EasyBuilderPro V60301 UserManual Eng

EasyBuilder Pro Installation and Startup Guide
Ver. 6.03.01
EasyBuilder Pro V4.00.01

Copyright © 2013 Weintek Labs., Inc. All rights reserved.
EasyBuilder Pro User Manual
1. EasyBuilder Pro Installation and Startup Guide .................................................................... 1-1

1.1. Installation Requirements............................................................................................. 1-2
1.2. Steps to Install EasyBuilder Pro .................................................................................... 1-3
2. Utility Manager ..................................................................................................................... 2-1
2.1. Overview ....................................................................................................................... 2-2
2.2. HMI IP, Password .......................................................................................................... 2-4
2.3. Editing Tools .................................................................................................................. 2-5
2.3.1. Build Download Data for SD/USB Disk ................................................................. 2-5
2.3.2. Steps to Download Project to HMI via USB Disk or SD Card ................................ 2-5
2.4. Transfer ......................................................................................................................... 2-6
2.4.1. Download (PC->HMI) ............................................................................................ 2-6
2.4.2. Upload (HMI->PC) ................................................................................................. 2-7
2.5. Simulation ..................................................................................................................... 2-8
2.5.1. Off-line Simulation / On-line Simulation .............................................................. 2-8
2.6. Pass-Through ................................................................................................................ 2-9
3. Create an EasyBuilder Pro Project ........................................................................................ 3-1
3.1. Overview ....................................................................................................................... 3-2
3.2. Create a New Project File ............................................................................................. 3-2
3.3. Save and Compile the Project File ................................................................................ 3-4
3.4. Run On-Line or Off-Line Simulation .............................................................................. 3-5
3.5. cMT Viewer ................................................................................................................... 3-5
3.6. Download the Project File to HMI ................................................................................ 3-6
3.6.1. Configure in EasyBuilder Pro ................................................................................ 3-6
3.6.2. Use HMI Name...................................................................................................... 3-9
3.6.3. Use USB cable ..................................................................................................... 3-11
3.6.4. Use USB Drive or SD Card ................................................................................... 3-11
3.7. Upload the Project File from HMI............................................................................... 3-13
4. Hardware Settings................................................................................................................. 4-1
4.1. Overview ....................................................................................................................... 4-2
4.2. I/O Ports ........................................................................................................................ 4-2
4.3. LED Indicators ............................................................................................................... 4-2
4.4. System Reset ................................................................................................................. 4-3
4.5. System Toolbar.............................................................................................................. 4-4
4.5.1. System Setting ...................................................................................................... 4-4
4.5.2. System Information .............................................................................................. 4-8
5. System Parameter Settings ................................................................................................... 5-1
5.1. Overview ....................................................................................................................... 5-2
5.2. Device ........................................................................................................................... 5-2

5.2.1. How to Control a Local PLC ................................................................................... 5-2

5.2.2. How to Control a Remote Device ......................................................................... 5-7
5.2.3. How to Control a Remote HMI ............................................................................. 5-9
5.3. Model.......................................................................................................................... 5-11
5.4. General ....................................................................................................................... 5-14
5.5. System Setting ............................................................................................................ 5-18
5.6. Remote ....................................................................................................................... 5-20
5.7. Security ....................................................................................................................... 5-22
5.7.1. General Mode ..................................................................................................... 5-22
5.7.2. Enhanced Security Mode .................................................................................... 5-22
5.8. Extended Memory ...................................................................................................... 5-24
5.9. Printer / Backup Server............................................................................................... 5-26
5.10. Time Sync./DST ........................................................................................................... 5-27
5.11. e-Mail .......................................................................................................................... 5-28
5.12. Recipe Database ......................................................................................................... 5-31
5.13. Cellular Data Network ................................................................................................ 5-32
6. Window Operations .............................................................................................................. 6-1
6.1. Overview ....................................................................................................................... 6-2
6.2. Window Types .............................................................................................................. 6-2
6.2.1. Base Window ........................................................................................................ 6-2
6.2.2. Fast Selection Window ......................................................................................... 6-2
6.2.3. Common Window ................................................................................................. 6-3
6.2.4. System Message Window ..................................................................................... 6-3
6.3. Create, Set, and Delete a Window................................................................................ 6-4
6.3.1. Creating and Setting a Window ............................................................................ 6-5
6.3.2. Open, Close, and Delete a Window ...................................................................... 6-7
6.4. Window Transparency .................................................................................................. 6-7
6.5. Editing Tips.................................................................................................................... 6-9
6.5.1. Non-display Area, Select Tool, and Hand Tool ...................................................... 6-9
6.5.2. Ruler.................................................................................................................... 6-10
6.5.3. Quick Copy .......................................................................................................... 6-12
7. Event Log ............................................................................................................................... 7-1
7.1. Overview ....................................................................................................................... 7-2
7.2. Event Log Management ................................................................................................ 7-2
7.2.1. eMT, iE, XE, mTV, iP Series .................................................................................... 7-3
7.2.2. cMT Series ............................................................................................................ 7-4
7.2.3. Excel Editing .......................................................................................................... 7-7
7.2.4. Quick View of Errors ............................................................................................. 7-7

7.3. Creating a New Event Log ............................................................................................. 7-8

8. Data Sampling ....................................................................................................................... 8-1
8.1. Overview ....................................................................................................................... 8-2
8.2. Data Sampling Management ........................................................................................ 8-2
8.3. Creating a New Data Sampling ..................................................................................... 8-2
8.3.1. Demonstration of Auto. stop ................................................................................ 8-9
8.3.2. Customized File Handling ..................................................................................... 8-9
8.4. Synchronizing cMT Viewer data and Saving to External Device or Database ............ 8-11
8.5. Checking History Data of a Specific Date / File on cMT Viewer. ................................. 8-12
9. Object General Properties .................................................................................................... 9-1
9.1. Overview ....................................................................................................................... 9-2
9.2. Selecting PLC and Setting Read/Write Address ............................................................ 9-2
9.3. Using Shape Library and Picture Library ....................................................................... 9-3
9.3.1. Picture ................................................................................................................... 9-3
9.3.2. Shape .................................................................................................................... 9-4
9.3.3. Shape manager ..................................................................................................... 9-6
9.4. Setting Label Text .......................................................................................................... 9-7
9.5. Adjusting Profile Size .................................................................................................... 9-9
10. User Password and Object Security .................................................................................... 10-1
10.1. Overview ..................................................................................................................... 10-2
10.2. User Password and Operable Object Classes ............................................................. 10-2
10.2.1. General Mode ..................................................................................................... 10-2
10.2.2. Enhanced Security Mode .................................................................................... 10-3
10.3. Enhanced Security Mode and Control Address .......................................................... 10-4
10.3.1. Control Address Settings .................................................................................... 10-4
10.3.2. Commands .......................................................................................................... 10-5
10.3.3. Command Execution Results .............................................................................. 10-7
10.4. Enhanced Security Mode Usage ................................................................................. 10-7
10.4.1. Importing User Accounts .................................................................................... 10-7
10.4.2. Login with USB Security Key ............................................................................... 10-9
10.4.3. Login / Logout Automatically with USB Security Key ....................................... 10-11
10.4.4. Enhanced Security Mode with Option List Object ........................................... 10-12
10.5. Object Security Settings............................................................................................ 10-12
10.5.1. Security Tab....................................................................................................... 10-13
10.5.2. Enable/Disable .................................................................................................. 10-13
10.5.2.1. Use Register Status/Value................................................................................. 10-14
10.5.2.2. Control Token .................................................................................................... 10-15
10.5.3. User Restriction ................................................................................................ 10-18

10.6. Example of Object Security Settings ......................................................................... 10-20

10.7. Protecting Password Settings from Unauthorized Editing ....................................... 10-23
10.8. Bulk Changing of Security Settings of Multiple Objects ........................................... 10-24
11. Index Register ..................................................................................................................... 11-1
11.1. Overview ..................................................................................................................... 11-2
11.2. Examples of Index Register ......................................................................................... 11-2
12. Keyboard Design and Usage ............................................................................................... 12-1
12.1. Overview ..................................................................................................................... 12-2
12.2. Steps to Design a Popup Keyboard ............................................................................. 12-2
12.3. Steps to Design a Keyboard with Direct Window ....................................................... 12-5
12.4. Steps to Design a Fixed Keyboard on Screen .............................................................. 12-6
12.5. Steps to Design a Unicode Keyboard .......................................................................... 12-7
13. Objects ................................................................................................................................ 13-1
13.1. Bit Lamp ...................................................................................................................... 13-3
13.1.1. Overview ............................................................................................................. 13-3
13.1.2. Configuration ...................................................................................................... 13-3
13.2. Word Lamp ................................................................................................................. 13-5
13.2.1. Overview ............................................................................................................. 13-5
13.2.2. Configuration ...................................................................................................... 13-5
13.3. Set Bit ........................................................................................................................ 13-10
13.3.1. Overview ........................................................................................................... 13-10
13.3.2. Configuration .................................................................................................... 13-10
13.4. Set Word ................................................................................................................... 13-13
13.4.1. Overview ........................................................................................................... 13-13
13.4.2. Configuration .................................................................................................... 13-13
13.5. Function Key ............................................................................................................. 13-21
13.5.1. Overview ........................................................................................................... 13-21
13.5.2. Configuration .................................................................................................... 13-21
13.6. Toggle Switch ............................................................................................................ 13-27
13.6.1. Overview ........................................................................................................... 13-27
13.6.2. Configuration .................................................................................................... 13-27
13.7. Multi-State Switch .................................................................................................... 13-29
13.7.1. Overview ........................................................................................................... 13-29
13.7.2. Configuration .................................................................................................... 13-29
13.8. Slider ......................................................................................................................... 13-33
13.8.1. Overview ........................................................................................................... 13-33
13.8.2. Configuration .................................................................................................... 13-33
13.8.3. Combo Setting .................................................................................................. 13-36

13.9. Numeric .................................................................................................................... 13-40

13.9.1. Overview ........................................................................................................... 13-40
13.9.2. Configuration .................................................................................................... 13-40
13.10. ASCII .......................................................................................................................... 13-57
13.10.1. Overview ........................................................................................................... 13-57
13.10.2. Configuration .................................................................................................... 13-57
13.11. Indirect Window ....................................................................................................... 13-60
13.11.1. Overview ........................................................................................................... 13-60
13.11.2. Configuration .................................................................................................... 13-60
13.12. Direct Window .......................................................................................................... 13-64
13.12.1. Overview ........................................................................................................... 13-64
13.12.2. Configuration .................................................................................................... 13-64
13.13. Moving Shape ........................................................................................................... 13-69
13.13.1. Overview ........................................................................................................... 13-69
13.13.2. Configuration .................................................................................................... 13-69
13.14. Animation ................................................................................................................. 13-73
13.14.1. Overview ........................................................................................................... 13-73
13.14.2. Configuration .................................................................................................... 13-73
13.15. Bar Graph .................................................................................................................. 13-77
13.15.1. Overview ........................................................................................................... 13-77
13.15.2. Configuration .................................................................................................... 13-77
13.15.3. Combo Setting .................................................................................................. 13-83
13.16. Meter Display............................................................................................................ 13-86
13.16.1. Overview ........................................................................................................... 13-86
13.16.2. Configuration .................................................................................................... 13-86
13.17. Trend Display ............................................................................................................ 13-94
13.17.1. Overview ........................................................................................................... 13-94
13.17.2. Configuration .................................................................................................... 13-94
13.18. History Data Display................................................................................................ 13-112
13.18.1. Overview ......................................................................................................... 13-112
13.18.2. Configuration .................................................................................................. 13-112
13.19. Data Block Display .................................................................................................. 13-119
13.19.1. Overview ......................................................................................................... 13-119
13.19.2. Configuration .................................................................................................. 13-119
13.20. XY Plot ..................................................................................................................... 13-127
13.20.1. Overview ......................................................................................................... 13-127
13.20.2. Configuration .................................................................................................. 13-127
13.21. Alarm Bar and Alarm Display .................................................................................. 13-133

13.21.1. Overview ......................................................................................................... 13-133

13.21.2. Configuration .................................................................................................. 13-133
13.22. Event Display........................................................................................................... 13-139
13.22.1. Overview ......................................................................................................... 13-139
13.22.2. Configuration .................................................................................................. 13-139
13.23. Data Transfer (Trigger-based) ................................................................................. 13-149
13.23.1. Overview ......................................................................................................... 13-149
13.23.2. Configuration .................................................................................................. 13-149
13.24. Backup .................................................................................................................... 13-151
13.24.1. Overview ......................................................................................................... 13-151
13.24.2. Configuration .................................................................................................. 13-151
13.25. Media Player ........................................................................................................... 13-158
13.25.1. Overview ......................................................................................................... 13-158
13.25.2. Configuration .................................................................................................. 13-158
13.26. Data Transfer........................................................................................................... 13-164
13.26.1. Overview ......................................................................................................... 13-164
13.26.2. Configuration .................................................................................................. 13-164
13.27. PLC Control ............................................................................................................. 13-168
13.27.1. Overview ......................................................................................................... 13-168
13.27.2. Configuration .................................................................................................. 13-168
13.28. Scheduler ................................................................................................................ 13-175
13.28.1. Overview ......................................................................................................... 13-175
13.28.2. Configuration .................................................................................................. 13-175
13.29. Option List............................................................................................................... 13-185
13.29.1. Overview ......................................................................................................... 13-185
13.29.2. Configuration .................................................................................................. 13-185
13.30. Timer ....................................................................................................................... 13-193
13.30.1. Overview ......................................................................................................... 13-193
13.30.2. Configuration .................................................................................................. 13-193
13.31. Video In ................................................................................................................... 13-198
13.31.1. Overview ......................................................................................................... 13-198
13.31.2. Configuration .................................................................................................. 13-198
13.32. System Message ..................................................................................................... 13-205
13.32.1. Overview ......................................................................................................... 13-205
13.32.2. Configuration .................................................................................................. 13-205
13.33. Recipe View ............................................................................................................ 13-207
13.33.1. Overview ......................................................................................................... 13-207
13.33.2. Configuration .................................................................................................. 13-207

13.34. Flow Block ............................................................................................................... 13-213

13.34.1. Overview ......................................................................................................... 13-213
13.34.2. Configuration .................................................................................................. 13-213
13.35. Operation Log ......................................................................................................... 13-218
13.35.1. Operation Log Settings ................................................................................... 13-218
13.35.2. Operation Log View ........................................................................................ 13-221
13.35.3. Operation Log Printing.................................................................................... 13-223
13.36. Combo Button......................................................................................................... 13-230
13.36.1. Overview ......................................................................................................... 13-230
13.36.2. Configuration .................................................................................................. 13-230
13.37. Circular Trend Display ............................................................................................. 13-236
13.37.1. Overview ......................................................................................................... 13-236
13.37.2. Configureation ................................................................................................ 13-236
13.38. Picture View ............................................................................................................ 13-245
13.38.1. Overview ......................................................................................................... 13-245
13.38.2. Configuration .................................................................................................. 13-245
13.39. File Browser ............................................................................................................ 13-248
13.39.1. Overview ......................................................................................................... 13-248
13.39.2. Configuration .................................................................................................. 13-248
13.40. Import/Export ......................................................................................................... 13-251
13.40.1. Overview ......................................................................................................... 13-251
13.40.2. Configuration .................................................................................................. 13-251
13.41. Pie Chart ................................................................................................................. 13-256
13.41.1. Overview ......................................................................................................... 13-256
13.41.2. Configuration .................................................................................................. 13-256
13.41.3. Combo Setting ................................................................................................ 13-258
13.42. Barcode ................................................................................................................... 13-261
13.42.1. 2D Barcode Display ......................................................................................... 13-261
13.42.2. WeChart Barcode Display ............................................................................... 13-262
13.42.3. Barcode Scanner (Android Camera) ............................................................... 13-272
13.43. String Table ............................................................................................................. 13-278
13.43.1. Overview ......................................................................................................... 13-278
13.43.2. Configuration .................................................................................................. 13-278
13.44. Database ................................................................................................................. 13-280
13.44.1. Database Server .............................................................................................. 13-280
13.44.2. SQL Query ....................................................................................................... 13-284
13.44.3. SQL Query Result Viewer ................................................................................ 13-291
13.45. Dynamic Scale ......................................................................................................... 13-293

13.45.1. Overview ......................................................................................................... 13-293

13.45.2. Configuration .................................................................................................. 13-293
13.46. Dynamic Drawing .................................................................................................... 13-296
13.46.1. Overview ......................................................................................................... 13-296
13.46.2. Configuration .................................................................................................. 13-296
13.47. PDF Reader ............................................................................................................. 13-302
13.47.1. Overview ......................................................................................................... 13-302
13.47.2. Configuration .................................................................................................. 13-302
13.48. Table........................................................................................................................ 13-304
13.48.1. Overview ......................................................................................................... 13-304
13.48.2. Configuration .................................................................................................. 13-304
13.49. VNC Viewer ............................................................................................................. 13-306
13.49.1. Overview ......................................................................................................... 13-306
13.49.2. Configuration .................................................................................................. 13-306
13.50. Contacts Editor ....................................................................................................... 13-310
13.50.1. Overview ......................................................................................................... 13-310
13.50.2. Configuration .................................................................................................. 13-310
13.51. Event Bar Chart ....................................................................................................... 13-313
13.51.1. Overview ......................................................................................................... 13-313
13.51.2. Configuration .................................................................................................. 13-313
13.52. Action Trigger.......................................................................................................... 13-318
13.52.1. Overview ......................................................................................................... 13-318
13.52.2. Configuration .................................................................................................. 13-318
13.53. Calendar .................................................................................................................. 13-322
13.53.1. Overview ......................................................................................................... 13-322
13.53.2. Configuration .................................................................................................. 13-322
14. Shape Library and Picture Library ....................................................................................... 14-1
14.1. Overview ..................................................................................................................... 14-2
14.2. Building Shape Library ................................................................................................ 14-2
14.2.1. Shape manager ................................................................................................... 14-2
14.2.2. Steps to Build Shape Library ............................................................................... 14-4
14.3. Building Picture Library............................................................................................... 14-9
14.3.1. Picture manager ................................................................................................. 14-9
14.3.2. Steps to Build Picture Library............................................................................ 14-11
14.3.3. Steps to Import Picture by Pasting ................................................................... 14-13
14.4. Immediate Modification and Preview ...................................................................... 14-15
14.4.1. Replacing a Picture ........................................................................................... 14-16
14.4.2. Replacing a Color .............................................................................................. 14-16

14.4.3. Extended Features ............................................................................................ 14-18

14.4.4. Docking a Window ............................................................................................ 14-19
15. Label Tag Library and Multi-Language ................................................................................ 15-1
15.1. Overview ..................................................................................................................... 15-2
15.2. Label Tag Library Manager .......................................................................................... 15-2
15.3. Steps to create Label Tag Library ................................................................................ 15-3
15.4. Using Label Tag Library ............................................................................................... 15-4
15.5. Selecting Language & Font ......................................................................................... 15-5
15.5.1. Language ............................................................................................................. 15-5
15.5.2. Non-ASCII Fonts .................................................................................................. 15-6
15.5.3. Font Management .............................................................................................. 15-8
15.5.4. Font Mapping...................................................................................................... 15-8
15.6. Settings of Multi-Language ......................................................................................... 15-9
16. Address Tag Library ............................................................................................................. 16-1
16.1. Overview ..................................................................................................................... 16-2
16.2. Building Address Tag Library ....................................................................................... 16-2
16.3. Using Address Tag Library ........................................................................................... 16-5
17. Transferring Recipe Data ..................................................................................................... 17-1
17.1. Overview ..................................................................................................................... 17-2
17.2. Steps to Update Recipe Data with Ethernet or USB Cable ......................................... 17-2
17.3. Steps to Update Recipe Data with SD Card or USB Disk ............................................. 17-3
17.4. Transferring Recipe Data............................................................................................. 17-4
17.5. Saving Recipe Data Automatically .............................................................................. 17-5
18. Macro Reference................................................................................................................. 18-1
18.1. Overview ..................................................................................................................... 18-2
18.2. Instructions to use the Macro Editor .......................................................................... 18-2
18.3. Configuration .............................................................................................................. 18-7
18.4. Syntax.......................................................................................................................... 18-8
18.4.1. Constants and Variables ..................................................................................... 18-8
18.4.2. Operators .......................................................................................................... 18-11
18.5. Statement ................................................................................................................. 18-14
18.5.1. Definition Statement ........................................................................................ 18-14
18.5.2. Assignment Statement ..................................................................................... 18-14
18.5.3. Logical Statements ............................................................................................ 18-14
18.5.4. Selective Statements ........................................................................................ 18-16
18.5.5. Iterative Statements ......................................................................................... 18-17
18.6. Function Blocks ......................................................................................................... 18-19
18.7. Built-In Function Block .............................................................................................. 18-22

18.7.1. PLC .................................................................................................................... 18-22

18.7.2. Free Protocol .................................................................................................... 18-30
18.7.3. Process Control ................................................................................................. 18-34
18.7.4. Data Operation ................................................................................................. 18-36
18.7.5. Data Type Conversion ....................................................................................... 18-40
18.7.6. String Operation ............................................................................................... 18-48
18.7.7. Mathematics ..................................................................................................... 18-66
18.7.8. Statistics ............................................................................................................ 18-70
18.7.9. Recipe Database ............................................................................................... 18-72
18.7.10. Data/Event Log ................................................................................................. 18-75
18.7.11. Checksum.......................................................................................................... 18-78
18.7.12. Miscellaneous ................................................................................................... 18-79
18.8. How to Create and Execute a Macro ........................................................................ 18-82
18.8.1. How to Create a Macro ..................................................................................... 18-82
18.8.2. Execute a Macro ............................................................................................... 18-86
18.9. User Defined Macro Function................................................................................... 18-86
18.9.1. Import Function Library File ............................................................................. 18-87
18.9.2. How to Use Macro Function Library ................................................................. 18-88
18.9.3. Function Library Management Interface .......................................................... 18-90
18.10. Some Notes about Using the Macro ........................................................................ 18-99
18.11. Use the Free Protocol to Control a Device ............................................................... 18-99
18.12. Compiler Error Message ......................................................................................... 18-104
18.13. Sample Macro Code................................................................................................ 18-110
18.14. Macro TRACE Function ........................................................................................... 18-115
18.15. Example of String Operation Functions .................................................................. 18-119
18.16. Macro Password Protection.................................................................................... 18-127
18.17. Reading / Writing CANbus Address Using Variable ................................................ 18-128
19. Configure HMI as a MODBUS Server .................................................................................. 19-1
19.1. Overview ..................................................................................................................... 19-2
19.2. Steps to Create a MODBUS Server ............................................................................. 19-2
19.3. Steps to Access a MODBUS Server ............................................................................. 19-4
19.4. Changing MODBUS Server Station Number Online.................................................... 19-7
19.5. MODBUS Address Type............................................................................................... 19-7
20. How to Connect a Barcode Reader ..................................................................................... 20-1
20.1. Overview ..................................................................................................................... 20-2
20.2. Steps to Connect a Barcode Reader ........................................................................... 20-2
21. Ethernet Communication and Multi-HMI Connection ....................................................... 21-1
21.1. Overview ..................................................................................................................... 21-2

21.2. HMI to HMI Communication ...................................................................................... 21-2

21.3. PC to HMI Communication ......................................................................................... 21-3
21.4. Operating the PLC Connected with Other HMI .......................................................... 21-4
21.4.1. Settings of eMT / iE / XE / mTV / iP Series ......................................................... 21-4
21.4.2. Settings of cMT Series models ............................................................................ 21-5
22. System Registers ................................................................................................................. 22-1
22.1. Overview ..................................................................................................................... 22-3
22.2. The Address Ranges of Local HMI .............................................................................. 22-4
22.2.1. Bits ...................................................................................................................... 22-4
22.2.2. Words.................................................................................................................. 22-4
22.3. System Registers ......................................................................................................... 22-5
22.3.1. HMI Time ............................................................................................................ 22-5
22.3.2. HMI Operation .................................................................................................... 22-7
22.3.3. Touch Position..................................................................................................... 22-8
22.3.4. Local HMI Network Information ......................................................................... 22-8
22.3.5. Project File Information .................................................................................... 22-10
22.3.6. Storage Space Management ............................................................................. 22-11
22.3.7. Recipe and Extended Memory ......................................................................... 22-11
22.3.8. Data Sampling ................................................................................................... 22-12
22.3.9. Event Log........................................................................................................... 22-13
22.3.10. Station Number Variables ................................................................................. 22-15
22.3.11. Index Registers .................................................................................................. 22-17
22.3.12. MODBUS Server Communication ..................................................................... 22-19
22.3.13. Communication Parameter Settings ................................................................. 22-20
22.3.14. Communication Status and Control with PLC (COM) ....................................... 22-23
22.3.15. Communication Status and Control with PLC (Ethernet) ................................. 22-24
22.3.16. Communication Status and Control with PLC (USB) ......................................... 22-29
22.3.17. Communication Status and Control with PLC (CAN Bus).................................. 22-30
22.3.18. Communication Status and Control with Remote HMI .................................... 22-30
22.3.19. Communication Status and Control with Remote PLC ..................................... 22-34
22.3.20. Local/Remote Operation Restrictions .............................................................. 22-36
22.3.21. Communication Error Codes............................................................................. 22-36
22.3.22. Driver ID ............................................................................................................ 22-38
22.3.23. DLT645 Controller ............................................................................................. 22-38
22.3.24. [PLC No Response] Window Control ................................................................ 22-38
22.3.25. [Fast Selection] Window Control ...................................................................... 22-39
22.3.26. EasyAccess ........................................................................................................ 22-39
22.3.27. EasyAccess 2.0 .................................................................................................. 22-39

22.3.28. Remote Print/Backup Server ............................................................................ 22-40

22.3.29. Pass-Through Settings....................................................................................... 22-40
22.3.30. VNC Control ...................................................................................................... 22-41
22.3.31. Project Key and HMI Key .................................................................................. 22-42
22.3.32. USB Security Key ............................................................................................... 22-42
22.3.33. User Name and Password ................................................................................. 22-43
22.3.34. Macro ................................................................................................................ 22-44
22.3.35. Input Object Function ....................................................................................... 22-45
22.3.36. Time Sync./Daylight Saving Time ...................................................................... 22-45
22.3.37. Cellular Data Network ...................................................................................... 22-47
22.3.38. Wi-Fi Setting ..................................................................................................... 22-47
22.3.39. OPC UA Server .................................................................................................. 22-49
22.3.40. e-Mail ................................................................................................................ 22-49
22.3.41. cMT Viewer and Diagnoser............................................................................... 22-51
22.3.42. Miscellaneous ................................................................................................... 22-52
23. HMI Supported Printers ...................................................................................................... 23-1
23.1. The Supported Printer Types ...................................................................................... 23-2
23.2. Steps to Add a New Printer and Start Printing ........................................................... 23-5
23.3. Installing Network Printer on cMT HMI ...................................................................... 23-7
23.4. Installing PPD File on cMT HMI ................................................................................... 23-9
24. Recipe Editor ....................................................................................................................... 24-1
24.1. Overview ..................................................................................................................... 24-2
24.2. Recipe / Extended Memory Editor Setting ................................................................. 24-2
24.3. Records of Recipe Database Setting ........................................................................... 24-4
25. EasyConverter ..................................................................................................................... 25-1
25.1. Overview ..................................................................................................................... 25-2
25.2. Converting Data Log File to Excel File ......................................................................... 25-2
25.3. Converting Event Log File to Excel File ....................................................................... 25-4
25.4. Converting Operation Log File to Excel File ................................................................ 25-5
25.5. Converting Multiple Files ............................................................................................ 25-6
25.6. Scaling Function .......................................................................................................... 25-8
25.7. Batch File .................................................................................................................... 25-9
26. EasyPrinter .......................................................................................................................... 26-1
26.1. Overview ..................................................................................................................... 26-2
26.2. Using EasyPrinter as a Printer Server ......................................................................... 26-3
26.2.1. Setup Procedure in EasyPrinter .......................................................................... 26-3
26.2.2. Setup Procedure in EasyBuilder Pro ................................................................... 26-4
26.3. Using EasyPrinter as a Backup Sever .......................................................................... 26-6

26.3.1. Setup Procedure in EasyPrinter .......................................................................... 26-6

26.3.2. Setup Procedure in EasyBuilder Pro ................................................................... 26-7
26.4. EasyPrinter Operation Guide .................................................................................... 26-10
26.4.1. EasyPrinter Managing Window ........................................................................ 26-10
26.4.2. Operation Guide ............................................................................................... 26-11
26.5. Convert Batch File ..................................................................................................... 26-15
26.5.1. The Default Value of Convert Batch File ........................................................... 26-16
26.5.2. Specialized Criteria ........................................................................................... 26-17
26.5.3. The Format of a Convert Batch File .................................................................. 26-17
26.5.4. The Order of Examining Criterion ..................................................................... 26-18
27. EasySimulator...................................................................................................................... 27-1
27.1. Overview ..................................................................................................................... 27-2
27.2. Steps to setup EasySimulator ..................................................................................... 27-2
28. EasySystemSetting .............................................................................................................. 28-1
28.1. EasySystemSetting ...................................................................................................... 28-2
28.2. Configuring EasySystemSetting................................................................................... 28-5
29. Pass-through ....................................................................................................................... 29-1
29.1. Overview ..................................................................................................................... 29-2
29.2. Serial Pass Through Ethernet Mode ........................................................................... 29-2
29.2.1. Steps to Install Virtual Serial Port Driver ............................................................ 29-2
29.2.2. Steps to Change the Virtual Serial Port Number ................................................ 29-3
29.2.3. Steps to Uninstall the Virtual Serial Port ............................................................ 29-3
29.2.4. Steps to Update Virtual Serial Port Driver .......................................................... 29-4
29.2.5. Settings of Ethernet mode .................................................................................. 29-5
29.3. Serial Pass-Through COM Port Mode ......................................................................... 29-7
29.3.1. Settings of COM Port Mode ................................................................................ 29-7
29.3.2. Using Utility Manager ......................................................................................... 29-7
29.3.3. Using System Registers ....................................................................................... 29-9
29.4. Pass-through Control .................................................................................................. 29-9
29.5. SIEMENS S7-200 PPI and S7-300 MPI Pass-through Settings ................................... 29-10
29.5.1. EasyBuilder Pro Settings ................................................................................... 29-10
29.5.2. S7-200 PPI Connection ..................................................................................... 29-10
29.5.3. S7-300 MPI Connection .................................................................................... 29-11
29.5.4. Registers of SIEMENS Pass-through .................................................................. 29-14
29.6. Ethernet Pass-Through ............................................................................................. 29-15
30. Project Protection ............................................................................................................... 30-1
30.1. Overview ..................................................................................................................... 30-2
30.2. EXOB Password ........................................................................................................... 30-2

30.3. Decompilation is Prohibited ....................................................................................... 30-3

30.4. Disable EXOB Upload Function ................................................................................... 30-3
30.5. Project Key .................................................................................................................. 30-3
30.6. EMTP Password .......................................................................................................... 30-4
31. Memory Map ...................................................................................................................... 31-1
31.1. Overview ..................................................................................................................... 31-2
31.2. PIN Settings ................................................................................................................. 31-2
31.3. Communication Flowchart ......................................................................................... 31-3
31.4. Address Types ............................................................................................................. 31-4
31.4.1. Communication Examples .................................................................................. 31-5
31.5. Settings ....................................................................................................................... 31-7
31.5.1. Steps to Add a Memory Map Device .................................................................. 31-7
31.5.2. Object Settings.................................................................................................... 31-8
31.5.3. Executing the Settings ........................................................................................ 31-9
32. FTP Server Application ........................................................................................................ 32-1
32.1. Overview ..................................................................................................................... 32-2
32.2. Steps to Log in FTP Server .......................................................................................... 32-2
32.3. Backup History Data and Update Recipe Data ........................................................... 32-3
33. EasyDiagnoser ..................................................................................................................... 33-1
33.1. Overview ..................................................................................................................... 33-2
33.2. Configuration .............................................................................................................. 33-2
33.3. EasyDiagnoser Settings ............................................................................................... 33-3
33.3.1. Main Menu ......................................................................................................... 33-3
33.3.2. Activity Area........................................................................................................ 33-4
33.3.3. Polling Packages .................................................................................................. 33-6
33.3.4. Devices ................................................................................................................ 33-8
33.3.5. Output (Macro debug) ........................................................................................ 33-8
33.4. Error Code ................................................................................................................... 33-9
33.5. Window Adjustment ................................................................................................. 33-10
34. Rockwell EtherNet/IP Free Tag Names ............................................................................... 34-1
34.1. Overview ..................................................................................................................... 34-2
34.2. Steps to Import User-Defined AB Tag CSV File to EasyBuilder Pro ............................. 34-2
34.3. Steps to Add a New Data Type.................................................................................... 34-4
34.4. Steps to Paste ............................................................................................................. 34-6
34.5. Miscellaneous Functions ............................................................................................ 34-7
34.6. Module-Defined.......................................................................................................... 34-8
35. EasyWatch ........................................................................................................................... 35-1
35.1. Overview ..................................................................................................................... 35-2

35.2. Configuration .............................................................................................................. 35-2

35.2.1. Basic Functions ................................................................................................... 35-2
35.2.2. Quick Selection Tools .......................................................................................... 35-3
35.3. Monitor Settings ......................................................................................................... 35-4
35.3.1. Adding a Monitor ................................................................................................ 35-4
35.3.2. Monitor Settings ................................................................................................. 35-4
35.3.3. Steps to Add a New Monitor .............................................................................. 35-5
35.4. Macro Settings ............................................................................................................ 35-8
35.4.1. Adding a Macro................................................................................................... 35-8
35.4.2. Macro Settings .................................................................................................... 35-8
35.4.3. Steps to Add a New Macro ................................................................................. 35-8
35.5. HMI Manager .............................................................................................................. 35-9
35.5.1. Opening HMI Setting .......................................................................................... 35-9
35.5.2. HMI Manager .................................................................................................... 35-10
35.6. Object List ................................................................................................................. 35-11
35.6.1. Object List Columns .......................................................................................... 35-11
35.6.2. Editing Object List ............................................................................................. 35-12
36. Administrator Tools ............................................................................................................. 36-1
36.1. Overview ..................................................................................................................... 36-2
36.2. User Accounts ............................................................................................................. 36-2
36.2.1. User Accounts Settings ....................................................................................... 36-2
36.2.2. Steps to Set User Accounts ................................................................................. 36-4
36.2.3. Steps to Import Accounts Using EasyBuilder Pro ............................................... 36-5
36.3. USB Security Key ......................................................................................................... 36-6
36.3.1. USB Security Key Settings ................................................................................... 36-6
36.3.2. Steps to Set USB Security Key ............................................................................. 36-7
36.3.3. Steps to Set USB Security Key Using EasyBuilder Pro ......................................... 36-8
36.4. e-Mail SMTP Server Settings ...................................................................................... 36-9
36.4.1. Steps to set e-Mail SMTP Server Settings ........................................................... 36-9
36.5. e-Mail Contacts ......................................................................................................... 36-10
36.5.1. e-Mail Contacts Settings ................................................................................... 36-10
36.5.2. Steps to set e-Mail Contacts ............................................................................. 36-11
36.5.3. Steps to Import e-Mail Settings and Contacts Using EasyBuilder Pro .............. 36-13
37. MODBUS TCP/IP Gateway ................................................................................................... 37-1
37.1. Overview ..................................................................................................................... 37-2
37.2. Steps to Create an Address Mapping Table ................................................................ 37-2
37.3. Notes about Configuring Address Mapping ............................................................... 37-5
38. EasyDownload..................................................................................................................... 38-1

38.1. Overview ..................................................................................................................... 38-2

38.2. Configuration .............................................................................................................. 38-2
39. Data Security ....................................................................................................................... 39-1
39.1. Overview ..................................................................................................................... 39-2
39.2. Configuration .............................................................................................................. 39-2
39.2.1. Word address settings ........................................................................................ 39-3
39.2.2. Bit address settings ............................................................................................. 39-5
40. Web Streaming ................................................................................................................... 40-1
40.1. Overview ..................................................................................................................... 40-2
40.2. Configuration .............................................................................................................. 40-2
40.3. Operation .................................................................................................................... 40-2
40.4. Applicable Models ...................................................................................................... 40-3
41. Energy ................................................................................................................................. 41-1
41.1. Energy Demand Setting .............................................................................................. 41-2
41.1.1. Overview ............................................................................................................. 41-2
41.1.2. Configuration ...................................................................................................... 41-2
41.2. Energy Demand Display .............................................................................................. 41-6
41.2.1. Overview ............................................................................................................. 41-6
41.2.2. Configuration ...................................................................................................... 41-6
42. IIoT ...................................................................................................................................... 42-1
42.1. MQTT .......................................................................................................................... 42-2
42.1.1. Overview ............................................................................................................. 42-2
42.1.2. Configuration ...................................................................................................... 42-2
42.2. OPC UA Server .......................................................................................................... 42-22
42.2.1. Overview ........................................................................................................... 42-22
42.2.2. Configuration .................................................................................................... 42-22
42.2.3. Device Statistics ................................................................................................ 42-28
42.2.4. Limitation .......................................................................................................... 42-29
Appendix A. Comparison of HMI Software Features.............................................................A-1
Appendix B. cMT Viewer Limitations .................................................................................... B-1
Appendix C. PC Simulation Limitations ................................................................................. C-1
Windows is a trademark or a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
Android is a trademark or a registered trademark of Google, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries.
IOS is a registered trademark of Cisco Systems, Inc. and/or its affiliates in the United States and certain other countries.
Other company names, product names, or trademarks in this document are the trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective
companies.
This document is subject to change without prior notice.

EasyBuilder Pro Installation and Startup Guide 1-1
1. EasyBuilder Pro Installation

and Startup Guide
This chapter explains how to install EasyBuilder Pro.
1.1. Installation Requirements............................................................................................. 1-2

1.2. Steps to Install EasyBuilder Pro .................................................................................... 1-3

1.1. Installation Requirements
Software:
Visit Weintek Labs, Inc.’s website at http://www.weintek.com. The language versions include
Simplified Chinese, Traditional Chinese, English, Japanese, German, Italian, Korean, Spanish,
Russian, French, Polish, and Turkish. The latest upgraded files can be downloaded too.
Operating System:
Windows® 7 (32bit / 64bit)
Windows® 8.1 (32bit / 64bit)

1.2. Steps to Install EasyBuilder Pro
1. Click [Install] and select the language for the installation process, and then click [Next].
2. If there is a previous version of EasyBuilder Pro on the PC, please remove it before
installation.
3. Please read and accept the License Agreement before continuing.

4. Select a folder for EasyBuilder Pro installation, or use the default folder. Click [Next].
5. Select a start menu folder, or use the default folder. Click [Next].

6. Select additional tasks, for example: [Create a desktop icon]. Click [Next].
7. Confirm all setting. To change the setting, click [Back]. To start installation, click [Install].

8. Installation in progress.
9. Click [Finish] to complete the installation.

10. The EasyBuilder shortcut can be found in [Start] » [All Programs] » [EasyBuilder Pro].
The description of each item in EasyBuilder Pro menu:

Installed file Description
Administrator Tools Saves User Accounts, USB Security Key, e-Mail SMTP
Server Setting, e-Mail Contacts to an external device
(USB drive or SD card) so that the data become
portable and can be imported to HMI.
cMT Viewer Supports access to cMT Series HMI via network, for
operating cMT Series HMI on PC.
Easy Access Supports access to remote HMI by connecting
EasyAccess server over Internet.
EasyBuilder Pro EasyBuilder Pro project editor.
EasyConverter Conversion tool for Data Sampling and Event Log.
EasyDiagnoser Monitoring and debugging tool operated on HMI.
EasyPrinter Allows exporting data to a remote server on PC via
Ethernet, realizing remote printing / backup.
EasySimulator Executes simulation.
EasySystemSetting Allows updating hardware system settings by using
SD card or USB drive.
EasyWatch An easy to use debugging and remote monitoring

tool running on PC that allows monitoring or setting

HMI and PLC addresses and executing macro.
Recipe Editor Tool for setting the format of Recipe data. Users can
open Recipe data or the data in the External
Memory.
Release Note Software release notes.
Utility ManagerEx EasyBuilder Pro management tool.
Note
 Certain HMI supports downloading/uploading projects via USB cable. After installing
EasyBuilder Pro, the USB driver will be automatically installed. A message saying
“Windows can’t verify the publisher of this driver” may show, please continue anyway.
After installing the USB driver, open [Computer Management] » [Device Manager] to
check if installation succeeded.

Utility Manager 2-1
2. Utility Manager
This chapter explains how to use Utility Manager.
2.1. Overview ....................................................................................................................... 2-2

2.2. HMI IP, Password .......................................................................................................... 2-4
2.3. Editing Tools .................................................................................................................. 2-5
2.4. Transfer ......................................................................................................................... 2-6
2.5. Simulation ..................................................................................................................... 2-8
2.6. Pass-Through ................................................................................................................ 2-9

Utility Manager 2-2
2.1. Overview
After installing EasyBuilder Pro, double click [UtilityManagerEx] shortcut on the desktop to
start. Utility Manager is for launching several utilities and it is a stand-alone program.
Utilities Description
Select Model Select your HMI model. Please note that if the model is incorrect,
certain features may not work correctly.
Design EasyBuilder Pro: Launch EasyBuilder Pro to edit projects.
EasyAddressViewer: Review the address ranges and formats of
supported PLCs.
Simulation: Simulate a HMI on PC by On-line Simulation (with PLC)
or Off-line Simulation (without PLC).
Analysis & Testing EasyDiagnoser: On-line monitoring and debugging tool. Diagnose
the connection status between PC/HMI and PLC.
See “33 EasyDiagnoser”.
EasyWatch: Allows users to monitor HMI or PLC address values via
Ethernet on PC.
See “35 EasyWatch”.
Reboot HMI: Restart a HMI to its initial condition by Ethernet or
USB connection.
Pass-Through: Allows PC applications to control PLC via HMI. In this
case the HMI is an adaptor.

Utility Manager 2-3
See “29 Pass-through”.

Publish Download: Download project file to HMI via Ethernet or USB cable.
Upload: Upload files on HMI to PC via Ethernet or USB cable.
Build Download Data for SD/USB Disk:
Build the data to be saved in SD card / USB drive and then insert
the device to HMI to download the data. This feature is not
supported by cMT Series.
Maintenance EasyPrinter, Backup/Printer Server: A backup/printer server on PC,
which receives backups from HMI and run a defined batch to
convert, or HMI screenshots to print out on PC.
Administrator Tools: Allows storing the data of [User Accounts],
[USB Security Key], [e-Mail SMTP Server Settings], and [e-Mail
Contacts] to USB.
See “36 Administrator Tools”.
cMT Viewer: Connect to a cMT Series model. PC is the display
terminal for cMT project.
Data/Event log Information: Connect with HMI via USB cable or
Ethernet to check the number of history files in HMI. This feature is
not supported by cMT Series.
EasyAccess 1.0: Control remote HMI instantly and conveniently no
matter which corners in the world you are. You can find more
information at: www.ihmi.net
Data Conversion Database Editor: Used to edit recipe data.
Click the icon to download the document about Recipe
Database.
Easy Converter: Reads the data sampling file and event log file in
HMI and convert the files to Excel (.xls) format.
See “25 EasyConverter”.
Recipe Editor: Used to create, view, and edit recipe data.
See “24 Recipe Editor”.
Minimize the window.
Close the window.

Add the frequently used utilities to the toolbar at the bottom of the
window.
Run Run the selected utility on the toolbar.
Edit Delete the selected utility on the toolbar.

Utility Manager 2-4
2.2. HMI IP, Password
Settings
When operating HMI via Ethernet or USB cable, please set the password for HMI to protect
against unauthorized access.
Set the download password. To use masking password, select [Mask] check box.
Note
 Please remember the password, otherwise, while restoring HMI default settings, the
project files and data in HMI will be completely erased.
Reboot HMI
Reboot the HMI without unplugging. After reboot, the system returns to the initial state. Set
the correct IP address when rebooting HMI via Ethernet.
Data/Event Log File Information

After setting, connect with HMI to check the number of history files in HMI.

Utility Manager 2-5
2.3. Editing Tools
2.3.1. Build Download Data for SD/USB Disk
1. Insert an external device (SD card or USB drive) to PC.

2. Assign the directory to store data.
3. Select the directory of the source file.
4. Click [Build] to create files for downloading.
Files will then be store to the inserted device for users to download to HMI without connecting
via a USB cable or Ethernet.
2.3.2. Steps to Download Project to HMI via USB Disk or SD Card
Assume we will download data in the folder named “123” (K:\123) on an USB disk.
1. Insert USB (in which the project is saved) to HMI.
2. In [Download / Upload] dialog box select [Download].
3. Enter Download Password.
4. In [Download Settings] dialog box, select [Download project files] and [Download history
files] check boxes.
5. Press [OK].
6. In [Pick a Directory] dialog box, select directory: usbdisk\disk_a_1\123.
7. Press [OK].
Project will then be updated.

Utility Manager 2-6
Note
 If only the history files are downloaded, it is necessary to reboot HMI to update files.
2.4. Transfer
2.4.1. Download (PC->HMI)
Download files to HMI via Ethernet or USB cable.
Setting Description
Firmware Update HMI kernel programs. The firmware
must be downloaded at the first time
downloading data to HMI.
MQTT If MQTT is used in the project and HMI is the
broker, this checkbox must be selected before
download.
Project Select an .exob / .cxob project file.
RW / RW_A Select a .rcp recipe file.
Recipe database Select a .db file of Recipe Database.
System settings Select a conf. system settings file.

Utility Manager 2-7
Startup screen Download a .bmp bitmap file to HMI. After HMI

is rebooted, this .bmp file will be shown before
project starts.
Reboot HMI after
download Automatically reboot after download.
Port No. Setting Select the port by which to download the
project file via Ethernet.
Synchronize HMI clock Synchronize HMI time with PC time when
with PC
downloading project file.
Reset recipe / recipe
database / event log /
data log / operation log
/ string table / Delete
startup screen / Delete Erase the selected files in HMI before download.
existing user accounts,
e-Mail contacts and
SMTP settings
2.4.2. Upload (HMI->PC)
Upload files from HMI to PC via Ethernet or USB cable. Click [Browse] and assign the file path
before uploading.
Setting Description
Event log Upload the .evt file in HMI to PC.

Utility Manager 2-8
Extended Memory Upload the .emi file saved in SD card or USB disk
(EM) to PC.
For information about [Project], [RW / RW_A], [Recipe database] or [Data log], see “2.4.1
Download” in this chapter.
Note
 The file will be uploaded to PC in .exob / .cxob format. Please decompile it into
editable .emtp file first and open the .emtp / .cmtp file in EasyBuilder Pro.
 To upload the historical files saved in the external device, please use FTP. See “32 FTP
Server Application” for more information.
2.5. Simulation
2.5.1. Off-line Simulation / On-line Simulation
Off-line simulation: Simulate project operation on PC without any connection.

On-line simulation: Simulate project operation on PC and PLCs are directly connected with PC.
Note
 When using [On-line simulation] on PC, if the target device is a local PLC (the PLC directly
connected to PC), there is a 10 minutes simulation limit.
Before executing On-line/Off-line Simulation, please select the source .exob file.
When executing On-line/Off-line Simulation, right click to use these functions:
Setting Description
Exit simulation Stop simulating.
Run EasyDiagnoser To monitor current communication status.
Screenshot Capture and save current screen image as a
picture file in the screenshot folder under the
installation directory.

Utility Manager 2-9
2.6. Pass-Through
This function allows the PC application to connect PLC via HMI. In this case, the HMI works like
a converter.
Pass-through provides two modes: [Ethernet] and [COM port].

When using [Ethernet], please install the virtual serial port driver first.
For more detail, please refer to “Chapter 29 Pass-Through Function”.

Create an EasyBuilder Pro Project 3-1
3. Create an EasyBuilder Pro

Project
This chapter explains the basic steps to create an EasyBuilder Pro project.
3.1. Overview ....................................................................................................................... 3-2

3.2. Create a New Project File ............................................................................................. 3-2
3.3. Save and Compile the Project File ................................................................................ 3-4
3.4. Run On-Line or Off-Line Simulation .............................................................................. 3-5
3.5. cMT Viewer ................................................................................................................... 3-5
3.6. Download the Project File to HMI ................................................................................ 3-6
3.7. Upload the Project File from HMI............................................................................... 3-13

3.1. Overview
The following is the process of creating a project.

1. Create a new project file.
2. Save and compile the project file.
3. Run On-line or Off-line simulation.
4. Download the project file to HMI.
The following describes each process.
Click the icon to watch the demonstration film. Please confirm your internet connection
before playing the film.
3.2. Create a New Project File
1. Launch EasyBuilder Pro and open a new project file.

2. Select a model and select [Use template] check box.
3. Click [New] button in the Device tab and select a device.

4. Configure parameters.
5. A new device is added to the [Device List].
6. Create an object, for example, a Toggle Switch, and then set the address.

7. Place the object in the edit window. A project is now created.
3.3. Save and Compile the Project File
1. In EasyBuilder Pro toolbar click [File] » [Save] to save the .emtp file.
2. In EasyBuilder Pro toolbar click [Project] » [Compile] to compile .emtp file as .exob file,
which could be downloaded to HMI. This also checks if the project can run correctly.

Note
 For cMT Series models, the project file extension is .cmtp, and the compiled file extension
is .cxob.
3. To use multiple languages, all languages must be configured in Label Tag Library first.
When downloading the project to HMI, select the needed languages only. A successful
compilation is shown in the following figure.
3.4. Run On-Line or Off-Line Simulation
Off-line simulation: Simulate project operation on PC without the need for connecting
any device.
On-line simulation: Simulate project operation on PC without downloading the project

to HMI. The PLC is connected to PC, please set correct parameters.
Note
 When using On-line Simulation on PC, if the target device is the PLC directly connected to
PC, there is a 10-minute simulation limit.
3.5. cMT Viewer
This program connects to cMT Series models via network. To run this program, execute

cMTViewer.exe under installation directory. Or, in EasyBuilder Pro toolbar, click [Tools] » [cMT
Viewer].
3.6. Download the Project File to HMI
The following explains four ways to download the project file to HMI.
Note
 For cMT-SVR, only the way described in 3.6.1 is available.
 When download project file to HMI using mini USB cable, please do not connect PLC
simultaneously, in order to avoid noise from PLC interfering with HMI.
3.6.1. Configure in EasyBuilder Pro
1. In EasyBuilder Pro toolbar, click [Project] » [Download]. Make sure that all the settings are
correct.
2. Select [Ethernet], set password and HMI IP.

Setting Description
Font files Download the font used in the project to HMI.
Runtime Select the check box to update the HMI kernel
programs. If this is the first time downloading file or
EasyBuilder Pro version is updated, please download
the firmware before downloading files to HMI.
EasyAccess 2.0 Download EasyAccess 2.0 driver to HMI. (This option
is available only for MT8000iE models. For other
models, EasyAccess 2.0 will be automatically
downloaded.)
Use user-defined Download the selected .bmp picture to HMI as the
startup screen
startup screen.
Use system settings Download the system settings file to update
file
hardware settings.
Synchronize HMI Synchronize HMI time with PC time when
clock with PC
downloading project file.
Delete existing user Select the check box to delete existing user
accounts, e-Mail
contacts and SMTP accounts, e-Mail contacts or SMTP settings before
settings downloading the project. This setting is only

effective when one of the following settings is

enabled:
1. [System Parameters] » [Security] » [Enhanced
security mode] » [Use existing user accounts on
HMI first (if existed), Othrewise, use settings
below].
2. [System Parameter s] » [e-Mail] » [Use existing
user accounts on HMI first (if existed),
Othrewise, use settings below].
Reset recipe/
event log/
data sampling/
recipe database/ The selected files will be erased before
operation log/ downloading.
string table/
user-defined
startup screen
Reboot HMI after HMI will reboot after the downloading process is
download
done.
Automatically
using current The system will compile the project and download it
settings to to the latest target HMI. The way to enable this
download after
compiling function is described in the following part.
[Automatically using current settings to download after compiling]

If this check box is selected, EasyBuilder Pro will compile the project and download it to the
latest target HMI.
1. In EasyBuilder Pro toolbar, click [File] » [Preferences].
2. Select [Automatic save and compile when download and simulate] check box.

3. In EasyBuilder Pro toolbar, click [Save] and then [Download].

4. In the dialog box, select [Automatically using current settings to download after compiling]
check box.
5. Click [Download].
6. When finished, next time when [Download] is clicked, EasyBuilder Pro will automatically
compile and download the project to the latest target HMI.
3.6.2. Use HMI Name
1. Go to [System settings] on HMI and then set HMI name first.

2. On PC, select the HMI name and start downloading. To use [Search], enter the HMI name
first to search for the HMI. [Search all] searches for all HMIs in the same subnet network.

3.6.3. Use USB cable
Select USB cable to download project to HMI. The way of setting is same as “3.6.1 Configure in
EasyBuilder Pro”. Before downloading via USB cable, please make sure the USB driver is
installed. Go to [Computer Management] » [Device Manager] to check if USB driver is installed.
If it is not installed, please refer to installation steps to install manually.
3.6.4. Use USB Drive or SD Card
The following explains how to download project file by using USB drive or SD card.
1. On EasyBuilder Pro toolbar click [Project] » [Build for SD card / USB disk download].
Browse for the project file and then click [Build], the file for download will be generated in
the connected external device.

2. Insert an external device to HMI.

3. Select [Download] on HMI and enter password.
4. After password is confirmed, it will show the directories in the external device. (pccard: SD
Card; usbdisk: USB Drive)
5. Select the directory that contains project, and then click [OK] to start downloading.

Note
 Please select the parent directory of the generated files when downloading. For the
structure above, please select disk_a_1, not mt8000ie.
 You may click [System Settings] to save the hardware settings configured in EasyBuilder
Pro into SD card or USB disk, and then download the settings file to HMI. See “4 Hardware
Settings” for more information.
3.7. Upload the Project File from HMI
1. On EasyBuilder Pro toolbar click [File] » [Upload].

2. Set HMI IP, HMI model, project location and project name, and then click [Upload].

Hardware Settings 4-1
4. Hardware Settings
This chapter explains HMI settings.
4.1. Overview ....................................................................................................................... 4-2
4.2. I/O Ports ........................................................................................................................ 4-2
4.3. LED Indicators ............................................................................................................... 4-2
4.4. System Reset ................................................................................................................. 4-3
4.5. System Toolbar.............................................................................................................. 4-4

4.1. Overview
This chapter discusses the HMI settings.
4.2. I/O Ports
The I/O ports may vary between models; please see the datasheet for more information.
The I/O Ports include:
 SD card slot: Allows downloading / uploading project file, including recipe data, event log,
data log…etc and also allows recording history data and data backup.
 COM Port: Connects PLC or other peripheral devices. The type of serial port include:
RS-232, RS-485 2W, RS-485 4W, and CAN Bus.
 Ethernet: Allows downloading / uploading project file, including recipe data, event log,
data log…etc. Connects to Ethernet devices, such as PLC, laptop.
 USB Host: Supports USB devices, such as mouse, keyboard, USB disk, printer, or barcode
device.
 USB Client: Allows downloading / uploading project file, including recipe data, event log,
data log…etc and also allows recording history data and data backup.
For the first time operating HMI, please complete the following system settings. When finished,
the project files designed using EasyBuilder Pro can be used on HMI.
4.3. LED Indicators
The LED indicators on the HMI indicate:

Models: MT8121XE, MT8150XE, MT8121iE, MT8150iE
LED Description
PWR (Orange) Indicates power status.
CPU (Green) Blinks when read/write Flash Memory.
COM (Blue) Indicates COM port communication status, blinks
during communication. When communication is
good, it may stay on. (Not including network
communication)
Other Models:
LED Description
PWR (Orange) Indicates power status.
CPU (Green) Indicates CPU status. If it blinks or goes out, there

may be a CPU error.

COM (Blue/Red) Indicates communication status, blinks during
communication. When communication is good, it
may stay on.
4.4. System Reset
Each HMI is equipped with a reset button and a set of DIP switches. When using the DIP
switches to change modes, the corresponding functions will be triggered. If system password is
lost or forgotten, see the following steps to restore factory default.
1. Flip DIP Switch 1 to ON and the rest to OFF, and then reboot HMI. HMI will switch to touch
screen calibration mode.
2. A “+” sign appears on the screen, touch the center of the sign, after all 5 signs are touched,
“+” disappears and the touch screen parameters will be stored in HMI system.
3. After calibration, confirm to restore the default password, select [Yes].
4. Confirm to restore the default password again by typing [yes] and clicking [OK]. The
project files and history records stored in HMI will all be removed. (The default Local
Password is 111111. However, other passwords, such as Download/Upload passwords
have to be reset.)
The following lists the DIP switch settings of different models. Please see the relevant
installation instruction.
eMT / iE SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 Mode

ON OFF OFF OFF Touch Screen Calibration Mode
OFF ON OFF OFF Hide HMI System Setting Bar
OFF OFF ON OFF Boot Loader Mode
OFF OFF OFF ON Reserved
OFF OFF OFF OFF Normal
Note
 The state of DIP Switch 4 on each unit may be different. If it should be ON when out from
factory, the Dip Switch 4 would be set ON and cut off. If it should be OFF, the Dip Switch 4
would be set OFF but the switch is not cut.
SW1 SW2 Mode
ON ON Restore factory default
ON OFF Hide system setting bar

mTV OFF ON Boot loader mode

OFF OFF Normal mode
cMT-SVR SW1 SW2 Mode

ON ON Restore factory default
ON OFF Restore Ethernet IP Settings
OFF ON Boot loader mode
OFF OFF Normal mode
4.5. System Toolbar
After rebooting HMI, you can set the system with [System Toolbar] at the bottom of the screen.
Normally, this bar is hidden automatically. Only by touching the arrow icon at the bottom-right
corner of the screen will the System Toolbar pop up. From left to right the icons are: System
Settings, System Information, Text Keyboard, and Number Keyboard.
How to hide HMI System Setting Toolbar:

 When [DIP Switch 2] is set ON, the system setting toolbar is disabled. When set OFF; the
system setting toolbar is enabled. Please restart HMI to enable/disable the toolbar.
 For mTV Series, flip DIP Switch 1 to ON to hide system setting toolbar.
 System register [LB-9020] can also enable/disable system setting toolbar. When [LB-9020]
is set ON, the toolbar is displayed, and set OFF to hide the toolbar.
4.5.1. System Setting
Set or modify system parameters. Confirm password for security first. The factory default
password is 111111.

Network
When downloading project file to HMI via Ethernet,
set the correct IP of the target HMI. You can obtain
an IP address automatically or enter the IP address
manually. To use Email and EasyAccess2.0, please set
correct DNS address.
Time / Date
Set HMI local time and date.
Security
Password protection, the default is 111111. Please
click the buttons to set the passwords, and finish
password confirmation.
[Password for entering system]
[Password for uploading project]
[Password for downloading project]
[Password for uploading history data]
History
Clears history data in HMI.

HMI name
Set HMI name to be used when download/upload
project.
OS setting
[Upgrade OS]
Upgrade firmware. Please do not turn off or unplug
HMI during OS upgrade process. For more details,
see the instruction about OS upgrade of the model
used.
[Portrait Mode]
Set screen orientation mode. After changing the
mode, reconnect HMI to power supply, for the
setting to take effect. That is, disconnect all power
from HMI, and then connect again. If portrait mode
is used (90 or 270 degree), the project must be
designed for portrait mode, otherwise it cannot be
correctly displayed.
VNC server setting

Remote HMI monitoring and controlling via
Ethernet.
[Start VNC single-connection]
Allows connection with one VNC client.
[Start VNC multi-connection]
Allows connection with multiple VNC clients.
Connecting more VNC clients may slow down the
communication speed.
Please see the settings steps in the later part.
Click the icon to watch the demonstration film.
Please confirm your internet connection before
playing the film.

Misc 1
Rotary switch for adjusting LCD brightness.
[Popup download window]
If selected, after inserting USB disk or SD card to
HMI, the Upload / Download dialog box shows.
[Restart after download/upload]
If selected, restarts HMI automatically after
uploading / downloading project.
Misc 2
[Hide mouse cursor]
If selected, the mouse cursor will be hidden.
[Enable [Reset HMI to default] button in calibration
mode]
If selected, when the operator presses and holds
anywhere on the screen for more than 2 seconds
during HMI startup, the touch screen calibration
mode will start. After calibration, [Reset HMI to
default] option shows.
[FTP client can modify USB/SD data]
If selected, USB/SD data can be modified using FTP.
[Modify HMI ports]
Change the port number for Upload/Download and
FTP.
EasyAccess 2.0
Activate EasyAccess 2.0 service.
Click the icon to download the demo project.
downloading the demo project.
The following steps explain how to set VNC server.

1. Enable HMI VNC server, set password.
2. Install Java IE or VNC Viewer on PC.
3. Enter remote HMI IP in Internet Browser. Or, in VNC Viewer enter remote HMI IP and
password.

4.5.2. System Information
Network: Displays network information & HMI IP address.
Version: Displays HMI firmware version and model type.

System Parameter Settings 5-1
5. System Parameter Settings

This chapter introduces the system parameter settings.
5.1. Overview ....................................................................................................................... 5-2

5.2. Device ........................................................................................................................... 5-2
5.3. Model.......................................................................................................................... 5-11
5.4. General ....................................................................................................................... 5-14
5.5. System Setting ............................................................................................................ 5-18
5.6. Remote ....................................................................................................................... 5-20
5.7. Security ....................................................................................................................... 5-22
5.8. Extended Memory ...................................................................................................... 5-24
5.9. Printer / Backup Server............................................................................................... 5-26
5.10. Time Sync./DST ........................................................................................................... 5-27
5.11. e-Mail .......................................................................................................................... 5-28
5.12. Recipes ........................................................................................................................ 5-31
5.13. Cellular Data Network ................................................................................................ 5-32

5.1. Overview
Launch EasyBuilder Pro, in the main menu select [Home] » [System Parameters] to open the
[System Parameter Settings] dialog box. System Parameter Settings are divided into several
tabs, these tabs will be introduced respectively in this chapter.
5.2. Device
Parameters in this tab determine the attributes of each device connected with HMI. The device
can be a Local / Remote HMI / PLC. A default device "Local HMI" exists when creating a new
project. This device is the HMI that will be updated and programmed.
5.2.1. How to Control a Local PLC
“Local Device” is a device connected to the local HMI. To control/connect a Local Device, add
this type of device first. Click [System Parameters] » [New] to open [Device Properties] dialog
box. For example, when connecting MODBUS RTU as a Local Device:

Setting Description
Name The name of the device.
HMI / Device In this example a device is used, so select [Device].
Location Select [Local] or [Remote]. In this example the device is
connected to the Local HMI, so select [Local].
Device type Select the type of the device.
I/F The available interface: [RS-232], [RS-485 2W], [RS-485
4W], [Ethernet], [USB], and [CAN Bus].
 If the interface used is [RS-232], [RS-485 2W], or
[RS-485 4W], configure communication parameters
by clicking [Device Properties] » [Settings] and then
[Com Port Settings] dialog box opens.
Timeout
If the communication has been disconnected for more
than preset time limit configured in [Timeout] (in sec),
Window No. 5 will pop up and show “Device No
Response” message.
Turn around delay
While sending the next command to the device, HMI will
delay the sending according to the time interval set in
[Turn around delay]. This may influence the efficiency of
the communication between HMI and the device. Default
value is “0”.
Note: If the device used is SIEMENS S7-200 Series, it is
recommended to assign “5” to [Turn around delay] and
“30” to [Send ACK delay].
 If the interface used is [Ethernet], click [Device
Properties] » [Settings] and the [IP Address Settings]
dialog box opens. Please set correct device IP address
and port number.

 If the interface is [USB], no further setting is

required. Please check the settings in [Device
Properties].
 If the interface is [CAN (Controller Area Network)
Bus], please see “Device Connection Guide” for
“CANopen” and import the .eds device file.
Device Set the default station number for device address if the
default device station number is not included in the address.
station no. Device station no. can be set in its address. The address
format: ABC#Addr
ABC stands for device station number and ranges from 0 to
255. Addr stands for device address. And the “#” sign
separates the station number and the address. As shown
in the following figure, the data is read from device station
number 1, and address 0x-20.
Default Use the station number variables as the default device

station no.
station number. Select one from LW-10000 to LW-10015
use station
no. variable (var0 to var15) as the station number variables. If the

station no. is not specified in device address, the station

number will be determined by the station no. variable.
For example, if var3 is set for default station no:
The followings demonstrate some examples:

 The device station number is “5”.
 The device station number is determined by var7

(LW-10007)
 Device address is set to “111”, since device station

no. is not specified, and the default station no. is
var3, the device station no. is determined by var3
(LW-10003).
Click the icon to download the demo project. Please

confirm your internet connection before downloading the
demo project.
Use When [Use broadcast command] check box is selected,
broadcast please fill in [Broadcast station no.] according to the
command broadcast station number defined by the device. When
HMI sends a broadcast command to the station number
set here, the device will only receive the command and
not reply to HMI.
As shown in the following figure:

When HMI sends a command to address 255#200, all the

devices will receive this command and will not reply.
Only devices that support broadcast command can use
this feature.
Interval of If the interval between read addresses of different
block pack commands is less than this value, the commands can be
(words) combined to one. The combining function is disabled if
this value is set to “0”.
For example, the interval value is set to “5”, to read 1 word
from LW-3 and 2 words from LW-6 respectively (read from
LW-6 to LW-7), since the interval of addresses between
LW-3 and LW-6 is less than 5, these two commands can be
combined to one. The result is to read 5 consecutive words
from LW-3 to LW-7.
Note: The maximum size of command combination data
must be less than [Max. read-command size].
Max. read - The maximum data size to read from the device at one
command time. Unit: word
size (words)
Max. write - The maximum data size to write to the device at one time.
command Unit: word.
size (words)
After all settings are completed, a new device named “Local PLC 1” is added to the [Device list].
Note
 When using cMT, select “Local HMI” in [System Parameter Settings] dialog box and then
click [New Device] to add a “Local PLC 1” under “Local HMI”.

5.2.2. How to Control a Remote Device
“Remote Device” is a device being connected to a remote HMI. To control a remote device, add
this type of device first. Please click [System Parameters] » [New] to open [Device Properties]
dialog box. For example, use MODBUS RTU as the Remote Device:
Setting Description

HMI or
In this example, a device is used, so select [Device].
Device
Location Select [Local] or [Remote]. In this example the device is
connected to Remote HMI, so select [Remote]. Set the IP
address and port number of the Remote HMI by clicking
[Settings] next to [Remote].
Device Type Select the type of the device.

I/F The interface used for Remote Device. If the remote device
uses a COM port, select [RS-232], [RS-485 2W], or [RS485
4W].
COM Set the correct COM port used by the Remote Device.
Device
default Set the station number of Remote Device.
station no.
After all settings are completed, a new device named “Remote PLC 1” is added to the *Device
list].
Note
 When using a cMT Series model, select the defined “Remote HMI 1” in [System
Parameters] dialog box and then click [New Device] to add a “Remote PLC 1” under
“Remote HMI 1”.

5.2.3. How to Control a Remote HMI
“Remote HMI” is the HMI other than “Local HMI”, and PC is also a “Remote HMI”. To control a
Remote HMI, add this type of device first. Click [System Parameters] » [New] to open [Device
Properties] dialog box as shown in the following figure:
Setting Description
HMI or
In this example, the device used is a HMI, so select [HMI].
Device
Location Select [Local] or [Remote]. In this example Remote HMI is
used, select [Remote]. Set the IP address and port number
of the Remote HMI by clicking [Device Properties] »
[Location] » [Settings].
After all settings are completed, a new device named “Remote HMI 1” is added to the [Device
list].

Note
 When using a cMT Series model, in [Device list] click [New HMI] to add a “Remote HMI 1”.

5.3. Model
Configure the [HMI model], [Timer], [Printer] and [Scroll bar] settings, and more.
eMT、iE、XE、mTV Series
cMT Series

Setting Description
HMI model Select an HMI model.
The [Resize pop-up windows / objects] dialog box will pop
up when changing to a model with a different resolution.
Select required adjustment and click [OK]. In most cases,
select all options.
Landscape/Portrait
Change the orientation of the project.
HMI station no. Set the station number of current HMI. The default value is
“0”.
Port no. Set the port number of current HMI. It is also used in
MODBUS server. The default value is “8000”.
Support cMT Supports communication with cMT Series models. cMT
communication
protocol Series project file should use the same communication port.
Timer Clock source
Set the source device of the clock/time information. It is
used by [Data Sampling], [Event Log], etc.
 If [HMI RTC] is selected, the time information comes
from the internal clock of the HMI.
 If [External device] is selected, the time information
comes from an external device. The address of the
source device must set correctly. As shown below, the
time information is from “TV” address type of the
“Local PLC”. The addresses of “TV” start from 0 and
contain 6 consecutive words and each of them store
the following information:
TV 0 → Second (range: 0~59)
TV 1 → Minute (range: 0~59)
TV 2 → Hour (range: 0~23)
TV 3 → Day (range: 1~31)

TV 4 → Month (range: 1~12)

TV 5 → Year (range: 1970~2037)
Printer (eMT, Type

iE, XE, mTV) A printer can be connected with the HMI. The HP PCL Series
printer is connected through USB interface while other
printers through a COM port.
For more information, see “23 HMI Supported
Printers”.
If the printer is connected through [COM], configure the
parameters correctly. If the printer type is [SP-M, D, E, F],
the [pixels of width] has to be set accurately, i.e. the set
pixel(s) cannot exceed printer’s default setting, or the HMI
will fail to print data.
Printer (cMT The printer driver can be installed on HMI.
Series) Type
Select printer type.
Status address
Shows printer status.
LW-n Status
0 Printer driver is not installed yet.
1 Installing printer driver.
2 Printer is ready.
3 Printer is printing.
LW-n+1 Error
0 None
1 Printer is not found.
2 Unknown error.
Control address
Updates printer connection parameters.

LW-n Command
0 None
1 Update connection parameters.
LW-n+1 I/O
0 Ethernet
1 USB
LW-n+2 IP address (Total: 4 words)
LW-n+6 Port (Default port number: 9100)
Please note that using only the ppd file for a printer may
not be able to run the printer since the corresponding
driver is absent. Using tested models is recommended.
Scroll bar Set the width of Scroll Bar, when the size of the object is too
small to display the contents, a scroll bar is displayed in the
object. This feature can be applied to objects that allow
scrolling, such as Alarm Display, Event Display, History Data
Display, and Option List.
Pass through
(Virtual COM Set the port number for Pass-through communication.
port)
5.4. General
Configure the properties related to screen display.

eMT, iE, XE, mTV Series

cMT Series

Setting Description
Options Enable fast display mode when change window
With this option selected, certain objects will cache the
most recent value and display it after changing window, to
achieve fast display.
The objects are: Bit Lamp, Word Lamp, Numeric, ASCII, Bar
Graph, Meter Display, Animation, and Moving Shape…etc.
RW_A enabled
Enable or disable recipe data RW_A. Enable this, the
objects can then control RW_A .The size of RW_A is 64K.
Windows Startup window no.
Designate the window shown when start up HMI.
Common window
The objects in the common window (Window No. 4) will be
shown in each base window. This determines that the
objects in common window are placed above or below the
objects in the base window.
Object layout
If [Control] mode is selected, when operating HMI,
[Animation] and [Moving Shape] objects will be displayed
above other kinds of objects neglecting the sequence that
the objects are created. If [Nature] mode is selected, the
display will follow the sequence that the objects are
created, the first created will be displayed first.
Screen saver Back light saver
If the screen is left untouched and reaches the time limit
set here, the back light will be turned off. The unit is
minute. Back light will be on again once the screen is
touched. If [none] is set, the back light will always be on.
Screen saver
If the screen is left untouched and reaches the time limit
set here. The current screen will automatically switch to a
window assigned in [Saver window no.].The setting unit is
minute. If [none] is set, this feature is disabled.
Saver window no.
To assign a window for screen saver.
Fast This setting is applicable for eMT, iE, XE, mTV, and iP Series.
selection Setting the attributes for fast selection button for Window
buttons No. 3. To use the fast selection button, create Window No.
3 first.
Attribute
Enable or disable fast selection window. Select [Enable] and

click [Settings] to set the attributes, including color and text

of the button.
Position
Select the button position on the screen. If [Left] is chosen,
the button will show at bottom left side of the screen; if
[Right] is chosen, the button will show at the bottom right
side of the screen.
Settings
Set the shape and label font of the Fast Selection Button.
Hide button when HMI starts
The Fast Selection Button will be hidden, calling it out
requires system registers LB-9013~LB-9015.
Monitor This setting is applicable for cMT Series.
Mode Window no. 3 in the project is monitored in this mode in
cMT Viewer. The user can select up to 50 cMT Series HMIs
to monitor in cMT Viewer, and in 3x3 or 5x4 tile view.
Event Use LW9450~9455 as time tags of event logs
When this option is selected, Event Log will use the
following time tags to show the time that the event is
triggered.
LW-9450: time tag of event log – second (range: 0~59)
LW-9451: time tag of event log – minute (range: 0~59)
LW-9452: time tag of event log – hour (range: 0~23)
LW-9453: time tag of event log – day (range: 1~31)
LW-9454: time tag of event log – month (range: 1~12)
LW-9455: time tag of event log – year (range: 1970~2037)
Please note that the system will not be able to use these
time tags when one of them exceeds acceptable range.
demo project.
Keyboard The window number in which the keyboard is placed.
When using Numeric Input or ASCII Input objects, the type
of keyboards can be selected. Up to 32 keyboards can be
added. To design a keyboard, a window should be
designated for creating it. Press [add] after creating, and
add the window to the list.
See “12 Keyboard Design and Usage”.
External keyboard layout
The available USB keyboard layouts are QWERTY and
AZERTY. System register LW-9199 allows switching keyboard
layouts on HMI.

Caret color / Select color

This setting is applicable for eMT, iE, XE, mTV, and iP Series.
Set the color of caret that appears when entering data in
Numeric Input and ASCII Input objects, or change the
selection color.
Project Projects can be restricted to be executed by a specific HMI.
protection See “30 Project Protection”.
5.5. System Setting
[System Setting] is used to configure different features of EasyBuilder Pro.
Some features are duplicated from system registers, such as, [Hide system setting bar
(LB-9020)], [Hide mouse cursor (LB-9018)], [Disable buzzer (LB-9019)], and [Disable upload
function (LB-9033)]. Users can also set these features via system tag.
To select a system tag, select [Address] » [System tag] check box when adding a new object and
then select the [Address Type].
To browse all the system tags, Select [Library] » [Tag] » [System] from the main menu of
EasyBuilder Pro.

Setting Description
Startup language after Set the language to use when HMI starts after
redownloading the the project is re-downloaded.
project
Delay time of device Certain PLC models need relatively longer
communication after startup time. In order to prevent
HMI starts communication error that occurs when HMI
attempts to communicate with a PLC that has
not yet started, a delay time can be set.
Include delaying the execution of all init.
Macros when HMI starts.
With this option selected, the macros that
have [Execute one time when HMI starts]
enabled will also be delayed.
Execute init. MACRO Designate the macro to be executed when HMI
when power on power on.
Auto logout If leaving HMI untouched for longer than the
set time, the objects protected by security
classes will not be able to operate. The user ID
and password must be entered again to unlock
it.
Hide system setting bar Hide the system setting bar in the bottom right
corner of the HMI screen.
Hide mouse cursor Hide the mouse cursor in HMI screen.
Mouse cursor size Set mouse cursor size.
Sound control With each touch on a button, a sound is
emitted: A sound is emitted when touching a
button.
With Each operation from a button, a sound is
emitted: When the [Min. press time] is
specified, there may be a time gap between
touching the object and the action of the
object. With this option selected, the sound is
emitted when the object actions.
Disable sound output: Mute HMI. (Not
including the sound played when tapping
system setting button on HMI.)
Disable upload function Disable HMI to upload project.
(effective after rebooting
HMI) (or set LB9033 ON)

Use a disconnection icon If selected, a disconnection icon is

or relative objects when displayed on relevant objects
device communication when failing to communicate with
fails the device.
This icon will be shown in the
lower right corner of the
object.
This icon will only show for
disconnection after successful connection.
Enable watch dog Watchdog automatically reboots the system
(LB-9049) after the HMI stops functioning for a specified
period of time.
5.6. Remote
Parameters in this tab configure remote connections. Certain functions can be carried out
using system registers.

Setting Description
Prohibit remote HMI Prohibit the connection with a remote HMI.
connecting to this The remote HMI will not be able to control the
machine local HMI.
Prohibit password Prohibit Remote HMI to read Local HMI’s
remote-read operation project password and user password.
(or set LB9053 ON)
Prohibit password Prohibit Remote HMI to write to Local HMI’s
remote-write operation project password and user password.
(or set LB9054 ON)
VNC Server If [Password free] check box is selected, the
client can connect with HMI via VNC without
entering the password.
If [Monitor mode] check box is selected, the
HMI connected via VNC can only be monitored
but not controlled.
If [Password from project] check box is
selected, set the password for VNC login.
Easy Access server Login EasyAccess 1.0 server:
Through this technology, users can easily
access to any HMI connected to the internet
and operate them on PC just like holding touch
screen in hand.
Easy Access does not transmit updated graphic
images directly but only the real time data.
This makes transmission really quick and
efficient. Please refer to “EasyAccess Manual”
for more information.
Location of EasyAccess 2.0 server:
Current location includes Global and China.
Click the icon to watch the demonstration
film. Please confirm your internet connection
Diagnoser Enable
When selected, cMT Viewer will allow
diagnostic operations when connecting to a
cMT model. System register LB-12656 can also
be used to control Diagnoser.
Password free
Enabling Disgnoser will not require password
login. System Register LB-12657 can also be

used to set whether a password is required.

Password
Enter the password for logging in Diagnoser.
System register LW-11756 (4 words) can also
be used to set this password.
cMT Viewer Max connect count
Allows specifying the allowable number of cMT
Viewer connections for a local cMT HMI.
5.7. Security
Parameters in this tab configure the user passwords and security classes. There are two
authentication modes: General Mode and Enhanced Security Mode.
For more information, see “10 Security”.
5.7.1. General Mode
Up to 12 sets of user and password are available. Password should be one non-negative integer.
Once the password is entered, the objects that the user can operate are classified.
There are six security classes available: A to F.
If [None] is selected for an object, every user can access this object.
For example, when the security class of User No. 3 is set as the preceding figure, User No. 3
could only access objects of classes A, B, C and “none”.
5.7.2. Enhanced Security Mode
At most 11 users can be set here. An [Administrator] user is provided in this mode. An
[Administrator] has all privileges and can operate all object classes. User passwords must be
alphanumeric and each user can have up to 12 classes: A to L.

Setting Description
Editable Determines whether other users can change the
password settings or see passwords.
Enable read-only
Under this mode, the settings can be viewed but not
changed.
Mask password
Passwords are masked by asterisks (*).
Select operable When [Use existing user accounts on HMI] check box
classes for each is selected, the user accounts existing on HMI will not
user be erased after downloading the project file to HMI.
Administrator Default administrator account, cannot be deleted, has
all privileges, and cannot be changed. Enhanced
Security Mode can be used with Option List object. It
displays the account names and privileges. If [Secret

user] is checked, the account names and privileges

will be hidden in Option List.
Control address An address for users to manage the accounts directly
on HMI.
Project password When this password is enabled, it has to be entered
before editing the project file.
Select [Enable] and then click [Settings] to set the
password.
Execute auto. This feature allows automatic login / logout using an
Login/logout USB security key. The login / logout status will be
when insert an written into a designated address. Insert the USB disk
to HMI to log in, and remove the USB disk to log out.
USB key into HMI
The result codes of login / logout: 0x00: No action,
0x01: Login succeeds, 0x04: Login fails, 0x08: Logout
succeeds, 0x10: Logout fails.
5.8. Extended Memory
Parameters in this tab determine the location of the extended memory.
Extended Memory is numbered from EM0 to EM9. It works in a way similar to other device
types (i.e. LW or RW address). Users can simply select from [Device type] list while adding a
new object. Size of each extended memory is up to 2G word.

Extended memories are saved as files in [SD card] or [USB disk]. [EM0] to [EM9] are saved as
“em0.emi” to “em9.emi” respectively. Users can use RecipeEditor.exe to open these files and
edit the data in the extended memory.
Data in extended memory will not be erased when power is cut, which means next time when
start up HMI again, data in the extended memory remains the same as before power off. This is
similar to recipe data (RW, RW_A).
When the device of extended memory does not exist and to read data in it, the data content
will be “0”; to write data to a device that does not exist, the "PLC no response" message will be
shown in HMI.
Users can insert or remove the external device to or from HMI without cutting the HMI power
to update or take data in extended memory.

5.9. Printer / Backup Server
Configure remote printer / backup server.
Setting Description
Output Orientation
settings Set how will words or pictures be printed out, [horizontal]
or [vertical].
Printer size
Set to print out in [Original size] or to [Fit to printer
margins].
Margin
Set the top, bottom, right and left margin width.
Communication IP address
settings Assign the IP address of the printer via network.
[Port], [User name], [Password]

Specify the data to log in server.
Port can be set from 1 to 65535.
Maximum length of user name or password is 12
characters.
For more information, see “26 EasyPrinter”.
Click the icon to download the demo project. Please confirm your internet connection
before downloading the demo project.

5.10. Time Sync./DST
Synchronize HMI time with NTP server.
Setting Description
HMI time zone Select HMI time zone.
Enable time Execute time synchronization when HMI starts
synchronization Automatically synchronizes HMI time with the
via NTP (Network designated NTP server when HMI starts.
Time Protocol) Server response time
server Select NTP server time zone.
Network time server
Provides four fields to fill in Network Time Servers for
user’s device. If the synchronization with server 1 fails,
the system will try to synchronize with server 2, and so
on. If HMI time cannot synchronize with any of the
Network Time Servers, the system register LB-12055 will
change to ON status.
Update interval
The frequency of synchronization, the range is from 10 to

86400 seconds.
Automatically set Start / End
daylight saving Set the start/end of Daylight Saving Time.
time (DST) The option [Last] may refer to the 5th or 6th week
depending on the selected month.
Daylight bias
Set the time zone's offset during DST.
Note
 When DST ends, and the time falls back, the Trend Display object in Real-time mode will
stop refreshing for the overlapping hour(s) when it just going back to standard time.
However, historical data will not be affected.
 When DST ends, adjusting HMI time (manually or by network) back to the DST period will
not be effective to the system. The system register LB-12355 stays OFF.
 When DST ends, and the time falls back, the system will not start DST for the overlapping
hour(s). The system register LB-12355 stays OFF.
 Before DST starts, adjusting HMI time (manually or by network) into the DST period will
start DST. The system register LB-12355 will be set ON. The HMI time will be the specified
time without adding the offset.
 During DST, adjusting HMI time (manually or by network) to a time that is not within DST
period will end DST. The system Register LB-12355 will be set OFF. The HMI time will be
the specified time without subtracting the offset.
 This feature does not yet support the DST in Southern Hemisphere.
For more information on system registers relevant to DST, see “22 System Registers”.
5.11. e-Mail
Select [Enable e-Mail function] check box to configure the parameters.

When [Use existing contact settings on HMI] check box is selected, the system will use the
contact settings in HMI after downloading the project to HMI, or use the following settings
when no contact is found in HMI.

Setting Description
SMTP Settings Server: Set SMTP Server.
Port: Set communication port.
User name: Set e-mail address.
Password: Set e-mail password.
Confirm Password: Confirm e-mail password.
SMTP server requires authentication:
Decide whether Secure Password Authentication is needed
when log in e-mail.
Use the following type of encrypted connection:
Decide whether the encrypted connection (TLS, SSL) is
needed when sending e-mail.
Sender Name:
Information Enter the sender name or use the local HMI name in the
device list, or the name specified using system register
LW-10884 (HMI name).

Mail Address:
Setting e-mail address.
Error message When an error occurs in email delivery, the error message
sent from SMTP server can be shown in the designated
address.
For more information on system registers relevant to
mail delivery, see “22 System Registers”.
Error Turn OFF LB-12053 or LB-12054 before send an e-Mail
notification When enabled, system registers LB-12053 or LB-12054 will
be turned off before sending e-mail, otherwise, when an
error occurs in email delivery, the register remains ON.
Test SMTP Verify SMTP settings in advance by sending a test email to
Settings the specified e-mail address.
Click [Recipients] to open the following dialog to edit contacts:
Setting Description
Contact list Add or remove contacts from the list.
Group Group up contacts.
Information No. of groups:
Set no. of contact groups, according to the number, the
groups are named from A to P and up to 16 groups can be
set.
Current group:
Displays the group that includes the contacts above.
Comment:
Enter a description for the current group.

For more information on sending Event Log, see “7 Event Log”.

For more information on e-mail related system registers, see “22.3.40 e-Mail”.
5.12. Recipe Database
Configure the recipe list for [Recipe Database].
Setting Description
Recipes List Add or delete a recipe, the maximum is 100 recipes.
New Add a new item, the maximum is 1000 items.
Settings Configure recipe settings, see the following description.
Delete Delete the selected items.
Import Import recipe definition.
Export Export recipe definition. The exported file will not contain
recipe records.
Click [Settings]:

Setting Description
Name Enter recipe item name.
Display Type Setting item data type.
Item size (WORD) Setting the size of the item.
Display with (Chars) Setting the number of characters of the item to be
displayed.
Right of decimal pt. Setting the decimal place when displaying data.
Alignment Setting the alignment when displaying data. [Align
left], [Align center], and [Align right] can be selected.
Note
 The maximum number of Recipe Database acceptable in a project file is 100 Recipe
Databases. A Recipe Database can contain 1000 items.
 The maximum data length acceptable in a Recipe Database is 2000 words. Exceeding the
limit can lead to compilation failure.
 The name of Recipe Database and recipe items should be alphanumeric.
For more information, see “24 Recipe Editor”.
5.13. Cellular Data Network
This tab is for setting cellular data. Cellular data network settings may differ from one model to
another.
Applicable models:
cMT-SVR (OS ver. 20151127 or later)
cMT3072/cMT3090/cMT3103/cMT3151 (OS ver. 20180723 or later)
cMT-HDM/cMT-FHD (OS ver. 20190130 or later)
Attaching a 3G/4G USB dongle to the USB port enables the cMT-SVR to connect to 3G/4G
networks.

Setting Description
Use existing contact If this check box is selected, the cellular data currently
settings on HMI in HMI will be used. When no specific settings are
required, generally, [PIN code] is “0000”, [APN] is
“internet”, and [Username], [Password], [Dial number]
are optional.
The relevant registers:

LW-11297: (16 words) : PIN code of SIM card (cellular network)
LW-11313: (16 words) : Access Point Name (cellular network)
LW-11329: (16 words) : username (cellular network)
LW-11345: (16 words) : password (cellular network)
LW-11361: (16 words) : dial number (cellular network)
LW-11377: (16bit) : stop (set 0)/start (set 1) connection (cellular
network)
LW-11378: (16bit) : last error code (0:success, 1:incorrect PIN code,
2:no SIM, 3:no device, 4:puk locked, 5:other) (cellular
network)
LW-11379: (16bit) : connection status (0:no device, 1:disconnect,
2:connecting, 3:connected) (cellular network)
USB Tethering
By connecting an Android® mobile phone with HMI using a micro USB cable, or any USB data
cable that is compatible with the phone, the internet connection of the phone can be shared
with HMI. On the Android mobile phone please enable USB Tethering.

When successfully connected, the following registers can be used to monitor and control the
connection status.
LW-11380: (16bit) : stop (set 0)/start (set 1) connection (USB
tethering)
LW-11381: (16bit) : connection status (0:no device, 1:disconnect,
2:connected, 3:fail, 4:OS not support, 5:HMI not
support) (USB tethering)

Window Operations 6-1
6. Window Operations
This chapter describes different types of windows and how to create, set and delete a window.
6.1. Overview ....................................................................................................................... 6-2

6.2. Window Types .............................................................................................................. 6-2
6.3. Create, Set, and Delete a Window................................................................................ 6-4
6.4. Window Transparency .................................................................................................. 6-7
6.5. Editing Tips.................................................................................................................... 6-9

6.1. Overview
A window is a basic element in a project. With a window, all kinds of information like objects,
pictures, and texts can be displayed on HMI screen. In total, 1997 windows numbered from 3 ~
1999 in EasyBuilder Pro can be built and edited.
6.2. Window Types
There are 4 types of windows, each with different functions and usages:
 Base Window
 Fast Selection Window
 Common Window
 System Message Window
6.2.1. Base Window
The most frequently used window, except for main screen, it can also be:
 A background of other windows.
 A keyboard window.
 A pop-up window of Function Key object.
 A pop-up window of Direct Window and Indirect Window objects.
 A screen saver.
Note
 Base Window should be in same size as the HMI screen. Therefore, the resolution of the
base window should be set to the resolution of HMI.
6.2.2. Fast Selection Window
Window no. 3 is the default Fast Selection Window. This window can co-exist with base
window. Generally, it is used to place the frequently-used buttons on the lower-left side or the
lower-right side on the screen. Please create window no. 3 first, and set the relevant properties
in [System Parameter Settings] » [General] tab. Apart from showing or hiding fast selection
window with the button on the screen, there are system registers to do so:
[LB-9013] Fast Selection window control [hide(ON)/show(OFF)]
[LB-9014] Fast Selection button control [hide(ON)/show(OFF)]
[LB-9015] Fast Selection window/button control [hide(ON)/show(OFF)]
Note
 cMT Series does not support Fast Selection Window.

6.2.3. Common Window
Window no. 4 is the default Common Window. Objects in this window will be displayed in
other base windows, not including pop-up windows. Therefore, the common objects in
different windows are often placed in common window.
When operating HMI, select [Function Key] » [Change common window] to change the source
of common window.
In menu[File] » [Preferences] » [Display] select whether or not to [Display Common Window
objects on Base Windows] when editing a project. This can avoid overlapping objects in base
window with objects in common window.
6.2.4. System Message Window
Windows No. 5, 6, 7, 8 are the default System Message Windows:

Window No. 5: PLC Response
When the communication between PLC and HMI is
disconnected, this message window will pop up
automatically right on the base window currently opened.
This window can be disabled by system registers.
Window No. 6: HMI Connection
When failing to connect HMI with a remote HMI, this
message window will pop up automatically.
Window No. 7: Password Restriction

When attempting to control an object without
authorization, this window may pop up as a warning
depending on the settings of the object.

Window No.8: Storage Space Insufficient

When HMI flash memory, USB disk or SD card run out of
storage space, this message window will pop up
automatically. (When the memory space is under 4 MB)
The following system registers can be used to check the free memory space in HMI, USB disk,
or SD card:
[LW-9072] HMI current free space (K bytes)
[LW-9074] SD current free space (K bytes)
[LW-9076] USB disk current free space (K bytes)
To check if there is sufficient storage in the devices, the following system registers can be used.
These addresses will set ON when the space is under 4 MB.
[LB-9035] HMI free space insufficiency alarm (when ON)
[LB-9036] SD card free space insufficiency alarm (when ON)
[LB-9037] USB disk free space insufficiency alarm (when ON)
For more information, see “22 System Registers”.
The text shown in windows no. 5 ~ 8 can be edited for easier reference.
Note
 A screen can display up to 16 pop-up windows simultaneous including System Message
Window, Direct Window and Indirect Window.
 The system does not allow opening the same window with two Direct (or Indirect)
Windows in one base window.
 Windows no. 3 to 9 are used by the system only, and windows no. 10 to 1999 can be
edited based on actual usage.
 For cMT Series, only 1 pop-up window can be displayed at a time.
6.3. Create, Set, and Delete a Window
Check the existing windows in [Window Tree].

[Object list] displays window numbers and window names. Opened windows are marked with
(*) sign. Press the (+) sign to see the object ID, address and description in this window.
[Window preview] displays the thumbnails of windows.

6.3.1. Creating and Setting a Window
In window tree right click on a window number then select [New].

Setting Description
Name The name appears on the title bar and also in window tree.
Window no. Can be 3 to 1999.
Size Set the window size in accordance with the HMI resolution.
Underlay Underlay Window can be seen as an extra Common
window Window. When designing the project, some commonly
used objects are used in some windows but not all. These
objects can be placed in underlay window.
Each base window can set three underlay windows as
background, from [Bottom] to [Top]. The objects in underlay
windows are displayed in this order in base window.
Pop-up Base window can also be used as a pop-up window. Use [X]
window and [Y] to set the coordinates indicating where in the screen
will this base window pop up. The origin of the coordinates
is the upper-left corner of the window.
Monopoly If the option is selected, when the base window pops up, no
operations of other pop-up windows and background
windows are allowed until the monopoly window is closed.
If a base window is used as a keyboard window, “Monopoly"
is automatically enabled.
Title bar If the option is selected, a title bar appears on a system
message window. This feature is only available for system
message windows no. 5 to no. 8.
Macro Select the macro to be executed when the window opens or
closes, or the macro to be executed periodically (each 500
ms).
Please build the macro in advance.
Note
 The objects in underlay window cannot be edited from the base window that displays
them. To edit those objects, please open the underlay window where they are located.
 When the window number of the underlay window used by the base window is identical
to the pop-up window, the pop-up window is disabled.
 When base window and pop-up window use the same underlay window, the objects in
the underlay window cannot be displayed in pop-up window.
Or, from the main menu click [View] » [Open Window] and then click [New] and select the type
of the window and click [OK].

Ways to call up [Window Settings] dialog:

 Right click on the window number in the window tree and select [Settings].
 In [View] » [Open Window] select the window then click [Settings].
 In the window, right click when no object is selected, and select [Attribute].
6.3.2. Open, Close, and Delete a Window
The ways to open an existing window:

 Double click on the window number in the window tree.
 In the window tree, select the window, right click, and then select [Open].
 In [View] » [Open Window] select the window then click [Open].
The ways to close or delete an existing window:

 In the window tree, select the window; right click, then select [Close] or [Delete].
 In [View] » [Open Window] select the window then click [Delete].
 To delete a window, please close it first.
6.4. Window Transparency
The cMT Series models support setting window transparency. This setting is applicable for
popup windows, Direct / Indirect Windows, and keyboard windows. The settings dialog box
and the effect are shown in the following screenshots. Greater transparency can make the
object on the base window more visible when it is covered by the popup window.

Example
Setting transparency to 40%:
Setting transparency to 90%:

6.5. Editing Tips
EasyBuilder Pro provides a user-friendly interface with which users can easily edit projects. The
following are some editing tips.
6.5.1. Non-display Area, Select Tool, and Hand Tool
As shown in the following screenshot, two areas can be found in the editing window: editing
area and non-display area. The non-display area refers to the area outside the editing area (the
one in the middle). Objects placed in the non-display area will not be visible on HMI, and
communication with devices continues. The invisible objects such as Meter, Time-based Data
Transfer, or Text objects used for comments can be placed in this area to avoid overlapping
with other objects in the editing area, which adds difficulty to project editing. The objects
placed in the non-display area remain effective.

Select Tool
Clicking this icon in the toolbar changes the cursor to the Select Tool. Select a
single object by clicking it, or select multiple objects by clicking on an empty
part of the editing screen and then drag a box around the objects.
Hand Tool
Clicking this icon in the toolbar changes the cursor to the Hand Tool. The Hand
Tool allows moving through the project screen by simply left clicking the mouse
and dragging anywhere.
6.5.2. Ruler
Selecting [View] » [Ruler] adds rulers to the top and left of the editing screen. Guides can be
added from the ruler by right click on the ruler. Objects will automatically snap to the guides
when moved or resized.

Setting Description
Delete Delete the guide.
Edit
Adjust the position of the guide.

Settings
Add or delete multiple guides.

Selecting [File] » [Preferrences] » [Grid] opens the following window for setting the color or
style of the Guides.

6.5.3. Quick Copy
Quick copy can be carried out by pressing and holding Ctrl key on the keyboard while an object
is selected, and then drag the cursor to a new location where the object will be created.

Event Log 7-1
7. Event Log
This chapter explains how to set and use Event Log.
7.1. Overview ....................................................................................................................... 7-2

7.2. Event Log Management ................................................................................................ 7-2
7.3. Creating a New Event Log ............................................................................................. 7-8

Event Log 7-2
7.1. Overview
The following are the basic steps to use Event Log:

1. Define event content and trigger condition.
2. Trigger event according to the condition.
3. Save the event log to the specified device.
4. View the process of event by using the relevant objects.
This chapter will explain how to set and use Event Log.
7.2. Event Log Management
Firstly, define the event content then use Alarm Bar , Alarm Display , Event Display
objects to view the process of the whole event from triggering→waiting to be processed→
return to normal. The upper limit for the number of event logs is 10000.

Event Log 7-3
7.2.1. eMT, iE, XE, mTV, iP Series
Setting Description
Category Classifies events by dividing them into 0 ~ 255 categories.
Select one category to add or view event log. In the bracket
“* +”, it shows the number of events are in this category.
History Saves event log files to the specified location. Once an event
files occurs, the HMI immediately saves the history file. When
executing On-line or Off-line Simulation on PC, the files will
be saved in the HMI_memory / SD_card / USB folder under
the installation directory.
Preservation limit
This setting determines the maximum number of Event Log
files to be preserved in HMI memory. This does not include
the file generated today. That is, if [Days of preservation] is
set to 2; the two latest files excluding the file generated today
will be kept. The files that are not within the range will be
deleted automatically for saving the storage space.

Event Log 7-4
Print In [System Parameter Settings] » [Model], select a printer and

set the printing format.
Copy Copy the selected item.
Paste Overwrites the selected item with the new items. A message
window will pop up to confirm this operation.
Paste
Appends as a new entry.
(Add Mode)
7.2.2. cMT Series
Setting Description
Category Classifies events by dividing them into 0 ~ 255 categories.
Select one category to add or view event log. In the bracket
“* +”, it shows the number of events are in this category.
Edit category name mapping… Opens a category name table
which allows editing corresponding category names.
Control If select [Enable] check boxes under both [Control address]
address and [History files], entering a specific value in the control
address sends the corresponding command.

Event Log 7-5
Value Command
1 Clear the event log on cMT HMI
2 Synchronize event log to the external device
3 Synchronize event log to the external device and then
clear the event log on cMT HMI
4 Use the history data stored in USB disk / SD card after
changing HMI
11 Update event log message contents by reading a new
String Table
If none of these values is entered, the system will synchronize
data in the same rules as [History files] setting explained
below.
Status When LW-n is used as the control address, the four
Error consecutive addresses following LW-n (LW-n+1~LW-n+4) will
(cMT Series) show status and error, please see the prompt in the settings
dialog box.
Value Status address: LW-n+1 and LW-n+3

0 Disconnected from external device or database
1 Connecting with external device or database
2 Connected with external device or database
3 Storing records into the archive. When this is done, the
value returns to 2.
Value Error address: LW-n+2 and LW-n+4
0 None
1 Unknown error
2 Failed to connect with external device or database
3 Access denied
4 Wrong database name
5 Inconsistent data format
6 Failed to open table
7 Failed to create table
8 Failed to write table
History files Saves the synchronized data to SD, USB disk, or database. The

Event Log 7-6
rules of synchronizing the data saved in the external device

are:
 When the number of events is under 10000, the events
will be temporarily saved in cMT HMI.
 When the number of events reaches 10000, and [HMI
memory (10000 limited)] is selected, the system will
automatically save the data to the external device and
deletes the earliest 1000 events in cMT HMI.
 When the number of events reaches 10000, and [HMI
memory (until space full)] is selected, the system will
keep on saving the data to HMI memory without
deleting the earlier events. In this case the data may not
be synchronized to database.
 If the external device already contains some events, the
new data is appended without overwriting the original
data each time in synchronization.
 When the external device is removed from cMT HMI, or
cMT HMI is disconnected from database server, if the
connection is recovered before the number of events
exceeds 9000, the events occur during disconnection will
be saved to cMT HMI. If the number of events exceeds
9000 during disconnection, the earlier data will be
deleted, and cannot be synchronized by recovering
connection.
Auto sync. Data will be automatically synchronized to the designated
periodically external device in the specified time interval, regardless of
the rules explained above.
Unit: Minute(s)
Range: 1~1440
Preservation This setting determines the maximum number of Event Log
limit files to be preserved in HMI memory. This does not include
the file generated today. That is, if [Days of preservation] is
set to 2; the two latest files excluding the file generated today
will be kept. The files that are not within the range will be
deleted automatically. The system checks the time of the files
and deletes earlier files only during synchronization.
Display With this option selected, Event Log displays the history data
history from read from database.

Event Log 7-7
database
Copy Copy the selected item.
Paste Overwrite the selected items with the clipboard contents.
A message window will pop up to confirm this operation.
Paste
Append the clipboard contents to the end of the list.
(Add Mode)
Note
 Before removing SD card / USB disk, or disconnecting from database server, please
synchronize event log data by using control address.
7.2.3. Excel Editing
Click on the Excel icon in Event Log setting dialog box to open the Excel template for a
reference of editing. This template is under the installation directory, the file name is
EventLogExample.xls. This template includes the ready-made dropdown lists and validation
mechanism.
Note
 [System tag] and [User-defined tag] cannot be set to true simultaneously, otherwise, the
system will view the User-defined tag to be a System tag, and [User-defined tag] to be
false. If setting [Device type] to [User-defined tag], please set [System tag] to false.
 When setting [User-defined tag] to true, if the system compares the [Device type] with
the user-defined tag in the system, and no suitable tag is found, the system will set the
[User-defined tag] in event log to false
 [Color] format is R:G:B, each should be an integer form 0 to 255.
 Before importing Label Library / Sound Library, please make sure the library names exist in
the system.
7.2.4. Quick View of Errors
When compiling the project, the errors in Event Log will be displayed in the Compile window.
To open Event Log and view the errors, double click on the item in the Compile window.

Event Log 7-8
7.3. Creating a New Event Log
General Tab
Click [New] in the [Event (Alarm) Log] dialog box.

Event Log 7-9
Setting Description
Category Select event category, the range is from 0 to 255.
Priority When the number of events equals to the max number of the
level system (default 1000), the lower priority events will be
deleted and new events will be added in.
Save to In Event Log main settings, if [Save to HMI memory] check
history box under [History files] group box is selected, selecting [Save
to history] here determines whether each separate event
should be saved as historical file.
Push With this check box selected, each time when an event
notification occurs, user’s iOS®/Android® device can run EasyAccess 2.0
(EasyAccess application to receive push notifications.
2.0)
Delay time This feature is used to set the delay time of Event Log after
for event HMI reboot, in order to avoid false alarm that occurs upon
monitoring HMI reboot due to uninitialized values. This feature is often
when HMI
resets used with [Dynamic condition value]. The delay time only
occurs once upon HMI reboot.
Read The system reads data from this address to check if the event
address matches the trigger condition.

Event Log 7-10
Notification When enabled, the system will set the specified address ON
or OFF when the event is triggered.
Follow
The notification bit will reset to its original state once the
alarm condition returns to normal. For example, when the
alarm is triggered, the state of the notification bit turns ON.
When the alarm condition returns to normal, and [Follow]
check box is selected, the state of the notification bit turns
OFF.
Condition When [Bit] is selected, Event Log will detect the state of a Bit
address.
When [Word] is selected, Event Log will detect the value of a
Word address to check if it is greater than, less than, or
equals to a specified value. See Example 1 and Example 2.
Dynamic condition value
Allows online change of the comparison value for trigger
condition when the condition is a Word address type. If
[Read/Condition use different addresses] is not selected, the
source of condition value will be the next consecutive address
from [Read address].
Read/Condition use different addresses
Allows selecting the Word address type to be the source of
condition value.
Example 1
The setting above indicates:

When [Read address] value is greater than or equals to 29 (= 30 - 1)
Or less than or equals to 31 (= 30 + 1), the event will be triggered. The trigger condition:
29 ≤ [Read address] value ≤ 31
After the event is triggered, when [Read address] value is greater than 32 (= 30 + 2) or less than
28 (= 30 - 2) the system will return to normal condition:
[Read address] value < 28 or [Read address] value > 32

Event Log 7-11
Example 2
The setting above indicates:

When [Read address] value is less than 29 (= 30 - 1)
or greater than 31 (= 30 + 1), the event will be triggered. The trigger condition:
[Read address] value < 29 or [Read address] value > 31
After the event is triggered, when [Read address] value is greater than or equals to 28 (= 30 - 2)
or less than or equals to 32 (= 30 + 2) the system will return to normal condition:
28 ≤ [Read address] value ≤ 32
Message Tab

Event Log 7-12
Setting Description
Content The text content displayed in [Alarm Bar], [Alarm Display],
and [Event Display] objects. Use the formats in the
following two examples of WATCH addresses to use
register data in content. The content in Label Tag Library
and String Table can be used in the Event Log message.
Font / Color / The font / color / background color can be set respectively
Background
color for each event. The font and color settings determine how
[Alarm Bar] shows the text, while The font, color, and
background color settings determine how [Alarm Display]
and [Event Display] show the text. These settings are not
available in the [Event Display] under History mode.
Write value for When an event in [Event Display] or [Alarm Display] is
Event/Alarm
Display object acknowledged, the value is written to the assigned [Write
address].
demo project.
Sound If enabled, the selected sound will be played when an
event is triggered. Continuous beep can also be enabled,
which only stops when the event is acknowledged or
recovered.
For continuous beep, a delay time can be set between
triggering the alarm and the start of beeping.

demo project.
Address of Click [Syntax] to edit and display the value in watch
WATCH 1 ~ 8
address when the event is triggered. Up to 8 watch
addresses can be set.
demo project.

Event Log 7-13
e-Mail Tab
Please enable this function in [System Parameter Settings] » [e-Mail] first.
Setting Description
Recipients Select the [To], [Cc], and [Bcc] recipients.
Subject Enter the subject of the e-mail.
Message Enter the [Opening] and [Ending] content of an E-mail.
Attach If the [Contains a screenshot of window] check box is
selected, the screenshot of the selected window will be
attached.

Event Log 7-14
Statistics
Setting Description
Occurrence If enabled, the number of occurrence of the event after
read and reset HMI startup will be written to the designated word
address address. The word address can be read / written.
Elapsed time If enabled, from an event occurs to its recovery, the
read and reset elapsed time (in seconds) will be written to the
designated word address. The word address can be read /
address written.
Click the icon to download the demo project. Please confirm your internet
connection before downloading the demo project.

Data Sampling 8-1
8. Data Sampling
This chapter explains how to set and use Data Sampling.
8.1. Overview ....................................................................................................................... 8-2

8.2. Data Sampling Management ........................................................................................ 8-2
8.3. Creating a New Data Sampling ..................................................................................... 8-2
8.4. Synchronizing cMT Viewer data and Saving to External Device ................................. 8-11
8.5. Checking History Data of a Specific Date on cMT Viewer. .......................................... 8-12

Data Sampling 8-2
8.1. Overview
After defining how the data is sampled, by sampling time, address, or data length, the sampled
data can be saved to the designated location, such as HMI memory, SD card, or USB disk. Trend
Display and History Data Display objects can be used to display sampling records.
8.2. Data Sampling Management
Create a new Data Sampling object first by the following steps:

1. From the menu select [Data/History] and click [Data Sampling].
2. Click [New] to finish relevant settings.
8.3. Creating a New Data Sampling
The following introduces how to set a new Data Sampling.

eMT, iE, XE, mTV, iP Series

Data Sampling 8-3
Setting Description
Sampling mode High priority
Data sampling processes with this feature enabled will be
prioritized. Please note that too many priorities can slow
down update rate of other objects.
Time-based
Samples data in a fixed frequency. The [Sampling time
interval] can be set from “0.1 second(s) to 120 mins”.
Trigger-based
Triggers data sampling by the status of a designated bit
address.
Mode Conditions to trigger Data Sampling:
[OFF -> ON] Triggers sampling when the status of the
address changes from OFF to ON.
[ON -> OFF] Triggers sampling when the status of the
address changes from ON to OFF.
[OFF <-> ON] Triggers sampling when the status of the
address changes.
Set ON/OFF after triggered
If selected, after triggering Data Sampling, the system will
set the designated bit address back to ON/OFF state.
Read address Specify an address to be the source of Data Sampling. To
convert a data record, please use a user-defined
conversion tag that allows [Read conversion]. For array
addresses, the GetCnvTagArrayIndex function can get the
relative array index and then calculate.

Data Sampling 8-4
Data Record In Real-time Mode, when [Auto. stop] is not selected, the
(Real-time) max. number of data records can be saved on HMI is
86400. When the number of records exceeds 86400, the
earliest data will be deleted.
Data Format
Data of different formats in consecutive registers can be
sampled. For example, setting: LW-0 (16-bit Unsigned),
LW-1 (32-bit Float), and LW-3 (16-bit Unsigned). The
upper limit for the number of records is 1000.
Auto. stop
Data sampling will automatically stop when the number
of records reaches [Max. data records].
See “8.3.1 Demonstration of Auto. stop”.
Clear real-time Set when the bit address status changes from [OFF -> ON]
data address or [ON -> OFF], clear the sampled data in Trend Display
Real-time Mode. The number of data records returns zero
but the data records that are already saved as history files
will not be cleared.
Hold address If the status of the designated address is set ON or OFF,
sampling will be paused until the status of the designated
address returns.
History files Save to HMI momery
Saves Data Sampling to HMI every 10 seconds. Or, use
system register [LB-9034] to force storing data. See
details on the restrictions of using LB-9034 in the Note
below.
Save to SD card / USB disk
Saves Data Sampling to the specified external device.
Each file consists of all records of a day

Data Sampling 8-5
The data sampling file will be saved on a daily basis into

the specified folder, and the file name will be
yyyymmdd.dtl, indicating the date of the file.
Folder name
Specify Data Sampling file name which must be all in
ASCII characters. The folder name will be written as:
[Storage Location] \ [Folder Name] \ [File Name]
Preservation limit
Determines the number of data sampling files to be
preserved. Please note that the current .dtl file is not
included in this limit. That is, if this limit is set to 2, apart
from the current file, two latest files will be preserved.
Cutomized file This feature can be used to customize naming and
handling management of data sampling files (*dtl).
See “8.3.2 Customized File Handling”.
Note
 A Data Sampling may include more than one type of records. Data Sampling can retrieve
different types of records at the same time. For example, if define three types of data, 4
words in total, the system retrieves a 4-word data each time from the designated address to
be the content in one Data Sampling.
 When using [Each file consists of all records of a day] and set [Preservation limit] to 2 files,
the data of yesterday and the day before yesterday will be kept. Data that is not built in this
period will be deleted to prevent the storage space from running out.
 When using [Customized file handling] and set [Preservation limit] to 2 files, not only the
currently sampled file, another 2 newest files (3 files in total) will be kept. The rest of the
data will be deleted to prevent the storage space from running out.
 When running simulation on PC, all data sampling will be saved to the datalog folder in
C:\EBPro\[Storage Location]\datalog. If you change the data format of data sampling, delete
the previous data records in the installation directory to prevent the system from reading
the old records.
 When saving files to USB disk or SD card, the capacity of a FAT32 folder depends on the
length of the file names. Fewer files can be saved when the file names are longer.
 When using LB-9034, the shortest interval between two successful executions is 2 seconds.
That is, after LB-9034 is triggered, it can be effective again 2 seconds later.
cMT Series
The settings are almost similar to eMT, iE, XE, mTV, iP Series. The following highlights the
settings that are different.

Data Sampling 8-6
Setting Description
Data Record Data of different formats in consecutive registers can be
sampled. The upper limit for the number of records is
1000.
Control Entering a value in the control address sends the
address corresponding command.
Value Command
1 Clear the sampled data in HMI
2 Synchronize data to the external device / database
3 Synchronize data to the external device / database
and then clear the sampled data in HMI
4 Use the history data stored in USB disk / SD card
after changing HMI
5 As data sampling stops when HMI storage is full, this
command allows restarting of data sampling when
there’s free space
Status & Error When LW-n is used as the control address, the four
address consecutive addresses following LW-n (LW-n+1~LW-n+4)
will show status and error, please see the prompt in the
settings dialog box.

Data Sampling 8-7
Value Status address: LW-n+1 and LW-n+3

0 Disconnected from external device or database
1 Connecting with external device or database
2 Connected with external device or database
3 Storing records into the archive. When this is done,
the value returns to 2.
Value Error address: LW-n+2 and LW-n+4
0 None
1 Unknown error
2 Failed to connect with external device or database
3 Access denied
4 Wrong database name
5 Inconsistent data format
6 Failed to open table
7 Failed to create table
8 Failed to write table
History files History data can be saved to USB disk, SD card, and
Database Server. When the sampled data reaches 10000
records, and [Save to HMI memory (10000 limited)] is
selected, the sampled data is automatically saved to the
selected external device, and the earliest 1000 records
are deleted. When [Save to HMI memory (until space
full)] is selected, the system will keep on saving data to
HMI memory without clearing the earlier racords. In this
case, the data will not be synchronized to Database. To
save data in Database Server, please set the computer’s IP
address.
See synchronization rules in “8.4 Synchronizing cMT

Data Sampling 8-8
Viewer data and Saving to External Device”.

See Database Server usage in “13.44 Database
Server”.
Cutomized file This feature can be used to customize naming and
handling management of data sampling files (*db). The current
*db file is saved in HMI memory. Please note the
following two points when Sync. Destination is USB disk /
SD card:
1. When *db file name changes, the *.db file with the
former name will be synchronized to USB disk / SD
card.
2. If a new *db file is generated when there’s no existing
USB disk / SD card on HMI, the earlier *db file will be
deleted. For example, if 20161218.db is the current
file, when 20161219.db is generated and no external
device is inserted to HMI, and then 20161218.db will
be deleted.
Find Customized File Handling settings dialog box in

“8.3.2 Customized File Handling”.
Auto sync. Data will be automatically synchronized to the designated
periodically external device in the specified time interval, regardless
of the rules explained above. Please note that the timer
will reset when a control address is used.
See “8.4 Synchronizing cMT Viewer data and Saving to
External Device or Database Server”.
All record in When Sync. Destination is USB disk / SD card, the
one file preservation limit is 1 to 65535 days.
Customized file When Sync. Destination is USB disk / SD card, the
handling preservation limit is 1 to 65535 files.
When Sync. Destination is HMI memory, the preservation
limit is 1 to 1000 files.
History source Data can be read from USB disk, SD card, or Database.

Data Sampling 8-9
8.3.1. Demonstration of Auto. stop
This feature depends on the arrangement of different objects and modes. (Set [Max. data
records] to n.)
Object [Auto. stop] not selected [Auto. stop] selected
Trend Display- Deletes the earlier Stops after reaching the
records and displays the specified number of
Real time latest number of records data records (n).
(n) in Trend Display. See
the following figure.
Trend Display- Keeps on sampling data Stops after reaching the
and displays all history specified number of
Historical data in Trend Display. data records (n).
History Data Keeps on sampling data Stops after reaching the
and displays all history specified number of
Display data in History Data data records (n).
Display.
Data Sampling Keeps on sampling new Stops after reaching the
data. specified number of
data records (n).
The figure illustrates how the data is sampled in Trend Display – Real Time mode when [Auto.
stop check] box is not selected. Set the number of data records to 10, when the 11th data is
generated, the earliest record is deleted and the newest record is added.
8.3.2. Customized File Handling
This feature can be used to customize naming and management of data sampling files (*.dtl,
*db).

Data Sampling 8-10
Setting Description
File creation Automatic mode
A new file will be created when the name of an existing
file is changed.
Trigger mode
A new file will be created according to the [Trigger
method] settings.
Trigger method Limit by number of data records
A new file will be created when the number of data
sampling records reaches the specified "Max. data
records in a file"
Register status
A new file will be created when the status of a designated
bit address meets the specified condition. The condition
is specified in Mode field.
Set ON/OFF after triggered
If selected, after the new file is created, the system will
set the designated bit address back to ON/OFF state.

Data Sampling 8-11
File name The file name can be an alphanumeric name, and certain
half-width symbols are allowed. The file name can also be
specified by a file name syntax.
Dynamic format
The file names can be set by a designated word address,
or by a file name syntax indicating the current system
time. The file name syntax can be specified by selecting
time buttons or entering the syntax in Format field. The
length limit is from 1 to 25.
The following half-width characters are not allowed:
\/:*?“<>|
Note
 If both [Limit by number of data records] and [Dynamic format] check boxes are selected,
before startup HMI, please enter the name in the designated register for Dynamic Format,
otherwise, it is impossible the reach the “Max. data records in a file”, and the data sampling
file will not be generated.
 When a new file is generated, the systm will first detect if the filename already exists. If the
file name does exist, the newly sampled data will be appended to the existing file.
8.4. Synchronizing cMT Viewer data and Saving to External Device or Database
History data in external device Real-time data
For other series, when displaying the sampled data in Trend Display object, it is necessary to
select from Real-time mode or History mode and the two modes cannot simultaneously be
displayed in one object.

Data Sampling 8-12
cMT Series allows displaying history data and at the same time updates real-time data in one
Trend Display or History Data Display object. The data saved in the external device can be
updated.
The rule of synchronizing the data saved in the external device:
1. When the sampled data reaches 10000 records, HMI will automatically save data to the
external device and deletes the earliest 1000 records in HMI.
2. If the external device is removed from HMI, and inserted back again at the time when the
sampled data is under 9000 records, the data generated during the time the external
device is removed is saved in HMI and is not cleared. If the data exceeds 9000 records
during the time the external device is removed, the earlier data is cleared and cannot be
synchronized even to insert the external device back to the HMI.
3. If there already exists sampled data in the external device, the new data is appended
without overwriting the original data each time in synchronization.
8.5. Checking History Data of a Specific Date / File on cMT Viewer.
To check the history data, see the following steps (Use Trend Display object as example).
1. Tap the icon in the upper-right corner of the Trend Display object.
2. The following dialog box appears.
3. Specify the date or the file.
4. Tap [Done] button to finish setting.

Object General Properties 9-1
9. Object General Properties

This chapter explains the basic settings of an object.
9.1. Overview ....................................................................................................................... 9-2

9.2. Selecting PLC and Setting Read/Write Address ............................................................ 9-2
9.3. Using Shape Library and Picture Library ....................................................................... 9-3
9.4. Setting Label Text .......................................................................................................... 9-7
9.5. Adjusting Profile Size .................................................................................................... 9-9

9.1. Overview
The basic steps to create an object:

1. Selecting the PLC device and setting the read/write address.
2. Using Shape Library and Picture Library.
3. Setting label text.
4. Adjusting profile size.
This chapter explains the basic settings of an object.
9.2. Selecting PLC and Setting Read/Write Address
Most objects read data from PLC devices, so a properly configured PLC address is needed.
Select the PLC to control at [PLC name] which comes from [System Parameters Settings] »
[Device List].
Setting Description
PLC name Select the PLC type.
Device type Different PLCs have different device types.
Address Set the read/write address.
System tag Address tags include [System Tag] and [User-defined Tag].
This option allows users to use [System Tag]. [System Tag]
consists of the preserved addresses by system for
particular purposes. The address tags include bit registers
or word registers (LB or LW).
After selecting [System tag], not only will the [Device type]
field display the chosen tag, but [Address] field will also
display the chosen register.

Index register Select this check box to use the [Index Register].
For more information about System Tag, see “22 System Reserved Words and Bits”.
For more information about Index Register, see “11 Index Register”.
For more information about Tag Library, see “16 Address Tag Library”.
9.3. Using Shape Library and Picture Library
In the settings dialog box of certain objects, “Shape” tab can be found. In this tab, Shape
Library and Picture Library can be used to add visual effects on objects. Select Shape tab to use
the libraries when creating an object.
9.3.1. Picture
Select [Use picture] and then click [Picture Library] button to open Picture Manager window,
and select a picture from the window.

Setting Description
Picture Click [Picture Library] button in Picture group box to open
Library Picture Manager window.
Set to
When this checkbox is selected, EasyBuilder will return the
original
picture to its original size to eliminate the redrawing step.
dimensions
Duplicate these This button is available only when a system picture is used.
attributes to Clicking this button will duplicate the attributes of the
every state current picture to other states.
9.3.2. Shape
Select [Use shape] and then click [Shape Library] button to open Shape Manager window, and
select a shape from the window.

Setting Description
Inner Select [Display] to show the inner color of the shape, and
select a color as the inner color by clicking the drop down
button.
Frame Select [Display] to show the frame color of the shape, and
select a color as the frame color by clicking the drop down
button.
Pattern color Click the drop down button to select a color for the
interior pattern of the shape.
Pattern type Click the drop down button to select a pattern.

Set to all Duplicate the attributes of the current state to other

states states.
9.3.3. Shape manager
In Picture Manager and Shape Manager windows, the currently selected pictue / shape is
highlighted yellow as shown below.
The information about the selected picture / shape:

Directory The directory from which EasyBuilder searches for the pictures / shapes.
Shape5 Name of the shape.
States: 2 Number of states of the shape.
Objects: 1 This shape is used by 0 object in the project.
Inner The state 0 and state 1 of this shape contain only “inner” but not “frame.”
For more information, see “14 Shape Library and Picture Library”.

9.4. Setting Label Text
Setting Description
Use label Select this check box to use labels for the object.
Use label
Select this check box to choose a label in Label Library.
library
Convert
labels to Select this check box to convert the label text into bitmap
bitmap format.
images
Label Library Browse Label Library
For more information, see “15 Label Tag Library
and Multi Language”.
Font Select a font from the list. EasyBuilder Pro supports
Windows True-type fonts.
Color Select the font color.
Size Select the font size.

Align Apart from setting [Align] here, alignment can also be

done by clicking the following shortcut keys. Multilined
text is aligned within the label outline instead of aligning
to the outline of the object.
[Left] [Center] [Right]
Blink Specify the way the text blinks. Choose [None] to disable
this feature or set the blinking interval to [1 second] or
[0.5 seconds].
Italic
Use Italic font.
Underline
Use Underline font.
Movement Direction
Set the direction of the marquee effect. The directions
include: [No movement], [Left], [Right], [Up], [Down].
Continuous
Specify how the marquee effect is displayed.
If not selecting this check box, the next text appears only
when the previous text disappears completely.
If selecting this check box, the text will be displayed

continuously.
Speed
Adjust the speed of the text movement.
Content Set the content of the text. If [Label Library] is used, it will
automatically use the text defined in Label Library.
Tracking If this check box is selected, when changing the position of
the text in one state, the text position in the other states
will also change in accordance.
Duplicate this
label to other Duplicate the current text to the other states.
state

Note
 When Text/Comment object is used with Comment enabled, the text used as comment
will not appear on HMI.
 Clicking shortcut keys can align multilined label text. To align label text, please
select the dotted outline of the label (red). When object’s outline (blue) is selected,
clicking the shortcut keys can only move the entire label to the left, center, or right edge
of the object without aligning the label text lines.
9.5. Adjusting Profile Size
When an object is created and placed in the editing screen, double click it and select the
[Profile] tab to adjust the position and size of the object.
Setting Description
Position Pinned
When this check box is selected, the position and the size
of the object cannot be changed.
[X] and [Y]
The coordinates of the position of the object in the editing
screen.
Size Adjust the [width] and [height] of the object.

User Password and Object Security 10-1
10. User Password and Object

Security
This chapter discusses the protection for operations provided by setting up user passwords and
security classes.
10.1. Overview ..................................................................................................................... 10-2

10.2. User Password and Operable Object Classes ............................................................. 10-2
10.3. Enhanced Security Mode and Control Address .......................................................... 10-4
10.4. Enhanced Security Mode Usage ................................................................................. 10-7
10.5. Object Security Settings............................................................................................ 10-12
10.6. Example of Object Security Settings ......................................................................... 10-20
10.7. Protecting Password Settings from Unauthorized Editing ....................................... 10-23
10.8. Bulk Changing of Security Settings of Multiple Objects ........................................... 10-24

10.1. Overview
This chapter discusses the protection for operations provided by setting up user passwords and
security classes. There are two authentication modes:
 General Mode
 Enhanced Security Mode
Each mode will be introduced later.
To set up the protection system, please:

1. Set user password and operable classes.
2. Set object class for objects.
An object belongs only to one security class. Setting the object class to “None” means any user
can operate this object.
10.2. User Password and Operable Object Classes
The security parameters can be found in [System Parameter Settings] » [Security]. Two modes
are available: General Mode and Enhanced Security Mode.
10.2.1. General Mode
Up to 12 sets of user and password are available. A password should be one non-negative
integer. There are six security classes: A to F.
Once the password is entered, the objects that the user can operate are classified. As shown
below, “User 1” can only operate objects with class A or class C.
Note
 General Mode is not available for cMT Series.

10.2.2. Enhanced Security Mode
Up to 11 users can be set here. In addition, [Administrator] setting is provided. Administrator

has all privileges and can operate all object classes. User passwords must be alphanumeric
characters and each user can have up to 12 operable classes: A to L. (Up to 127 users can be
set in Administrator Tools. Please see “10.4 Enhanced Security Mode Usage” for more details.)
Enhanced Security Mode provides a [Control address] for users to manage the accounts
directly on HMI. Please see “10.3 Enhanced Security Mode and Control Address” for more
details. Alternatively, use USB Security Key to log in automatically. Insert the USB disk in which
the key is saved to log in. Please see 10.4.3 Login / Logout Automatically with USB Security Key”
for more details.

10.3. Enhanced Security Mode and Control Address
The Control Address is used for login and account management. The Control Address can only
be assigned to LW register on Local HMI, and 20 consecutive registers will be used. To log in
using Control Address, please select to log in by [user name] or [user index].
Please set [user name] and [password] in [System Parameter Settings] » [Security] » [Enhanced
security mode] in advance.
10.3.1. Control Address Settings
When control address is set to LW-n, where n is an arbitrary number, the following addresses
will be designated:
Address Tag Name Description
LW-n (1 word) command Commands to be executed: Login, Logout,
Add/Setting/Delete Accounts, etc.
LW-n + 1 (1 word) command Displays the result of executing
execution commands.
result
LW-n + 2 (1 word) user index The index of accounts (used with Option
List Object).
LW-n + 3 (1 word) user Binary value. Level A = bit0, Level B =
privilege bit1, …
LW-n + 4 (8 words) user name Account name (Case-sensitive and only
allows letters and numbers).
LW-n + 12 (8 words) password Account password (Case-sensitive and
only allows letters, numbers, or special
characters).
After setting the [Control address], the relevant addresses can be found in [Address Tag Library]
» [User-defined tags].For example, setting [Control address] to LW-0: (UAC stands for User
Account Control)
LW-0  [UAC command]
LW-1  [UAC command execution result]
LW-2  [UAC user index]
LW-3  [UAC user privilege]
LW-4 ~ LW-11  [UAC user name]
LW-12 ~ LW-20  [UAC password]
Note
 In Enhanced Security Mode, if cMT Series model is used, the Control Address can only be
assigned to PLW register of Local HMI.

10.3.2. Commands
Setting different values in LW-n [command] enables different commands:

Set Value Command Corresponding Address
1 Log in by user name Set [user name] and [password] first. After
entering the user name and password, the
system will check if they are valid in
[System Parameter Settings] » [Security] »
[Enhanced security mode].
2 Log in by user index Set [user index] and [password] first.
Please refer to 10.4.4 Enhanced Security
Mode with Option List Object.
3 Log out
4 Change the password Set [user name] and [password] first.
of current logged-in Please fill in the original password in [user
user name] and new password in [password].
5 Add an account Set [user name], [password] and [user
privilege] first.
6 Add a temporary Set [user name], [password], [user
account (minutes) privilege], and [user index] first. [user
index] is for specifying a time period (in
minutes), within this period the account is
valid. If 0 is specified, this account stays
valid until the HMI is powered off.
7 Delete an existing Set [user name] first.
account by user
name
8 Delete an existing Set [user index] first.
account by user index
9 Setting the privilege Set [user name] and [user privilege] first.
of an existing account
by user name
10 Setting the privilege Set [user index] and [user privilege] first.
by user index
11 Setting the password Set [user name] and [password] first.
by user name
12 Setting the password Set [user index] and [password] first.
by user index
13 Read the privilege of Set [user name] first. If the command
an existing account succeeds, [user privilege] can be displayed.
by user name
14 Read the privilege of Set [user index] first. If the command
an existing account succeeds, [user privilege] can be displayed.
by user index

15 Add a temporary Set [user name], [password], [user

account (days) privilege], and [user index] first. [user
index] is for specifying a time period
(number of days), within this period the
account is valid. If 0 is specified, this
account stays valid until the HMI is
powered off.
16 Add an expiring Set [user name], [password], [user
account (minutes) privilege], and [user index] first. [user
index] is for specifying a time period (in
minutes), within this period the account is
valid. 0 is an invalid value for this setting.
17 Add an expiring Set [user name], [password], [user
account (days) privilege], and [user index] first. [user
index] is for specifying a time period
(number of days), within this period the
account is valid. 0 is an invalid value for this
setting.
18 Remaining minutes Set [user name] first. If succeeded, the
for user name remaining time (in minutes) will be
displayed in [user index].
19 Remaining minutes Set [user index] first. If succeeded, the
for user index remaining time (in minutes) will be
20 Remaining days for Set [user name] first. If succeeded, the
user name remaining time (number of days) will be
21 Remaining days for Set [user index] first. If succeeded, the
user index remaining time (number of days) will be
Note
 Add a temporary account / expiring account: The difference between temporary accounts
and expiring accounts is that temporary accounts are not stored in the system and will be
invalid after HMI is turned off. Both temporary accounts and expiring accounts will be
automatically deleted when they are expired.
 Delete the existing account: The currently logged in account cannot be deleted.
 Offline/Online Simulation: Simulate using the account settings in the program. Any
modifications of the account during simulation will not be reserved for next simulation.
 admin: Default administrator account, cannot be deleted, has all privileges and cannot be
changed.
 System Register PLW-10754: Displays current user name. (Only available for cMT Series)
 The [user privilege] address does not display the privileges assigned to current user
account, please use system register LW-9222 to display the privileges.

10.3.3. Command Execution Results
After the command is executed, the system will store the result code to control address LW-n +
1. The listed result codes below are shown in hexadecimal format.
Result Codes Command execution result
(0x001) Succeeds
(0x002) Invalid command
(0x004) Account exists (when adding a new account)
(0x008) Account not exists
(0x010) Password error
(0x020) Deny command
(0x040) Invalid name
(0x080) Invalid password character exists
(0x100) Invalid import data
(0x200) Out of validity range (when log in by USB Security Key).
The [Effective Time] can be set in Administrator Tools.
Note
 Users can add a new event in Event (Alarm) Log, and designate the [Read address] to LW-n
+ 1 [command execution result]. Open [Message] tab » [Text] » [Content] and specify the
message to be displayed in Event Display Object for showing command execution result.
10.4. Enhanced Security Mode Usage
10.4.1. Importing User Accounts
The user accounts can be set using other tools we provide, apart from the settings in [System
Parameter Settings] » [Security] tab. Administrator Tools can also be used to set user accounts.
Administrator Tools can be found in the installation directory. After the program starts, select
the [User Accounts] check box. Up to 127 accounts can be added.

For more information, see “36 Administrator Tools”.
The added accounts can be stored in USB disk or SD card and imported in HMI by a Function
Key Object. To do so, create a Function Key Object, and select [Import user accounts].

When finished, insert the external device to HMI, and press Function Key to import accounts. If
[Overwrite] is selected, the existing accounts will be overwritten with new accounts and
automatically log out after importing. If select [Delete file after importing user accounts] check
box, the system will delete the account data saved in the external device after importing. If the
[Effective Time] in Administrator Tools is specified, the importing can only be done in the time
limit specified. The imported accounts will not be deleted by system when the effective time
ends.
10.4.2. Login with USB Security Key
Instead of entering user name and password to login, a key can be used to do so. In EasyBuilder
Pro installation directory, launch Administrator Tools, select [USB Security Key] check box. The
account information uses the predefined data in [System Parameter Settings] » [Security].

Note
 Please note that the user accounts used for USB Security Key must already exist in HMI.
For more information, see “36 Administrator Tools”.
USB Security Key can be stored in USB disk or SD card, and create a Function Key to log in by
USB Security Key as shown below:

When finished, insert the external device to HMI, and press Function Key to log in using USB
Security Key. If the [Effective Time] in Administrator Tools is specified, the login can only be
done in the time limit specified. The system will log out automatically when the key expires.
10.4.3. Login / Logout Automatically with USB Security Key
As shown below, in [System Parameter Settings] » [Security], select [Enable] check box for
[Execute auto. login/logout when insert an USB key into HMI].
This function allows automatic login / logout using an USB security key. Insert the USB disk in
which the key is saved to HMI to log in, and remove the USB disk to log out. The login / logout
status will be written into a designated address, the result codes of login / logout:
0x00: No Action
0x01: Login Succeeds
0x04: Login Fails
0x08: Login Succeeds
0x10: Logout Fails
For more information about USB Security Key, see “36 Administrator Tools”.

Note
 When Auto Login / Logout is enabled, log in by [Function Key] object is not possible, but it
is still possible to log in / out with a designated control address.
 This function does not support On-line / Off-line simulation.
 Only the USB Security Key saved in USB disk is valid.
Click the icon to download the demo project that explains how to use USB Security Key to
log in / out. Please confirm your internet connection before downloading the demo project.
10.4.4. Enhanced Security Mode with Option List Object
Enhanced Security Mode uses Control Address LW-n + 2 as account index. With Option List
Object, account names and privileges can be displayed. Users can select whether or not to
display the account privileges and secret users in Option List. Secret users are set to be hidden
in [System Parameter Settings] » [Security] » [Enhanced Security Mode]; their account names
will be hidden in Option List if [Secret user] check box is not selected. If the control address is
set to LW-0, the monitor address for index of Option List is designated to LW-2.
10.5. Object Security Settings
Settings in the Security tab allow users to configure conditions so that the object is operable
when the condition is met. The sound emitted when operating the object can be selected.

cMT Series eMT, iE, XE, mTV Series
10.5.1. Security Tab
Setting Description
Min. press Press and hold the object for longer than the [Min. press
time (sec) time] set here to activate the object.
Display After pressing the object, a dialog appears for operation
confirmation confirmation. If the response to this dialog comes later
request than the set [Max. waiting time (sec)], this dialog
disappears automatically and the operation will be
canceled.
10.5.2. Enable/Disable
When [Use register status/value] or [Use control token] is selected, whether the object is

operable is determined by the status of the designated address or acquisition the control token,
respectively. As shown in the following figure, only when LB-0 is in OFF state and “2: Control
Token” is acquired will this object be operable.
The following table describes the action this object will take when it’s token is not acquired.
Setting Description
Do nothing When the control token is not acquired, the object is
when disabled displayed.
Hide when When the control token is not acquired, the object is
disabled hidden.
Grayed label When the control token is not acquired, the label of the
when disabled object turns gray.
10.5.2.1. Use Register Status/Value
When selected, the status of the designated bit/word address determines whether the object
is operable.
Setting Description
Bit The object is operable when the designated bit is in
On/Off state.
Word When [Use Register Status/Value] and [Word] are both
selected, the status of a designated word address
determines whether the object is operable.
Enable if value is: >, <, ==, <>, >=,<=
When the value in the word address reaches the
condition specified here, the object is operable.
Tolerance: This setting is available for <> and ==.
<>: The object will be operable when:

value in address > [value in address + tolerance]

or
value in address < [value in address - tolerance]
==: The object will be operable when:
value in address is between [value in address + tolerance]
and [value in address - tolerance] (including value in
address ± tolerance)
For example:
When the value in the designated word address is

between 9~11, the object is operable.
Please note that [Word] option is only available for Set
Word and Numeric objects.
Note
 Word objects supported on cMT Series include: Set Word, Numeric, ASCII, Combo Button.
Word objects supported on iE/XE/eMT/mTV Series include: Set Word, Numeric.
10.5.2.2. Control Token
Contrl Token
One cMT HMI can be simultaneously controlled by multiple cMT Viewer clients. To ensure
system safety by preventing an object to be controlled by multiple clients simultaneously, a
control token can be set. Only one cMT Viewer client can acquire the control token at a time,
and only the cMT Viewer client that acquires control token can operate the object. The rest of

the clients can acquire the token one by one when the token is not occupied.
The applicable objects include: Combo Button, Numeric, ASCII, Direct Window, and Indirect
Window.
Setting Description
Control Token Select a control token for the object.
Token Library… Add/delete control token.
Control Token – Local Only
When this token is selected, only the local cMT HMI can
operate the object. (applicable models: cMT3072,
cMT3090, cMT3151, cMT-HDM…)
Idle Timeout
Setting Idle Timeout helps avoid the issue that prevents
other users from gaining operating right when the token
possessor, having finished operation, does not release
the control token. When the token possessor’s HMI
remains inactive (no touch operation) for a given time
period, the control token will be released.
The setting range allowed for Idle Timeout is 0~86400
seconds. For “Control Token- Local Only”, the Idle
Timeout can only be zero and is not adjustable.
Enable if Token is When [acquired] is selected, only the device that
obtains the control token can operate the object. When
[unacquired] is selected, only the devices that do not
obtain the control token can operate the object.

Note
 When a cMT Viewer client opens a page, it obtains unacquired control tokens of all
objects. Upon leaving the page, the control tokens are released.
 A cMT Viewer client can simultaneously possess multiple control tokens.
 Control tokens are allocated on a first come first served basis, and a control token can be
possessed by one cMT Viewer client at a time. Attempts made for acquiring a control
token when it is unavailable will be put into a queue, and it becomes available, it will be
passed to the next one in the queue.
 When changing to a new window, even if the object with the same control token appears
in both previous and new window, the control token is reacquired upon entering the new
window. If the object with the control token is placed in an overlay window or a common
window, and the same overlay window is used in both previous and new window, then
reacquiring control token will not take place.
 When cMT Viewer client is disconnected from the Server, and the connection is recovered
within 30 seconds, reacquiring control token is not necessary. When the disconnection
goes longer than 30 seconds, reacquiring control token is necessary.
 Control token is released when its possessor’s HMI remains untouched for a period of
time longer than Idle Timeout. Later on when HMI is operated, an attempt will be made
to acquire the control token again.
 To monitor idle time countdown, use an ASCII object with system register PLW-11998.
When two or more control tokens are used, this system register will count down from
least idle time until elapsed.
In the following example, on the top, ASCII object shows idle time countdown from
PLW-11998. The bottom two objects use two different control tokens, one with a
5-second idle time and the other 15-second. When running simulation, PLW-11998 will
count down from five seconds.

After 5 seconds, the bottom left object turns grey due to expired control token, and
another object has 10 seconds left for countdown.
10.5.3. User Restriction
Set the security class of the object to be operated by an authorized user.

Setting Description
Object class “None” means any user can operate this object. Only
account “admin” can operate “Administrator” object
class.
Disable Once the permitted class of the user matches that of the
protection object, the system will stop checking the security class
permanently permanently, that means, any user can operate this
after initial object freely after it is unlocked.
activation
Display When an unauthorized user attempts to operate the
warning object, a warning dialog (Window no. 7) appears. The
message if content of the message in the dialog can be modified.
access denied
Make invisible When the user's privilege does not match the object
while class, the object will be hidden.
protected

10.6. Example of Object Security Settings
The following shows an example of setting object security class:
1. Create a project, go to [System Parameter Settings] » [Security] » [General] to enable 3

users:
User 1 = Operable class: A
User 2 = Operable class: A, B
User 3 = Operable class: A, B, C
2. Design Window no. 10 as shown:
Create two [Numeric Input] objects:

[LW-9219] User no. (1~12), Length = 1word
[LW-9220] For entering user password. Length = 2 words
Create a [Numeric Display] object:
[LW-9222] Displays the operable object class of current user. (16-bit Binary)
Create a [Set Bit] object
[LB-9050] logout
Create three [Set Bit] objects:
Each set to different classes but all select [Made invisible while protected].
3. After setting, please save and compile the project and execute off-line simulation. The
below shows how it works when simulating.

Before entering the password, it displays

“0000000000000000”, which means that
the user operable object class is “None”.
[Class A Button] ~ [Class C Button] objects
are classified from “A” to “C” and selected
[Made invisible while protected]; therefore
they are hidden at this moment.
Enter User 1 password “111”.

Since User 1 is only allowed to operate class
A objects, [Class A Button] object appears for
operating. [LW-9222] bit 0 turns to “1”
means that user can operate class A objects.
Enter User 3 password “333”.

Since User 3 is allowed to operate class A, B,
C objects, [LW-9222] bit 0 ~ bit 2 turns to “1”,
means that user can operate class A ~ C
objects.
Click [Logout] button to log out, the

system will return to the initial state, and
current user can only operate class “None”
objects.

Note
 Password input: If the password is incorrect, [LB-9060] will be ON; if the password is
correct, [LB-9060] will be OFF. All user passwords (User 1 to User 12) can be obtained
from system registers [LW-9500] ~ [LW-9522], 24 words in total.
 Changing password directly on HMI: When [LB-9061] is set ON, the system will read data
in [LW-9500] ~ [LW-9522] to update user password. The new password will be used in
future operations. Please note that the user operable object classes will not be changed
due to the change of password.

10.7. Protecting Password Settings from Unauthorized Editing
Before sending the project to others who may edit the project afterwards, it is recommended
to click [Editable] button in Security settings tab to open read-only mode. This mode can
protect password settings from unauthorized editing.
When [Enable read-only] is selected, a password will be required for changing security settings
in the project.
When [Mask password] is selected, passwords will be masked by asterisks (*).
Note
 The protected projects cannot be decrypted since they are encrypted by users, therefore,
please remember your password.

10.8. Bulk Changing of Security Settings of Multiple Objects
Selecting multiple objects in a group and then selecting [Security settings] in the right-click
menu can open an Objects’ Security Properties window that allows users to change the
security settings of all the selected objects at a time.
Note
 When the selected objects have different security settings pages, Objects’ Security
Properties will automatically adjust and show the settings that users are allowed to
change. The rest of the settings will be hidden or greyed out. The following is a window
that shows when selecting a Bit Lamp and a Numeric object.


Index Register 11-1
11. Index Register

This chapter explains how to use Index Register.
11.1. Overview ..................................................................................................................... 11-2

11.2. Examples of Index Register ......................................................................................... 11-2

Index Register 11-2
11.1. Overview
EasyBuilder Pro provides Index Registers for changing addresses flexibly. With Index Registers,
user can change the object’s read/write address directly on HMI without changing its settings.
There are 32 Index Registers, divided into 16-bit and 32-bit.
The corresponding address of 16-bit Index Register 0 to 15: LW-9200 (16bit) to LW-9215 (16bit)
The maximum offset range is 65536 words.
The corresponding address of 32-bit Index Register 16 to 31: LW-9230 (32bit) to LW-9260
(32bit)
The maximum offset range is 4294967296 words.
When using [Index register], the address is designated by the following equation:
The constant set in [Address] + the value in the chosen Index Register.
Note
 Index Registers work for the Word registers. For Bit registers, adding 1 to the value in the
Index Register, the offset is 16 bits.
11.2. Examples of Index Register
The following explains the way to designate the register while Index Register is used.
If not selecting [Index register] check box and set address to [LW-10]. The system will directly

Index Register 11-3
read / write LW-10.
If select [Index register] check box and set [Index] to [INDEX 0 (16-bit)]. The system will read /
write [LW(10 + value in Index Register 0)].
If the data in [LW-9200] is “5”, the designated address is [LW(10+5)] = [LW-15].
Here’s a demo project shown as an example:

Index Register 11-4
Example 1
The following shows an example of using a Word register and select [Index register]. If the
value in [LW-0] is 0, in [LW-10] is 3, and in [LW-20] is 6, the result is:
If the value in Index 0 (LW-9200) is 0, then [LW0 + Index 0] = read [LW-0].
If the value in Index 0 (LW-9200) is 10, then [LW0 + Index 0] = read [LW-10] = 3.
Example 2
The following shows an example of using a Bit register and select [Index register].
If the state of [LB-16] is ON, and the state of [LB-32] is OFF.
Since 1 Word equals to 16 Bit, adding 1 in Index Register, the offset is 16 bits.
If Index 6 (LW-9206) is set to 1, then switch [LB-0 + Index6] reads LB-16 which is in ON state.
If Index 6 (LW-9206) is set to 2, then switch [LB-0 + Index6] reads LB-32 which is in OFF state.

Index Register 11-5
Note
 When using Index Registers for Bit register, the offset is 16 bits. For example, if the Bit
register is LB-0, and set the value in Index Register to 1, then LB-16 will be activated. If set
the value in Index Register to 2, then LB-32 will be activated.
Click the icon to download the demo project. Please confirm your internet connection.

Keyboard Design and Usage 12-1
12. Keyboard Design and Usage

This chapter explains how to design and use keyboard in EasyBuilder Pro.
12.1. Overview ..................................................................................................................... 12-2

12.2. Steps to Design a Popup Keyboard ............................................................................. 12-2
12.3. Steps to Design a Keyboard with Direct Window ....................................................... 12-5
12.4. Steps to Design a Fixed Keyboard on Screen .............................................................. 12-6
12.5. Steps to Design a Unicode Keyboard .......................................................................... 12-7

12.1. Overview
Numeric Input and ASCII Input objects need keyboard as an input tool. Both numeric keyboard
and ASCII keyboard are created with Function Key object. Apart from the keyboards provided
by EasyBuilder Pro, you can create the keyboard if needed.
The types of the keyboards are:
 Popup Keyboard (with or without title bar)

 Fixed Keyboard
 Unicode Keyboard
12.2. Steps to Design a Popup Keyboard
1. Create and open a window for the new keyboard. For example, set to “window no. 200”.
2. Adjust the height and width of “window no. 200” and create a variety of Function Key
objects in [ASCII/Unicode mode].
Set one of the Function Key objects as the [Esc] key.

Set another Function Key object as the [Enter] key.
The rest are mostly used to enter numbers.
3. Select a suitable picture for each Function Key object.
4. Select [System Parameter Settings] » [General] » [Keyboard] » [Add] to add “window no.
200”. Up to 32 keyboards can be added.
5. After the keyboard window is added, when you create Numerical Input and ASCII Input
objects, “200. Keyboard” can be found in *Data Entry+ » *Keyboard+ » *Window no.+. The
[Popup position] is for designating the display position of the keyboard on the HMI screen.
The system divides the screen into 9 areas.

6. Select “200.Keyboard”. When you press Numerical Input or ASCII Input objects on the
screen, “window no. 200” will pop up. You can press the keys on the keyboard to enter
data.

12.3. Steps to Design a Keyboard with Direct Window
1. Create a Direct Window object and set a read address to activate it.
In [General] » [Attribute] select [No title bar] and the correct [Window No.].
2. Open the [Profile] tab to set the same size as the created keyboard window.
3. Create a Numeric Input object, and don’t select [Use a popup keypad] check box.

4. Create a Set Bit object, set address to [LB-0] and set [Set style] to [Set ON]. Overlay it on
the Numeric Input object. Pressing the Numeric Input object will open the keyboard
window.
5. Add Set Bit objects on the [Enter] and [ESC] Function Key objects respectively. Set address
to [LB-0] and [Set style] to [Set OFF]. In this way when pressing either [Enter] or [ESC] key
will close the keyboard window.
12.4. Steps to Design a Fixed Keyboard on Screen
You can also place a fixed keyboard on the screen instead of popup keyboard or Direct Window.
This type of keyboard can’t be moved or closed.
1. Create a Numeric Input object, in [Data Entry] » [Keyboard] don’t select [Use a popup
keypad] check box.
2. Use Function Key objects to design the keyboard and place it on the screen.
3. Press the Numeric Input object and enter a value with Function Key objects directly.

12.5. Steps to Design a Unicode Keyboard
The following steps explain how to create a Unicode keyboard with Function Key objects.
1. Place an ASCII Input object on the window and select [Use Unicode] check box.
2. Create Function Key objects as shown in the following figure, and an [Enter] key. A simple
UNICODE keyboard is created.
Note
 You can group up the elements of the designed keyboard and save to Group Library for
future use.
Click the icon to download the demo project. Please confirm your internet connection before

Objects 13-1
13. Objects
This chapter explains how to use different objects.
13.1. Bit Lamp ...................................................................................................................... 13-3

13.2. Word Lamp ................................................................................................................. 13-5
13.3. Set Bit ........................................................................................................................ 13-10
13.4. Set Word ................................................................................................................... 13-13
13.5. Function Key ............................................................................................................. 13-21
13.6. Toggle Switch ............................................................................................................ 13-27
13.7. Multi-State Switch .................................................................................................... 13-29
13.8. Slider ......................................................................................................................... 13-33
13.9. Numeric .................................................................................................................... 13-40
13.10. ASCII .......................................................................................................................... 13-57
13.11. Indirect Window ....................................................................................................... 13-60
13.12. Direct Window .......................................................................................................... 13-64
13.13. Moving Shape ........................................................................................................... 13-69
13.14. Animation ................................................................................................................. 13-73
13.15. Bar Graph .................................................................................................................. 13-77
13.16. Meter Display............................................................................................................ 13-86
13.17. Trend Display ............................................................................................................ 13-94
13.18. History Data Display................................................................................................ 13-112
13.19. Data Block Display .................................................................................................. 13-119
13.20. XY Plot ..................................................................................................................... 13-127
13.21. Alarm Bar and Alarm Display .................................................................................. 13-133
13.22. Event Display........................................................................................................... 13-139
13.23. Data Transfer (Trigger-based) ................................................................................. 13-149
13.24. Backup .................................................................................................................... 13-151
13.25. Media Player ........................................................................................................... 13-158
13.26. Data Transfer........................................................................................................... 13-164
13.28. Scheduler ................................................................................................................ 13-175
13.29. Option List............................................................................................................... 13-185
13.30. Timer ....................................................................................................................... 13-193
13.31. Video In ................................................................................................................... 13-198
13.32. System Message ..................................................................................................... 13-205
13.33. Recipe View ............................................................................................................ 13-207

Objects 13-2
13.34. Flow Block ............................................................................................................... 13-213

13.35. Operation Log ......................................................................................................... 13-218
13.36. Combo Button......................................................................................................... 13-230
13.37. Circular Trend Display ............................................................................................. 13-236
13.38. Picture View ............................................................................................................ 13-245
13.39. File Browser ............................................................................................................ 13-248
13.40. Import/Export ......................................................................................................... 13-251
13.41. Pie Chart ................................................................................................................. 13-256
13.42. Barcode ................................................................................................................... 13-261
13.43. String Table ............................................................................................................. 13-278
13.44. Database ................................................................................................................. 13-280
13.45. Dynamic Scale ......................................................................................................... 13-293
13.46. Dynamic Drawing .................................................................................................... 13-296
13.48. Table........................................................................................................................ 13-304
13.49. VNC Viewer ............................................................................................................. 13-306
13.50. Contacts Editor ....................................................................................................... 13-310
13.51. Event Bar Chart ....................................................................................................... 13-313
13.52. Action Trigger.......................................................................................................... 13-318
13.53. Calendar .................................................................................................................. 13-322

Objects 13-3
13.1. Bit Lamp
13.1.1. Overview
Bit Lamp object displays the state of a designated bit address. If the bit state is OFF, the State 0
shape will be displayed. If the bit state is ON, the State 1 shape will be displayed.
13.1.2. Configuration
Click [Object] » [Bit Lamp] icon on the toolbar to open a Bit Lamp object property dialog box.
Set up the properties, press OK button, and a new Bit Lamp object will be created.
General Tab

Objects 13-4
Setting Description
Comment User can describe the information of the object.
Bit Lamp / Toggle Switch
Switch between Bit Lamp and Toggle Switch features.
Read address Click [Setting] to select the [PLC name], [Address], [Device type],
[System tag], [Index register] of the bit device that controls the [Bit
Lamp] object. Users can also set address in [General] tab while
adding a new object.
Invert signal
Reverses the display of ON / OFF states. For example, if [Invert
signal] check box is selected, when the designated bit is OFF, the
object displays ON state.
Blinking The appearance of the object may alternate between states when
the bit is ON or OFF.
Mode:
None
No blinking.
Alternating image on state 0
The appearance of the object alternates between State 0 and 1
when the bit is OFF.
Alternating image on state 1
The appearance of the object alternates between State 0 and 1
when the bit is ON.
Blinking on state 0
The State 0 appearance of the object will blink when the bit is OFF.
Blinking on state 1
The State 1 appearance of the object will blink when the bit is ON.
Hide picture/shape if no corresponding picture for current state
If selected, when there are not enough pictures to represent all the
states, hides the picture. Otherwise, displays the last state.
Note
 In [Label] tab, if select [ON=OFF (use state 0)] check box, both state 0 and 1 follow the
settings of state 0.

Objects 13-5
13.2. Word Lamp
13.2.1. Overview
Word Lamp object displays the state according to the value of a designated word register. Up to
256 states are available. When the value of the register is 0, State 0 appearance of the object is
displayed, and with the register value being 1 the object displays State 1, and so on.
Click [Object] » [Word Lamp] icon on the toolbar to open a Word Lamp object property dialog
box. Set up the properties, press OK button, and a new Word Lamp object will be created.

Objects 13-6
General Tab
Setting Description
Word Lamp / Multi-State Switch
Switch between Word Lamp and Multi-State Switch features.
Mode / Offset Word Lamp object offers the following three modes:
Value
The state is displayed according to the value in the designated word
address and plus the [Offset].
As shown below, if the value within LW-200 is 3, since the offset is
set to 3, the shape of state 0 is displayed. (value 3 - offset 3)

Objects 13-7
LSB
Convert the value from decimal to binary. The least significant
active bit in a binary data word selects the state displayed.
Decimal Binary Displayed state
0 0000 State 0 displayed. All the bits are 0.
State 1 displayed. The least significant
1 0001 active bit is bit 0.
8 1000
active bit is bit 3.
Bit combination
Lamp state depends on the states of bit combinations, where PLC 1
represents the least significant bit (LSB), PLC 2 represents the next
LSB, and so on. Maximum number of bit is 4, for a total of 16
states. Changing [No. of states] in Attribute group box changes the
number of read addresses.

Objects 13-8
Change state by time

The state displayed changes on a time basis. The frequency can be
set.
[System tag], [Index register] of the word device that controls the
[Word Lamp] object. Users can also set address in [General] tab
while adding a new object.
Attribute No. of states
The number of states is utilized by the object. The state is
numbered from 0, so the number of states minus 1 will be the state
number. If the value within the word register is ≥ *No. of states+
defined in Attribute, the highest state will be displayed.
If the number of states is set to 8, the valid states will be 0, 1, 2, …,
7. In this case if the word value is 8 or higher, the system will
display the state 7 shape.
Hide picture/shape if no corresponding picture for current state
If selected, when there are not enough pictures to represent all the
states, hides the picture. Otherwise, displays the last state.
Note
 In [Label] tab, Language 1 determines the relevant settings of the font. For Language 2~8,
only the font size can be changed and other settings follow Language 1.

Objects 13-9

Objects 13-10
13.3. Set Bit
13.3.1. Overview
The Set Bit object provides two operation modes: manual or automatic. Manual mode can
trigger a designated bit address to change the state between ON and OFF when the object is
touched. In automatic mode, the bit is automatically activated when a pre-defined condition
occurs; touching the button will not be effective.
Click [Object] » [Set Bit] icon on the toolbar to open a Set Bit object property dialog box. Set up
the properties, press OK button, and a new Set Bit object will be created.
General Tab
Setting Description
Write address Click [Setting] to select the [PLC name], [Address], [Device type],
[System tag], [Index register] of the bit device that controls the Set
Bit object. Users can also set address in [General] tab while adding
a new object.
Write after button is released

Objects 13-11
If this function is selected, the action is delayed till button is

released; otherwise, the action is executed once the button is
pressed. This function does not work with momentary buttons.
Mode / Offset Set style Description
Set ON Set ON the designated bit of the device.
Set OFF Set OFF the designated bit of the device.
Toggle Alternates the bit state each time pressed.
Momentary Holds the bit ON only while button is
pressed.
Periodical toggle Set a designated bit ON and OFF at a set time
interval. Time interval can be selected; the
range is from 0.1 to 25.5 seconds.
Set ON when Set ON the bit within the window when the
window opens window opens.
Set OFF when Set OFF the bit within the window when the
window opens window opens.
Set ON when Set ON the bit within the window when the
window closes window closes.
Set OFF when Set OFF the bit within the window when the
window closes window closes.
Set ON when Set the bit ON when the backlight is turned
backlight on ON.
(N/A for
cMT-SVR)
Set OFF when Set the bit OFF when the backlight is turned
backlight on ON.
(N/A for
cMT-SVR)
Set ON when Set the bit ON when the backlight is turned
backlight off OFF.
(N/A for
cMT-SVR)
Set OFF when Set the bit OFF when the backlight is turned
backlight off OFF.
(N/A for
cMT-SVR)
Macro Set Bit object can trigger the start of a Macro routine when the
Macro has been created in advance.
For more information, see “18 Macro References”.
Trigger mode If [Set style] is set to [Toggle], there is a further selection to make of
whether the macro operates after Off to ON, ON to OFF transition,
or at both of the changes of state.
Note
 In [Label] tab, if select [ON=OFF (use state 0)] check box, both state 0 and 1 follow the
settings of state 0.

Objects 13-12
 Using address types other than PLB or PLW_Bit for Set Bit objects with [Periodic Toggle]
attribute is not supported by cMT-SVR.

Objects 13-13
13.4. Set Word
13.4.1. Overview
The Set Word object provides two operation modes: manual or automatic. Manual mode can
change the value in a designated word address when the object is touched. In automatic mode,
the word register is automatically activated when a pre-defined condition occurs; touching the
button will not be effective.
Click [Object] » [Set Word] icon on the toolbar to open a Set Word object property dialog box.
Set up the properties, press OK button, and a new Set Word object will be created.
General Tab

Objects 13-14
Setting Description
Set Word object. Users can also set address in [General] tab while
pressed.
Notification If this check box is selected, it will notify a designated bit address
(setting ON or OFF).
Before writing / After writing
Set the state of the designated bit address before or after the
manual operation.
Attribute Set Style
Select the button action from the drop down list, see Example 2.
Dynamic limits
Set the [Bottom limit] and [Upper limit] by a designated register,
see Example 1.
Example 1
Set the [Bottom limit] and [Upper limit] by a designated register. When Dynamic Address is
LW-n, where n is an arbitrary number, the rule of setting Upper / Bottom limit is:
Content 16-bit 32-bit
Dynamic address LW-n LW-n
Bottom limit LW-n LW-n
Upper limit LW-n+1 LW-n+2
When Dynamic Address is LW-100, the rule of setting Upper / Bottom limit is:
Dynamic address LW-100 LW-100
Bottom limit LW-100 LW-100
Upper limit LW-101 LW-102
Example 2
The available button actions are:
 Write constant value
Preset a register with the value entered. Each time when the button is pressed, it writes the
[Set value] to the designated register. Data format is as set by the [Write address]; it can be
16-bit BCD, 32-bit BCD, …32-bit float. As shown below, when the button is pressed, preset the
register with 12.

Objects 13-15
 Increment value (JOG+)

Increase value in register by a set amount in [Inc. value], each time when the button is pressed,
up to the [Upper limit]. As shown below, each button press increases the value in the register
by 1 until the value is 10.
 Decrement Value (JOG-)

Decrease value in register by a set amount in [Dec. value], each time when the button is
pressed, down to the [Bottom limit]. As shown below, each button press decreases the value in
the register by 1 until the value is 0.
 Press and hold increment (JOG++)

When the button is held longer than a set time in [JOG delay], it will increase the value in a
register by a set amount :[Inc. value] at a set rate :[JOG speed], to the [Upper limit].
As shown below, when the button is pressed, it increases the value in the designated register
by 1. When the button is held longer than 1 second, it increases the value in register by 1 every
0.5 second, till the value is 10.
 Press and hold increment (JOG--)

When the button is held longer than a set time in [JOG delay], it will decrease the value in a
register by a set amount: [Dec. value] at a set rate: [JOG speed], to the [Bottom limit].
As shown below, when the button is pressed, it decreases the value in the designated register
by 1. When the button is held longer than 1 second, it decreases the value in register by 1
every 0.5 second, till the value is 0.

Objects 13-16
 Periodic JOG++
This automatic function increases the value in the register by a set amount: [Inc. value], at a set
rate: [Time interval], to the [Upper limit]. As shown below, the system will automatically
increase the value in the register by 1 every 0.5 second, till the value is 10. Then the value
returns to 0 and add 1 every 0.5 second again.
 Automatic JOG++
This automatic function increases the value in the register by a set amount: [Inc. value], at a set
rate: [Time interval], to the [Upper limit].then holds this value. As shown below, the system will
automatically increase the value in the register by 1 every 0.5 second, till the value is 10, and
then stop.
 Automatic JOG--
This automatic function decreases the value in the register by a set amount: [Dec. value], at a
set rate: [Time interval], to the [Bottom limit].then holds this value. As shown below, the
system will automatically increase the value in the register by 1 every 0.5 second, till the value
is 10, and then stop.

Objects 13-17
 Periodic bounce
Increases the word address value to the [Upper limit] by a [Inc. value] at a set rate in [Time
interval], then decreases to the [Bottom limit] by the same value at the same rate. As shown
below, the system will increase the value in the designated register by 1 every 0.5 second, till
the value is 10, and then decrease the value by 1 every 0.5 second till the value is 0 whenever
the screen is active.
 Periodic step up
Step up to the [High limit] by [Inc. value] at a set rate in [Time interval], then reset immediately
to the [Low limit]. The action repeats whenever the screen is active. As shown below, the
system will increase the value in the designated register by 1 every 0.5 second, till the value is
10, and then reset to 0 and increase again, and the action repeats.
 Periodic step down

Step down to the [Low limit] by [Dec. value] at a set rate in [Time interval], then reset
immediately to the [High limit]. The action repeats whenever the screen is active. As shown
below, the system will decrease the value in the designated register by 1 every 0.5 second, till
the value is 0, and then reset to 10 and decrease again, and the action repeats.

Objects 13-18
 Set when window opens / Set when window closes

Automatic function occurs whenever the screen is active. The value entered in [Set value] is set
into the word address when the action occurs. If [Set value] is set to 5, when the window
opens / closes, the system enters 5 into the designated register.
 Set when backlight on / Set when backlight off (Not supported on cMT-SVR)
Automatic function occurs whenever the backlight is active. The value entered in [Set value] is
set into the word address when the action occurs. If [Set value] is set to 5, when the backlight
turns ON / OFF, the system sets 5 into the designated register.
 Cyclic JOG+
Each time when the button is pressed, increases the word address value to the [Upper limit] by
[Inc. value] then reset to the [Bottom limit]. As shown below, each time when pressing the
button, the system will increase the value in the designated register by 1, till the value is 10,
and then reset to 0 and increase again by pressing the button.
 Cyclic JOG-
Each time when the button is pressed, decrease the word address value to the [Bottom limit]
by [Dec. value] then reset to the [Upper limit]. As shown below, each time when pressing the
button, the system will decrease the value in the designated register by 1, till the value is 0,
and then reset to 10 and decrease again by pressing the button.
 Cyclic JOG++
When the button is held longer than a set time in [JOG delay], it increases the value in a
register by a set amount in [Inc. value] at a set rate in [JOG speed], to the [Upper limit], then
reset to the [Bottom limit]. As shown below, when the button is held longer than 0.5 second,
increase the value in the designated register by 1 every 0.1 second, till the value is 10, and then

Objects 13-19
reset to 0 and increase again by holding the button.
 Cyclic JOG- -
When the button is held longer than a set time in [JOG delay], decrease the value in a register
by a set amount in [Dec. value] at a set rate in [JOG speed], to the [Bottom limit], then reset to
the [Upper limit]. As shown below, when the button is held longer than 0.5 second, decrease
the value in the designated register by 1 every 0.1 second, till the value is 0, and then reset to
10 and decrease again by holding the button.
Security Tab

Objects 13-20
Setting Description
Interlock Use interlock function
When this option is enabled and [Word] is selected, whether
the object is operable depends on the condition of a word
address specified in [Trigger if value is:]. In the settings above,
the object is operable only when the value in LW-1 is greater
than 1.
Hide when disabled
The object is hidden when the specified condition does not
occur in the specified word address.
Grayed label when disabled
The label of the object turns gray when the specified condition
does not occur in the specified word address.
Trigger if value is:

This setting is for specifying a trigger condition. The available
options are: >, <, ==, <>, >=, and <=. A tolerance value can be
set for conditions == and <>.
For example:
When the value is the specified word address is greater than

or equal to 11, or smaller than or equal to 9, the object will be
hidden and is not operable.
Note
 Using address types other than PLW for Set Word objects with automatic attributes such
as [Periodic set up], [Periodic set down], [Automatic JOG++], [Automatic JOG--], and
[Periodic JOG++]…etc, is not supported by cMT-SVR.

Objects 13-21
13.5. Function Key
13.5.1. Overview
The Function Key object can be used for several tasks, such as switching between windows,
keypad design, Macro execution, screen hardcopy, and setting USB security key.
Function Keys with [Screen hardcopy] or [Import user data/Use [USB Security Key]] selected do
not work remotely on cMT Viewer.
Click [Object] » [Function Key] icon on the toolbar to open a Function Key object property
dialog box. Set up the properties, press OK button, and a new Function Key object will be
created.
General Tab

Objects 13-22
Setting Description
Activate If this function is selected, the action is delayed till button is
after button released; otherwise, the action is executed once the button is
is released pressed.
Change Change full-screen window: Change to another base window.
window Change common window: Change common window.
Display popup window: A pop-up window displays in the base
window. If [Close this popup window when parent window is closed]
check box is selected, the pop up window will be closed when
change the base window to another window. Otherwise, a function
key in the pop up window is needed to close it.
(cMT Series) Animation Setting: cMT Series allows using transition

effects for opening popup windows using Function Keys. The settings
can be opened by clicking [Animation Setting].
The effects are shown below. Different effects may be used for Start
(window appears) and End (window disappears).
Effect Name Transition
Fade
Fly
Float

Objects 13-23
Wipe
Split
Circle
Clock
Zoom
Turn
Push
[Duration] specifies how many milliseconds (ms) a transition effect

takes to complete.
[Direction] The direction of the transition.
Return to previous window: If this is selected, the Function Key will
change from the current screen to the previous one displayed. For
example, when window no. 10 is changed to window no. 20, press
the function key to return to window no. 10. This function is only
available for base window.
Close window: Close any active pop-up windows, message windows
included.
Display calculator window(cMT Series): If this option is selected,
clicking this Function Key can open a calculator with an
unchangeable appearance. This calculator allows operators to do
simple calculation and enter the result to a destination object by
pressing the Enter key.

Objects 13-24
Selecting this option opens [Keep calculation open after paste]

checkbox, which keeps the calculator displayed after the value is
entered to the object.
Click the icon to watch the demonstration film. Please confirm

your internet connection before playing the film.
Keyboard Configures the button as a keypad key, and the character it enters,
Input via [Numeric] or [ASCII] objects.
Enter: Same as the keyboard’s “Enter” function.
Backspace: Same as the keyboard’s “Backspace” function.
Clear: Clear the value in the word register.
Esc: Same as the [Close window] function; it is used to close the
keyboard window.
Delete: Same as the keyboard’s “Delete” function, deletes the
number or character on the right side of the text cursor.
Left: Same as the keyboard’s “←” key moves the text cursor to the
left side of the previous number or character.
Right: Same as the keyboard’s “→” key moves the text cursor to the
left side of the next number or character.
Line feed: Move the cursor down to the next line.
Inc: Increment by 1.
Dec: Decrement by 1.
ASCII/UNICODE: Specify the character to be entered by this key.

Objects 13-25
Execute Select this check box to execute one of the Macros from the drop
Macro down list that has already been configured by users.
Window title Function Key defined can be used to move a pop-up window which
bar has no [window title bar] to a preferred position on screen. Select
the pop-up window and then click on a preferred position, the
window will be moved.
Click the icon to download the demo project. Please confirm

your internet connection before downloading the demo project.
Hard copy Print the current window. Before using this function, choose a printer
screen to
model in [System Parameter Settings] » [Model] » [Printer].
USB disk, SD
card or If a monochrome printer is used, selecting [grayscale] can provide a
printer better print result, but the text may not be clearly printed. To
improve text printing, avoid using [grayscale].
Acknowledge
all events
Acknowledge all events once by pressing the Function Key.
(alarms)
(cMT Series)
Import user
data / Use A Function Key can be used to import the e-mail contacts or user
[USB accounts set, also, to log in using USB Security Key.
Security Key]

Objects 13-26
Data Position
Select the external device to store data from [SD card] or [USB disk].
Account import mode
If [Overwrite] is selected, the existing accounts will be overwritten
with new accounts in the external device after importing. If [Append]
is selected, HMI will append more accounts while the old accounts
still exist.
Delete file after importing user accounts
If select this check box, the system will delete the account data saved
in the external device after importing, this can prevent the account
data from leaking out.
Notification If this selection is enabled, it will notify a designated bit address to
set ON or OFF, each time the button is pressed.
Note
 [Overwrite] is the only option when importing the e-mail contacts. This means that all
existing contacts will be removed first, and then the new contacts are added.
For more information, see “6 Window Operations”, “12 Keypad Design and Usage”, “36
Administrator Tools”.

Objects 13-27
13.6. Toggle Switch
13.6.1. Overview
Toggle Switch object is a combination of Bit Lamp object and Set Bit object. The appearance of
the object is controlled by the ON / OFF state of the read bit address. As well, pressing the
button sets the value in the bit address according to the settings.
Click [Object] » [Toggle Switch] icon on the toolbar to open a Toggle Switch object property
dialog. Set up the properties, press OK button, and a new Toggle Switch object will be created.
General Tab

Objects 13-28
Setting Description
Bit Lamp / Toggle Switch
Switch between Bit Lamp and Toggle Switch features.
Read/Write
use different Different addresses can be used to read data and write data.
addresses
[System tag], [Index register] of the bit device that controls the
[Toggle Switch] object. Users can also set address in [General] tab
Invert signal
Reverses the display of ON / OFF states. For example, if [Invert
signal] check box is selected, when the designated bit is OFF, the
object displays ON state.
When [Read/Write use different addresses] option is not selected,
the title of this group box will be “Read/Write address”.
[Toggle Switch] object. Users can also set address in [General] tab
while adding a new object. The address can be the same or
different from [Read address].
released, otherwise, the action is executed once the button is
pressed. This function does not work with momentary buttons.
Attribute Set style Description
Momentary Holds the bit ON only while button is
pressed.
Macro Toggle Switch object can trigger the start of a Macro routine when
the Macro has been created in advance.

Objects 13-29
13.7. Multi-State Switch
13.7.1. Overview
Multi-state Switch object is a combination of Word Lamp object and Set Word object. The
appearance of the object is controlled by the value of the read word address. As well, pressing
the button sets the value in the word address according to the settings.
Click [Object] » [Multi-State Switch] icon on the toolbar to open a Multi-State Switch object
property dialog box. Set up the properties, press OK button, and a new Multi-State Switch
object will be created.
General Tab

Objects 13-30
Setting Description
Word Lamp / Multi-State Switch
Switch between Word Lamp and Multi-State Switch features.
Model / Different modes can be selected: [Value], [LSB].
Offset For more information, see “13.2 Word Lamp”.
Read/Write
addresses
Multi-state Switch object. Users can also set address in [General]
tab while adding a new object.
Multi-state Switch object. Users can also set address in [General]
tab while adding a new object.
pressed.
Attribute Switch style
Select the object’s operation mode, see Example 1.
User-defined mapping
The value placed in the write register of each selection, the action
taken when an illegal value is entered, and error notification to a
designated bit address can be set.

Objects 13-31
Remain current state

If an illegal value is entered, Multi-state Switch will remain at the
current state.
Jump to error state
If an illegal value is entered, Multi-state Switch will jump to the
error state.
Error notification
If an illegal value is entered, automatically set the value placed in
the designated register.
Send
notification After the system successfully writes data to PLC, the designated bit
after writing address will be set On/Off.
successfully
Error handling The action taken when an illegal value is entered or notify a
(cMT Series) designated bit address. This is similar to [User-defined mapping];
the difference is the value corresponding to each state need not to
be preset.
Example 1
 JOG+
Increase the value of a designated register by 1 each time when pressing the button, till the
value equals to [No. of states]. A cyclic action can be enabled. As shown below, each time
when pressing the button, the state number will add 1 start from state 0, till state 4 ([no. of
state]-1), and returns to 0 and step up again.

Objects 13-32
 JOG-
Decrease the value of the designated register by 1 each time when pressing the button, till the
value equals to 0. A cyclic action can be enabled. As shown below, each time when pressing the
button, the state number will minus 1 start from state 4 ([no. of state]-1), till state 0, and
returns to state 4 and step down again.

Objects 13-33
13.8. Slider
13.8.1. Overview
Slider object is used to change the value in a designated word register address by moving the
slide on the screen.
Click [Object] » [Slider] icon on the toolbar to open a Slider object property dialog box. Set up
the properties, press OK button, and a new Slider object will be created.
General Tab
cMT

Objects 13-34
eMT, iE, XE, mTV
Setting Description
Attribute Direction
Select the direction of the slider. (Right, Up, Left, Down)
Resolution
Sets the value change in the word register for each step of the
Slider. For example, if set to 10, the register value changes by 10
points for each increment or decrement on the Slider.
Constant
Sets the range of the Slider. For example, If set [Low limit] to 5, and
[High limit] to 100, the Slider will enter values between 5 and 100.
Address
Set the [Low/High limit] by a designated register, see Example 1.
Coarse increment
Apart from moving the roller to change the value as in [Resolution],

Objects 13-35
if this option is selected, the word value will increase / decrease by

the [Increment] value each time the object is touched.
Slider object. Users can also set address in [General] tab while
Notification If enabled, the state of a designated bit address will be set to ON or
OFF before or after writing.
Click [Setting] to select the [PLC name], [Address], [Device type],
notification settings. Users can also set address in [General] tab
[Before writing] / [After writing]
Change the state of a designated bit register before, or after the
slider is slid.
Watch address When moving the roller, the new value written to the word register
address can be displayed in real time.
Example 1
Set the low or high limit by a designated register. When write address is LW-n, where n is an
arbitrary number, the rule of setting limits is:

Address LW-n LW-n
Low limit LW-n LW-n
High limit LW-n+1 LW-n+2
When address is LW-100, the rule of setting limits is:

Address LW-100 LW-100
Low limit LW-100 LW-100
High limit LW-101 LW-102
Outline Tab
cMT Seires

Objects 13-36
eMT, iE, XE, mTV Seires
Setting Description
Slider button Select slider button type, by default, a picture selected from the
type (cMT) Picture Library can be the slider button.
Slider button Four default styles are offered, and the width and color of the
type (eMT, iE, Frame, Background, Slot can be set.
XE, mTV)
13.8.3. Combo Setting
cMT Series HMI support combo setting for Slider, which allows setting of multiple related
objects at a time. Slider can be set with Background and Dynamic Scale.

Objects 13-37
Background
Setting Description
Margin Specify the space between the background edge and
the objects.
Color/Style Customize
Select a suitable background pattern and color.

Picture
Use the default picture or choose a picture from

Picture Library.

Objects 13-38
Dynamic Scale
Setting Description
Style The scale style will follow the Slider.
Alignment The position of the scale bar along the Slider.
Tick Mark Configure the number of tick marks for main and
sub scales, and the color of tick marks.
Scale Label Configure the font, font color, font size and other
attributes of scale label.
In Slider settings if [Address] is selected for
Low/High limit, then Scale Label’s [Dynamic limits]
will be set automatically.
In Slider settings if [Left] is selected for Direction,
then Scale Label’s [Reverse (Left/Right)] will be set
automatically.

Objects 13-39

Objects 13-40
13.9. Numeric
13.9.1. Overview
Numeric object can be used to input or display the value of a designated word register.
Click [Object] » [Numeric] icon on the toolbar to open a Numeric object property dialog box.
Set up the properties, press OK button, and a new Numeric object will be created.
General Tab
Setting Description
Allow input If selected, the input features and relevant settings are enabled.
Read / Write
address

Objects 13-41
[System tag], [Index register] of the word device that displays the
value. Users can also select a tag defined in Address Tag Library.
Write address Select the [PLC name], [Device type], [Address] of the word device
that system writes to.
Notification If this check box is selected, it will notify a designated bit address
(setting ON or OFF).
Before writing / After writing
Set the state of the designated bit address before or after the
manual operation.
Notification If an illegal value is entered, automatically set the state of a
on invalid
input designated register.
Data Entry Tab
cMT eMT, iE, XE, mTV Series
Setting Description
Mode Touch
Used when data entry is initiated by touching the screen object.
Bit control

Objects 13-42
Used when data entry is enabled by turning ON a designated bit,

and entry ends when the bit goes OFF.
Allow input Specify a bit address that enables or ends data entry. The order of
bit address data entry is specified in [Input order] and an external USB
keyboard is needed for data entry. For cMT-SVR, use iPad’s
keyboard.
Input order Perform continuous input by setting [Input order] and [Group].
The criterion of searching the next input object:
 The range of [Input order]: 1 ~ 511, range of [Group]: 1 ~ 15.
 If [Group] is not selected, its input order is 0.
 The system only searches for the objects within the same
Group.
 The lower number of order is entered before the higher
number of order.
 For multiple objects within the same group and with the same
input order, the object placed in the lower layer is entered first.
Keyboard Use a popup keypad
If selected: A pre-designed pop-up keypad can be chosen by
selecting a check box, and selecting the relative position on the
HMI screen. When data entry is enabled, the pop-up keypad
displays in the selected position, and closed when data entry ends.
If not selected: When data entry is enabled, the pop-up keypad is
not displayed. Users may:
 Create a custom design on the same screen window.
 Use a USB keyboard.
System keypad
cMT Series model has its own system keypad, select this checkbox
to use the system keypad, or select [Custom keypad] to set up a
customized keypad.
Animation Setting
When using a cMT Series model with [Custom keypad] selected,
the transition effect of the keypad window can be selected.
See Chapter 13.5 Function Key in this manual for the list of
effects.
Hide title bar

Objects 13-43
Use a keypad without the title bar.

Popup position
When using a cMT Series model with [Custom keypad] selected,
the position where the keypad pops up can be selected. The
position can either be relative to HMI screen or relative to object.
Relative to HMI screen Relative to object
Restart the keypad if input value is out of range

When entering data, if the value entered is not within the valid
range, the system will automatically restart the keypad.
Other options Display lower and upper limits
(For cMT If selected, when entering a value, the range
Series) is displayed near the object.
Display previous value
If selected, when entering a value, the value
before update is displayed near the object.
To create a keyboard in current window, see “12 Keypad Design and Usage”.
Example 1
This example demonstrates how to use [Input Order] and [Group] to perform continuous input
in several Numeric objects. After entering data in one object, entry will be passed to the next
input order object which is in the same group.
1. Create three Numeric objects, and set [Input order] to 1, 2, and 3 respectively. Include
the three objects in [Group 1] as shown in the following figure.
LW-0

Objects 13-44
LW-1
LW-2
Group1
Order1 Order2 Order3
2. When finish entering data in the last object, to end data entry of all objects, please select
[Stop sequential input function after input] check box.

Objects 13-45
Numeric Format Tab
Setting Description
Display Data Format
Set the data format of a designated word register. The selections
include: BCD, HEX, Binary, Unsigned, Signed, Float. 16-bit uses 1
word where 32-bit uses two words.
Mask
If selected, any values entered will be hidden by displaying them as
****.
Number of Left of decimal Pt.
digits The number of digits before the decimal point.
Right of decimal Pt.
The number of digits after the decimal point.
Display Each “*” sign represents each digit that will be displayed in the
format Numeric object. Apart from “*” signs, extra texts can be entered in

Objects 13-46
the [Format] field, for example: kg. The available alignment options
are: [Left], [Center], [Right], [Leading zero].
The numeric value represented by “*” sign will be displayed from
the highest digit to the lowest in the Numeric object.
Truncated digits
Specify the number of digits to be truncated, from the lowest digit
to the highest.
The number of “*” signs = [Left of decimal Pt.]-[Truncated digits]
Please see the following examples:
When leading zero is not used, the text enclosed in two “*” signs
will not show, for example:
[Left of decimal Pt.] = 5, [Truncated digits] = 0, and Display Format
is “Total=**kg***g”
If the data read is 255, the result would be: "Total=255g"
If the data read is 1000, the result would be: "Total=1kg000g"
Scaling Interpolation
If this check box is selected, [Engineering low] and [Engineering
high] boxes appear. Values entered in these boxes correspond to
the display range required. The setting also requires [Input low]
and [Input high] in the limits section. See Example 2.
Test: Preview the result of Interpolation. See Example 2.
Dynamic scales: Set the [Engineering low] and [Engineering high]
by a designated register. See Example 4.
Macro subroutine
The value read from or written to the register can be computed by

Objects 13-47
macro subroutines selected in [Read conversion] and [Write

conversion]. The macro subroutines should be defined in Macro
Function Library. To use this feature, see “13.9.2.1 The rule of using
Macro subroutine”.
Limits This section allows users to apply display limits to the values held in
the input register. The color when the register value is outside
limits can be set.
Direct
Sets the limits by entering values in [Input low] and [Input high]. If
the value entered is outside the limits, the value in the register
cannot be changed.
Dynamic limits
Set the limits by a designated register, see Example 5.
Use alarm Low limit
color When the value in the register is outside the [Low limit], display
digits by the color set.
High limit
When the value in the register is outside the [High limit], display
digits by the color set.
Blink
When the value in the register is outside either limit, the digits
flash.
Trigger Action Setting (cMT)
Actions executed before/after writing can be classified into action groups. The groups are put
in sequence. The actions within the same group are executed at the same time. When all the
actions within the same group are completed, the actions in the next group are then executed.
Compared to the Notification actions selected in General tab, Trigger Action Setting offers
more flexible combination of actions. For more details about these settings, please also see
Action Trigger in Chapter 13.

Objects 13-48
Setting Description
Actions The predefined action groups will be executed once the write
before writing operation starts, and will not wait for it to be completed.
Actions after The predefined action groups will be executed when the write
writing operation is completed.
13.9.2.1. The rule of using Macro Subroutine
 There must be a return value and exactly one parameter.

Examples:
sub char test (short a) // (Correct)
sub test (char a) // (Incorrect, no return value.)
sub char test (char a, char b) // (Incorrect, two parameters.)
 Use the Macro data type that corresponds to the object’s data format.
The mapping is as follows:

Objects 13-49
Macro Data Type Numeric Object Data Format

short 16-bit Signed
Int 32-bit Signed
unsigned short 16-bit BCD, 16-bit HEX, 16-bit Binary, 16-bit Unsigned
unsigned int 32-bit BCD, 32-bit HEX, 32-bit Binary, 32-bit Unsigned
float 32-bit Float
For example, if the data format of the numeric object is 16-bit Unsigned, only the
corresponding Macro data type: unsigned short, is available.
Examples:
sub char test(unsigned short a) // (Correct)
sub char test(char a) // (Incorrect)
 Supports only the local HMI address.

Examples:
GetData(var, "Local HMI", LB, 0, 1) // (Correct)
GetData(var, "MODBUS RTU", 0x, 0, 1) // (Incorrect)
 The following system defined functions are unable to be invoked:

ASYNC_TRIG_MACRO, SYNC_TRIG_MACRO, DELAY, FindDataSamplingDate,
FindDataSamplingIndex, FindEventLogDate, FindEventLogIndex, INPORT, INPORT2, OUTPORT,
PURGE, TRACE
 The following statements are not supported:

For-Next, While-Wend
Example 2
If [Interpolation] is selected, the scaling equation is as the following:
If A indicates the original data and B indicates the displayed data:
B = [Engineering low] + (A - [PLC low]) × Ratio
where, Ratio = ([Engineering high] - [Engineering low]) / ([PLC high] - [PLC low])
As shown below, the original data is 15, after conversion, 40 will be displayed.

Objects 13-50
Click [Test] button to preview the result of Interpolation. Enter a value in [PLC] field as shown in
the following figure, for example, enter value 15, and the result, which is 40, will be displayed.
Example 3
If the numeric format selected is not Float and decimal point is used, the decimal place of the
converted result will not be adjusted automatically, please adjust [Engineering high] to
correctly place the decimal point of the result gained in [Interpolation] mode. Please see the
illustration below.
1. Create two Numeric objects, set [Right of decimal Pt.] to 1 and select [Interpolation]
method for one of the objects as shown in the following figure.

Objects 13-51
2. Enter value “123”, the object set to [Interpolation] displays “246.0” instead of “24.6”.
3. To move the decimal point one place to the left, adjust [Engineering high] as shown in the
following figure.
Example 4
If [Interpolation] is selected, set the [Engineering low] and [Engineering high] by a designated
register. When Dynamic Address is LW-n, where n is an arbitrary number, the rule of setting
[Engineering low] and [Engineering high] is:

Objects 13-52

Dynamic address LW-n LW-n
Engineering low LW-n LW-n
Engineering high LW-n+1 LW-n+2
Dynamic address LW-100 LW-100
Engineering low LW-100 LW-100
Engineering high LW-101 LW-102
Example 5
Set the limits by a designated register. When [Address] is LW-n, where n is an arbitrary number,
the rule of setting limits is:
Address LW-n LW-n
Low limit LW-n LW-n

Address LW-100 LW-100
Example 6
The following demonstrates how to use [Macro subroutine] for scaling when configuring
Numeric object.
The following two macros are used, one for [Read conversion] and one for [Write conversion].
1. Create two Numeric objects: NE_0 and NE_1 and use the same control address. Select
[Macro subroutine] for NE_1.

Objects 13-53
2. Enter 0 in NE_0 then NE_1 will execute [Read conversion]. The value gained will be 10.
3. Enter 80 in NE_1, [Write conversion] is executed and the value gained will be 70. NE_0
displays 70.

Objects 13-54
Note
 If executing [Read conversion] and [Write conversion] by the same numeric object, the
value entered in this object is computed by the Macro subroutine of [Write conversion]
first, and then the result is computed by the Macro subroutine of [Read conversion]. In
Example 5, if the subroutine of [Write conversion] is set to b=a-20, then entering 80 in
NE_1 will get 60 after [Write conversion] and then the object displays 70 after [Read
conversion].
Security Tab
Setting Description
Interlock Use interlock function
When this option is enabled and [Word] is selected, whether
the object is operable depends on the condition of a word
address specified in [Trigger if value is:]. In the settings above,
the object is operable only when the value in LW-1 is greater
than 1.
Hide when disabled
The object is hidden when the specified condition does not
occur in the specified word address.
Grayed label when disabled
The value in the object turns gray when the specified

Objects 13-55
condition does not occur in the specified word address.
Trigger if value is:

This setting is for specifying a trigger condition. The available
options are: >, <, ==, <>, >=, and <=. A tolerance value can be
set for conditions == and <>.
For example:
When the value is the specified word address is greater than

or equal to 11, or smaller than or equal to 9, the object will be
hidden and is not operable.
Font Tab
Setting Description
Color When the value is within the limits, display digits using color set in
this tab.
Align Left: Align the number to the left.

Objects 13-56
Center: Align the number to the center.

Right: Align the number to the right.
Leading zero: The number is preceded with leading zeros when the
number of digits is less than that set.
Size Set the font size.

Objects 13-57
13.10. ASCII
13.10.1. Overview
ASCII object can be used to input or display ASCII or UNICODE characters held in designated
word registers.
Click [Object] » [ASCII] icon on the toolbar to open an ASCII object property dialog box. Set up
the properties, press OK button, and a new ASCII object will be created.
General Tab
Setting Description
Allow input If selected, the input features and relevant settings are enabled.

Objects 13-58
Multi-line If selected, the ASCII object can display multi-lined text. If a line
display feed character LF (0xA) is used in the string, a newline will be
created.
Vertical When [Multi-line display] is enabled, the method to vertically align
alignment multiple lines of text can be selected.
Mask If selected, any values entered will be masked by asterisks (*)..
Use UNICODE Select this check box to display data in UNICODE format. If not
selected, the characters are displayed in ASCII format. This feature
can be used with the [Function Key] object that uses
[ASCII/UNICODE].
Reverse Normally an ASCII code is displayed in “high byte”, “low byte”
high/low byte order. Reverse selection makes the system display ASCII characters
in “low byte”, “high byte” order.
[System tag], [Index register] of the word device that displays
characters. Users can select a defined address tag from Address Tag
Library, or set address in [General] tab while adding a new object.
No. of words
Select the maximum number of words to be displayed.
Note
 An UNICODE character uses 1 word, and an ASCII character uses 1 byte. Therefore 1 word
can be used as 1 UNICODE character or 2 ASCII characters. (1 word equals to 2 bytes)

Objects 13-59
Font Tab
Setting Description
Attribute The font, size, color, and alignment can be set.
Align
Left: Align the text to the left.
Center: Align the text to the center.
Right: Align the text to the right.

Objects 13-60
13.11. Indirect Window
13.11.1. Overview
Indirect Window object opens or closes a pop-up window assigned by a designated word
register. There are two ways to use Indirect Window object: The first is to use the profile of
Indirect Window object, and let the pop-up window be resized and displayed in the defined
profile; the second is to automatically resize the window according to the size of the pop-up
window to be displayed. To close the pop-up window, assign 0 to the designated word register.
The difference between Direct Window and Indirect Window is that Direct Window is
controlled by a bit register, while Indirect Window is controlled by a word register.
Click [Object] » [Embed Window] » [Indirect Window] icon on the toolbar to open the object
property dialog box. Set up the properties, press OK button, and a new Indirect Window object
will be created.
General Tab
Setting Description
pop-up window. Users can also set address in [General] tab while

Objects 13-61

Attribute Style
Set the display style of the pop-up window. There are two styles:
 No title bar
The pop-up window has no title bar and cannot be dragged.
 With title bar

The pop-up window has a title bar that can be dragged to move the
window.
Animation Effect
(cMT Series) Different effects may be used for Start (window appears) and End
(window disappears).
Fade
Fly
Float
Wipe
Split

Objects 13-62
Circle
Clock
Zoom
Turn
Push
Duration
Specifies how many milliseconds (ms) a transition effect takes to
complete.
Direction
The direction of the transition.
Use window Sets the offset of the window number for selecting the pop-up
no. offset window. The window number of the pop-up window is calculated
by the value in the word register added to the offset. For example,
assume the value in the register is 20 and offset is 5, the pop-up
window number will be 25.
Auto. adjust Automatically resizes the Indirect Window and align the pop-up
window size window to the preset region.
Alignment
Sets a reference point of the pop-up window from one of the five
positions on the screen. For example, if the lower-right region is
selected, the lower-right corner of the pop-up window is aligned to
the lower-right region of the Indirect Window. See Example 1.
Example 1
Here is an example of using Indirect Window. The setting is shown in the following figure, set
the address to LW-0 which assigns the window number. Create window no. 11 and 12 first.
1. Create an Indirect Window object, set address to LW-0, and select [Auto. adjust window
size].
2. Select the region where the window is to be displayed.

Objects 13-63
3. Enter value 11 in LW-0, the pop-up window displayed is window no. 11.
4. Enter value 12 in LW-0, the pop-up window displayed is window no. 12.
5. Enter value 0 in LW-0, the pop-up window is closed.
To close the pop-up window, apart from entering 0 in the designated word register, another
way is to place a Function Key object in the pop-up window, and set the key to [Close window].
Note
 At most 24 windows can be displayed simultaneously at run time.
 The system does not allow opening the same window with two Direct (or Indirect)
windows in one base window.
 If the pop up window has monopoly property enabled, then when the window pops up,
all background windows may not be operated until the monopolizing window has been
closed.

Objects 13-64
13.12. Direct Window
13.12.1. Overview
Direct Window object opens or closes a pop-up window assigned by a designated bit register.
When the state of the bit register changes, the pop-up window appears at the predefined
location. The display area for the pop-up window is limited by the size of predefined location.
Returning the state of the bit register closes the pop-up window. The difference between
Direct Window and Indirect Window is that Direct Window is controlled by a bit register, while
Indirect Window is controlled by a word register.
Click [Object] » [Embed Window] » [Direct Window] icon on the toolbar to open a Direct
Window object property dialog box. Set up the properties, press OK button, and a new Direct
Window object will be created.
General Tab
Setting Description
pop-up window. Users can also set address in [General] tab while

Objects 13-65

Attribute Style
Set the display style of the pop-up window. There are two styles:
 No title bar
The pop-up window has no title bar and cannot be dragged.
 With title bar

The pop-up window has a title bar that can be dragged to move the
window.
Window no.
Set the pop-up window number.
Animation Effect
Different effects may be used for Start (window appears) and End
(window disappears).
Fade
Fly
Float
Wipe

Objects 13-66
Split
Circle
Clock
Zoom
Turn
Push
Duration
Specifies how many milliseconds (ms) a transition effect takes to
complete.
Direction
The direction of the transition.
Auto. adjust Automatically resizes the Direct Window and align the pop-up
window size window to the preset region.
Alignment
Sets a reference point of the pop-up window from one of the five
positions on the screen. For example, if the lower-right region is
selected, the lower-right corner of the pop-up window is aligned to
the lower-right region of the Direct Window. See Example 1.
Example 1
Create window no. 11 which can be controlled by a Toggle Switch with address LB-0.
1. Create a Direct Window object and set read address to LB-0.
2. In this example, the reference point for alignment is set to the lower-right region.

Objects 13-67
3. When LB-0’s state is ON, window no. 11 will show.
4. When LB-0’s state is OFF, window no. 11 will be hidden.

Objects 13-68
Note
 A screen can simultaneously display up to 24 pop-up windows including System Message
Window, Direct Window and Indirect Window.
 The system does not allow opening the same window with two Direct (or Indirect) Windows
in one base window.
 If the pop up window has monopoly property enabled, then when the window pops up, all
background windows may not be operated until the monopolizing window has been closed.

Objects 13-69
13.13. Moving Shape
13.13.1. Overview
Moving Shape object defines the states and moving distance of an object. The state and the
location of the object depend on consecutive registers.
Click [Object] » [Animation] » [Moving Shape] icon on the toolbar to create a Moving Shape
object. Set up the properties, press OK button, and a new Moving Shape object will be created.
General Tab
Setting Description
Read address Click [Setting] to configure the [PLC name], [Device type],
[Address], [System tag], or [Index register] of the word devices that
control the display of object’s state and moving distance. Users can
also set the address in [General] tab while adding a new object.

Objects 13-70
Attribute Select the object’s movement mode and range. See “13.13.2.1
Illustration of Modes” in the following part.
Display ratio The size of shape in different states can be set individually as
shown in the following figure.
Limit address The object’s moving range can be set by adjusting the data in the
designated register, see Example 1.
Example 1
Supposed that the object’s moving range is limited by register LW-n, the addresses in the
following table are used to limit the moving range.
Data format 16-bit 32-bit
[Min. X] address LW-n LW-n
[Max. X] address LW-n+1 LW-n+2
[Min. Y] address LW-n+2 LW-n+4
[Max. Y] address LW-n+3 LW-n+6
13.13.2.1. Illustration of Modes
Available modes are: (Assume Read Address is LW-n)

 X axis only
The object is only allowed to move along the X-axis. The moving distance ranges from [Min. X]
to [Max. X].

Object state LW-n LW-n
Moving distance on X-axis LW-n+1 LW-n+2
 Y axis only
The object is only allowed to move along the Y-axis. The moving distance ranges from [Min. Y]
to [Max. Y].

Objects 13-71

Moving distance on Y-axis LW-n+1 LW-n+2
 X & Y axis
The object is allowed to move along the X-axis and Y-axis. The moving range in X and Y
directions is defined by [Min. X], [Max. X] and [Min. Y], [Max. Y] respectively.

For example, if the object’s read address is LW-100 and the data format is [16-bit Unsigned],
LW-100 is used to control the object’s state, LW-101 is used to control the object’s moving
distance on the X-axis, and LW-102 is used to control the object’s moving distance on the Y-axis.
The following figure shows that the object’s read address is LW-100 and initial position is (100,
50). To move the object to the position (160,180) and change its state to State 2, assign 2 to
LW-100, 160-100 = 60 to LW-101, 180-50 = 130 to [LW102].

Objects 13-72
 X axis w/ scaling
The object moves in X-axis only with scaling. Suppose that the value of the designated register
is DATA, the system uses the following equation to calculate the moving distance on the X-axis.
[Scaling high]-[Scaling low]
Displacement=(Data-[Input low])×
[Input high]-[Input low]

 Y axis w/ scaling
The object is for Y axis movement with scale, and the equation to calculate the moving
distance on the Y-axis is the same as the one in [X axis w/ scaling].
 X axis w/ reverse scaling
This works in the way as [X axis w/ scaling], but the moving direction is in reverse.
 Y axis w/ reverse scaling
This works in the way as [Y axis w/ scaling], but the moving direction is in reverse.

Objects 13-73
13.14. Animation
13.14.1. Overview
Animation object is defined by a pre-defined point set and states. Animation object will then
move to a given point in a given state defined by designated registers. The object state and
position depend on current value of two consecutive registers. The first register controls the
state of the object and the second register controls the position along the predefined path.
Click [Object] » [Animation] » [Animation] icon on the toolbar. First, create the pre-defined
path. Move the mouse to each moving position, and click the left button to define positions
one by one. When it is done, right click on the screen, set up the properties, press OK button,
and a new Animation object will be created.
To change the object’s attributes, double click on the object to open Animation Object’s
Properties dialog box.

Objects 13-74
General Tab
Setting Description
Attribute No. of states
Configure the number of states for this object.
Controlled by register
Use the designated registers to control the object’s state and
position. See Example 1.
Based upon time interval
The object’s state and position will change from time to time. [Time
interval attributes] is used to set the time interval for states and
positions.
Position speed: The speed of movement. The unit is 0.1 second.

Supposed that *Speed+ is set to 10, the object’s position will change
each second.

Objects 13-75
Image state change: Determines how state changes, either

[Position dependent] or [Time-based]. If [Position dependent] is
selected, the object state will change when position changes. If
[Time-based] is selected, the object position will change based on
[Position speed] and the object state will change based on [Image
update time].
Backward cycle: Assumed the object has four positions: position 0,
position 1, position 2, and position 3, and [Backward cycle] is not
selected. When the object moves to the last position (position 3),
the next position will be back to the initial position 0, and repeat.
The moving path is shown as follows:
position 0 → position 1 → position 2 → position 3 → position 0 →
position 1 → position 2…
If [Backward cycle] is selected, when the object moves to the last
position (position 3), it will move backwards to position 2, position
1 and then the initial position 0, and start over again. The moving
path is shown as follows.
position 0 → position 1 → position 2 → position 3 → position 2 →
position 1 → position 0…
Example 1
The object’s state and position are determined by the registers, and the addresses must be
configured correctly, as in the following table:
Object position LW-n+1 LW-n+2
For example, if the designated register is LW-100 and the data format is [16-bit Unsigned], then
LW-100 represents object’s state, LW-101 represents position. In the picture below, LW-100 = 2,
LW-101 = 3, so the object’s state is 2 and position is 3.

Objects 13-76
Profile Tab
Setting Description
Shape rectangle size Set the size of the shape.
Trajectory Set the position of each point on the moving path.
Note
 Since multiple pictures might be used by an [Animation] object, [Set to original dimension]
will not return all pictures to the original size.

Objects 13-77
13.15. Bar Graph
13.15.1. Overview
Bar Graph object displays data as a bar graph for visualization.
Click [Object] » [Chart] » [Bar Graph] icon on the toolbar to open Bar Graph dialog box. Select
properties, click OK button, a new Bar Graph object is created.
General Tab
cMT

Objects 13-78
eMT, iE, XE, mTV
Setting Description
Read address Click [Setting] to Select the [PLC name], [Device type], [Address],
[System tag], and [Index register] of the word devices that controls
how the bar graph displays.

Objects 13-79
Outline Tab
cMT
eMT, iE, XE, mTV

Objects 13-80
Setting Description
Type Choose either [Bar] or [Circular].
Attribute Mode
Choose either [Normal] or [Offset]. If [Offset] is selected, an
original value [Origin] must be entered for reference.
Direction / Degree
Bar: Determine the bar graph direction. Available options are [Up],
[Down], [Right], and [Left].
Circular: Determine the circular bar graph direction. Available
options are [Clockwise] and [Counter clockwise].
If [Full circle] is selected, set the start degree.

If [Full circle] is not selected, set the start and end degree.
Bar width ratio (%)
The ratio of bar to object width. The figure below shows two ratios,
100% and 50%.
Hole Radius (%)

The ratio of the radius of the hole to the radius of the whole
circular bar graph. The figure below shows two ratios, 0% and 50%.
Color/Style Set the bar’s frame and background color, bar style, and bar color.
See the picture below.

Objects 13-81
Range Tab
Setting Description
Zero / Span The percentage of filling can be calculated by the formula, see
Example 1.
Target When the register value meets the condition, the color of filled
indicator area will change to the target color, see Example 2.
Alarm If the register value is larger than [High limit], the color of filled
indicators area will change to [High color]. If the register value is smaller than
[Low limit], the color will change to [Low color].
Dynamic When [Enable] is selected, the [Low limit] and [High limit] of [Alarm
taget/alarm indicator] and the [Target Value] of [Target indicator] will use
/zero(span) designated registers, which is shown in their respective fields see
Example 3.
Example 1
The percentage of filling can be calculated by the following formula:
Register value − [Zero]
Percentage of filling = × 100%
[Span] − [Zero]
Assume [Offset] is selected. If (Register value – [Zero]) is greater than 0, the bar will fill up from

Objects 13-82
[Origin]. If (Register value – Zero) is less than 0, the bar will be drawn below [Origin].
For example, [Origin] is 5, [Span] is 10, and [Zero] is 0.

For different value in read address, it will display as below:
If the value at read address is 4: If the value at read address is 8:
Example 2
When the register value meets the following condition, the color of filled area will change to
the target color.
[Target Value] - *Tolerance+ ≤ Register value ≤ *Target Value+ + [Tolerance]
Assume [Target Value] is 5 and [Tolerance] is 1. As shown below, if the register value is equal to
or larger than 4 (=5-1) and equal to or less than 6 (=5+1), the filled area’s color of the bar will
change to the target color.
Example 3
If [Dynamic target/alarm] is enabled, [Low limit] and [High limit] of [Alarm indicator] are
defined by designated registers as shown in the following table. Furthermore, if [Dynamic
zero/span] is used, [Zero], [Span] and [Origin] will be defined by designated registers. Assume
the address is LW-n, the limits are:
Alarm Low Limit LW-n LW-n

Objects 13-83
Alarm High Limit LW-n+1 LW-n+2

Target LW-n+2 LW-n+4
Zero LW-n+3 LW-n+6
Span LW-n+4 LW-n+8
Origin LW-n+5 LW-n+10
cMT Series HMI support combo setting for Bar Graph, which allows setting of multiple related
objects at a time. Bar Graph can be set with Background and Dynamic Scale.

Objects 13-84
Background
Setting Description
the objects.

Picture

Picture Library.

Objects 13-85
Dynamic Scale
Setting Description
Style The scale style will follow the bar type.
Tick Mark Configure the number of tick marks for main and
sub scales. If the style is circular, the radius and tick
mark length can be specified.
Scale Label Configure the font, font color, font size and other
attributes of scale label.

Objects 13-86
13.16. Meter Display
13.16.1. Overview
Meter Display object displays the value of word register with a meter.
Click [Object] » [Chart] » [Meter Display] icon on the toolbar to open the Meter Display dialog
box. Set the object’s attributes and then click OK to create a new Meter Display object.
13.16.2.1. eMT, iE, XE, mTV Series
General Tab
Setting Description
Read address Click [Setting] to select the [PLC name], [Device type], [Address],
[System tag], and [Index register] of the word devices that controls
the Meter Display object.

Objects 13-87
Outline Tab
Setting Description
Degree Set the pointer to go around the meter clockwise or
counterclockwise.
Sets the object’s start degree and end degree measured clockwise
from the 12 o’clock position. The angle range is 0 to 360 degrees.
The following shows meters of different settings.

Objects 13-88
 [Start degree] =290∘  [Start degree] = 120∘

[End degree] = 70∘ [End degree] = 240∘
 [Start degree] = 40∘  [Start degree] = 225∘

[End degree] = 140∘ [End degree] = 315∘
Background Sets the object’s background color and profile color.

Full circle
When selected, the object will display the whole circle. Otherwise, the
object will only display a partial circle in the defined degree range, as
Transparent
When selected, the object will not display the background and profile
color.
Tick marks Configures the number of tick mark and color.
Pointer Configures pointer’s style, length, width, and color.
Pin point Configures the style, radius, and color of the pin point.

Objects 13-89
Limits Tab
Setting Description
Value Sets the object’s display range. Meter Display object will use the
value of [Zero] and [Span] and the value of register to calculate the
pointer’s position. See Example 1.
Range limits Configures the values of [Low limit], [High limit], their
corresponding display colors, and the width.
Use user-defined radius

Configures the radius to display range limits.
For example, set to 80: Set to 30:

Objects 13-90
Dynamic Limits
The low limit and high limit are set by registers. See Example 2.
Scale label Select the attribute of scale label on Meter Display.
Example 1: Pointer position calculation

Set object’s display range. Meter Display object will use the value of *Zero+ and *Span+ and the
value of register to calculate the pointer’s position. For example, supposed that [Zero] is 0,
[Span] is 100, when the value of register is 30, [Start degree] is 0, and [End degree] is 360, then
the degree indicated by the pointer is:
{ (30 – [Zero]) / ([Span] – [Zero]) } * ([End degree] - [Start degree]) =
{(30 – 0) / (100 - 0)} * (360 – 0) = 108
Pointer will be pointing at 108 degrees.
Example 2: Dynamic Limits

The low limit and high limit are set by the register.
Suppose the address is LW-n, the following table shows the read address of low limit and high
limit:
Low limit LW-n LW-n
For instance, when address is LW-100, the rule of setting limits is:

Objects 13-91
13.16.2.2. cMT Series
General Tab
Setting Description
Style Three options are available: [Custom], [Style 1], and [Style 2]. Click
on the text to configure the properties. If [Custom] is selected, set
the properties such as [Pointer], [Pin point], [Background picture],
etc.

Objects 13-92
Setting Click the button of [Style 1] or [Style 2] to set the style of meter.
Outline
The following is the outline of Style 1 when [Full circle], [Half
circle], or [Quarter circle] is selected.
The following is the outline of Style 2 when [Full circle], [Half

circle], or [Quarter circle] is selected.
Rotation
Rotates the background picture clockwise according to the angles
set.
Color
Sets the color of the background picture of meter.
Angle Sets the range to label the scale, 0∘to 360∘clockwise or
counterclockwise from the twelve o’clock position.
Full circle
If selected, the full circle is drawn according to the selected
direction and the start angle. The limits are determined by the
value set in [Minimum] and [Maximum] field under [Value].
Enable If selected, the pointer slides to the designated position when the
animation read value changes; if not selected, the pointer directly points to
the designated position when the read value changes.
Value Sets the lower and upper limits of the meter.
Read address Displays the value in meter according to the value in the designated
word register.
Indicator Sets the style of pointer and pin point. If [Custom] is selected, the
direction of the pointer must points upward to correctly display.

Objects 13-93
Range limit Sets the colors to indicate different ranges.

Dynamic limits
The low limit and high limit are decided by the register. See
Example 2 above.
Scale Sets the number of main and sub scale, the color of tick marks and
scale label.

Objects 13-94
13.17. Trend Display
13.17.1. Overview
Trend display objects draw curves of the data recorded by Data Sampling object.
Click [Data/History] » [Trend Display] icon on the toolbar to open a Trend Display object
property dialog box. Set up the properties, press OK button, and a new Trend Display object
will be created.
General Tab
Button Description
Go to the earliest sampling data.
Go to the previous time interval.
Click to stop auto-scrolling. When the new sampling data is
generated, the display does not scroll, nor is the new data outside
the display range displayed.
Click to start auto-scrolling. The display scrolls as the new sampling
data is generated.
Go to the next time interval.
Go to the latest sampling data.

Objects 13-95
Setting Description
Data
Sampling Select a Data Sampling object as the source data.
Object index
Refresh data In history mode, when this option is selected, Trend Display will be
automatically automatically refreshed every 10 seconds. If this option is not
selected, Trend Display can only be refreshed by changing window.
No line When HMI time is adjusted to an earlier time, and data sampling
connection keeps going on, selecting this option can prevent the system from
between
records if the drawing a line to connect the gap between current trend curve
next record is (earlier in time axis) and former trend curve (later in time axis). This
earlier can slow down refresh speed.
Trend type Select the mode of data source, either [Real-time] or [History].
Real-time
In this mode, the display object shows all sampled data since the
HMI started. The maximum number of records that can be sampled
is set in [Max.data records] (Real-time mode) of the Data Sampling
object. When the sampling data exceed this setting, the earlier
data will be deleted.To show older data, use [History] mode.
[Hold control]: Suspends the update of Trend Display. However, It

Objects 13-96
does not stop the sampling process of Data Sampling object.

History
In this mode, the data comes from the history data files stored on
HMI. . The history data files are sorted by dates and each is given
an index. The system uses [History control] to select the history
data files that are created on different dates.
The system sorts the history data of sampling data by date; the
latest file is record 0 (typically the data sampled today), the second
latest file is record 1, and so on. If the value of designated register
in [History control] is n, the Trend Display object will display data
record n.
Here is an example to explain [History control]. If the designated
register is LW-0, and the sampling data files available are
pressure_20061120.dtl, pressure_20061123.dtl,
pressure_20061127.dtl, and pressure_20061203.dtl, and it is
2006/12/3 today, based on the value of LW-0, the sampling data
file which will be selected by [Trend Display] is shown as follows:
Value of LW-0 Selected sampling history data
0 pressure_20061203.dtl
If use with Option List object and select data source as [Dates of
historical data], the history data will be sorted by date and
displayed in Option List object, see “13.29 Option List”.
Pixel [Distance] is used to set the distance between two sampling points,
as shown in the following figure.
Time [Distance] is used to set the X-axis in unit of time, as shown in the
following figure.

Objects 13-97
Select [Time] for [X axis time range] and go to [Trend] » [Grid] and
enable [Time scale]. Please refer to [Time scale] in the later section.
Dynamic Designate a 32-bit word register for adjusting the distance between
distance
between data two sampling points (select Pixel), or the time unit represented by
samples/ X-axis (select Time). If no value is entered, the default value will be
Dynamic X
axis time used.
range
Refresh data If selected, every time when opening the window on which the
automatically
Trend Display object in history mode is placed, the display is
automatically refreshed once per second. Please note that:
 The refresh status can be observed from the control button of
Trend Display object.
Showing button: The automatic refresh feature is
enabled.
Showing button: The automatic refresh feature is
disabled.
 When scrolling to the previous data, the automatic refresh
feature is disabled, the button is shown.
 If [Refresh data automatically] check box is selected, when
change back to the window, the display is refreshed, ignoring
the control buttons. For example, select [Refresh data
automatically], and scroll to the previous data, the automatic
refresh feature is disabled. In this case, changing to another
window and then change back will still refresh the display.
 If [Refresh data automatically] check box is not selected when
building the project, the feature can still be enabled by
pressing button on HMI. In this case, the automatic
refresh feature is disabled, that is, even when change back to
the current window, the display will not be refreshed.

Objects 13-98
Hold control When the register is set ON, suspend the update of Trend Display. It
does not stop the sampling process of Data Sampling object. This
setting is available only in Real-time mode.
Watch line Use the *Watch line+ function to display a “watch line” when user
touches the Trend Display object. It will also export the sampling
data at the position of watch line to the designated word device
and use Numeric objects to display the results, as shown in the
following figure.
[Watch line] can also export sampling data with multiple channels.
The system will consecutively write each channel to the specified
address and the following addresses, in the same order as in [Data
Sampling] object. The address assigned to [Watch line] is the start
address, and sampling data for each channel will be exported to
the word devices starting from “start address.” If the data format of
each channel is different, the corresponding address of each
channel is arranged from the first to the last. If the watch register is
LW-300, watch function will export each channel’s data to the
following addresses:
Register Channel Data format
LW-300 0 16-bit Unsigned (1 word)
LW-301 1 32-bit Unsigned (2 words)
LW-303 2 32-bit float (2 words)
LW-305 3 16-bit Signed (1 word)
Time stamp Time stamp output
output Suppose the address is set to LW-n, then:
If enabled, the system will use the time of the first sampling data as
“time origin”, and write the time stamp of the most recent sampled

Objects 13-99
data (relative to “time origin”) to [LW-n+2].

When clicking on the curve, the time stamp of the closest sampled
point will be written to [LW-n].
Clear real-time data address (Data Sampling object) will clear the
time origin as well.
Time stamp is recorded in seconds.
Trend Tab
Setting Description
Transparent /
Frame / Select the color of frame and background.
Background
Show scroll Enable or disable the scroll control as shown in the following figure.
controls
Grid Set the number of dividing lines and the line color. The number of
divisions depends on the setting in General tab » [Distance

Objects 13-100
between data samples] / [X axis time range].

X-axis interval
The number of vertical grid lines.
 Select [Distance between data samples] in General tab:
Select how many sampling point will be included between two
vertical grid lines.
 Select [X axis time range] in General tab:
Select the time range between two vertical grid lines.
X-axis division
Y-axis division
The number of horizontal grid lines.
Time scale Select [Time] / [Date] check box to display the time scale along the
x axis.
Font / Color / Size

Select the font, font color, and font size of the time scale.
The default font size is 8.
Time / Date Relative time mode
When this mode is selected, the time of the earlist sampling data
will be the start time from which to count a relative time. This
mode works with time scale [SSSSSS] and under this mode, time
scale [Date] cannot be used.

Objects 13-101
The time of the latest sampling data will be marked on the top left
corner of the object. This group box is used to set the time / date
display format and font color.
Channel Tab
Setting Description
Y scale Set Y-axis to be Main Axis or Aux. Axis. See “Y Scale Tab” for more
information.
Channel Configure each sampling line’s format and color. At most 64

channels could be configured.
Dynamic limits
 Not selected:
[Zero] and [Span] are used to set the low limit and high limit of
sampling data. If the low limit is 50 and the high limit is 100 for one
sampling line, [Zero] and [Span] must be set as [50] and [100], so
that all the sampling data can be displayed in the trend display
object.

Objects 13-102
 Selected
The low limit and the high limit are read from the designated word
devices, as shown below. When address is LW-n , the register’s
address:
Data Format 16-bit 32-bit
Low limit LW-n LW-n
High Limit LW-n+1 LW-n+2
For example, if LW-100 is used here, the low limit and the high limit
will be read from:
High Limit LW-101 LW-102
A typical usage of this is to zoom in and zoom out of Trend Display.
(Not available for cMT Series). See Example 1.
Channel If [Enable] is selected, the bits of the assigned word register will be
visibility used to show/hide each channel. The first bit controls the first
control channel, and the second bit controls the second channel, and so
on. For example, suppose there are 5 channels and LW-0 is used,
channels which will be shown given the states of the control bits
are:
Channel Control Bit State Displayed
1 LW_bit-000 OFF YES
2 LW_bit-001 ON NO
3 LW_bit-002 ON NO
Note on using this feature: Each control bits are not reserved for
the channel. If a particular channel is not displayed, the control bit
is assigned to the next displayed channel. For example, if the third
channel of the 5 channels is not displayed, only 4 channels will be
displayed in Trend Display, and the used control bits will only be:
LW_bit-000~003.

Objects 13-103
Y Scale Tab
Setting Description
Y scale Show whether Y-axis is Main Axis or Aux. Axis.
Y-axis will not be displayed when [none] is selected for Y scale in
Data Sampling Object group box. At most 32 Y axes can be
displayed, including one main axis and multiple aux. axes.
Scale font Select the font, font color, and font size of the scale.
Dynamic To show or hide Y-scale. If the control address is LW-50, then the
Y-scale first axis is controlled by LW_Bit 5000, and the second axis is
visibility
controlled by LW_Bit 5001, and so on.
Dynamic To change the main axis. If writing 1 into LW-80, the main axis will
main axis be Channel 1; if writing 2 into LW-80, the main axis will be Channel,
and so on.

Objects 13-104
General Tab
The Trend Display on cMT Series combines Real-time mode and History mode. Drag left to
scroll the Trend Display to view history data and drag right to view the latest sampling data.
Pinch two fingers together to zoom out Trend Display or spread them apart to zoom in.
Zoom In Zoom Out

For more information about how sampling data is saved, see “8 Data Sampling”.

Objects 13-105
Setting Description
Data
Sampling Select a [Data Sampling] object as the source data.
Object index
Millimeter Same as eMT, iE, XE mTV Series.
Time Same as eMT, iE, XE mTV Series.
Watch line Same as eMT, iE, XE mTV Series.
Disable Y-axis
With this option selected, dragging the object with your finger will
scrolling with
only scroll X-axis range while Y-axis remains being placed in the
swiping
middle of the object even if it is zoomed in/out.
up/down
Disable zoom With this option selected, Trend Display cannot be zoomed in/out.
Tapping the icon on the upper right corner of Trend Display
object will not be able to zoom in /out the object, but this can
move the object back to its original place.
Show custom This option appears when [Customized file handling] is selected in
file name Data Sampling. With this option selected, the customized file name
is shown as caption in History Data Display.

Objects 13-106
Trend Tab
Setting Description
Transparent /
Frame / Select the color of frame and background.
Background
Grid Set the number of dividing lines and the line color. The number of
divisions depends on the setting in General tab » [Distance
between data samples] / [X axis time range].
X-axis interval
 Select [Distance between data samples] in General tab:
Select how many sampling point will be included between two
vertical grid lines.
 Select [X axis time range] in General tab:
Select the time range between two vertical grid lines.
X-axis division
Y-axis division

Objects 13-107
The number of horizontal grid lines.

Time scale Select [Time] / [Date] check box to display the time scale along the
x axis.
The default font size is 8.
Time / Date Relative time mode
When this mode is selected, the time of the earliest sampling data
will be the start time from which to count a relative time. This
mode works with time scale [SSSSSS] and under this mode, time
scale [Date] cannot be used.
The time of latest sampling data will be marked on the top left
corner of the object. This group box is used to set the time / date
display format and font color.
Channel Tab
Setting Description
Y scale Set Y-axis to be Main Axis or Aux. Axis. See “Y Scale Tab” for more
information. At most 32 Y axes can be displayed, including one
main axis and multiple aux. axes.

Objects 13-108
Channel Configure each sampling line’s format and color. At most 64

channels could be configured.
Dynamic limits
 Not selected:
[Zero] and [Span] are used to set the low limit and high limit of
sampling data. If the low limit is 50 and the high limit is 100 for one
sampling line, [Zero] and [Span] must be set as [50] and [100], so
that all the sampling data can be displayed in the trend display
object.
 Selected
The low limit and the high limit are read from the designated word
devices, as shown below. When address is LW-n , the register’s
address:
Low limit LW-n LW-n
High Limit LW-n+1 LW-n+2
For example, if LW-100 is used here, the low limit and the high limit
will be read from:
High Limit LW-101 LW-102
A typical usage of this is to zoom in and zoom out of Trend Display.
(Not available for cMT Series). See Example 1.
Channel If [Enable] is selected, the bits of the assigned word register will be
visibility used to show/hide each channel. The first bit controls the first
control channel, and the second bit controls the second channel, and so
on. For example, suppose there are 5 channels and LW-0 is used,
channels which will be shown given the states of the control bits
are:
Channel Control Bit State Displayed
2 LW_bit-001 ON NO
3 LW_bit-002 ON NO
Note on using this feature: Each control bits are not reserved for

Objects 13-109
the channel. If a particular channel is not displayed, the control bit

is assigned to the next displayed channel. For example, if the third
channel of the 5 channels is not displayed, only 4 channels will be
displayed in Trend Display, and the used control bits will only be:
LW_bit-000~003.
Y Scale Tab
The scale along the Y axis of a specific channel can be displayed. To enable Y Scale, [Grid]
should first be enabled in [Trend] tab. Y Scale can be configured on the in cMT Viewer as
shown in the following steps.
1. Tap the button on the upper right corner of Trend Display object.
2. Tap [Trend Display Setting] » [Y Scale].
3. Select the channels.

Objects 13-110
Example 1
The example explains how to zoom in or zoom out Trend Display. The feature described is not
available for cMT Series.
In Channel tab select [Dynamic limits] check box. If the [Address] is set to LW-n, then LW-n
controls the low limit where LW-n+1 controls the high limit.
Set [Address] to LW-0 and create two Numeric objects for entering the low / high limit. The
address that controls the low limit is LW-0; the address that controls the high limit is LW-1.
Let’s suppose the data is between 0 and 30; set the [Low limit] to 0 and the [High limit] to 30,
the trend curve is displayed as shown in the following figure.
To zoom out the Trend Display, enter a value greater than 30 in [High limit] as shown in the
following figure.

Objects 13-111
To zoom in the Trend Display, enter a value less than 30 in [High limit] as shown in the following
figure.

Objects 13-112
13.18. History Data Display
13.18.1. Overview
History Data Display object displays data stored by Data Sampling object. It differs from Trend
Display in that History Data Display object uses a table to display data. The following is an
example of a history data display object.
Click [Data/History] » [History Data Display] icon on the toolbar to open a History Data Display
object property dialog box. Set up the properties, press OK button, and a new History Data
Display object will be created.

Objects 13-113
General Tab
cMT eMT, iE, XE, mTV
Setting Description
Data
Sampling Select a Data Sampling object as the source data.
object index
Refresh Data The system will refresh data every 10 seconds. When this option is
Automatically not selected, data can be freshed only by changing windows.
Style Select History Data Display object’s style.
Shows grids between rows and columns.
Color
Change the color of grids.
Column interval
Change the width of each column. The figures below are the
examples.
Grid
Profile color Change the color of frame and background. Use [Transparent] to

Objects 13-114
hide frames and background.

Text Change the font and font size.
Enable or disable showing the time and date and configure its
format and color.
Move column [Date] to the front of column [Time]
Swap the postion of column [Date] and column [Time].
Sequence no.
Time / Date
Show the sequence number of all records.
Time ascending
Put earliest data at the top and the latest data at the bottom.
Time descending
Put the latest data at the top and the earliest data at the bottom.
The history files are sorted by date and each file is given an index.
History
Control The latest one is assigned index 0 (in most cases: today), the
(eMT, iE, XE, second latest file is assigned index 1, and so on. [History Control] is
mTV Series)
used to specify the history data to be shown.
Note
 When using cMT-SVR, use the filter icon in the upper-right corner of History Data Display
object on iPad to select the date and display the data.

Objects 13-115
Data Format Tab
Setting Description
Channel Each History Data Display object can display up to 64 channels.
Check [Display] to select the channels to be shown on the screen.
In the figure above, there are 4 channels (channel 1 to channel 4) in
the Data Sampling object, and only Ch.1 and Ch.4 are selected. The
data formats are shown next to channel name. The data format of
each channel is decided by the corresponding Data Sampling
objects. The result is shown below:
When display [String] format in History Data Display object, there

Objects 13-116
are two additional options:
 Display in [UNICODE] mode

 Reverse high byte and low byte data and then display.
Title Tab
cMT eMT, iE, XE, mTV
Setting Description
Use title Enable or disable title, which is marked as shown below:
Show custom This option appears when [Customized file handling] is selected in
file name
(cMT) Data Sampling. With this option selected, the customized file name
is shown as caption in History Data Display.
Background Transparent
When selected, hide the background for title area.
Color
Set the background color of title.
Setting Defines the text to be shown on the title.

Objects 13-117
The text can be edited in Label Tag Library. Build the Label Tag
Library first, and in History Data Display settings dialog select the
checkbox in the Label Library column, and then select the label tag.
Note
 After running simulation on PC, to run simulation again using the same project that
contains some changed data, please find the HMI_memory, SD_card, or usb1 folder in
EasyBuilder Pro installation, and then delete the old data sampling records in it, to prevent
the system from reading old data in the second simulation.
Edit Tab
Supported for eMT, iE, XE, mTV, iP Series

Objects 13-118
Setting Description
Control When set to 1, the data in Data Address will overwrite the data in
address
data log.
When set to 2, the selected data log will be deleted.
Data address The system will start reading row by row from the selected one in
History Data Display, and change the data log accordingly.
Please note that the settings in this address must be identical to
that in Data Sampling.
Select By changing the value in Select Address, the corresponding row in
address
History Data Display can be selected.
Please note that:
1. When the value in Select Address is 0, no row will be selected,
and the value in Data Address will stay the same as that of the
previously selected row number.
2. When the value in Select Address exceeds the total number of
rows in History Data Display, the last row (the one with largest
row number) will be selected.
Note
 When an external device is used to save data log, removing the external device will make
Edit function ineffective. Editing can keep on when the external device is inserted again
and the system starts reading historical data.

Objects 13-119
13.19. Data Block Display
13.19.1. Overview
Data Block is a combination of several word devices with continuous address, where the X axis
of Data Block Display object represents the address and the numbers on the Y axis represent
the data values in the corresponding address. Data Block Display object can display multiple
data blocks. For example, it can display two data blocks LW-12~LW-15 and RW-12~RW-15 in
trend curves simultaneously. It is very useful to observe and compare the difference of trend
curves.
The display result
Click the [Object] » [Chart] » [Data Block Display] icon on the toolbar to open the property
dialog box. Set up the properties, press OK button, and a new Data Block Display object will be
created.

Objects 13-120
General Tab
Setting Description
Comment Description of the object.
No. of Set the no of channel for this object. Each channel represents one
channel data block. The maximal number of channels is 12.
Watch Line If enabled, when user touches the [Data Block Display] object, it
will display a vertical cursor line on it, and store the data on the line
to the designated registers. See Example 1.
Allow input (cMT Series)
With this checkbox selected, entering a value in the specified
address for watch line can move the verticle watch line to the
desired position.
Channel Select the channel to be configured.
Control Specify the control address also the data source.
address Control address is used to control and clear the drawn curve. After
executing the operation below, the system will reset the control
word to zero.
Enter “0” = No action (default)
Enter “1” = Draw (Without clear first)
Enter “2” = Clear
Enter “3” = Redraw

Objects 13-121
No. of data address

If control address is LW-n, then LW-n+1 stores the number of word
devices in each data block, i.e. the number of data. The maximum
value is 1024.
Data storage start address
If [Offset to start address] is enabled, the [Offset value storage
address] will be set as [Control address] + 2.
If select 16-bit data format, the address for each data will be start
address, start address + 1, start address + 2 and so on.
If select 32-bit data format, the address for each data will be start
address, start address + 2, start address + 4 and so on.
For more information about control address, see Example 2 to 5.
Limit Set the minimum and maximum limit for the curve.
Note
 The system can draw at most N curves, where N = 32 divided by the number of channel.
Example 1
How to use watch (Cursor Line) feature
Use “Watch” function to check the value of any point of the curve. When the user touches
[Data Block] object, it will display a “cursor line”, and the system will write the index and value
of that data on the cursor line to the designated address.
Data Format Index Value Channel 1 Value Channel 2 Value
16-bit Address Address + 1 Address + 2
32-bit Address Address + 2 Address + 4
When watch address is set to LW-n, the value written into LW-n represents the channel index
number to be called up. (Start form 0)
Note
 [Data Index] is a 16 bit unsigned integer. When the designated register of cursor line is 32
bit device, it will be stored in the bit 0-15.
 If the channel to be viewed has no data, “0” will be displayed, as shown below. In the
example, there is no data in channel 1, when the cursor points at Data 4, “0” will be

Objects 13-122
displayed as shown below.
 If there is less data in Channel 1, “0” will be displayed, as shown below.
Example 2
How to show a data block
1. Write the number of data to *No. of data address+, i.e. “Control address+1”
2. Store the data consecutively beginning at [Data storage start address].
3. Write “1” to [Control address] to draw the curve without cleaning the plot. All previous
curves will not be erased.
4. The system will write “0” to *Control address+ after marking the plot.
Note
 Do not change the content of [Control address], [No. of data address] and [Data storage
start address] between step 3 and step 4 above as doing so might cause error for the
trend curve plot.

Objects 13-123
Example 3
How to clear the graph
1. Write “2” to *Control address+, all the trend curves will be cleared.
2. The system will write “0” to [Control address] after the trend curve is cleared.
Example 4
How to clear the previous trend curve and display new one
1. Write the number of data to *No. of data address+, i.e. “control address+1”
2. Store the data consecutively beginning at [Data storage start address].
3. Write “3” to *Control address+, the previous trend curves will be cleared and the new
content in data block will be plotted on the screen.
4. The system will write “0” to *Control address+ after the trend curve has been plotted.
Example 5
How to use offset mode
If [Offset to start address] is selected, [Control address], [No. of data address], and [Offset
value storage address] will use 3 consecutive addresses.
For example, assume the total number of channels is 3 (start from 0 to 2), and the [Control
address] are LW-0, LW-100, and LW-200, respectively. Then, the other addresses will be set as
follows: (In the example, format 16-bit Unsigned is used and [Offset value storage address] are
all m).

Objects 13-124
Item Channel 0 Channel 1 Channel 2

Control Address LW-0 LW-100 LW-200
No. of data LW-1 LW-101 LW-201
address
Offset value LW-2 (=m) LW-102 (=m) LW-202 (=m)
storage address
Data 1 LW-0+m LW-100+m LW-200+m
Data 2 LW-1+m LW-101+m LW-201+m
… … … …
The following figure on the left shows the result when offset mode is not used while the figure
on the right shows the result when offset mode is used.
Note
 When [Control address] is set to LW-n, [No. of data address] and [Offset value storage
address] are as follows:
Data Type 16-bit 32-bit
Control address LW-n LW-n
No. of data address LW-n+1 LW-n+2
Offset value storage address LW-n+2 LW-n+4
 If the control registers are 32-bit devices, only bit 0-15 will be used for control purpose, bit
16-31 will be ignored. (as illustrated below)
 When the value in [Control address] is not zero, the system will read [No. on data address]
and [Offset value storage address].
 It is recommended to use [Offset to start address] for data block display with multiple
channels and the same device type. As shown in the following figure, The control words of

Objects 13-125
channel 1 is located from LW-n, the control words of channel 2 is located from LW-n+3,
and so on.
Display Area
Setting Description
Description Data samples
Configure the maximal number of data samples (points) to be
displayed.

Objects 13-126
Samples to scroll
Configure the number of data samples being scrolled.
Enable scroll switch
Clicking displays the previous or next data point.
Clicking displays the first or the last data point.

Profile Set the color of the frame and background of the object.
Transparent
Hides the background. Color selection will not be available.
Grid Set the number of horizontal and vertical divisions shown by grid.
Channel Set the color, width and style of each curve.

Objects 13-127
13.20. XY Plot
13.20.1. Overview
XY Plot object is used to display values for two variables (x,y) for a set of data, where the data
comes from word registers. Up to 32 channels can be displayed simultaneously. This object
facilitates data observation and analysis. Additionally, negative numbers can be displayed as
well.
Click [Object] » [Chart] » [XY Plot] icon on the toolbar to open a [XY Plot] object property dialog
box.
General Tab

Objects 13-128
Setting Description
Direction There are four selections, right, left, up or down.
No. of
Set the number of channels for observation.
channels
Control Controls the operation of all channels simultaneously. When the
address [Control address] is LW-n, assigning values to LW-n will issue
commands to XY plot according to the table below. Meanwhile,
LW-n+1 l controls the number of data points plotted. After
operation, the [Control address] will be reset to 0.
Control Value Result
address
LW-n 1 Plots point on XY curve.
(The plotted points are kept.)
2 Clears all XY curves.
3 Clears then plots new XY curve.
LW-n+1 Any
Controls the number of data points plotted.
number
No. of data address
Controls the number of data points. Each channel can plot up to
1023 points.
Channel Select a channel to configure.
Read Address PLC name
Select a PLC which will be the source of [X data] and [Y data] and
designate a read address.
The format of the data register blocks used for the display channels
depends on whether [Separated address for X and Y data] and/or
[Dynamic limits] has been selected. See Example 1.
Dynamic  When not selected (See Example 2)
limits The Low and High limits can be set by entering constants. The Low
and High limits are used for calculating X and Y range in
percentage.
 When selected (See Example 3)
A zoom effect can be created by changing the Low / High Limits.

Objects 13-129
Example 1
The format of the data register blocks used for the display channels depends on whether
[Separated address for X and Y data] has been selected, and if [Dynamic limits] has been
selected. The following explains the situations where 16-bit register is used:
 If [Separated address for X and Y data] is not selected, and set [Read address] to LW-n:
Select [Dynamic limits] Not select [Dynamic limits]
X data Y data X data Y data
Low Limit LW-n LW-n+2 Constant Constant
High Limit LW-n+1 LW-n+3 Constant Constant
st
1 data LW-n+4 LW-n+5 LW-n+0 LW-n+1
nd
3rd data LW-n+8 LW-n+9 LW-n+4 LW-n+5
th
 If [Separated address for X and Y data] is selected, and set [X data] to LW-m, [Y data] to
LW-n:
Select [Dynamic limits] Not select [Dynamic limits]
X data Y data X data Y data
Low Limit LW-m+0 LW-n+0 Constant Constant
High Limit LW-m+1 LW-n+1 Constant Constant
st
1 data LW-m+2 LW-n+2 LW-m+0 LW-n+0
2nd data LW-m+3 LW-n+3 LW-m+1 LW-n+1
rd
th
Example 2
When [Dynamic limits] is not selected, the Low and High limits can be set. The Low and High
limits are used for calculating X and Y range in percentage.
Read Address Value − Low Limit
Scale (%) =
High Limit − Low Lmit
If [Separated address for X and Y data] is not selected and the address is LW-n, the
corresponding limits are retrieved from the addresses as shown in the following table.
X axis low limit LW-n LW-n
X axis high limit LW-n+1 LW-n+2
Y axis low limit LW-n+2 LW-n+4
Y axis high limit LW-n+3 LW-n+6

Objects 13-130
Example 3
If [Dynamic limits] is selected, a zoom effect can be created by changing the setting of Low /
High Limits.
In the following example, XL=X low limit, XH=X high limit, YL=Y low limit, YH=Y high limit, and
XY, XY1, XY2 are three XY data. When changing the high limits of X and Y axis, the result is
shown below:
Original
Change the high limit of Y axis to 25. Change the high limit of Y axis to
(zoom in) 100 (zoom out)
For more information, see “13.17 Trend Display”.
Note
 For cMT Series, on the screen of the visualization device directly pinch two fingers together
to zoom out or spread them apart to zoom in.
 X and Y data can be set to different formats. For example: If X data uses 16-bit unsigned, Y
data uses 32-bit signed, please note the address setting.
 When using a Tag PLC, such as AB tag PLC, X and Y must be in the same format. When using
different formats a warning will be shown.

Objects 13-131
Display Area Tab
Setting Description
Profile color Select the color of the frame and the background, or select
[Transparent] check box to hide the frame and background.
Curve For each channel select the properties of color, width, and line
style.
Maker There are four different types of XY plot. The result is shown below:

Objects 13-132
See Example 4.
Reference line Up to 4 horizontal reference lines can be shown on the graph. Fill in
high, low limits and Y axis percentage values. Different colors can
be selected for each reference line.
If [Limit from PLC] is selected, designate a register to be the read
address of reference line.
Example 4
The curve shown in the following figure is drawn with 7 points numbered from P0 to P6.
The steps the system draws the X-axis Projection are:
1. Calculates the two points in X-axis – (X0, 0) and (X6, 0).
2. Link all the points in the order of (X0, 0), P0… P6, (X6, 0) and returns to (X0, 0) at last.
3. Fill out all enclosed areas.
Similarly for Y-axis projection:
Note
 XY Plot can be drawn repeatedly up to 32 times:
1 channel32 times
2 channels16 times
The way to calculate: 32 divided by the number of channels.

Objects 13-133
13.21. Alarm Bar and Alarm Display
13.21.1. Overview
Alarm Bar and Alarm Display objects are used to display alarm messages which are defined in
Event (Alarm) Log objects. When the trigger conditions are met, events or alarms will be
displayed as they occur in chronological order in Alarm Bar or Alarm Display object.
Alarm Bar scrolls all alarm messages in one single display line, whereas Alarm Display shows
alarm messages in multiple lines.
For more information, see “7 Event Log”.
Alarm Bar - Displays alarm messages in one scrolling line.
Alarm Display – Displays alarm messages in multiple lines.
Click [Data/History] » [Alarm Display] or [Alarm Bar] icon on the toolbar to open the object
property dialog box. Set up the properties, press OK button, and a new object will be created.
General Tab
The difference between these two objects is that Alarm Display allows an [Acknowledge
address] and a [Scrolling control address] to be set.

Objects 13-134
Setting Description
Enable If selected, the [Acknowledge value] selected for the associated
acknowledge event, specified in Alarm (Event) Log » Message tab will be written to
function the [Acknowledge address] designated in Alarm Display. For more
information, see “7 Event Log”.
Scrolling If enabled, the value in the designated control address indicates the
control number of lines to be scrolled down. The minimal value is 0, which
address indicates the first line. Please note that with this address enabled,
the horizontal and vertical scroll bars will not be available on the
object; please make sure that the width of the object is enough for
completely showing the content.
Note
 When using cMT-SVR, press and hold the event on the screen to acknowledge an event;
drag a finger on the screen to scroll.

Objects 13-135
Alarm Tab
Alarm Bar Alarm Display
Alarm Display object has extra settings compared to Alarm Bar object: [Occurrence count] and
[Elapsed time]. The table below introduces the settings shared between these two objects.
Setting Description
Include Events in the selected category will be displayed. The categories are
categories set in Event (Alarm) Log object.
For example, if the category is set to “2 to 4” here, only events in
categories 2, 3, 4 will be displayed. For more information, see “7
Event Log”.
Scroll speed This selection is only available for Alarm Bar. Select one of the
speed settings at which the messages scroll.
Move When this option is selected, the message will move along the
smoothly alarm bar more smoothly. Please note that enabling this may lead
to high CPU loading.
Format Time ascending
Latest alarm is placed last in the list (the bottom).
Time descending
Latest alarm is placed first in the list (the top).

Objects 13-136
Display order
Select the items to be displayed and use the up and down arrow
buttons to adjust the display order of the alarms.
Date
Displays the date tag with each alarm message. The four formats of
date tag:
MM/DD/YY、DD/MM/YY、DD/MM/YY、YY/MM/DD
Time
Displays the time tag with each alarm message. The four formats of
time tag:
HH:MM:SS、HH:MM、DD:HH:MM、HH
Security Tab
Alarm Bar Alarm Display
Setting Description
Interlock When [Use interlock function] check box is selected,
whether the object is operable is determined by the
state of a designated Bit address. As shown in the above
settings, if LB-0 is ON, the object is operable.

Objects 13-137
Hide when disabled

When the designated Bit is OFF, the object will be
hidden.
User Set the security class of the object to be operated by an
restriction authorized user.
Object class
“None” means any user can operate this object. Only
class.
Make invisible while protected
When the user's privilege does not match the object
class, the object will be hidden.
When this check box is deselected in Alarm Display
object settings, the unauthorized user can see the Alarm
Display object, but cannot trigger the object or make any
change.
This check box is greyed out in Alarm Bar object settings.
Font Tab
Set the font size or select [Italic].
The font, color, and content of the alarm messages displayed in Alarm Bar and Alarm Display
objects are set in Alarm (Event) Log object:

Objects 13-138

Objects 13-139
13.22. Event Display
13.22.1. Overview
Event Display object is used to display event messages which are defined in Event (Alarm) Log
and have met a trigger condition. The triggered events are displayed in the chronological order.
Event Display object displays: the date and time the event occurs, the time the event is
acknowledged, the time the event returns to normal, the event message, the occurrence count,
and the elapsed time. Multi-lined messages can also be displayed.
Click [Data/History] »[ Event Display] icon on the toolbar to open an Event Display object
property dialog box. Set up the properties, press OK button, and a new Event Display object
will be created.

Objects 13-140
General Tab
Setting Description
Mode The available modes are: [Real-time] and [History].
 Real-time
All the events triggered since HMI starts up are displayed.
 History
The system reads the event log in HMI memory and displays
them. The content can be updated by changing window. In case
when the trend display shows history data from today, the
display will refresh once per second.
Acknowledge When in Real-time mode, and an event is acknowledged by touching
address an active display line, the [Acknowledge value] specified in Event
(Alarm) Log object, Message tab, is output to the [Acknowledge
address] of Event Display object. For more information, see “7 Event
Log”.

Objects 13-141
History When in History mode, and if:

Control  [Enable reading multiple histories] is not selected
Daily event log files can be displayed. A history control address can
be designated. The value in the designated register is used as an
index to select historical files.
Index value 0 displays the latest file.
Index value 1 displays the second latest file.
Index value 2 displays the third latest file, and so on.
If control address to LW-100, and four data log exist with dates:
EL_20100720.evt, EL_20100723.evt, EL_20100727.evt, and
EL_20100803.evt.
Each index value in the control word corresponds to a record
according to the table below:
Value in LW-100 The corresponding record
0 EL_20100803.evt
1 EL_20100727.evt
2 EL_20100723.evt
3 EL_20100720.evt
 [Enable reading multiple histories] is selected
Displays a list of events triggered in multiple days. If [History control]
address is set to LW-n, the LW-n to LW-n+1 form a range of log
selection. Please note that the control address leads to different
results in “Number of days” mode and in “Index of the last history”
mode.
Number of days
Display range is determined by the value in control address. [LW-n]
marks the number of days from today as the start date of display,
and [LW-n+1] marks the number of days preceding the start date,
inclusive of the start date, as the end date.
Example: If today were 2010/6/10, and the value in LW-n is 1,
LW-n+1 is 3, then the data range will start from 1 day from today
(LW-n = 1), which is 20100609 (yesterday) in this case, and include
data for the preceding 3 days, inclusive of 20100609. As a result, the
data displayed should be 20100607~20100609. Since 20100607 does
not exist in this example, the data displayed will be from 20100609
and 20100608.
Index of the last history

The value in control address [LW-n] marks the index value of the

Objects 13-142
record to start, and the value in [LW-n+1] marks the index value of
the record to end. If LW-n = 1, and LW-n+1 = 3, the data displayed
will include data No.1, No.2, No.3.
Please note that the value in [LW-n+1] must be greater than the
value in [LW-n], to form a valid range.
The maximum size of data that can be displayed is 4MB; the
exceeding part will be ignored.
The following shows how data will be stored when the data size is
too big.
5 history data, each 0.5MB  Data displayed: 8 x 0.5MB
5 history data, each 1MB  Data displayed: 4 x 1MB
5 history data, each 1.5MB  Data displayed:
2 x 1.5MB+1 x 1MB (partial)
Control Enable event management
address If this check box is selected, writing a specific value into register
LW-n and LW-n+1, where n is an arbitrary number, will control [Event
Display] object with different commands as shown below:
Address Value Command
LW-n 0 Display all events.
1 Hide [Confirmed] events.
2 Hide [Recovered] events.
3 Hide [Confirmed] or [Recovered] events.
4 Hide [Confirmed] and [Recovered] events.
LW-n+1 1 Delete a single selected event.
Scrolling If enabled, the value in the designated control address indicates the
control number of lines to be scrolled down. The minimal value is 0, which
address indicates the first line.
In the following figure, there are 10 events recorded in the object,
and value 3 is set at the control address. The upper event object
displays the events in time ascending order, and begins at the 4 th
event; on the other hand, the lower one displays the events in time
descending order, and begins at the 7th event.

Objects 13-143
If [Scrolling control address] is enabled, the scroll bar cannot be used

for scrolling, but still shows the relative position of the content. If the
control address holds a value that is larger than the total number of
lines, the display will stroll to the end. Please note that with this
address enabled, the horizontal and vertical scroll bars will not be
available on the object; please make sure that the width of the
object is enough for completely showing the content.
For cMT Series, all the events occur are displayed and updated in real-time.
Press the filter icon in the upper-right corner of the object and set the start and end date. If the
dates are not set, all the events are displayed.

Objects 13-144
Event Display Tab
Setting Description
Include Events in the selected category will be displayed. The categories are
categories set in Event (Alarm) Log object.
For example, if the category is set to 2 to 4 here, only events in
categories 2, 3, 4 will be displayed. For more information, see “7
Event Log”.
Acknowledge Select [Click] or [Double Click] to acknowledge each single event.
style (eMT, iE, When an event occurs the user can tap the event line once or twice
XE, mTV to acknowledge the new event.
When acknowledged, the text color of the event will change to the
Series)
selected color, and the acknowledge value associated with that
event will be sent to the register designated in [Acknowledge
address]. If the address is set to LW-100, and the acknowledge
value is set to 31, when user acknowledges the event, value 31 is
written to LW-100.
This can be used in conjunction with Indirect Window object so
that when an event is acknowledged, the corresponding message
window is displayed.
Max. event The maximum number of events to be displayed in this Event
no. (eMT, iE, Display object. When the number of the displayed events equals to

Objects 13-145
XE, mTV the set maximum number, the new coming event will overwrite the
Series) latest event.
Color Different colors indicate different event states, such as
acknowledged, returns to normal, or selected. The system draws a
highlight box around the latest selected event.
History background (eMT, iE, XE, mTV)

When using Event Display object and select History mode, the
background color of the history record can be customized.
Grid Displays a grid of rows and columns in the object. The color of the
grid lines can be selected.
Auto fit short column (cMT Series Default style)
The column width automatically adjusts to the size of the content.
Caption (cMT Available styles are: Default, Crystal, and Flat.
Series) With [Use caption] enabled, the font size, color, and name of the
caption can be specified for Recipt View object.

Objects 13-146
Sort Tab
Setting Description
Sort Time ascending
Latest event is placed last in the list (the bottom).
Time descending
Latest event is placed first in the list (the top).
Order & Select the items to be displayed and use the up and down arrow
Characters buttons to adjust the display order of the events.
Date Displays the date tag with each event message. The four formats of
date tag: MM/DD/YY、DD/MM/YY、DD/MM/YY、YY/MM/DD
Time Displays the time tag with each event message. The four formats of
time tag: HH:MM:SS、HH:MM、DD:HH:MM、HH

Objects 13-147
Security Tab
Setting Description
Interlock When [Use interlock function] check box is selected,
whether the object is operable is determined by the
state of a designated Bit address. As shown in the above
settings, if LB-0 is ON, the object is operable.
Hide when disabled
When the designated Bit is OFF, the object will be
hidden.
User Set the security class of the object to be operated by an
restriction authorized user.
Object class
“None” means any user can operate this object. Only
class.
Make invisible while protected
When the user's privilege does not match the object
class, the object will be hidden.

Objects 13-148
When this check box is deselected, the unauthorized

user can see the Event Display object, but cannot trigger
the object or make any change.
Font Tab
In Real-time mode: Users may select Italic font and set the font size. The font is displayed
according to the setting in Event Log object.
In History mode: Users may select Italic font and set the font size, font and color, or tick the
[Font from label library] check box.
Empty Warning
When [Use empty warning] is enabled, the text displayed when no event has occurred can be
specified.

Objects 13-149
13.23. Data Transfer (Trigger-based)
13.23.1. Overview
Data Transfer (Trigger-based) object can transfer values from the source register to the
destination register. The data transfer operation can be activated by changing the state of the
designated bit register, or by manually pressing the object.
For cMT Series, only touch trigger mode is available.
Click [Object] » [Data Transfer] » [Data Transfer (Trigger-based)] icon on the toolbar to open the
property dialog box. Set up the properties, press OK button, and a new Data Transfer
(Trigger-based) object will be created.
General Tab

Objects 13-150
Setting Description
Source
Data Transfer object reads the data from [Source Address].
address
Destination
Data Transfer object writes the data to [Destination Address].
address
Attribute No. of words
The number of words to be transferred from [Source Address] to
[Destination Address]. The unit is word.
Mode
Touch trigger
Press the object to activate data transfer operation.
External trigger
The data transfer operation is activated when the state of the
designated bit address changes.
There is a further selection to make of whether the data transfer
operation is activated after Off to ON, ON to OFF transition, or at
both of the changes of state.
Trigger
Specify a bit address for [External trigger] mode.
address
Notification When enabled, the system will set the designated address ON or
OFF when it’s ready for data transfer.
Follow
The notification bit will reset to its original state once the system
starts data transfer.
Note
 When using Data Transfer Trigger Based object, place the control bit addresses in the
same window in order to trigger Data Transfer. If the Data Transfer Trigger Based object is
placed in the common window, when the state of the control bit addresses placed in any
window changes, Data Transfer is triggered.

Objects 13-151
13.24. Backup
13.24.1. Overview
Backup (Trigger-based) object and Backup (Global) object can transmit recipe data (RW, RW_A),
event log, recipe database, sampling data, and operation log to an external device (SD card,
USB disk), in a specified time range or format. For example, when the event log is saved in a SD
card, a USB disk can be inserted when HMI power is still ON, and use Backup object to copy the
data into USB disk from SD card, and then remove USB disk without turning off HMI power. The
data saved in USB disk can be used on PC for analyzing. When the system is backing up, the
state of system register [LB-9039] is set ON. With [e-Mail] option, information can be sent to
configured email contacts.
Backup (Trigger-based) object is triggered by pressing the object on the screen while Backup
(Global) object runs in the background regardless of screens being viewed. Backup (Global)
object is available only on cMT Series models.
On the toolbar click [Object] » [File Operation] to find [Backup (Trigger-based)] and [Backup
(Global) objects.
Open [Backup (Trigger-based)] object property dialog box, set up the properties, press OK
button, and a new Backup (Trigger-based) object will be created.
When using a cMT Series model, [Backup (Global)] object is available. Open [Backup (Global)]
object managing dialog box, click [New] to open the object property dialog box, set up the
properties, press OK button, and a new Backup (Global) object will be created.

Objects 13-152
General Tab
Backup (Trigger-based)
Backup (Global) cMT Series

Objects 13-153
Setting Description
Source [RW], [RW_A], [Recipe database], [Historical event log],
[Historical data sampling], [Operation log]
Select one from the above for the source. When backing up
[Historical data log], use [Data Sampling object index] to select the
one to back up.
Options other than RW, RW_A will be available only when they are
used in the project file.
Backup Select the destination where the source files will be saved to.
position SD card / USB disk
The external device connected to HMI.
If using cMT series, SD card and USB disk can only save [RW],
[RW_A], and [Recipe database].
Remote printer/backup server (eMT, iE, XE, mTV Series)
To select this, enable MT remote printer/backup server at: [Menu]
» [Edit] » [System Parameters] » [Printer/Backup Server].
Please note that [Operation log] backup can only be saved to
Remote printer/backup server. To save into a SD card or USB drive,
please use the control address of Operation Log object.
For more information, see “26 EasyPrinter”.
E-mail
To use e-mail, go to [System Parameters] » [e-Mail] tab to configure
first. And then go to Backup object » [e-Mail] tab to configure the
recipient address, subject, and message.
Save format Select the desired format to back up the file.
eMT, iE, XE, mTV Series:
 HMI Event Log File (.evt) / HMI Data Log File (.dtl)
 Comma Separated Values (.csv)
The [Event] column is included in the backup file to indicate the
type of the event.
0 = Event is triggered
1 = Event is acknowledged
2 = Event returns to normal

Objects 13-154
EasyConverter can be used to easily convert HMI Event Log File

(.evt) and HMI Data Log File (.dtl) to .xls or .csv format.
 SQLite Database File (.db)
cMT Series:
 SQLite Database File (.db) (Only for backup to e-mail)
 Comma Separated Values (.csv)
Add BOM (Byte Order Mark) to file header for EXCEL can
interpreting non-ASCII strings correctly.
When back up event log in .csv format, open the csv file in EXCEL.
The BOM (Byte Order Mark) can be added to the file header so that
the .csv file containing non-ASCII strings can directly be opened in
EXCEL. The title, export time, occurrence count, and elapsed time
can be included or omitted in the backed-up .csv file.
Event This groupbox will be available only when backing up a historical

category event log in CSV format. Two options can be found in this group
range box: All and Partial. Selecting partial and entering “3, 5, 8” in the
field will backup events in categories 3, 5, and 8. Selecting partial
and entering “3-8” will backup events in categories 3 to 8.
Range Historical data sampling
Select a number of files. For example, if [Start] is set to [Current],
and [Within] is set to [5 file(s)], the latest five files in memory will
be backed up.
Historical eventlog
Select a number of days. For example, if [Start] is set to [Yesterday],
and [Within] is set to [2 day(s)], the files obtained yesterday and
the day before yesterday will be backed up. Select [All] to save all
files, and the maximum is 90 days.
Trigger Mode
There are three ways to activate Backup function.
Touch trigger
Touch the Backup object to activate backup operation.
External trigger (bit)
Register a bit device to trigger the backup operation.

Objects 13-155
Select whether the backup operation is activated after Off to ON,

ON to OFF transition, or at both of the changes of state.
External trigger (word)
Users can specify the number of days to backup data using [Trigger
address]. [Trigger address] usage (suppose LW-n is used):
LW-n: Will start to back up when the value changes from 0 to 1.
LW-n+1: The start date of backup.
LW-n+2: The number of days for backup. (The maximum: 90 days).
On cMT-SVR, Backup (Trigger-based) object only supports [Touch

trigger] mode but not [External trigger (bit)] and [External trigger
(word)] modes.
Trigger When the state of the designated register is set ON, the backup
address operation is activated. When the backup operation is done, the
state of the designated register is set OFF.
Note
 All history files should have been saved in memory, either HMI memory, USB disk or SD
card. Otherwise, the Backup object will not work.
 The maximum number of days for backup is 90 days. (Not including cMT Series)
 When saving files to USB disk or SD card, the capacity of a FAT32 folder depends on the
length of the file names. Fewer files can be saved when the file names are longer.
For cMT Series, see “7 Event Log” and “8 Data Sampling” that explain the mechanism of

Objects 13-156
synchronizing data to external device.

Advance Tab (eMT, iE, XE, mTV)
Setting Description
Serial number If enabled, when backing up history files, a user-defined, 5-digit
serial number can be appended to the end of the file name of the
history data backup.
The serial number is determined by the value in the designated
source address. After backup, the value of this LW address will
automatically increment by 1.
The range of the serial number is 0~65535
For example, if the serial number is 123, the appended 5 digits will
be 00123.
A data sampling file -20140407.dtl will be backed up as
2014040700123.dtl.
An event log file -20140407.evt will be backed up as
2014040700123.evt.
Options Remove old files after backup
If selected, the old history files will be removed after backup.
Note
 cMT Series does not support Advance settings.

Objects 13-157
e-Mail Tab
Setting Description
Add .txt
extension to If selected, when sending backup data as an email attachment, the
the filename filename extension .txt will be added to the file name. This
to skip the prevents the mail server or anti-virus software from blocking
anti-virus emails.
detection
Recipients,
Back up the email address of the recipients, the subject of the
Subject,
email, and the message content.
Message

Objects 13-158
13.25. Media Player
13.25.1. Overview
At the first time using Media Player object in the project, download the project to HMI via
Ethernet. EasyBuilder Pro installs Media Player driver automatically.
Media Player object plays video files with controls such as seek, zoom, and volume adjustment
to provide maintenance instructions or procedures on video so as to enable on-site operators
to perform tasks efficiently.
This object does not work remotely on cMT Viewer.
Click [Object] » [Media Player] icon on the toolbar to open a Media Player object property
dialog box. Set up the properties, press OK button, and a new Media Player object will be
created.
General Tab
cMT (excluding cMT-SVR, cMT-HDM, cMT-FHD) eMT, XE

Objects 13-159
Setting Description
Use UI control Use media control provided by user interface.
Resume previous playback / Resume after restart
Resume Media Player when changing from another window to the
window where Media Player is.
Control  Selected
address Designate a word register to control the object operations.
 Not selected
No manual control. Video will be played automatically when the
designated window opens.
Command (control address + 0)
Enter a value in the Command register to designate which action is
executed.
Parameter 1 (control address + 1)
Enter a value in Parameter 1 associated with each command action.
Parameter 2 (control address + 2)
Enter a value in Parameter 2 associated with each command action.
Status (control address + 3)
Indicates the status or errors.
File index (control address + 4)
The file number in the designated folder. It is recommended to file
the video name with a number.
Start time (control address + 5)
The start time of the video (second). 0, normally.
End time (control address + 6)
The end time of the video (second). (The time length of the video)
Update video playing time
If enabled, the elapsed playing time of video will be written into
[Playing time] register at a rate set by [Update period] in seconds.
Update period
Update period of [Playing time], range from 1 to 60 (second).
Playing time (control address + 7)
The elapsed playing time of video (Second). Normally between
start time and end time.
Ext. device Play video files in SD card / USB disk.
Folder name
The folder name of video files stored in SD card or USB disk. Files
must be stored in root directory. Subdirectories won’t be accepted.
(For example, “example\ex” is an invalid directory.)
[Folder name] cannot be empty, must be alpha-numeric, and all in
ASCII character.
Attribute Auto. repeat

Objects 13-160
When finish playing all the video files, replay from the first file.
Ex: Video 1 > Video 2 > Video 1 > Video 2
Background
The background color of the object.
Note
 The data format for control address is 16-bit Unsigned or 16-bit Signed. If using 32-bit
Unsigned or 32-bit Signed, only the previous 16 bits will be effective.
Control command
The following are the settings of different commands.

 Play index file
[Command] = 1
[Parameter 1] = file index
[Parameter 2] = ignore (set 0)
Note
 Files are stored with file names in ascending order.
 If the file cannot be found, [Status] bit 8 is set ON.
 Please stop the playing video before switching to another.
 Play previous file

[Command] = 2
Note
 If [File index] is zero, the same file is replayed.
 Play next file

[Command] = 3
 If there are no more files, the index 0 file is played.
 Pause / Play Switch

[Command] = 4

Objects 13-161
 Stop playing and close file

[Command] = 5
 Start playing from the designated time
[Command] = 6
[Parameter 1] = target time (second)
Note
 Parameter 1 (target time) must be less than the ending of time or it plays the last second.
 Forward
[Command] = 7
Note
 Going forward to the designated second in [Parameter 1]. If the video is paused, the
forwarding action will be started by playing.
 When the designed time is later than the end time, it plays the last second.
 Backward
[Command] = 8
Note
 Going Backward to the designated second in [Parameter 1], if the video is paused, the
backward action will be started by playing.
 When the designed time is earlier than the beginning time, it plays from beginning.
 Adjust volume
[Command] = 9
[Parameter 1] = volume (0 ~ 128)

Objects 13-162
Note
 Default volume is 128.
 Set video display size
[Command] = 10
[Parameter 1] = display size (0 ~ 16)
Note
 [Parameter 1 = 0]：Fit video image to object size.
 [Parameter 1 = 1 ~ 16]：Magnification from 25% ~ 400% in 25% increments where 1 = 25%,
2 = 50%, 3 = 75% and so on.
 Status (control address + 3)

When playing a video the system sets [File Open (bit00)] and [File Playing (bit01)] to ON. If the
file cannot be found, or an invalid command is entered, the Command Error bit 08 is set ON. If
the file format is not supported, or a disk I/O error occurs, during playback (for example, USB
disk unplugged), the File Error bit 09 is set ON.
00: File Opened / Closed (0 = closed, 1 = opened)

01: File Playing (0 = not playing, 1 = playing)
08: Command Error (0 = accepted, 1 = incorrect)
09: File Error (0 = accepted, 1 = incorrect)
Note
 The figure shows the status value associated with each state:
Stop = 0, Pause = 1, Playing = 3
 [Command], [Parameter 1], and [Parameter 2] are write addresses. All others are read
only.

Objects 13-163
Preview Tab
Users can test whether the video format is supported by using the preview function.
Setting Description
Forward << /
Go forward or backward of the video. (in minutes)
Backward >>
Play / Pause Select to start playing video or pausing.
Stop Stop playing and close the video file. To test another video, please
stop playing the current video first.
Load Select a video to preview.
Note
 Only one video file can be played at one time.
 If [control address] is not enabled and [Auto. repeat] is not selected, after finish playing
the first file, the system will stop playing and close the video file.
 If [control address] is not enabled, the system will find the first file in the designated
folder and start to play (in ascending order of the file name).
 If the file can be previewed, the format is supported. If the video image quality is poor,
please adjust the resolution.
 The supported formats: mpeg4, xvid, flv…etc.

Objects 13-164
13.26. Data Transfer
13.26.1. Overview
Data Transfer (Time-based) object has similar function compared to Data Transfer
(Trigger-based) object. They transfer the data from source to destination register. The
difference is that Data Transfer (Time-based) object transfers data based on time schedule, and
is able to transfer data in bits.
When using cMT Series, Data Transfer (Time-based) object is divided into two modes:
[Time-based] and [Bit trigger]. In these two modes, the system automatically detects the state
of the designated bit register and executes data transfer. [Time-based] mode is the same as
described earlier, where [Bit trigger] mode transfers data when the state of the designated bit
register changes. For the detail of [Bit trigger] mode, see “13.26.2.2 Data Transfer Bit Trigger”.
Click [Object] » [Data Transfer] » [Data Transfer (Time-based)] icon on the toolbar to open the
Data Transfer management dialog box. Click [New] and configure the properties. All the
defined Data Transfer can be viewed from the dialog box as shown in the following figure.
eMT, iE, XE, mTV Series

Objects 13-165
cMT Series
13.26.2.1. Data Transfer Time-based
General Tab
Click the [New] button in the Data Transfer management dialog box.
Setting Description
Attribute Address type
Select the data type, either [Bit] or [Word].
No. of bits /No. of words
When [Bit] is selected in [Address type], set the number of bits
transferred each time when data transfer is triggered.
When [Word] is selected in [Address type], set the number of
words transferred each time when data transfer is triggered.

Objects 13-166
Interval
Select the time interval of data transfer, for example, when 3
seconds is set, the system will transfer data every 3 seconds.
Specifying a short time interval or a big number of data to transfer
may cause an overall performance of system decrease. Therefore, it
is recommended that users choose a longer time interval and a
smaller amount of data to transfer.
When a short interval is inevitable, be aware of the interval must
be longer than the data transfer operation. For example, if the data
transfer operation takes 2 seconds, set the interval longer than 2
seconds.
Activate only
when
Data Transfer object transfers data only when the designated
designated
window is opened.
window
opened
Source
address
Destination
address
Follow
13.26.2.2. Data Transfer Bit Trigger
General Tab
Click the [New] button in the Data Transfer management dialog box, and open [Bit trigger] tab.

Objects 13-167
Setting Description
Source
address
Destination
address
No. of word Set the number of words transferred each time when data transfer
is triggered.
Trigger Set the register that controls data transfer and select the trigger
address mode.
Trigger mode
Trigger data transfer when the state of the designated register
changes from Off to ON, ON to OFF, or at both of the changes of
state.
Follow

Objects 13-168
13.27. PLC Control
13.27.1. Overview
PLC Control object can execute commands when it is triggered.
Click [Object] » [PLC Control] icon on the toolbar to open the PLC Control Object management
dialog box. To add a PLC Control object, click [New], set up the properties, press OK button and
a new PLC Control object will be created.
Click [New] and the following dialog box appears. See “13.27.2.1 Type of Control”.
Note
 The [General PLC Control] option is not available for cMT Series.
 Triggering [Screen hardcopy] in cMT Viewer will result in files being saved into the USB
disk / SD card connected to the cMT HMI. Likewise, the [Back light control] option in cMT
Viewer will control the backlight of the HMI itself.

Objects 13-169
 Selecting [Change window] or [General PLC Control] as [Type of control] will require more
than one trigger word (consecutive). Using a user-defined tag PLC will require declaring an
array datatype.
13.27.2.1. Type of Control
 Change window
Setting Description
Active only when
designated Allow this operation only if a particular screen is displayed.
window opened
Turn on back light The backlight is turned ON when the window is changed.
Clear data after Reset the value at trigger address to zero when the window
window changed object is changed. If [Use window no. offset] is selected, this
option will only show when a negative offset is used.
Use window no. Select the check box and select a window offset, the new
offset window no. to change to will be the value in [Trigger address]
plus the offset. For example, if [Trigger address] is LW-0 and
offset is set to -10. When the value in LW-0 is 25, the system
will change to window no. 15 (25-10=15). The range of the
offset is -1024 to 1024.
Note
 If [LB-9017] is set ON, the write-back function will be disabled, the new window number is
not written back into a designated address.
Place a valid window number in the designated trigger address to change the base screen to
the new window number. The new window number is written back into the designated

Objects 13-170
address.
For example, if current window is window no. 10, and [Trigger address] is set to LW-0,
When LW-0 is changed to 11, the system will change the current window to window no. 11,
and then write 11 to LW-1.
When the window is changed, the new window number is written back into the address that is
calculated by [Trigger address] and the data format, as shown in following table.
Data Format Trigger address Write address
16-bit BCD Address Address + 1
32-bit BCD Address Address + 2
16-bit Unsigned Address Address + 1
16-bit Signed Address Address + 1
32-bit Unsigned Address Address + 2
32-bit Signed Address Address + 2
 Write data to PLC (current base window)
Each time the base window is changed, the new window number will be written into the
[Trigger address]. If [Use window no. offset] is selected, the window number of the base
window plus the window number offset will be written into the [Trigger address].
 General PLC Control (eMT, iE, XE, mTV)
Transfer word data blocks from PLC to HMI, and vise-versa, and the transfer direction is
controlled by the value in the [Trigger address].
Value in Action
[Trigger address]
1 Transfer data from PLC register  HMI RW register
2 Transfer data from PLC register  HMI LW register
3 Transfer data from HMI RW register  PLC register
4 Transfer data from HMI LW register  PLC register
Four consecutive word registers are used as described in the following table:
Address Purpose Description
[Trigger Determine the The valid values are listed in the
address] direction of data above table. When a new control

Objects 13-171
transfer code is written into the register,

HMI will start to transfer. After data
transfer is finished, the value will
be set to 0.
[Trigger The size of data The unit is word.
address] +1 to transfer.
[Trigger Offset to the Assume the value is “n”, where n is
address] +2 start address of an arbitrary number, the start
PLC register address of PLC register is [Trigger
address + 4 + n].
Take an OMRON PLC as an
example:
If [Trigger address] uses DM-100,
[Trigger address + 2] will be
DM-102. If the value in DM-102 is
5, the start address of data source
would be DM-109 (100 + 4 + 5 =
109).
[Trigger Offset to the Take OMRON PLC as an example:
address] +3 start address of If set [Trigger address] to DM-100,
LW or RW [Trigger address + 3] will be
memory in HMI DM-103. If the value in DM-103 is
100, the start address of memory
in HMI is RW-100 or LW-100.
Example 1
To use PLC Control object to transfer 16 words data in OMRON PLC, starting from address
DM-100, to the HMI address, starting from RW-200. The setting is shown below:
1. Firstly, create a PLC Control object, set [Type of control] to [General PLC control], and set
[Trigger address] to DM-10, that is, to use the four sequential registers start from DM-10
to control data transfer.
2. Confirm the data size and the offset addresses.
Set DM-11 to 16, since the number of words to transfer is 16 words.
Set DM-12 to 86, which indicates the address of data source is DM-100 (100=10+4+86).
Set DM-13 to 200, which indicates the destination address is RW-200.
3. Set DM-10 according to the direction of data transfer.
If set DM-10 to 1, the data will be transferred from PLC to HMI RW register,
If set DM-10 to 3, the data will be transferred from HMI RW register to PLC.

Objects 13-172
 Back light control (write back)

When [Trigger address] is turned ON, HMI backlight will be turned ON/OFF and [Trigger
address] will be turned OFF. Any touch on the screen will turn the backlight on.
 Back light control
When [Trigger address] is turned ON, HMI backlight will turn ON/OFF and the state of [Trigger
address] will not be changed.
 Sound control
When the state of the designated [Trigger address] changes, the HMI will play the sound
selected from the sound library. There is a further selection determines whether the sound is
played after Off to ON, ON to OFF transition, or at both of the changes of state.
 Execute macro program
Select a pre-defined Macro from the drop-down list. When the state of the designated [Trigger
address] changes, the selected Macro is executed. There is a further selection determines
whether the Macro is executed after Off to ON, ON to OFF transition, or at both of the changes
of state. If select [Always active when ON], the macro will be executed repeatedly. (The
shortest time interval between runs is 0.5 second.)
 Screen hardcopy
When the state of the designated [Trigger address] changes, print the selected screen. If select
[SD card] or [USB disk] as [Printer], a “hardcopy” folder will be generated in the selected

Objects 13-173
external device for saving the printed screen in JPG format. The name of the JPG files starts
from yyyymmdd_0000.
To print the screen using a printer, go to System Parameter Settings » Model tab and set the
printer.
To print the screen using a remote printer, go to System Parameter Settings » Printer/Backup
Server tab and configure the parameters.
There are three options to specify the source window for hardcopy:
Current base window
Print the base window currently opened.
Window no. from register
Print the window designated by the value in a designated word address.
Designate window no.
Directly select a window to be printed.
Customized File Handling
This feature can be used to customize naming of the folders and the JPG files.
Setting Description
Folder name The folder name can be an alphanumeric name, and
certain half-width symbols are allowed:
!@#$%^&()_+{}`-=;',.
The folder name can also be specified by a naming syntax.
Dynamic format
The folder names can be set by a designated word
address, or by a naming syntax indicating the current
system time. The syntax can be specified by selecting
time buttons or entering the syntax in Format field. The
length limit is from 1 to 25.
Note: Up to 10 layers of folders can be created. The
exceeding layers will be ignored.
File name The way to specify a file name is similar to specifying a
folder name.
Note: If the file name already exists, the system will add
“_0001” to the file name as a serial number. The numbers
of the later files add up until “_9999”. The files after
“_9999” will be ignored.
For example, if the three file names exist: “A.jpg”,
“A_0001.jpg”,“A_0003.jpg”. When trigger screen
hardcopy with the same file name, the coming files will
be named in this order: “A_0002.jpg”, “A_0004.jpg”,

Objects 13-174
”A_0005.jpg”, and so on.
Note
 A background printing procedure is performed when the printed window is not the
current base window.
 If the hard-copied window is a background window, its [Direct Window] and [Indirect
Window] objects will not be printed.
 When using a dynamic format name, the system will use a “_” sign as a substitute for
invalid symbols.
 When using a dynamic format name, if screen hardcopy is triggered without specifying
the format first, the system will save the file in the default directory, which is:
hardcopy\yymmdd_0000.JPG

Objects 13-175
13.28. Scheduler
13.28.1. Overview
Scheduler object turns bits ON/OFF, or writes values to word registers at designated start times.
It works on a weekly basis.
Click [Object] » [Time-related] » [Scheduler] icon on the toolbar to open the Scheduler
management dialog box, click [New] to open the Scheduler property setting dialog box.
The following two demonstrations explain the usage of Scheduler.

Example 1
A motor is scheduled to power - ON at 9:00 and power – OFF at 18:00, Monday to Friday.
We are using LB-100 to control the motor state. LB-100 will be set ON at 9:00 and OFF at 18:00.
1. Click the Scheduler icon on the toolbar to open the Scheduler management dialog box,
click [New].
2. In [General] tab, select [Bit ON] in [Action mode] and set [Action address] to LB-100.
3. In [Time Set] tab, select [Constant].

Objects 13-176
4. Enter [Start] time as 9:00:00 and select Monday to Friday. Do not select [Setting on
individual day].
5. Enter [End] time as 18:00:00 and select [Enable termination action] check box.
6. Click [OK], a new Scheduler object will be created on the [Scheduler] list.
Example 2
A thermal heater is scheduled to heat up to 90°C at 08:00 and cool down to 30°C at 17:00,
Monday to Friday. LW-100 is used to store the set point value.
1. Click the Scheduler icon on the toolbar to open the Scheduler management dialog box,
click [New].
2. In [General] tab, select [Word write] in [Action mode] and set [Action address] to LW-100.
3. Select [Constant] for [Word write value settings] and enter 90 in [Start value].
4. In [Time set] tab select [Constant].

5. Enter [Start] time as 8:00:00 and select Monday to Friday. Do not select [Setting on
individual day].
6. Enter [End] time as 17:00:00 and select [Enable termination action] check box.
7. Return to [General] tab and enter 30 in [End value].
8. Click [OK], a new schedule object will be created on the [Scheduler] list.

Objects 13-177
General Tab
Setting Description
Power ON Execute the defined action when the HMI is powered ON.
start/end  Enabled
action When HMI is powered ON within the scheduled time range, the
start action will be performed automatically. When HMI is powered
ON outside the scheduled time range, the termination action will
be executed.
 Disabled
When the HMI is powered ON at a time later than the start time,
the start action will not be performed, but the termination action
will be performed. When the termination action is not defined, the
scheduled range is not recognized and no action is performed.

Objects 13-178
Action mode Choose the action to do at the given time.

Bit ON
At the start time, set the designated bit ON. At the end time, set
the designated bit OFF.
Example: Start time : 09:00:00 End time : 17:00:00
Bit OFF
At the start time, set the designated bit OFF. At the end time, set
the designated bit ON.
Example: Start time : 09:00:00 End time : 17:00:00
Word write
The [Write start value] entered here is transferred to the
designated [Action address] word register at the start time. At end
time, the [Write end value] entered here is written to the [Action
address]. The valued can be entered manually or be set by using
[Address] mode. In [Address] mode, the value in the specified
address is the start value where the value in [Address + 1] is the
end value.
Example: Device address: LW-100
Start time: 09:00:00 End time: 17:00:00
Write start value: 10 Write end value: 0
Use register: If control address is LW-n, then enter 10 in LW-n and
enter 0 in LW-(n+1).

Objects 13-179
Note
 Only is an [End time] is set in the [Time set] tab will the [Write end value] box appear.
Time Set
Specify start time and end time. [Constant] allows specifying a date or period and time.
[Address] allows controlling the time by the designated address.
 Constant
Setting on individual day
If [Setting on individual day] is selected
The same start time and end time can be assigned to different days of the week.

Objects 13-180
Note
 Start and end time must be entered.
 Start and end time must be on a different time, or same time but different day.
If [Setting on individual day] is not selected
Start time and end time entered must start and end within 24-hours.
Note
 Start time and end time must be on a different time, different day.
 If an end time is earlier than a start time, the end action will occur in the next day.
 Address
The scheduler object retrieves the start/end time and day of week information from word
registers, enabling all parameters to be set and changed under PLC or user control.
Designated as the top address in a block of 11 sequential registers which are used to store time
setting data.
The format of the 11 word registers should normally be 16-unsigned integer. If a 32-bit word
address is chosen, only bits 0-15 are effective, and bits 16-31 should be written as zero.
The following describes each register.
Control (Time setting address + 0)
When [Control] bit is ON, the HMI will read and update [Action mode], [Start time], and [End
time] values.

Objects 13-181
Note
 HMI will not regularly read the data from [Action mode] (address + 2) to [End time]
(address + 10). Please turn [Control] ON when the settings are changed.
Status (Time setting address + 1)
When the read operation is completed, Bit00 of this register turns ON. If time data read is out
of range or incorrect in any way Bit01 turns ON.
Note
 After the scheduler reads the data and the status is turned ON (The value in [Address + 1]
= 01), the control bit must be turned OFF (address = 0). The status bit and error bit will be
turned OFF (10) at the same time.

Objects 13-182
Action mode (Time setting address + 2)

Enable/disable [Enable termination action] and [Setting on individual day]. Whatever the
[Enable termination action] bit is, all the time data, from [Control] to [End time (second)], will
be read.
Note
 If [Enable termination action] is OFF, all 11 registers are still read but end time is ignored.
 If [Setting on individual day] is ON, make sure that all start end times are entered. If more
than one start / end day bit is ON, and error will occur.
Start/End Day (Start Day: Time setting address + 3, End Day: Time setting address + 7)
Designates which day of week is used to trigger the start or end action.
Start/End Time (Start Time: Time setting address + 4 to + 6, End Time: Time setting address +
8 to + 10)
Hour: 0 – 23 Minute: 0 – 59 Second: 0 - 59
Values outside these ranges will cause error.
Note
 16-bit unsigned integer format must be used; BCD format is not supported here.
 In [Address] mode, [Control] bit should be set after HMI reboots to update scheduler
time.
 When using RW address, [Control] bit should be set after HMI reboots to update
scheduler time. Placing a Set Bit object with [Set ON when window opens] selected in the
common window is recommended, this can retain last settings after HMI reboots.

Objects 13-183
 End time depends on [Action mode] (address + 2). [Enable termination action] (Bit 00)
and [Setting individual day] (Bit 01) are related:
Prohibit tab
Before the scheduled action is performed, the HMI will read the specified bit state. If it is ON,
the scheduled start/end action will be skipped. Otherwise, it will be performed normally.
Note
 The maximum number of Scheduler objects in a project is 64.
 A time schedule applies one action only when the start time is reached.
 [Write start/end value] and [Prohibit] bit is read only once before start action. After that,
even to change the state of [Prohibit] bit or [Write start/end value], the end action and
the value written will not be affected. Also, to read data of [Write start/end value] and
[Prohibit] bit, there is a delay of start action due to the communication.
 Each time RTC data is changed, scheduler list entries that possess both start and end
times will be checked for in-range or out-range conditions. For in-range, the start action
will occur. If the end action is not set, the new range is not recognized, the action will not
occur.
 If several Scheduler objects are set to the same start time or end time, the action is
performed in ascending order of the schedule number.

Objects 13-184
 In [Time Set] » [Address] mode, the system will read [Control] word regularly. The length
of the period depends on the system.
 In [Time Set] » [Address] mode, when start time and end time is out- range, error occurs
in the set action time. (Note: BCD is not an acceptable format)
 In [Time Set] » [Address] mode, the action will not start up until the first time the time
data is successfully updated.

Objects 13-185
13.29. Option List
13.29.1. Overview
Option List object displays a list of items that the user can view and select. Once the user
selects an item, the corresponding data will be written to a word register.
There are two forms of this object – [List box] and [Drop-down list]. The [List box] lists all items
and highlights the selected one. The [Drop-down list] normally displays only the selected item.
Once the object is pressed, the system will display a list (which is similar to list box) as shown in
the following figure.
Click [Object] » [Option List] icon on the toolbar to open an Option List object property dialog
box. Set up the properties, press OK button, and a new Option List object will be created.

Objects 13-186
General Tab
Setting Description
Attribute Mode: The list style, either [List box] or [Drop-down list].
Style: This option is available only when the selected mode is
[Drop-down list]. Available styles are: [Standard] and [Classic]. The
appearance of the obejects will be shown in cMT Style when
[Standard] is selected, and shown in iE/eMT/XE style when [Classic]
is selected. When the project is converted from iE/eMT/XE to cMT,
the default style will be [Classic].
Item no.: Set the number of items for the object. Each item
represents a state displayed in the list and the corresponding value
will be written to the [Monitor address].
Background: Set background color.
Selection: Set background color for the selected item.
Source of item data: There are 4 sources available: [Predefine],
[Dates of historical data], [Item address], and [User account]. See

Objects 13-187
13.29.2.1..
Monitor The corresponding value of the selected item will be written to
address [Monitor address].
Write when button is released
If this check box is selected, the selected item value will be written
to [Monitor address] after the button is released.
Send
notification Set On/Off the designated bit address after successfully writing
after writing data to PLC.
successfully
Note
 For cMT Series, the [Dates of historical data] and the [write when button is released]
selections are not available.
13.29.2.1. Source of item data
 Predefine
The list is manually defined in [Mapping] tab.
The number of items can be adjusted by [Item no.], and each item represents one state. Each
item has a corresponding value which will be written to [Monitor address].
 Dates of historical data

This selection is not available for cMT Series.

Objects 13-188
Option List object can be used with historical data display objects, such as Trend Display object,
History Data Display object and Event Display object to control which history file should be
shown. The figure below is an example of Option List used with Trend Display.
Setting Description
Type Two options are available: [Event (Alarm) log] and [Data sampling].
Date Set the date format. YYYY means a four digits year (EX: 2012), YY
means a two digits year (EX: 12), MM means month and DD means
day.
Data Select which Data Sampling object is displayed when [Type] is [Data
Sampling Sampling], and it should be the same as the [Data sampling object
object index] configured in [Trend Display] or [History Data Display].

Objects 13-189
Enable
[delete If selected, a control address can be set. Writing “1” to this address
history data] will delete the history data of the specified date.
function
Note
 In [Dates of historical data] mode, since the system automatically reads the historical data
and finds the date information, it is not necessary to configure in the [Mapping] tab.
 The error message displayed in Option List can be modified in [Mapping] tab.
 Item address
The list will be read from the given [Item address] and controlled by [Control address]. The
following options will be available:
Setting Description
Control [Address]: If the value at this address is changed to 1, the option
address list would be replaced by items defined at [Item address]. After
updating, the value will be restored to 0.
[Address + 1]: Define the number of items in [Item address].

Objects 13-190
Item address Assign the item address

UNICODE
The item will use UNICODE characters, such as Chinese characters.
The length of each item
Define the number of letters for each item, the unit is Word.
Note
 The UNICODE characters used here should be used by Text object, so that EasyBuilder Pro
will compile the needed fonts and download these fonts to HMI, then the UNICODE
letters can be correctly displayed.
 [The number of items] multiplied by [The Length of each item] must be less than 1024
words.
 The system automatically disables [Mapping] tab in [Item address] mode.
 User account
If [Enhanced Security] mode is enabled, [User account] would appear in the [Source of item
data] and it lists the names of users.
Setting Description
Sort Select the sorting method from [Ascending] of [Descending].
Display If [Privilege] is selected, the privileges for each user will be
displayed in option list.
If [Secret user] is selected, even though it is defined to be hidden in
[System parameter settings] » [Security] » [Enhanced Security], the
users will still be displayed in [Option List].
Note

Objects 13-191
 The address that controls user index is [Control Address +2 (LW-n+2)] which is set in
[System Parameters] » [Security] » [Enhanced Security].
Mapping Tab
This table displays all available states/items, their item data and values. To change the number
of available items, please go to [Option list tab] » [Attribute] » [Item no.].
Setting Description
Item The system lists all available items. Each item represents a state
that will be displayed in the list. This field is read-only.
Value Here user can assign value for each item, basing on the following
two criteria:
For reading: If the value in [Monitor address] is changed, the object
selects the first-matched item. If no item is matched, the status
goes to error state and signals the notification bit register (if
requested).
For writing: The system writes this value to [Monitor address] when
user selects an item.
Item data Text displayed for each item. The Option List object displays the
text of all items in the list for users to review and select.
Import item This feature is enabled when select [Recipe-Selection] as [Monitor
data from address]. Click [Import item data from recipe record] to open the
recipe record [Records of Recipe Database] setting dialog box. Select [Item data
source], the data belonging to the selected column will all be
imported to Option List object.

Objects 13-192
Before importing, the number of items in Option List changes

according to the number of items defined in Records of Recipe
Database.
After importing, modifying Records of Recipe Database will not
change the content of Option List.
Error state On error state, the list box removes the highlight to represent no
item is selected and the drop-down list displays the data of error
state. Only the drop-down list uses error state, list box is not able to
use error state.
For example, item number 8 is the error state when specifying 8 in
[Item no.]. (The first item number is 0)
Set default Reset all values or states to default. That is, set 0 for item 0, 1 for
item 1, and so on.
Error The system will set ON/OFF to the specified bit register when error
notification is detected. The signal of the bit register could be used to trigger a
procedure for correcting the error by using objects such as Event
Log, Alarm Bar, or pop-up window.

Objects 13-193
13.30. Timer
13.30.1. Overview
Timer object is a switch that can be used to control the mode to count time. The modes are
explained later. Timer object uses the following 6 variables:
Timer Variable Type Description
Input bit (IN) Bit The main switch of Timer.
Measurement bit (TI) Bit Turns ON when the Timer begins
counting time.
Output bit (Q) Bit Activated when the Timer finishes
counting time.
Preset time (PT) Word Presets a time before the Timer
begins counting time.
Elapsed time (ET) Word Displays the elapsed time.
Reset bit (R) Bit Resets the elapsed time (ET) to 0.
Click [Object] » [Time-related] » [Timer] icon on the toolbar to open the property dialog box as

Objects 13-194
Note
 [Constant preset time] is only available for cMT series.
If use cMT Series, clicking the Timer icon on the toolbar will open the Timer managing window,
click [New] to configure.
 On delay
Mode Register
Input bit (IN): The main switch of Timer.
Measurement bit (TI): Turns ON when the Timer
Output bit (Q): Turns ON when the Timer finishes
counting time.
Preset time (PT): Presets a time before the Timer
Elapsed time (ET): Displays the elapsed time.
Description
Period 1: When the IN turns ON, TI turns ON and the ET starts counting. The Q remains OFF.
Period 2: When the ET equals to the PT, the TI turns OFF and the Q turns ON.
Period 3: When the IN turns OFF, the Q turns OFF and the ET is reset to 0.
Period 4: When the IN turns ON, the TI turns ON and the ET starts counting. The Q remains
OFF.
Period 5: Turns IN OFF before the ET reaches the PT, the TI turns OFF, and the ET is reset to 0.
Since the ET doesn’t reach the PT, the Q remains OFF.

Objects 13-195
 Off delay
Mode Register
Output bit (Q): Turns OFF when the Timer finishes
counting time.
Description
Period 1: When the IN turns ON, the TI remains OFF and the Q turns ON, the ET is reset to 0.
Period 2: When the IN turns OFF, the TI turns ON and the Q remains ON, the ET starts
counting.
Period 3: When the ET equals to the PT, the Q and TI turn OFF.
Period 4: When the IN turns ON, the TI remains OFF and the Q turns ON, the ET is reset to 0.
Period 5: When the IN turns OFF, the TI turns ON and the Q remains ON, the ET starts
counting.
Period 6: Turns the IN to ON before the ET reaches the PT, the TI turns OFF, the Q remains
ON, and the ET is reset to 0,.
 Pulse
Mode Register
Output bit (Q): Turns ON when the Timer begins
counting time and turns OFF when the Timer
finishes counting time.
Description
Period 1: When the IN turns ON, the TI and Q turn ON simultaneously, and the ET starts
counting.
Period 2: When the ET equals to PT, the TI and Q turn OFF simultaneously. Since IN is turned
OFF when counting time, the ET is reset to 0.
Period 3: When the IN turns ON, the TI and Q turn ON simultaneously, and the ET starts
counting.
Period 4: When the ET equals the PT, the TI and Q turn OFF simultaneously.

Objects 13-196
 Accumulated ON delay
Mode Register
Output bit (Q): Turns ON when the Timer finishes
counting time.
Reset bit (R): Resets ET to 0
Description
Period 1: When the IN turns ON, the TI turns ON and the elapsed time ET starts counting, the
Q remains OFF.
Period 2: When the IN turns OFF, if the ET doesn’t reach the PT, the TI turns OFF, and at the
same time the Q remains OFF. The ET is in the retentive state.
Period 3: When the IN turns ON, the TI turns ON. The timer measurement starts again and
the ET starts counting from the kept value. The Q remains OFF.
Period 4: When the ET reaches the PT, the TI turns OFF and the Q turns ON.
Period 5: When the IN turns OFF, the Q turns OFF. Turning ON the reset bit R will reset the ET
to 0, and then the reset bit turns OFF.
 Accumulated OFF delay
Mode Register
Output bit (Q): Turns OFF when the Timer finishes
counting time.
begins counting.
Reset bit (R): Resets ET to 0
Description
Period 1: When the IN turns ON, the TI remains OFF and the Q turns ON.
Period 2: When the IN turns OFF, the TI turns ON and the Q remains ON. The ET starts
counting.
Period 3: When the IN turns ON, the TI and Q remain ON, and the ET is in the retentive state.
Period 4: When the IN turns OFF again, the ET starts counting from the kept value.
Period 5: When the ET equals to the PT, the TI and Q turn OFF simultaneously. Turning ON
the reset bit R will reset the ET to 0, and then the reset bit turns OFF.

Objects 13-197

Objects 13-198
13.31. Video In
13.31.1. Overview
The eMT, XE, and mTV Series HMI models provide the Video Input feature. By installing a
surveillance camera, user can monitor the site on HMI. The video images can be stored in
external devices and then analyzed on PC. This feature can be utilized in different places for
monitoring, such as vehicles or buildings.
eMT, XE, and mTV Series: Support USB camera video input.
eMT, XE Series: Support IP camera video input.
cMT Series: Supports video recording but does not support capturing images.
eMT3120A/eMT3150A: Not only support USB camera video input but also NTSC and PAL
analog video systems. For hardware, HMI provides 2 channels for Video Input. User can freely
switch the channel, and capture real-time images even when Video Input is paused.
Click the Video In icon on the toolbar to open the property dialog box. Set up the properties,
press OK button, and a new Video In object will be created.

Objects 13-199
General Tab
Analog Video Systems USB Camera
IP Camera

Objects 13-200
Setting Description
Input channel Select the Video Input channel from channel 1 or channel 2.
(Analog video systems)
Encode
Select the format from NTSC or PAL. (Analog video systems)
format
RTSP Enter the IP camera’s RTSP address.
When account and password are required for accessing the IP
Camera, an RTSP address with credentials embedded can be used.
For example:
admin:admin@192.168.1.119:554/cam/realmonitor?channel=1&subtype=0
Streaming over TCP
Select this check box to stream video over TCP.
Capture Select [Use capture function] check box and configure the settings.
address Capture address
Designate the address that triggers image capturing.
Storage medium
Designate the storage device.
System Storage Device
Analog video Select SD card or USB disk to save the captured
system images. The images of channel 1 will be saved in
“VIP1” folder in the chosen storage and so on.
USB Only saves the captured images in SD card.
Camera
IP Camera XE Series: Captured images can be saved in USB
drive.
eMT Series: Captured images can be saved in SD
card.
Record time
Set a period of time to capture the images.
System Method
Analog video  The longest period can be set from 10
system seconds before triggering [Capture address]
to 10 seconds after triggering.
 The time interval of image capturing is once
every second.
 The captured .jpg file will be named in the
following format:

Objects 13-201
Before or after [Capture address] is

triggered: YYYYMMDDhhmmss.jpg
The moment that [Capture address] is
triggered: YYYYMMDDhhmmss@.jpg
For example, set *Record time+ “Before” and
“After” to “5” seconds. When the state of [Capture
address] changes from OFF to ON, the system will
start capturing one image per second, from 5
seconds before the triggering time to 5 seconds
after the triggering time, which is 11 images in
total including the one captured at the triggering
moment.
USB Only the image of the triggering moment is
Camera captured. The name format:
YYYYMMDDhhmmss.png.
IP Camera Only the image of the triggering moment is
captured. The naming format:
YYYYMMDDhhmmss.png.
Click the icon to download the demo project. Please confirm your
internet connection before downloading the demo project.
Control Use control function
address If enabled, enter certain value to the control address and the
following addresses can control Video Input object. For example, if
the designated control address is LW-n (n is any address), enter
certain value to the designated addresses will execute commands
as the following table.
Address Value Command
LW-n 0 Stop displaying image
1 Open channel 1 and display the
image on HMI
2 Open channel 2 and display the
image on HMI
3 Open channel 1 but don’t display the
image on HMI (Capture function
operable)
4 Open channel 2 but don’t display the
image on HMI (Capture function
operable)

Objects 13-202
LW-n+1 1 Pause / resume the video

LW-n+2 1~100 Adjust the contrast ratio
LW-n+3 1~100 Adjust the brightness
 After changing the value in [Control address (LW-n)], the
system will keep the new value.
 After changing the value in [Control address + 1 (LW-n+1)],
the system will execute the command and then reset the
value to 0.
 If [Use control function] check box is not selected, the system
will play the image of the selected channel.
 If [Display adjustment] check box is selected, the contrast
ratio and brightness can be adjusted. (Analog video systems)
 The USB Camera / IP Camera is controlled by LW-n (value 0 or
1) and LW-n+1.
Note
About analog video systems:
 Only one channel can be opened at a time.
 Real-time images can still be captured when Video In is paused.
 Recommended analog video systems and resolutions:
1:1 50%
NTSC 720 x 480 360 x 240
PAL 720 x 576 360 x 288
About USB Camera:
 When the USB Camera is disconnected during video playing, video will not resume when
camera is connected again. If [Control address] is used in the project, please use the
control address to stop and restart video. If [Control address] is not used, switch to
another screen and then return, or restart HMI in order to resume the video.
 The maximum size of Video In object of eMT3070A is 340*240, as for eMT3105P,
eMT3120A, eMT3150A, XE, and mTV Series, the maximum size of Video in object is
640*480.
 When using a USB Camera, the display resolution of the run-time video is determined by
the resolution supported by the USB Camera that is closest to the size of the object. The
resolution supported by the USB Camera may not be identical to the size of the object.
Therefore, it is good practice to adjust the size of object according to the actual resolution
of the video.

Objects 13-203
 When using a USB Camera, the right and bottom edge of the Video In object will keep a
distance of 50 pixels away from the window edge to prevent the run-time video from
exceeding the window.
 When using a USB Camera, the background color of Video In object is black. If the
resolution of the run-time video is smaller than the object, the empty area is colored
black. Therefore, it is good practice to adjust the size of object according to the actual
resolution of the video. The tested and available USB Cameras are: Logitech C170,
Logitech C310, Logitech C910, LifeCam VX-2000.
 The OS versions that support USB Camera:
Model OS Version (or later)

eMT3070A 20140116
eMT3105P, eMT3120A, eMT3150A 20140701
XE Series 20140624
mTV 20140807
About IP Camera:
 A RTSP address is required for using IP camera. The RTSP address can be found in the
configuration tool of the IP camera, or possibly from an online repository.
 When the IP Camera is disconnected during video streaming, video will not resume when
the camera is connected again. If [Control address] is used in the project, please use the
control address to stop and restart video. If [Control address] is not used, switch to
another screen and then return, or restart HMI in order to resume the video.
 When using an IP camera, the display resolution of the run-time video will be same as
that of the object drawn in the EasyBuilder Pro project. If the actual video resolution is
different from the size of the object, the resolution will be adjusted to fit the object,
which may cause distortion of video image. Therefore, it is good practice to adjust the size
of object according to the actual resolution of the video.
 Use the IP cameras that comply with ONVIF standard, and use RTSP for video streaming.
 To ensure the quality and smoothness of the video, and not to affect HMI’s general
performance, adjust the settings of IP camera when video lags or high CPU loading is
observed. As the project complexity and hardware specs vary from one case to another,
please fine-tune the video parameters accordingly.
 Recommended video specification:
Resolution 960x544 (max.)

Format H.264, MJPEG
Refresh Rate 15 fps
Transmission Speed 800kbps (max.)

Objects 13-204

Objects 13-205
13.32. System Message
13.32.1. Overview
If objects use [Display confirmation request] or [local HMI supports monitor function only] is
turned on/off, the corresponding messages configured here will be displayed in pop-up
message boxes.
Click the System Message icon on the toolbar to open the setting dialog box.
System Message
Setting Description
Dialog Size Select the size for pop-up window and texts.
Confirmation If an object uses [Display confirmation request], this message
required would pop up when the object is used. [Message] shown on

Objects 13-206
confirmation dialog box, and the text label of the 2 buttons, [OK]
and [Cancel], can be set. Please use the same font for the labels of
[Message], [OK] and [Cancel]. Additionally, only when selecting
[Label Library] for [Message], the use of Label Library for [OK] and
[Cancel] buttons can be enabled.
Deny Displays when system tag LB-9196 (local HMI supports monitor
write-command function only) is turned ON.
Allow Displays when system tag LB-9196 (local HMI supports monitor
write-command function only) is turned OFF.
Note
 cMT Series does not support adjusting dialog size and using system tag LB-9196.

Objects 13-207
13.33. Recipe View
13.33.1. Overview
Recipe View object can be used to display a specific recipe. All items and values of the recipe
can be viewed by using this object.
Click the Recipe View icon on the toolbar to open a Recipe View object property dialog box. Set
up the properties, press OK button, and a new Recipe View object will be created.
General Tab

Objects 13-208
The name of each part of the Recipe View object is shown in the following figure.
Setting Description
Refresh data When selected, the system will automatically refresh Recipe View
automatically when recipe is changed; otherwise, Recipe View will be refreshed
after window change.
Recipe table Choose the recipe name or look for other recipes from the
drop-down list.
Style
Available styles are: Default, Crystal, and Flat.
(cMT Series only)
Caption With [Use caption] enabled, the text, font size, color, and name of
(cMT Series only) the caption can be specified. (Use caption is only available when
the selected style is Crystal or Flat.)
Title The item name assigned in [System Parameter Setting] » [Recipe].
Transparent
If selected, the title row has no shading; the color selection is not
available.
Profile The frame and background color of the object can be set.
Transparent
Select to hide the background, the color selection is not available.
Grid The dividing lines between columns and rows.
Enable
Select to show the grid.
Auto fit short column (cMT Series Default style)
The column width automatically adjusts to the size of the content.
Selection
Control Change the shading color of the selected row.
(N/A for cMT)
Default sort Configure how the items are sorted. [Ascending] and [Descending]
method can be selected.
Note
 There are 4 system registers that can be used to view/update/add/delete recipe database:
Selection
Current selection of record in Recipe View object, and it is numbered from zero. If the first

Objects 13-209
record is chosen, the value of Selection will be 0. When the value of Selection is changed,
the corresponding values will be updated, such as “No”, “Timer_1”, “Timer_2”, as shown
in the following figure.
Count
Show the number of records in current recipe.
Command
Enter certain value will send command to the selected record.
Enter “1”: Add a new recipe record.
Enter “2”: Update the selected recipe record.
Enter “3”: Delete the selected recipe record.
Enter “4”: Delete all recipe records.
Result
View the result of executing commands.
Displays “1”: Command successfully executed.
Displays “2”: The selected record does not exist.
Displays “4”: Unknown command.
Displays “8”: Records reach limit (10000 records), no new records can be added.
Please go to [System Parameter Settings] » [Recipe Database] tab to create the recipe
data before using Recipe View object. See “5 System Parameter Settings”.
About creating recipes, see “24 Recipe Editor”.

Objects 13-210
Example 1
In this example, a recipe database is created to be displayed by Recipe View object. When you
select a recipe record on Recipe View object, the value of [Selection] and the corresponding
values will change accordingly. When finish designing, you can modify the recipe database by
entering a value in [Command].
1. Create a recipe as shown in the following figure.
2. Use Records of Recipe Database to create a number of records as shown in the following
figure.

Objects 13-211
3. Create a Recipe View object and use the recipe database created in the preceding steps.
4. Create 4 Numeric objects using registers “Selection”, “Count”, “Command”, and “Result”.
5. Create corresponding input objects for “No”, “Name”, “Timer_1”, …, “Timer_4”, “Speed”.
For example, “Name” is an ASCII item with size “10”. Create an ASCII object and set device
type to “RECIPE” » “Name”.
6. The project is then completed.

7. As shown above, “Mars” is selected and the corresponding items are also updated. There
are 5 records so the “Count” displays “5”. Try selecting different rows of the Recipe View
object. Fields “Name”, “Timer_1”, …will change accordingly.
8. Try the following operations:
 Add:
To add current data as a new record, enter “1” in “Command”.
 Update:
To update recipe database, enter “2” in “Command”.
 Delete:
To delete the selected record, enter “3” in “Command”.
 Sort the items.
 Click the title to change the order.

Objects 13-212
Example 2
In this example, [RECIPE_Bit] can be used to read / write individual bits of Recipe data.
Although BOOL type items cannot be added to Recipe Database, individual bit access of 16bit /
32bit data is possible.
As shown in the following figure, select [RECIPE_Bit] for the read address of Bit object and
point to the target item, and then the available Bit selections will be displayed. In this manner,
Recipe Database can be used to record, read, and write bit data.

Objects 13-213
13.34. Flow Block
13.34.1. Overview
Flow Block object displays the flow status of the blocks in the pipe or the status of the
transportation lines. Unlike Moving Shape object which requires a precise measurement
between two points when drawing a straight line provided by users, the blocks flow at a fixed
interval in a horizontal or vertical straight line.
The features of Flow Block:
 Each section of the Flow Block must be a horizontal or vertical straight line and the blocks
flow at a fixed interval within it.
 Dynamic speed and direction adjustment (Speed and direction can be controlled by a
designated register.
 Security mechanism (Interlock), which hides Flow Block when the status of designated bit
is invalid.
Click on the Flow Block icon on the toolbar or select [Objects] » [Animation] » [Flow Block] to
create object.
General Tab
Setting Description
Reverse The blocks flow in the direction the object is drawn (the blue
direction arrow). If select this check box, the blocks flow in the opposite
direction.

Objects 13-214
Dynamic Read address

speed The direction and speed at which the blocks flow can be controlled
by a designated register. The valid rage is -25 to 25. When a
negative value is entered, the blocks flow in a reversed direction.
Setting
Displays the address and format of the designated register. [System
register], [Index register], and [Tag Library] can be set here.
Flow speed 25 flow speed levels, the valid range is 0 to 25 when [Dynamic
speed] is not selected. A larger value indicates a faster speed.
Outline Tab
For setting the outline property of Flow Block. The following illustration shows each item.

Objects 13-215
Setting Description
Pipe Sets the properties of the pipe within which the blocks flow. The
background color, border width and color can be set. When the
[Border] check box is selected, the background color must be set.
Block Sets the properties of blocks. Style, width, length, interval and color
can be set.
Available styles are Rectangle and Arrow. The direction in which the
arrows point to indicates the direction of the flow block.
Rectange: Arrow:
Dynamic Allows dynamic color change. Nine customized colors, numbered
color from 0 to 8, are allowed. The color is selected by entering a value in
the designated register. Entering a value greater than the largest
color number changes the Flow Block to the last color in the list.
Note
 If both [Reverse direction] and [Dynamic speed] check boxes are selected in [General] tab,
when entering a negative value in the designated register of dynamic speed, the blocks

Objects 13-216
flow in the direction the object is drawn.

 When both [Arrow] and [Dynamic speed] are selected, the arrow will only show when a
value is given to the designated address.
 To avoid the pipe lines from overlapping when drawing a turn, there is a minimum width
planned at each turn. As shown in Fig. 34.1, the sign on the cross cursor defines the
minimum width. Fig. 34.2 demonstrates that each turn is drawn in the minimum width.
(Fig. 34.1) (Fig. 34.2)

The valid range of the length, width, and height of the Flow Block can be adjusted
according to the size of the object drawn and the size of the window.
As shown in the following figure, when the size of the Flow Block is larger, the valid range
is restricted to prevent the flow block from exceeding the window size. When the size of
the object is smaller, the adjustment range will be larger.
To prevent the flow block from overlapping itself, when the distance between two lines is
shorter (Section A), the valid range is restricted. When the distance is longer (Section B),
the adjustment range will be larger.
Example 1
The demonstration below shows how to use [Dynamic speed] to control the direction and

Objects 13-217
speed of Flow Block by a designated word register.

1. Create a Flow Block object and select [Dynamic speed] check box. Set [Address] to LW-0,
and set the format to 16-bit Signed.
2. Create a Numeric object, set [Address] to LW-0. The high limit is 25, and the low limit is
-25. The format is 16-bit Signed.
3. Execute simulation or download the project to HMI. When entering a positive value in
LW-0, the blocks flow in the direction the section is drawn. A larger value indicates a faster
speed. When a negative value is entered, the blocks flow in a reversed direction, and the
smaller value indicates a faster speed. When 0 is entered, it stops flowing.

Objects 13-218
13.35. Operation Log
13.35.1. Operation Log Settings
13.35.1.1. Overview
Operation Log records user’s operation steps and displays the record in real-time. When an
error occurs, use operation log to analyze the problem. The backup tables can be used to
review the process in order to resolve the errors.
13.35.1.2. Configuration
Select the objects to be recorded. Click [Data/History] » [Operation Log Setting], and then
select [Enable operation log function] check box.

Objects 13-219
Setting Description
Object When Operation Log is enabled, the objects that can be recorded
are listed in the setting dialog box sorted by window numbers.
[Filter]: By clicking icon, all recordable objects are listed. Users
can use the filter to more easily locate the desired objects.
Enable The selected objects are recorded by Operation Log.
Comment The description of the object as shown in the following figure.

Objects 13-220
Select all Selects all the listed objects. If [Filter] is used, clicking [Select all]
only selects the objects in the list.
Discard all Discards all the selected objects. If [Filter] is used, clicking [Discard
all] only discards the objects in the list.
Storage Sets the way the records are stored.
settings Maximum record no. in HMI memory
Sets the maximum number of records that can be stored in HMI
memory.
External devices for synchronization / backup
Stores backup data to SD card or USB disk. Backup data can be
synchronized to database (cMT Series).
Behavior when HMI space is insufficient
When HMI memory space is insufficient, two options are provided:
[Stop saving operation log]: Stops saving new records in order to
keep the earlier records.
[Synchronize to external device]: Stores the Operation Log to the
external device. When the device does not exist, the HMI clears the
oldest records in its memory.
Control Entering different values in the control address sends
address corresponding commands to Operation Log and returns the result
of executing the command.
If control address is LW-n (where n is an arbitrary number), the
address that returns the result of executing the command is
LW-n+1.
Control address (LW-n):
(1): Clear all records.
(2): Copy the records to the USB disk.
(3): Copy the records to the SD card.
(4): Copy the records to the USB disk and clear the records in HMI
memory.
(5): Copy the records to the SD card and clear the records in HMI
memory.
(6): Enable Operation Log.
(7): Disable Operation Log.
(8): Use history data stored in USB disck after changing HMI.
(9): Use history data stored in SD card after changing HMI.
(10): Copy the records to the database server. (cMT Series)
(11): Copy the records to the database server and clear the records

Objects 13-221
in HMI memory. (cMT Series)

(12): Use existing historical data in database after changing to
another HMI. (cMT Series)
Execution result (LW-n+1):
(0): Processing.
(1): Execution succeeded.
(2): The device does not exist.
(3): The record does not exist.
(4): Unknown error.
Note
 Operation Log can only record the operation of the objects that are manually triggered.
Objects that cannot be manually triggered are not recorded, such as Time Based Data
Transfer object.
 When running off-line or on-line simulation, Operation Log is stored under EasyBuilder
installation directory: HMI_memory\operationlog\operationlog.db
 Triggering Macro with a Set Bit object generates two records, the triggering of bit and the
triggering of Macro.
13.35.2. Operation Log View
13.35.2.1. Overview
Operation Log View can be used to review the Operation Log.
Before using Operation Log View, please follow the steps described in the preceding
part to finish Operation Log Settings. Click [Data/History], and then click [Operation
Log View].

Objects 13-222
General Tab
Title
Selection
Control
Profile
Frame &
Background
Grid
Setting Description
Style The style of Operation Log View object can be selected
from Default, Crystal, and Flat.
Title/Profile/Grid/ These attributes can be configured when the chosen style
Selection control is Default.
Font Sets the color, font, and font size of the text displayed in
Operation Log View object.

Objects 13-223
Title Tab
Setting Description
Title Sets the title displayed in Operation Log View object.
Sort Sorts the records in time ascending or descending order.
Display order Sets the order of the displayed item. If [Display chars.] is 0, all
characters are displayed.
Date / Time Sets the format of date and time displayed in Operation Log View
object.
13.35.3. Operation Log Printing
13.35.3.1. Overview
Operation Log Printing can generate an Operation Log sheet by printing out using a printer or
by saving as JPEG file into an external device. Before using this function, please go to Operation
Log Settings to finish the settings.
Operation Logs printed using cMT Viewer will be saved to the USB disk / SD card connected to
the cMT HMI.

Objects 13-224
Select “Enable [Operation Log] printing” check box and click [Settings] button to open the
Operation Log Printing dialog box.
General Tab
Setting Description
Printer Select the device to save the Operation Log sheet. If a printer is
selected, the paper size should be A4. If an external device is
selected, the Operation Log sheet is saved as a JPEG file. The

Objects 13-225
system generates a folder named "operationlogsheet", and the files

saved in the folder are named "print date_sequence number". For
example, the first JPEG file saved on 2013/05/08 is named
130508_0000 and so on.
Orientation Sets the layout of the Operation Log sheet to be horizontal or
vertical.
Font Sets the font and the font size to of the Operation Log sheet. The
following table lists the corresponding size.
Size Title Content
Large 20 pt. 16 pt.
Middle 16 pt. 12 pt.
Small 12 pt. 8 pt.
Range Sets the range of the Operation Log to be included in the sheet.
Date
Sets the range by date, counted from the start day through the
number of days entered. The maximum available range is 30 days.
Record
Sets the range by the number of records. The maximum available
range is 10000 records.
Trigger Sets the register to control Operation Log Printing. When the
address register is set ON, it starts printing. When the printing is done, the
register is set OFF automatically.
Preview Preview the result before generating the Operation Log sheet.

Objects 13-226
Layout Tab
The layout of each part is shown in the above figure.

Setting Description
Title Sets the content of the title. The title is limited to one line.
Printed on all pages
If selected, the title is shown on each page; otherwise, the title is
shown on the first page.
Header Sets the content of the header. The header can have 5 lines in
maximum.
If selected, the header is shown on each page; otherwise, the
header is shown on the first page.
Footer Sets the content of the footer. The footer can have 5 lines in
maximum.
If selected, the footer is shown on each page; otherwise, the footer
is shown on the last page.
Date/Time If selected, the date/time the in the sheet is shown on the
lower-right corner of each page; otherwise, the date/time is not
shown.
Page number Shown on each page.

Objects 13-227
Content Tab
Setting Description
Title Sets the title displayed.
Sort Time ascending
The latest record is placed at the bottom.
Time descending
The latest record is placed at the top.
Date/Time Sets the format of date and time displayed.
13.35.3.3. Demonstration
Example 1
The following demonstration explains how to create an Operation Log project.
1. Create a Toggle Switch object and a Numeric object on window number 10.
2. Go to Operation Log Settings; enable the Toggle Switch object and Numeric object on
window number 10.

Objects 13-228
3. Create an Operation Log View object and finish relevant settings.

4. Run off-line simulation; trigger Toggle Switch and Numeric object. Operation Log is
displayed by Operation Log View object.
Example 2
Upload Operation Log to PC by using Utility Manager or use Backup object to send the file by
email.
 Upload by Utility Manager
1. Open Utility Manager, click [Upload].
2. Select [Operation log], enter file name and HMI IP, and then click [Upload].

Objects 13-229
 Send the sheet by e-mail

1. Open [System Parameter Settings] » [e-Mail] tab. Set e-mail server and the address of
recipient and sender.
2. Create a Backup object, under [Source] select [Operation log], and under [Backup
position] select [e-Mail].
For more information about e-Mail settings, see “5 System Parameter Settings”.

Objects 13-230
13.36. Combo Button
13.36.1. Overview
Combo Button can execute multiple commands. The former way was to overlay multiple
objects in the same position, and the commands are executed in the order of the layer of the
objects. This takes time to test the order when planning the project. Combo Button allows
users to easily set multiple commands with one object, and freely adjust the order of executing
commands.
The following are the features of Combo Button:
 Executes multiple commands.
 Allows adjusting the order of executing multiple commands.
 Displays the state in Bit or Word Lamp.
Click on the Combo Button icon on the toolbar or select [Objects] » [Combo Button] to create
object. Configure object properties, click OK, a new Combo Button object will be created.

Objects 13-231
13.36.2.1. eMT, iE, XE, mTV
General Tab
Setting Description
Lamp The mode to display the state of a designated bit or word register.
None: Not using lamps to show states.
Bit Lamp
Displays the state of a designated bit address.
[Invert Signal] Reverses the display of ON / OFF states. For example,
if [Invert signal] check box is selected, when the designated bit is
OFF, the object displays ON state.
Word Lamp
Displays the state according to the value of a designated word
register.
[No. of state]: The number of states used by the object. The state is
numbered from 0, so the number of states minus 1 will be the state
number. If the value in the word register is ≥ *No. of states+ defined

Objects 13-232
in Attribute, the highest state will be displayed.

If the number of states is set to 8, the valid states will be 0, 1, 2, …,
7. In this case if the word value is 8 or higher, the system will
display the state 7 shape.
Actions A combo button can execute up to 20 actions.
Key Description
Add actions.
Delete the selected action.
Change the order of the actions.
Copy the selected action.
Paste the copied action.
Add Delay
Delays the action for a few milliseconds. A combo button can set
one [Delay] action only.
Set Bit
Sets the designated bit ON or OFF.
Set style Description
Set Word
Sets the value in the designated register.
Set style Description
Write Writes a constant value to the designated
Constant register.
Value
JOG+ Increases value in register by a set amount in
[Inc. value] each time when the button is
pressed, to the [Upper limit].
JOG- Decreases value in register by a set amount in
[Dec. value] each time when the button is
pressed, to the [Bottom limit].
Dynamic Sets the Upper / Bottom limit by a designated
limits register.
When Dynamic Address is LW-n, where n is an
arbitrary number, set upper limit when using
[JOG+], and bottom limit when using [JOG-].
Change Window
Switch to the designated window.

Objects 13-233
General
Bit/Word Lamps, Set Bit, Set Word, and Toggle are common actions explained in 13.36.2.1 eMT,
iE, XE, mTV.
For cMT Series, actions can be classified into action groups, whichs are put in sequence.
Actions within a group are executed at the same time, and after the actions in the current
group have been all triggered, the actions in the next group will then be triggered. Please see
Ch13.53 Action Trigger for more information on the notes about action groups.
Setting Description
Down actions Execute action when the button is pressed.
Up actions Execute action after the button is pressed and released.
Set Bit Momentary is a two-step action where pressing the button (Down
action) will set the bit on and then releasing the button (Up action)
will set the bit off.
Change Switches to the designated window.
window Change full-screen window: Changes to another base window.

Objects 13-234
Change common window: Changes common window.

Return to previous window: Changes from current screen to the
previous one displayed. For example, when window no. 10 is
changed to window no. 20, this function can be used to return to
window no. 10. This function is only available for base window.
Animation Setting:
The effects are: Fade, Fly, Float, Wipe, Split, Circle, Clock, Zoom,
Turn, Push. Different effects may be used for Start (window
appears) and End (window disappears).
takes to complete.
Execute Executes one of the Macros from the drop down list that has
Macro already been configured by users. In an action group, [Execute
Macro] is seen as completed as soon as it is triggered. Ever if a
particular macro takes longer to complete, the system will not wait
for the macro to complete running before moving on to the next
action group.
Popup
Opens a designated window.
Window
Close
Closes currently opened window.
Window
Keyboard Configures the button as a keypad key, and the character it enters,
Input via [Numeric] or [ASCII] objects.
keyboard window.
Inc: Increment by 1.
Dec: Decrement by 1.

Objects 13-235
Screen
Saves current screen as a hard copy file into a SD card or USB disk.
Hardcopy
Acknowledge
all events Acknowledges all events once.
(Alarms)
Import Data Imports e-mail contacts or user accounts, or is used as USB Security
Key login.
Data Position:
[SD card] or [USB disk].
Account import mode:
If [Overwrite] is selected, the existing accounts will be overwritten
by new accounts. If [Append] is selected, accounts are appended.
Delete file after importing user accounts:
The system will delete the account data saved in the external
device after importing; this can prevent the account data from
leaking out.
Wait Until The next group will be executed only when the condition set for a
designated bit or word address is met.
Data Transfer
Sends the value in the designated address to another address.
(Global)
Note
 One Combo Button can only do one of these window actions, and only once: [Change
Window], [Popup Window], and [Close Window].
 At most 20 groups can be created in a Combo Button, and at most 20 actions can be
added into a group.

Objects 13-236
13.37. Circular Trend Display
13.37.1. Overview
Circular Trend Display object draws the trend curve of Data Sampling in a polar coordinate
system, where y-axis represents the radial coordinate and the x-axis represents the angular
coordinate. The way to use this object is similar to using Trend Display object.
13.37.2. Configureation
Click the Circular Trend Display icon on the toolbar to open the property dialog box. Set up the
properties, press OK button, and a new Circular Trend Display object will be created.

Objects 13-237
General Tab
Setting Description
Data Sampling Selects the data source for drawing the trend curve.
Type Selects the type of the trend from [Real-time] or [History].
Real-time
In this mode, it displays a fixed number of sampling data
from the moment HMI starts to present. The number of
sampling data is determined by the [Max. data records
(real-time mode)] setting of Data Sampling object. If the
number of sampling data exceeds this number, the earlier
data will not be displayed. To display earlier data or the
data in other days, please select [History] mode.
[Hold control] address can be used to pause refreshing the
display. This only stops displaying new data in the Circular
Trend Display object, and the data is still being sampled by

Objects 13-238
Data Sampling object.

History
In this mode, it displays the sampled data sorted by date.
Select the data source from [Data Sampling], and then use
[History control] address to view the records of different
dates.
Note
If [Show scroll control] check box in Trend Tab is not
selected, the earlier data cannot be viewed when
exceeding the specified [Distance].
For example: Set [Distance] to 1 (hour.), then sampling data
earlier than one hour is not displayed.
Refresh data If enabled, the window in which the Circular Trend Display
automatically object (in history mode) is placed will be refreshed once
per second.
 The scroll controls can be used to check the refresh
status.
If button is displayed, the Circular Trend Display
will be automatically refreshed.
If button is displayed, the Circular Trend Display
will stop being refreshed.
 Scrolling backward and viewing earlier data will
disable [Refresh data automatically]. The button
displayed is at this moment.
 If [Refresh data automatically] is selected, the display
is refreshed when change back to this window,
regardless of the use of scroll controls.
Example: If [Refresh data automatically] is selected,
scrolling to the earlier display stops auto-refresh. At this
moment change to another window and then change back,
the Circular Trend Display is still refreshed.
If [Refresh data automatically] is not enabled when
building the project, to enable it directly on HMI, simply
press . Please note that auto-refresh remains disabled
after window change.

Objects 13-239
Distance Defines the time length that the circle represents, the unit
is hour, the range is 1 to 24 (hours).
Start position The position from where to start drawing the trend curve.
(Up) (Right)
(Down) (Left)
Dynamic X-axis If selected, a word register can be designated to control the

time range time length of Circular Trend Display. The unit is hour. If no
value is entered, the distance is set to default.
Zoom in / out Enlarge or reduce the size of the object. The maximum size
is 10 times larger. If 0 is entered in the designated register,
the effect equals entering 1, the object remains the original
size.
Hold control When the register is set ON, suspend the update of Circular
Trend Display. It does not stop the sampling process of
Data Sampling object. This setting is available only in
Real-time mode.
History control History data is sorted by date. The system uses [History
control] to select the history data that are created in
different dates and then displays it by Circular Trend
Display object.
If the value of the designated register in [History control] is
0, the Circular Trend Display object displays the latest

Objects 13-240
record. If the value is 1, the second latest record is

displayed and so on. This setting is available only in History
mode.
If use with Option List object and select data source as
[Dates of historical data], the history data will be sorted by
date and displayed in Option List object, see “13.29 Option
List”.
In the following example, when history control address is
set to LW-0, and there are 4 sampling data: 20061120.dtl,
20061123.dtl, 0061127.dtl, 20061203.dtl. The
corresponding data selected by the value in history control
address is as the following list.
Value in LW-0 The sampling data displayed
0 20061203.dtl
1 20061127.dtl
2 20061123.dtl
3 20061120.dtl
Watch line Displays a watch line when user touches the Circular Trend
Display object, and the sampling data at the position of the
watch line is output to the designated register. To display
sampling data with multiple channels, the system
consecutively writes the data of each channel to the
designated word register and the following registers. If the
data format of each channel is different, the channels are
sorted by the data format of its corresponding register.
In the following example, when watch address is set to
LW-0, and there are 4 sampling data, the format of each
data is: 16-bit Unsigned, 32-bit Unsigned, 32bit Signed, and
16-bit Signed. The corresponding watch address is as the
following list.
Channel Data Format Data Length Watch Address
0 16-bit Unsigned 1 Word LW-0
1 32-bit Unsigned 2 Words LW-1
2 32-bit Signed 2 Words LW-3
3 16-bit Signed 1 Word LW-5
Time stamp output If selected, the system will start counting time from the
first data sampled, and output the elapsed time counted of

Objects 13-241
the latest data sampled to the register designated in [Time

stamp output + 2]. When pressing a point on the trend
curve, the relative time of the nearest data sample is then
output to [Time stamp output address].
Note
The format of the register designated in [Time stamp
output] and [Time stamp output + 2] must be 32-bit. [Time
stamp output + 2] is only available for Real-time mode
while [Time stamp output] is available for Real time mode
and History mode.
Trend Tab

Objects 13-242
Setting Description
Profile Frame
Sets the color of the frame of the object.
Background
Sets the color of the background of the object.
Show scroll controls
The scroll controls are displayed for scrolling to view
the sampling data of other time range. The
minimum scrolling unit is determined by the setting
of [Distance] in General tab. If [Show scroll controls]
check box is not selected, the earlier data cannot be
viewed when exceeding the specified [Distance].
For example: Set [Distance] to 1 (hour.), then
sampling data earlier than one hour is not displayed.
Grid Sets the number and the color of the dividing lines.
Y-axis
Sets the number of divisions on Y axis.
Font size
Sets the size of the font which labels the time scale
or channel scale.
Time scale
If enabled, displays the time scale. When the time
length is longer than 1 hour, the scale division is 1
hour. When the time length is set to 1 hour, the scale

Objects 13-243
division is 15 minutes.
Channel scale
If enabled, displays the channel scale. The color of
the font which labels the channel scale corresponds
to the setting of the trend curve of each channel.
Time / Date Time
Sets the display format of time.
Date
Sets the display format of date.
Channel Tab
Setting Description
Channel Sets the style and the color of the trend curve, and
the upper and lower limit of data that can be drawn
on the trend curve. Up to 8 channels are supported
simultaneously.

Objects 13-244
Not selecting [Dynamic limits]

The upper and lower limits of the data are set by
constants.
Selecting [Dynamic limits]
The upper and lower limits are set by the designated
register. When the address is LW-n, the
corresponding addresses are as the following list.
Lower limit LW-n LW-n
Upper limit LW-n+1 LW-n+2
Channel Visibility If [Enable] is selected, the bits of the designated
Control word register will be used to show/hide each
channel. First bit (Bit-0) controls the first channel;
second bit (Bit-1) controls the second channel, and
so on.
Display channel when the corresponding bit is:
If [ON] is selected, when the corresponding bit is
OFF, the channel is hidden. If [OFF] is selected, when
the corresponding bit is ON, the channel is hidden.
In the following example, the control address of
channel visibility is set to LW-0 and each channel
shows when the corresponding bit is OFF. If there
are 5 channels, the visibility of the channels is as the
following list.
Channel Control address Bit state Display
1 LW_bit-001 ON NO
2 LW_bit-002 ON NO

Objects 13-245
13.38. Picture View
13.38.1. Overview
Picture View object plays slideshow of picture files saved in an external device such as a USB
drive or SD card.
Click the Picture View icon on the toolbar to open the property dialog box. Set up the
properties, press OK button, and a new Picture View object will be created.
General Tab

Objects 13-246
Setting Description
Outline Sets the toolbar position, background color, and text font
of the Picture View object.
Hide delete button
If selected, the delete button will not be displayed on the
Picture View object toolbar. The delete button is used to
delete the picture currently viewed.
Display with original size when a picture size is smaller
than the object size.
If selected, when the size of the picture is smaller than the
Picture View object, this setting helps to prevent distortion
caused by enlarging the picture.
File position Select the file source of the picture files from [SD card] or
[USB disk].
Directory The directory where the picture files are saved.
Dynamic folder path
Designate folder path by a local address.
File selection Automatically display the newly generated image
When a new image is generated in the folder path, Picture
View object will automatically display the new image.
Send notification when switching to a new picture
When [Automatically display the newly generated image]
is selected, the state of the designated address changes to
On/Off when the new picture is displayed on HMI.
Specify file from address (hide toolbar)
When enabled, the displayed picture is designated by a file
name in a local address, and the toolbar will be hidden.
Note
 The file name must be all in ASCII characters, and the Unicode characters are not
supported.
 The supported picture formats are: .jpg, .bmp, .gif, .png.

Objects 13-247
Outline Tab
Setting Description
Outline Specify the position, background color, and font of Picture
View object.
Hide delete button
When selected, the delete button for deleting the viewed
picture will be hidden in the Picture view object.
Display with original size when a picture size is smaller
than the object size.
When selected, the picture will be displayed in its original
size if it is smaller than the Picture View object. This can
avoid distortion caused by enlarging the picture.

Objects 13-248
13.39. File Browser
13.39.1. Overview
File Browser object can display files and folders saved in the SD card or USB disk. Apart from
browsing for the files in the external devices, the name of the file and the file path selected in
File Browser object can be written to the designated address.
Click the File Browser icon on the toolbar, or select [Object] » [File Browser] to open a File
Brower object property dialog box and set up the properties.
General Tab

Objects 13-249
Setting Description
Folder path address Current directory.
File name address The file name of the currently selected file.
Full (folder + file The full directory and file name of the currently
name) address selected file.
Control address Designate the control address used for deleting a
file or changing file name in File Browser.
Command: Control Address
0: None
1: Delete
2: Rename
Result: Control Address+1
0: Success
1 or more: Error
New File Name: Control Address +2
Outline Tab

Objects 13-250
Setting Description
Folder position Select the position of the file from SD card or USB
disk.
File type Select all files or only CSV file to be displayed.
Font / Background
Set the attributes and font of the object.
/ Color
Note
 The file name and the directory of the selected file will be written to the designated
address, but changing the contents of the designated address will not change the selected
file in the File Browser.
 The system will read the folder path address and file name address when the HMI is
restarted or when an external device is inserted to the unit. If valid data is can be read
from the designated address, the system will then automatically navigate to the
appropriate directory and highlight the file according to the data read. If [Folder path
address] is not enabled, the data at Full (folder + file name) address will be read.

Objects 13-251
13.40. Import/Export
13.40.1. Overview
With Import/Export object, Recipe Database or String Table can be imported or exported.
Click the Import/Export icon on the toolbar to open the Import/Export Object management
dialog box. To add an Import/Export object, click [New], set up the properties, press OK button
and a new Import/Export object will be created.

Objects 13-252
General Tab
Setting Description
Type Select the file source from Recipe Database or
String Table.
File position Select the position of the file to be imported /
exported from SD card, USB disk, or Remote HMI
(cMT Series). When Remote HMI is selected, please
note that only files in cMT Series models can be
imported.
Recipe Select the recipe. This option is hidden when select
String Table.
Control address Designate the control address used for performing
import/export, or displaying the result.
Control: Control Address
Recipe Database:
0: None
1: Import
2: Export (no overwrite)

Objects 13-253
3: Export
String Table:
0: None
1: Delete
2: Import
4: Export (no overwrite)
5: Export
Status: Control Address+1
0: Idle
1: Busy
Result: Control Address +2
1: Success
4: The file already exists, no overwriting.
Other: Error
File name address The name of the imported/exported file. If [Include
folder path] is selected, the full directory and file
name will be included at this address.
Folder path address The directory of the imported/exported file.
Remote HMI address When the file position is [Remote HMI (cMT
Series) ], please enter the remote HMI’s IP address
in this field.
Example 1
The following is an example on recipe export/import settings.
Field Setting
File position USB disk
Recipe Recipe_A (or other recipe)
Control address LW-100
File name address LW-200
Folder path address LW-250
1. Create two ASCII Input objects. Set address to LW-200 and LW-250 respectively.
2. Enter the file name in LW-200: 2015_recipe.csv.
3. Enter the folder path in LW-250: Setting.
4. Use a Set Word object to write value 3 to LW-100. Then, Recipe_A will be exported to the
USB disk, in the “Setting/2015_recipe.csv” file.

Objects 13-254
Note
 When performing “Export (no overwrite)” command, if the target file already exists, the
export operation will be canceled, and the result value will be set to “4”.
The following lists the result values and the information.
Result (HEX) Information
0x1 Success.
0x4 File already existed and will not overwrite.
0x10 Invalid command.
0x100 Data contains non-numeric data.
0x101 Path contains invalid string “..”.
0x102 Communication error while updating Recipe DB.
0x103 Error while reading Recipe DB information from
project file.
0x200 General exception.
0x201 General status error.
0x202 Import to unknown database type.
0x203 Error while validating Recipe DB table definition.
0x204 Error while validating Recipe DB table data.
0x205 Error while writing Recipe DB table definition.
0x206 Error while writing Recipe DB table data.
0x300 File error: Unknown error.
0x301 File error: Empty file name.
0x302 File error: The external device does not exist.
0x303 File error: Invalid file name (directory or special
files), or a folder with the same name already exits.
0x304 File error: Unable to remove file.
0x305 File error: Open file stream error.
0x306 File error: Unhandled BOM.
0x307 File error: Error while parsing CSV file (incorrect
formats).
0x308 File error: Insufficient space on the external device.
0x309 File error: Unable to find the file.
0x30A File error: The CSV file contains over 10000 data
rows.
0x400 Database general exception.

Objects 13-255
0x401 Database error: Unable to open table.

0x402 Database error: Unable to get rows.
0x403 Number of columns in CSV file and in Recipe DB do
not match.
0x501 Unable to connect remote HMI.
0x503 Import from remote HMI database is prohibited.
0x504 Import from remote HMI database is not
supported.
Click the icon to watch the demonstration film. Please confirm your internet connection before
playing the film.

Objects 13-256
13.41. Pie Chart
13.41.1. Overview
The Pie Chart object draws a pie chart that is divided into slices to illustrate numerical
proportion, according to the value of the designated read address.
Click the Pie Chart icon on the toolbar to open the property dialog box. Set up the properties,
press OK button, and a new Pie Chart object will be created.
General Tab
Setting Description
Angle Set the [Start degree] of the chart. Choose the Chart
to be [Clockwise] or [Counter clockwise].
If [Full circle] isn’t selected, then [End degree] must

Objects 13-257
be set.
Hole Set the size of the hollow circle in the center of Pie
Chart.
No. of channels Set the number of channels to be displayed in the

chart. The range is from 2 to 16.
Border color Set the color of the border.
Data display The [Style] can be set as [None], [Value] and
[Percentage]. The [Font] and [Size] are for the text
on the chart. For Value Style, the [Right of decimal
Pt.] can set the value on the chart to be displayed
with the decimal point. The [Right of decimal Pt.]
option is only available for [Value] style.
Read Address The address is for channel 1. The following
consecutive addresses are for the rest of the
channels. For example, if the Read Address is LW-0,
then the Read Address for channel 2 is LW-1;
channel 3 is LW-2…and so on.
Channel Set the [Text color], [Background color], [Pattern
color], and [Pattern style] of the selected channel.
The [Background color] is for the [Pattern style] that
has background. If the [Pattern style] doesn’t have a
background, then the [Background color] doesn’t
need to be set.

Objects 13-258
cMT Series HMI support combo setting for Pic Chart, which allows setting of multiple related
objects at a time. Pic chart can be set with Background and Legend.
Background

Objects 13-259
Setting Description
the objects.

Picture

Picture Library.
Legend

Objects 13-260
Setting Description
Title Set whether to use a title for Pic Chart, and set the
font size / font color of the title. The title can be
selected from Label Library.
Channel Set the channel label. When using Label Library, the
number of the channels should be the same as the
number of states in the library.

Objects 13-261
13.42. Barcode
13.42.1. 2D Barcode Display
13.42.1.1. Overview
The 2D Barcode Display object transfers the information from the read address into QR Code or
Aztec Code.
Click the 2D Barcode Display icon on the toolbar to open the property dialog box. Set up the
properties, press OK button, and a new 2D Barcode Display object will be created.
General Tab
Setting Description
Mode Supports QR code and Aztec code.
Correction level 2D barcodes have error correction capability to restore data
if the barcode is dirty or damaged.
QR code
Four correction levels are available: L, M, Q, and H. The data
restoration rate is listed below. (The data restoration rate for
total codewords. Codeword is a unit that constructs the data
area.)
Correction Level
L 7%
M 15%
Q 25%
H 30%
Aztec code
Aztec code supports error correction levels from 5% to 95%.

Objects 13-262
Specifying a higher correction value results in a larger printed

symbol and increases accuracy.
Color Set the 2D barcode color.
UNICODE By default, the 2D barcode is generated via ASCII encoding. If
this check box is selected, the 2D barcode is generated via
UNICODE encoding.
For characters that are not ASCII defined English alphabets or
numbers, for example, Chinese or Korean characters, please
select the Unicode check box.
Read address The 2D Barcode Display object will display the 2D barcode
generated from the information entered by the read address.
The word length limit: 1 ~ 1024.
13.42.2. WeChart Barcode Display
13.42.2.1. Overview
WeChat Barcode Display object displays the QR code needed for EasyAccess 2.0 push
notification via WeChat.
Click the [Object] » [Barcodes] » [WeChat Barcode Display] to open the property dialog box.
Set up the properties, press OK button, and a new WeChat Barcode Display object will be
created.
General Tab
Setting Description
Mode Supports QR code and Aztec code.
Correction level 2D barcodes have error correction capability to restore data
if the barcode is dirty or damaged.

Objects 13-263
QR code
Four correction levels are available: L, M, Q, and H. The data
restoration rate is listed below. (The data restoration rate for
total codewords. Codeword is a unit that constructs the data
area.)
Correction Level
L 7%
M 15%
Q 25%
H 30%
Aztec code
Aztec code supports error correction levels from 5% to 95%.
Specifying a higher correction value results in a larger printed
symbol and increases accuracy.
Color Set the 2D barcode color.
UNICODE By default, the 2D barcode is generated via ASCII encoding. If
this check box is selected, the 2D barcode is generated via
UNICODE encoding.
For characters that are not ASCII defined English alphabets or
numbers, for example, Chinese or Korean characters, please
select the Unicode check box.
Read address The 2D Barcode Display object will display the 2D barcode
generated from the information entered by the read address.
The word length limit: 1 ~ 1024.

Objects 13-264
System Parameter Settings
Setting Description
EasyAccess WeChat push notification feature is only supported by servers
Server located in China.
WeChat Settings
After downloading the project file to HMI, the QR code will be shown on HMI screen, please
scan this QR code using WeChat application to subscribe to push notifications.
1. Open WeChat application and scan the QR code displayed on HMI.

Objects 13-265
2. Configure after scanning. (At the first time using WeChat, the system will ask for
permission.)
3. The HMI should follow EasyAccess 2.0 public account before it can be binded.

Objects 13-266
4. Follow EasyAccess 2.0 public account to receive event push notification.
5. After following EasyAccess 2.0 public account, do step 1 and step 2 again to bind the HMI.

Objects 13-267
6. Enter EA2.0 platform and tap the button shown below to log in with your account.
7. Push notification from HMI can now be received using WeChat, tap the button shown
below to open HMI management interface.

Objects 13-268
8. In HMI management interface, the online HMI will have a green point near its name, while
an offline HMI has a grey point. HMI can be unbinded by selecting it and then tapping the
trash bin button to delete it from the list. Tapping the gear button will open push
notification settings.
9. Tapping the trash bin button will open the following page where HMI can be unbinded.

Objects 13-269
10. Tapping the gear button can open push notification settings for selecting the events to be
pushed.
Note
 Only an online HMI with EasyAccess 2.0 activated by a server located in China can send
push notification. Scanning QR Code on an HMI that is not activated will open the

Objects 13-270
following window.
 Scanning the QR code on an HMI that is already binded to WeChat account will open the
following window.
 EasyAccess 2.0 push notification via WeChat is only supported by servers located in China,
when scanning QR code on HMIs activated by a global server, the following page will open:

Objects 13-271
https://weintek.zendesk.com/

Objects 13-272
13.42.3. Barcode Scanner (Android Camera)
13.42.3.1. Overview
By connecting an Android device (smartphone/tablet) equipped with a camera to a cMT HMI

using cMT Viewer installed on the Android device, the camera can be used to scan 1D or 2D
barcodes.
Click the Barcode Scanner icon on the toolbar or click [Objects] » [Barcodes] and then select
[Barcode Scanner]. Configure the parameters and click OK; a Barcode Scanner object will be
created.
General Tab
Setting Description
Control address Control address: Gives Command to Barcode

Objects 13-273
Scanner.
0: None
1: Start and Clear
2: Stop
3: Clear
Control address + 1: Shows Execution Status.
0: None
1: Success
2 or more: Error Code
Control address + 2: Shows data length scanned.
Status address Status address: Shows camera status is On / Off.
0: Off
1: On
Status address + 1: Shows whether scanning is
ready.
0: Stopped
1: Ready for scanning
Barcode address The address that stores the data read, UNICODE is
allowed.
Read byte limit If the data read exceeds this setting, the execution
status turns to 2 (error code).

Objects 13-274
Security Tab
Setting Description
Sound If Enable is selected, when data is read, a sound is
emitted. The supported sound file format is .wav.
Note
 Barcode Scanner is currently supported on cMT-SVR and cMT3151 models. Barcode
Scanner cannot be opened using simulation mode or cMT Viewer.
 Supports: EAN/UPC, Code 128, Code 39, Interleaved 2 of 5 and QR Code.
 On the device, if other applications are also using the camera, or the camera is locked,
cMT Viewer may not operate properly.
 In the project, when multiple cMT Viewer devices are connected, since the same address
is shared between the devices, the devices will simultaneously scan if they are displaying
the same window with Barcode Scanner.

Objects 13-275
Example 1
The following demo project shows how to scan QR code using a tablet.
1. At the beginning, the display is dark.
2. Tap Start button, the status of Scanning turns ON, the display turns bright, and is ready for
scanning.
3. When a QR code is read, the Execute Status turns 1, and the QR code is captured, its
content will be displayed in Barcode Address group box. Unicode is also supported.

Objects 13-276
4. If the size of the data read exceeds the maximum allowable size set in Read Byte Limit (10
bytes in this project), the Execution Status turns to 2 (error code). The exceeding part will
still be displayed in the ASCII objects in Barcode Address group box, since the data length
displayed depends on the ASCII object settings (20 words in this project).
5. After changing to another page, Scanning turns OFF, the parameters are reserved. The
parameters will be cleared when next time Start button is tapped, or Clear button is
tapped.

Objects 13-277

Objects 13-278
13.43. String Table
13.43.1. Overview
By pre-configuring the texts and their corresponding numbers in the String Table, the text can
be changed dynamically on HMI. String Table can also be used in a multi-language
environment.
Click [Project] » [String] to open the property dialog box. Set up the properties, press OK
button, and a new String Table object will be created.
Setting Description
Section A list of all the existing String Tables.
[New Section] Add a new String Table.
[Delete Section] Delete the selected String Table.
New Add a new string in the table.
Settings Set the content of the selected string.
Export CSV File… Export all the existing String Tables as a *.csv file.
Import CSV File… Import *.csv file into the String Table.
Export EXCEL File… Export all the existing String Tables as a *.xls file.
Import EXCEL File… Import *.xls file into the String Table.
Note
 The font of each language in the String Table must be specified in Label Text Library.

Objects 13-279
 Number of rows from all sections combined is limited to 10000.

Example 1
1. Create a String Table using the same settings as the preceding figure.
2. Create a Text object, select [Use string table] check box. In String ID group box, select
[Dynamic] and set read address to LW-0.
3. Create a Numeric object, set address to LW-0.

4. When the value in LW-0 is 0, the No. 0 string is displayed; when the value in LW-0 is 1, the
No. 1 string is displayed.

Objects 13-280
13.44. Database
13.44.1. Database Server
13.44.1.1. Overview
Database Server object enables connection with MySQL or MS SQL database server, allowing
users to send data log or event log to the database, or use SQL Query to access data from the
database.
Click the Database Server icon on the toolbar to create a Database Server object. Or, click
[Data/History] » [Database Server] in the menu.

Objects 13-281
General Tab
Setting Description
Server system Supported server systems: MySQL, MS SQL Server
IP Enter the IP address of the database.
Use domain name
A domain name can be used as MQTT server’s IP address.

Use server name
This option is only available when the selected server

system is MS SQL Server. An instance stands for a
communication port number, and the port number can
be used to identify multiple database servers on the
same computer.
A server name can be in one of the following formats.
 <Computer name>\<Instance name>
 <Computer name> ( Connect to Default Instance :
MSSQLSERVER)
 <IP address>\<Instance name>
 <IP address> (Connect to Default Instance :
MSSQLSERVER)
Port Enter the port number of the database.
Username Enter the username for connecting the database.
The maximum is 32 words.
Password Enter the password for connecting the database.
The maximum is 32 words.
Database name Enter the name of the database for collecting historical
data.
Status/Control Tab
Setting Description
Status address LW-n: Displays the connection status of Database
Server.
Value Description
0 Not attempting to connect to
database.
1 Failed to connect to database.
2 Connection succeeded.

Objects 13-282
LW-n+1: Error indicator.

Value Description
0 No error.
1 Unknown error.
2 Failed to connect to database.
3 Database blocks the
unauthorized connection.
4 Incorrect database name.
5 Invalid domain name.
Control address LW-n: Controls the operation of Database Server.
Value Description
0 Ready
1 Start
2 Stop
3 Update
LW-n+1: Sets the IP address of the database.
LW-n+5: Sets the port number of the database.
LW-n+6: Sets the username for connecting database.
LW-n+22: Sets the password for connecting database.
LW-n+38: Sets the name of the database for collecting
historical data.
 If sampled data is successfully synchronized to the SQL database, three tables will be
generated in the database, and the sampled data is saved in *_data table.
Table Description
<HMI NAME>_<DATALOG NAME>_data Saves data sampling
<HMI NAME>_<DATALOG NAME>_data_format System folder
<HMI NAME>_<DATALOG NAME>_data_section System folder
 When synchronizing event log, the three tables generated in the database are listed as
the following table, and the event log is saved in *_event table.
Table Description
<HMI NAME>_event Saves event log
<HMI NAME>_event_log System folder
<HMI NAME>_event_update_time System folder
 If the content of data sampling / event log, such as data format or event message, is
changed and downloaded to HMI, please delete the tables listed above first, and then the
new content will thus be effective.
Example 1
1. Create a Database Server object, set Status Address to LW-0, and Control Address to
LW-10.

Objects 13-283
2. Create a Data Sampling object, in [Sync. to database] group box select [Enable], and set
Control Address to LW-80, to update or clear HMI historical data.
3. If the database is successfully connected, the status indicator LW-0 displays 2 (connection
succeeded), and the error indicator LW-10 displays 0 (no error).
4. Write 2 in LW-80 (sync. data). Open SQL database, the data can be found in table <HMI
NAME>_<DATALOG NAME>_data.

Objects 13-284
Click the icon to watch the demonstration film. Please confirm your internet connection before
playing the film.
13.44.2. SQL Query
13.44.2.1. Overview
SQL Query can exchange data with SQL database. Before enabling SQL Query, please configure
Database Server.
Click [Data/History] » [SQL Query] to open the settings dialog box. Configure the parameters
and click OK; a SQL Query will be created.
General Tab
Setting Description
Advanced Mode Without [Advanced Mode] selected:

Objects 13-285
Click [New] to add a new row or click [Import from

server] to import an existing database.
With [Advanced Mode] selected:
Manually enter syntax in Command tab to control
MySQL/MS SQL database. Please note that returning
from Advanced Mode to General Mode is not
possible.
Description User’s description about this query.
Database Select the source database to read from.
Local: The source database is the SQLite database
stored in a USB disk or SD card attached to HMI.
playing the film.
Remote: The source database is the designated
Database Server.
File path Use [Static] or [Dynamic] directory for a local
database. When [Static] is selected, please enter the
directory in this dialog box. When [Dynamic] is
selected, please designate an address as the data
source for the file path.
Table name Enter the name of this query table.
Schema The data read from database will be filled into the
corresponding address specified in the schema.
Please manually set Address Format after reading
data.
Note
 A Primary Key should contain only numeric values.
 In MySQL, Auto Increment must be enabled for Primary Key.

Objects 13-286
Command Tab
Setting Description
Control address Designate five consecutive registers to execute
commands and show results. When importing the
table from database, four commands will exist by
default in the Command table: Create, Read,
Update, and Delete.
13.44.2.3. Advanced Mode
In the Command table in Advanced Mode, [No. of arguments], [No. of outputs], and [Action]
columns can be found.

Objects 13-287
Click [New] or [Settings] to open SQL Query Command window.
Query Tab
Setting Description
Command ID Specify the ID number used to give this command.
Description Enter the description of this command.

Objects 13-288
SQL Query Enter the syntax for this command. An argument

should be enclosed in braces: ${argument no.}
Discard result With this checkbox selected, the result of executing
this command will not be shown in SQL Query Result
Viewer object. This checkbox can be selected for
commands that are done directly to the database
without the need for returning a result, such as
INSERT INTO, UPDATE, DELETE…etc.
Argument Tab
If argument is used in the syntax of a command in [Query] tab, the system will refer to the
address specified in this tab according to the argument number enclosed in ${argument no.}.

Objects 13-289
Output Tab
After reading database, the result will be stored in the addresses specified in this tab.
13.44.2.4. Status
Value Meaning
0 Normal
1 Query result exceeds 1000 records. Using LIMIT clause can
constrain the number of rows in one page.
13.44.2.5. Error Code
Error Code Meaning

0 No mistakes
1 Unknown error
2 Invalid command
3 Database Server is not connected yet
4 Argument cannot be read
5 Cannot write and output

Objects 13-290
6 Incorrect number of arguments

7 Error in MySQL, please read error message
8 Unsupported datatype
9 Number of columns exceeds the limit
10 Number of rows exceeds the limit
11 Unable to read local database directory
12 Name of local database does not exist
13 Internal error
13.44.2.6. Converting Datatype
Converting datatype as shown in the following table will take place after reading MySQL
database. If conversion cannot run properly, error code 5 will show. For example, when
converting MySQL’s INT into EasyBuilder Pro’s 16-bit Unsigned, if the value exceeds the limit of
16-bit Unsigned, error code 5 will show.
MySQL data format EasyBuilder Pro datatype
TINYINT 16/32-bit BCD
SMALLINT 16/32-bit HEX
MEDIUMINT 16/32-bit Binary
INT 16/32-bit Signed
BIGINT 16/32-bit Unsigned
BIT
FLOAT 32-bit Float
DOUBLE
DECIMAL
DATETIME String
CHAR, BINARY
VARCHAR, VARBINARY
TINYBLOB, TINYTEXT
BLOB, TEXT
MEDIUMBLOB, MEDIUMTEXT
LONGBLOB, LONGTEXT

Objects 13-291
13.44.3. SQL Query Result Viewer
13.44.3.1. Overview
SQL Query Result Viewer shows the results obtained by running SQL Query.
Click on [Data/History] » [SQL Query Result Viewer] to open the settings dialog box. Configure
the parameters and click OK; a SQL Query Result Viewer will be created.
General Tab
Setting Description
Comment User’s comment about this result viewer.
SQL Query Select an existing SQL Query to show its result.
Style/ Style Color Select a style and a color for this result viewer.
Text Set the font, font size, and font color for the texts
shown in this result viewer.

Objects 13-292
Caption Set the font size and font color for the caption of this
result viewer.
Table This group box opens when selecting Default as
style. The attributes of the result query table can be
configured.
Filter enabled With this checkbox selected, entering keywords in
SQL Query Result Viewer to search for specific text is
possible.

Objects 13-293
13.45. Dynamic Scale
13.45.1. Overview
Dynamic Scale offers customizable tick marks and scale labels and can be used together with
objects such as Trend Display, Bar Graph…, etc.
Click the Dynamic Scale icon on the toolbar to open a Dynamic Scale object property dialog box.
Set up the properties, press OK button, and a new Dynamic Scale object will be created.
General Tab
Setting Description
Style Select the style from [Circular], [Horizontal], or [Vertical]. If select
[Circular], set the [Direction] and [Degree].

Objects 13-294
Direction
Select from [Clockwise] or [Counterclockwise].
Degree
If [Full circle] is selected, set the start degree.
If [Full circle] is not selected, set the start and end degree.
Tick Mark Select the color of the tick mark, and set the number of ticks for the
main and sub scale (major and minor tick mark).
For [Circular] style, the length of the major and minor tick mark, and
the radius of the circular tick mark can be set.
Scale Label Displays major tick labels.
Circular
Set the font, font color, font size, and decimal point of the scale

Objects 13-295
label.
Set the radius start from the center of the object to the position to
place the scale label.
Virtical / Horizontal
Set the font, font color, font size, and decimal point of the scale
label.
Set the position to display the scale label.
The Max. and Min. limits of the scale label can be specified. If
[Dynamic limits] is selected, the Max. and Min. limits can be set by
the designated word addresses.

Objects 13-296
13.46. Dynamic Drawing
13.46.1. Overview
Dynamic Drawing object enables drawing a shape in a specified region on HMI screen at run
time. The shape can be a line, a rectangle, a circle, or a dot. By setting the Attributes Addresses,
the style and the color of the shape can be customized.
Click the Dynamic Drawing icon on the toolbar to open a Dynamic Drawing object property
dialog box. Set up the properties, press OK button, and a new Dynamic Drawing object will be
created.
General Tab
Setting Description
Clear Address Clears the drawing.

Objects 13-297
Attributes Address Changes the attributes in the drawing.
Entering different values in different Attributes Addresses brings different effects, as shown in
the following table.
Attributes Attributes Attributes Attributes Attributes Attributes

Address Address+0 Address+1 Address+2 Address+3 Address+4
Default 0 Ones Tens Customizable Customizable
0: Non-arrow 0: Small 0: Solid line
1: Single-ended arrow (Hollow) 1: Large 1: Dashed line
2: Double-ended arrow (Hollow) 2: Dotted line
Line 1 3: Single-ended arrow (Solid) 3: Dash Dot line Line color
4: Double-ended arrow (Solid) 4: Dash Dot Dot line
5 and up: Solid line

with thicknesses greater
than 2
0: Hollow Drawn in Line mode Interior pattern
Rectangle 2 Rectangle color
1: Solid Drawn in Pattern mode color

Circle 3 Circle color
Dot 4 Dot color

Ellipse 5 Ellipse color
Ellipse from 0: Hollow Drawn in Line mode Interior pattern

6 Ellipse color
Rectangle 1: Solid Drawn in Pattern mode color
Arc 7 Drawn in Line mode Arc color

Pie 8 Pie color
Move Origin 21
Attributes Attributes Attributes Attributes Attributes Attributes Attributes

Address Address+0 Address+5 Address+6 Address+7 Address+8 Address+9
Default 0
Line 1 Start point X Start point Y End point X End point Y
Right-bottom point Right-bottom point

Rectangle 2 Left-top point X Left-top point Y
X Y
Circle 3 Center point X Center point Y Radius
Dot 4 Dot X Dot Y
Ellipse 5 Center point X Center point Y Radius on the X Radius on the Y

Objects 13-298
axis axis
Ellipse from
6 Left-top point X Left-top point Y Width Height
Rectangle
Arc 7 Center point X Center point Y Radius Start degree End degree
Pie 8 Center point X Center point Y Radius Start degree End degree
Move Origin 21 New origin X New origin Y
The values in [Attributes Address+2] represent different Line or Pattern styles, as shown in the
following table.

Objects 13-299
Color Tab
Setting Description
New Adds a color to be used in the drawing.
Delete Deletes the selected color.

Objects 13-300
Example 1
The following demo project demonstrates how to dynamically draw an arrow or a circle on HMI
screen. To build the project, follow these steps:
1. Create a Dynamic Drawing object, set Clear Address to LB-0, and Attributes Address to
LW-0.
2. Create a Toggle Switch object, set address to LB-0, and select Toggle as switch style, for
clearing the drawing.
3. Create 10 Numeric objects, set addresses to LW-0~LW-9, for specifying the attributes in the
drawing.
4. Run simulation or download the project to HMI to see the result. By entering 1 in LW-0, a
line is drawn, and entering different values in LW-1~9 can change the style, the color, and
the position of the line.
5. Press Clear Pattern button, and enter 3 in LW-0, a circle is drawn, and entering different
values in LW-1~9 can change the style, the color, and the position of the circle.

Objects 13-301
Note
 Before using Attributes Address, please define [Attributes Address + 1] ~ [Attributes
Address + 9]. The system will reset the Attributes Address, after it is used.
 If the drawing is not cleared, the new drawing will overlap the previous one, and the
maximum acceptable number of drawings in a Dynamic Drawing object is 1000.
 The maximum number of line styles is 19, which means the maximum thickness of a solid
line is 16. The style numbers that exceed 19 will be displayed as 19.
 Find the color number in Color tab.
 The range of the start and end degree for Arc and Pie is 0 to 360 degrees.
 Origin position is relative to left-top corner (0,0). Giving “move origin” command will
make (x1, y1) the new origin, and x1, y1 will keep on accumulating until being reset to (0,0)
by clearing the drawing.

Objects 13-302
13.47. PDF Reader
13.47.1. Overview
PDF Reader object enables viewing of PDF documents on HMI.
Click the PDF Reader icon on the toolbar to create a PDF Reader object. Or, click [Object] »
[Media] » [PDF Reader] in the menu.
General Tab
Setting Description
File position Select the position where the PDF file is stored.
Path The directory of the PDF file stored in the external
device.
Page Control Change the displayed page by entering its page
number.

Objects 13-303
Note
 PDF Reader cannot be opened using simulation mode or cMT Viewer.
 The PDF files protected by passwords or restrictions cannot be read using PDF Reader.
 CPU loading may rise when multiple PDF Reader objects are opened simultaneously.
 When entering a page number in the Page Control register under multi-page view mode,
the specified page will be opened in single-page view.

Objects 13-304
13.48. Table
13.48.1. Overview
Table object allows users to draw a table in the editing window, and customize the border, grid,
and pattern of the table.
Click the Table icon on the toolbar to create a Table object. Or, click [Object] » [Table] in the
menu.
General Tab

Objects 13-305
Setting Description
Preview Window Displays the settings result.
Vertical Sets the number of columns in the table. Range:
1~255
Horizontal Sets the number of rows in the table. Range: 1~255
Spacing The available options are [Equal] and [Free]. When
[Free] is selected, the user can manually adjust the
column width or row height in the editing window.
Border Sets the type, width, and color of the border. [Line
width] setting is available only when Solid line type
is selected. The range of width is 0~8. The line will
become invisible when the width is set to 0.
Grid Sets the type, width, and color of the grid. [Line
width] setting is available only when Solid line type
is selected. The range of width is 0~8. The line will
become invisible when the width is set to 0.
Fill Sets the pattern style and color.
Alignment By dragging the objects into the cells in the Table,
the objects can align to the preset position. Different
alignments can be set for each cell in the Table, by
default the objects are center-aligned, and nine
different alignments can be selected as shown in the
screenshot of the settings window.

Objects 13-306
13.49. VNC Viewer
13.49.1. Overview
VNC Viewer can run on HMI to control a PC or a device remotely. VNC server must be installed
on the remote device to be connected. On HMI the user can monitor and control the remote
device.
Click on the VNC Viewer icon on the toolbar or select [Objects] » [VNC Viewer] to open the
settings dialog box. Configure the parameters and click OK; a VNC Viewer object will be
created.
General Tab

Objects 13-307
Setting Description
IP Enter the IP address of the remote device to be
connected.
Port Enter the port number of the remote device to be
connected.
Default Password Enter the VNC password to log in the VNC server of
the remote device. If Default Password is enabled,
when connecting the remote device, VNC Viewer
will automatically use the password specified here
to log in, and the user doesn’t need to enter the
password.
Color level Select from four color levels: Full (all available
colors), Medium (256 colors), Low (64 colors), Very
low (8 colors).
Auto select (not all servers support this function)
Allow VNC Viewer to automatically detect and select
the color level supported by the server used.
Enable run-time modification in [Control] function
Select color level or decide whether to enable [Auto
select] in HMI runtime using the control addresses
that can be specified in the Control tab in the VNC
Viewer settings dialog box.
Title bar Enable
When [Enable] is selected, a field shows for entering
the caption in the title bar. The caption is limited to
ASCII characters, and the font cannot be customized.
The caption can be selected from Label Tag Library.
Only when the title bar is enabled can the VNC
Viewer window be moved or resized by dragging.
Note
 eMT/iE/XE/mTV: VNC Viewer is supported for OS version 20160418 or later.
 cMT Series: VNC Viewer is supported only on cMT series HMI screen accessed locally, and
for OS version 20180928 or later.
 VNC Viewer cannot be simulated in on-line simulation mode.
 When [Default password] is selected, HMI’s Virtual Keyboard can only be called out
manually. If [Default password] is not selected, the Virtual Keyboard can pop up
automatically.

Objects 13-308
Control Tab
Setting Description
IP A set of word addresses can be specified to control
VNC Viewer as well to display the connection status.
Control address: Shows the connection status
0: Stopped
1: Running
2: Failed to connect
3: Authentication error
4: Server disconnection error
5: Security error
Control address + 1: Command
0: None
1: Start
2: Stop
Control address+2~+5: IP
Control address+6: Port Number

Objects 13-309
Control address+7: Default Password

0: Disable
1: Enable
Control address+8: Password (16 words)
Control address+24: Title bar
0: Disable
1: Enable
Control address+25: Title bar name (16 words)
Control address +41: Color level
0: Very low
1: Low
2: Medium
3: Full
Control address +42: Auto select
0: Disable
1: Enable
Note
 The allowable value range that can be entered in Control Address+6 is 0~99. The actual
Port Number will be the value entered in Control Address+6 plus 5900. For example, if the
user enters 1 in Control Address+6, the actual Port Number will be 5901. However, if the
user enters 100 in Control Address+6, the value will not be added by 5900, and the actual
Port Number will be 100.
 In VNC Viewer, to use the HMI built-in Virtual Keyboard, please tap the Focus button on
the Virtual Keyboard first, and then tap VNC Viewer screen. This will change the input
target.

Objects 13-310
13.50. Contacts Editor
13.50.1. Overview
Contacts Editor enables users to dynamically add / modify / delete email contacts on HMI.
Click the Contacts Editor icon on the toolbar to create a Contacts Editor object. Or, click
[Objects] » [Contacts Editor] in the menu.
General Tab

Objects 13-311
Setting Description
Control Address A set of word addresses can be specified to change
contact list or to show results.
Control address: Gives commands.
Value Command
0 None
1 Add a contact to contacts list
2 Delete a contact from contacts list
3 Update mail address
4 Add a contact to group
5 Remove a contact from group
6 Remove all contacts from group
7 Display contacts in group
8 Display contacts with no group
9 Display all contacts
Control address + 1: Shows execution result.
Value Result
1 Success
2 Invalid command
3 Contact not found
4 Contact already exists
5 Too many contacts
6 Invalid name
7 Invalid mail address
8 Invalid group (equal to zero)
9 Invalid group (exceed boundary)
Control address + 2: Group(s), uses bits to
represent groups.
Value Commands
0 Group A
1 Group B
2 Group C
3~15 Group D ~ Group P
Control address + 3: Name (32 word(s)), contact
name
Control address + 35: e-Mail (32 word(s)), e-mail
address

Objects 13-312
Note
 General tab cannot be found when the model used is a cMT model.
 Contact names do not support Unicode.
 The number of groups is specified in [System Parameter Settings] » [e-Mail] » [Recipients].
Please note that the number of groups cannot be dynamically changed on HMI.
Outline
Setting Description
Font & Color Select Contacts Editor object’s font and color.
Title
Setting Description
Title The title shown in Contacts Editor.
Display chars The displayable data length of each title in Contacts
Editor. Range: 1~60

Objects 13-313
13.51. Event Bar Chart
13.51.1. Overview
Event Bar Chart is a type of easy-to-use bar chart that can comprehensively illustrate project
schedule. Using Event Bar Chart to illustrate HMI events or alarms can help users to clearly
understand the time at which an event or alarm occurs, and its duration. Before drawing an
Event Bar Chart, please configure Event Log object first.
This feature is only supported on cMT Series models (excluding cMT-Gateway).
13.51.2.1. Event Log
Click [Data/History] » [Event Log] in the menu to configure several event logs. This section
describes the Event Bar Chart related settings that can be found in the Event Log settings dialog
box.
Setting Description
Edit category name
Event Bar Chart will show the name of each category.
mapping

Objects 13-314
13.51.2.2. General Tab
Setting Description
Category Event Bar Chart will illustrate the duration of all events in
one category, please select correct category in this field.
13.51.2.3. Message Tab
Setting Description
Text Enter the name of the event log.
Color Select the color for the bar shown in Event Bar Chart
that illustrates this event log.

Objects 13-315
13.51.2.4. Event Bar Chart
Click [Data/History] » [Event Bar Chart] in the menu to draw an Event Bar Chart.
General Tab
Setting Description
Include categories Select the categories that will be shown in Event
BarChart.
Appearance Tab
Setting Description
Display timespan Specify the time interval that is measured as a number of

Objects 13-316
hours. Events occur during this time interval will be

illustrated in Event Bar Chart. Tapping in the upper
right corner of the HMI screen can also change this
setting.
Style By default 3 styles are provided for users to choose from.

Text size Text sizes range from 50%~200%.
Title bar Format Date + Time:
Date only:
Time only:
Watch line A watch line shows at the point in the Event Bar Chart
that is touched. The time represented by the touched
point will show at the top of the watch line.
Number of Division The number of divisions on X axis.
Time label Format The format in which the time label is displayed.
HMI Settings
On cMT HMI or cMT Viewer, tap the icon in the upper-right corner of the object to open
the following settings window.

Objects 13-317
Setting Description
Begin Date and Time Specify the begin date and time at which Event Bar
Chart displays data. By default this setting is disabled,
and Event Bar Chart displays from the begin date and
time of the stored data.
End Date and Time Specify the end date and time at which Event Bar Chart
displays data. By default this setting is disabled, and
Event Bar Chart ends at the end date and time of the
stored data.
Event Filter Keyword
Events can be filtered by entering a keyword.
Match case
Use case-sensitive search when searching for events in
English.
Display Timespan Dynamically change the time range (1~96 hours.)
(hr.) shown in Event Bar Chart. Select all to display all
existing events.
Note
 When HMI power is off, the HMI will not be able to obtain the alarm states; therefore, the
alarm states during the power off period will not be illustrated in Event Bar Chart, not
even after the power turns on.

Objects 13-318
13.52. Action Trigger
13.52.1. Overview
The Action Trigger object can classify actions into action groups. The groups are put in
sequence. The actions within the same group are executed at the same time. When all the
actions within the same group are completed, the actions in the next group are then executed..
This object is only available for cMT Series.
Click [Object] » [Action Trigger] icon on the toolbar to open an Action Trigger object property
dialog box. Clicking [New] can add a new Action Trigger.
General Tab

Objects 13-319
Setting Description
Mode: Idle If the screen is left untouched for more than the specified time limit
Timeout configured in [Idle Timeout], Action Trigger will start executing.
Range: 1~43200 seconds
Mode: Value When the state of the designated register meets the preset
Changed condition, Action Trigger will start executing.
Check condition recursively when actions ended
When all actions are completed, the trigger condition will be checked
again; and if the condition is met, the actions will be triggered again.
Dynamic condition value
This option is available when [Word] is selected as Type. Selecting
this option opens the [Read/Condition use different addresses]
option. When [Read/Condition use different addresses] is not
selected, the condition value is read from the next contiguous
register of [Value address].
Action Group Actions are classified into groups. Actions in the same group will
simultaneously be triggered, and only after the actions in the
previous group have been all triggered, the actions in the next group
will then be triggered.
Delay Delays the action for the specified time period (milliseconds).
Set Bit Sets the designated bit address ON or OFF.
Set ON
Sets ON the designated bit.
Set OFF
Sets OFF the designated bit.
Toggle
Alternates the bit state.
Set Word Changes the value in the designated word address.
Write constant value
Sets a register with the constant value entered.
Increment value (JOG+)
Increases value in register by a set amount in [Inc. value], up to the
[Upper limit].
Decrement Value (JOG-)
Decreases value in register by a set amount in [Dec. value], down to
the [Bottom limit].
Dynamic Limits (JOG+, JOG-)
Sets the [Bottom limit] and [Upper limit] by a designated register.

Objects 13-320
When JOG+ is used, the designated register sets the upper limit.
When JOG- is used, the designated register sets the bottom limit.
Change Switches to the designated window. Change full-screen window can
window only be the last action in the last group in an Action Trigger.
Change full-screen window: Changes to another base window.
Change common window: Changes common window.
Return to previous window: Changes from current screen to the
previous one displayed. For example, when window no. 10 is
changed to window no. 20, this function can be used to return to
window no. 10. This function is only available for base window.
Animation Setting:
The effects are: Fade, Fly, Float, Wipe, Split, Circle, Clock, Zoom, Turn,
Push. Different effects may be used for Start (window appears) and
End (window disappears).
takes to complete.
Execute Executes one of the Macros from the drop down list that has already
Macro been configured by users. Running a macro may take a while to
complete; therefore, when [Execute Macro] is put into an action
group, it is seen as completed when it is triggered. The system will
not wait for the macro to complete running before moving on to the
next action group.
Popup
Pops-up a designated window.
Window
Keyboard Inputs characters/control signals, as often used with [Numeric] or
Input [ASCII] objects.
keyboard window.

Objects 13-321
Inc: Add 1 to the current value.

Dec: Minus 1 from the current value.
Screen
Saves current screen as a hard copy file into a SD card or USB disk.
Hardcopy
Acknowledge
all events Acknowledges all events at once.
(Alarms)
Import Data Imports the e-mail contacts or user accounts, or logs in using USB
Security Key.
Data Position:
The external device to read data from. Options: USB disk or SD card.
Account import mode:
If [Overwrite] is selected, there will be only imported accounts after
import. If [Append] is selected, there will be imported accounts in
addition to existing accounts after import.
Delete file after importing user accounts:
The system will delete the account data saved in the external device
after importing; this can prevent the account data from leaking out.
Wait Until The next group will be executed only when the condition set for a
designated bit or word address is met. However, if the condition is
not met even after the set wait time (timeout), it can either move on
to the next action group or end prematurely without continuing.
Data Transfer
Sends the value in the designated address to another address.
(Global)
Note
 At most 1000 Action Triggers can be created in a project.
 At most 20 groups can be created in an Action Trigger, and at most 20 actions can be
added into a group.

Objects 13-322
13.53. Calendar
13.53.1. Overview
The Calendar object can show a calendar on cMT Series HMI.
Click [Object] » [Time-related] » [Calendar] icon on the toolbar to open a Calendar object
property dialog box. Set up the properties, press OK button, and a new Calendar object will be
created.
General Tab
Setting Description
Appearance Navigation bar Set the background color and text color of the
navigation bar.

Objects 13-323
Day of week Set the background color and text color of the days of
week.
Day Set the background color, grid color, and text color of the days.
Today Set the background color and text color to show today.

Shape Library and Picture Library 14-1
14. Shape Library and Picture

Library
This chapter explains how to build Shape Library and Picture Library.
14.1. Overview ..................................................................................................................... 14-2

14.2. Building Shape Library ................................................................................................ 14-2
14.3. Building Picture Library............................................................................................... 14-9
14.4. Immediate Modification and Preview ...................................................................... 14-15

14.1. Overview
EasyBuilder Pro provides Shape Library and Picture Library for visual effects on objects.
Picture Manager provides two modes: [Project] and [Library]. Pictures in [Project] mode will be
stored in .emtp project file. Pictures in [Library] mode will be stored in EasyBuilder Pro libraries,
or the user-defined directory.
Each Shape or Picture includes up to 256 states. This chapter explains how to build Shape
Library and Picture Library.
For more information about using libraries while creating an object, see “9 Object General
Properties”.
14.2. Building Shape Library
Shapes are vector graphics constructed by lines, curves or polygons. A Shape can have more
than one state, and each state includes two parts: frame and inner, as shown in the following
figure.
State 0 State 1
Frame
Inner
14.2.1. Shape manager
An object can use frame, inner or both. Click [Project] » [Shape], and the [Shape manager]
dialog box appears.

Setting Description
Project The Shape edited here will be saved in .emtp. Up to
1000 Shapes can be added.
Library The Shape edited here will be saved to the library
directory on PC and will not be saved to .emtp
project file.
Include existing .plb shape library files or create a
New library
new one. To create an empty library, enter a new
file name and click [Open]. Up to 40 library files can
be added.
Unattach library Exclude currently selected library.
Copy the selected Shape to [Project]. Only the

Copy to project
shapes that do not belong to the System Libraries
can be copied. Shapes in System Frame/System
Button/System Lamp/System Pipe cannot be
copied.
Background Select and preview the background color of the
Shape. The color is only displayed in [Shape
manager] dialog box, and is not displayed when
placing the object in the screen.
More options Set the color and style of [Inner], [Frame], and

[Pattern].
Move the Shape to the previous / next state.
Copy Copy the selected Shape.
Paste Paste the copied Shape.
Insert transparent Insert a blank state after the selected state.

state
Delete Delete the selected state of the shape.
Clean Delete all the states of the selected shape.
OK Confirm to save the edited Shape.
Cancel Cancel the editing event.
Help Open help files.
Note
 The color of [Inner] and [Frame] can be selected in Shape Library. The selection of [Pattern
Style] is only available in System Frame / System Button Library.
 cMT Series supports using gradient patterns in [Pattern Style], as follow:
14.2.2. Steps to Build Shape Library
The following explains how to create a new Shape Library and add a Shape with two states into

the library.
1. Click [New library] and enter the name of the new Shape Library, for example, “new_lib”.
2. Click [Open], a popup dialog appears; click [Yes] to create the file.
3. A new Shape Library [new_lib] is added in [Shape manager], and its directory is shown
below the name. This library is empty now as shown in the following figure.
4. Add a state to the selected Shape. First, use the drawing tools to draw a frame and inner
in the window and select the frame to add to the Shape Library.

5. Click [Project] » [Shape] » [Save to shape] button in the toolbar, select [new_lib], and
select a number in this library. The selected number is highlighted yellow.
6. Save the Shape as [Frame], select [Insert], and click [Save].
Setting Description
Inner Displays the inner of the Shape.
Frame Displays the frame of the Shape.
Save to library Save as Frame
Saves the Shape as a frame.
Save as Inner
Saves the Shape as inner.

Insert
Inserts the Shape to be a new state.
Replace
Replaces a state with this Shape.
Save Saves the settings above.
7. The following shows that a state of the Shape is added, and is defined as a frame.
8. Create the shape to be saved as inner. Select the shape drawn in the window.
9. Click [Save to Shape Library] button in the toolbar, select [new_lib], and select the same
number as in creating the frame in this library. The selected number is highlighted yellow.
10. Save the Shape as [Inner], select [Replace], and click [Save].

11. A state of a Shape can include [Inner], [Frame], or both. The state 0 of the Shape shown in
the following figure includes both frame and inner. Click [OK], the state 0 of the Shape is
created.
12. Follow the steps of creating state 0 and insert a new state set to state 1 as shown in the
following figure. The Shape now has two states, click [OK] to finish setting.

14.3. Building Picture Library
14.3.1. Picture manager
Click [Project] » [Picture] button in the toolbar and the [Picture manager] dialog box appears.
Setting Description
Project The Picture edited here will be saved in .emtp. Up
to 1000 Pictures can be added.
Library The Picture edited here will be saved to the library
directory on PC and will not be saved to .emtp
project file.
Add the existing .flbx and .flb picture library files.
New library
To add a new library that does not exist, enter a
new file name and click [Open], an empty library
file is created. Up to 40 library files can be added.
Unattach library Delete the currently selected library.

Browse libraries Search for path and view the pictures in the path.
Copy to project Copy the Picture to [Project].

Background Select the background color of the Picture. The
color is only displayed in [Picture manager] dialog
box, and is not displayed when placing the object in
the screen.
More picture Log in to Weintek Official Website to download
libraries more libraries.
Export Export the selected Picture.
Modify Modify the settings of the selected Picture.
Move the Picture to the previous / next state.
Copy Copy the selected Picture.
Paste the copied Picture. The Picture copied to the

Paste
clipboard can be imported to the library by pasting.
Insert
Insert a blank state after the selected state.
transparent state
New Add a new Picture.
Delete Delete the selected Picture.
Clean Delete all the Pictures listed here.
OK Confirm to save the edited Shape.
Cancel Cancel the editing event.
Help Open help files.
Note
 The supported picture formats are .bmp, .jpg, .gif, .dpd, .svg and .png. When adding a gif
animation file in Picture Library, the loop times of this animated Picture can be set.

14.3.2. Steps to Build Picture Library
The following example explains how to create a new Picture Library and add a Picture with
two states into the library.
1. Click [New library] and enter the name of the new Picture Library.
2. Click [Open], a popup dialog appears; click [Yes] to create the file.
3. A new Picture Library [new_lib] is added in [Picture manager]. This library is empty as
4. Draw the two pictures below to represent state 0 and state 1 respectively.
5. Select [new_lib], and select a number in this library. The selected number is highlighted
yellow.

6. Click [New], and select the picture for state 0.

7. When the following dialog box is shown, select [Enable] check box to use transparent
color. Set to RGB (121, 121, 121), the corresponding color in the picture below will be
transparent. Or, click on a desired area with mouse to be the transparent area, the system
will show the RGB of the clicked area automatically.
8. The Picture of state 0 is created. Follow the steps of creating state 0 to create state 1 by
clicking [New] as shown in the following figure.

9. When finished, a complete Picture is created, click [OK]. In [Picture manager] dialog box it
shows that the newly added Picture Number 0 is a bitmap picture with two states.
14.3.3. Steps to Import Picture by Pasting
The following example explains how to import a Picture into the library by pasting the picture
from the clipboard.
1. Copy the following picture to the clipboard.
2. Click the Paste icon on the right side.

3. The Pictur can be easily imported to the library.
Pasting a picture directly from the clipboard into the project editing window is possible.
1. If the picture below is already in the clipboard.
2. Pressing Ctrl+V key in the editing window will open the following dialog box.
3. The picture will be pasted into the editing window after clicking OK.
4. Double clicking the picture and open Picture Library, the picture can be found in the

Project tab in Picture Manager.
Note
 Transparent color can only be set for .bmp, .dpd, and .jpg picture files.
14.4. Immediate Modification and Preview
Shape Library / Picture Library settings windows are opened in the editing window. The user
can immediately change the picture used by an object or multiple objects, and certain libraries
support immediate color change.

14.4.1. Replacing a Picture
1. Click the object or objects whose picture is to be replaced.

2. Locate a new picture in Picture Library window and click the lower-right corner of that
picture.
14.4.2. Replacing a Color
The [Color] drop-down list appears when the selected library supports immediate color
change.

1. Select an object or objects whose color is to be replaced.

2. Select a color from the Color drop-down list.
3. Click the lower-right corner of the new picture to apply.

Setting Description
Set to all states Apply the selected color to all states of the object
that use the same picture.
Auto Automatically execute [Set to all states].

14.4.3. Extended Features
 In the settings window, dragging the slider leftward or rightward can make the thumbnail
of the pictures smaller or bigger.
 Immediate preview can be achieved by:

1. Select an object.
2. Press and hold the Shift key on the keyboard.
3. Select a picture in the library to preview, and release the Shift key to return to current
picture.

14.4.4. Docking a Window
Users can drag the Shape / Picture Library window to a desired destination position. When
dragging the window, a semi-transparent outline of the window shows where the window will
be docked when releasing the mouse cursor at that point.

Label Tag Library and Multi-Language 15-1
15. Label Tag Library and

Multi-Language
This chapter explains how to build and use Label Tag Library.
15.1. Overview ..................................................................................................................... 15-2

15.2. Label Tag Library Manager .......................................................................................... 15-2
15.3. Steps to build Label Tag Library .................................................................................. 15-3
15.4. Using Label Tag Library ............................................................................................... 15-4
15.5. Settings of Multi-Language ......................................................................................... 15-5

15.1. Overview
The Label Tag Library feature enables a multi-language environment. When multiple languages
are required, users can create the Label Tag Library and then select a suitable label in the
project. The project will display the corresponding language in runtime based on the settings.
EasyBuilder Pro supports up to 24 different languages simultaneously. This chapter will explain
how to create and use the Label Tag Library.
15.2. Label Tag Library Manager
Click [Project] » [Label] on the toolbar and the [Label Tag Library] dialog box appears.
Setting Description
State no. Indicates the current state. Each Label has a maximum
of 256 states (state no. 0 ~ 255). The state no. is
determined by [Language no.]. If less than 3 languages
are used, the maximum state no. is 256. If more than
4 languages are used, divide 768 by the language
number to get the maximum state no..
For example, the number of languages is 24, then
there are only 768/24 = 32 states.
New Adds a new Label.
Settings Sets the selected Label.
Save Label File Saves all Labels in .lbl format.
Load Label File Loads the existing .lbl file to the Label Library.
Export EXCEL File Saves all Labels in .csv, .xls, or .xlsx format.

Import EXCEL file Loads the existing .csv, .xls, or .xlsx file to the Label
Library.
Note
 Unicode is not supported when importing and exporting an Excel file.
15.3. Steps to create Label Tag Library
Please follow the steps to create a Label Tag Library.

1. From the Library menu, click [Label]. The Label Tag Library dialog box appears. Click [New]
to specify the name of the Label and the number of states to be displayed by this Label.
2. Click [OK] and a new label is added to the Label Tag Library. Select the label and click
[Settings] to edit its content.
3. Edit the corresponding language content.

15.4. Using Label Tag Library
When there are defined labels in the Label Library, the labels can be found in the object’s
[Label] tab. Select [Use label library] check box, and select the label from the pull-down list
[Label tag].

When a tag is selected, the content of the selected tag is shown in the [Content] field in its
corresponding font style. Please note that from Language 2 to Language 24 can only be set the
Font [Size], the others such as [Color], [Align], [Blink], etc. will follow the settings of Language
1.
15.5. Selecting Language & Font
15.5.1. Language
Click [Project] » [Language & Font] on the toolbar and the [Language & Font] dialog box
appears.

Setting Description
Language no. Specifies the number of languages used in a project.
Font Shows language names and the fonts used for each
language . A font description can be entered.
[Language Code] allows changing the language used
for push notification about the events in EasyAccess
2.0, when [Push notification (EasyAccess 2.0)] is
enabled in Event Log.
playing the film.
15.5.2. Non-ASCII Fonts
Parameters in [Non-ASCII Fonts] tab determine the non-ASCII fonts. The non-ASCII fonts used
are listed here. When using non-ascii characters or double byte characters (including Simplified
or Traditional Chinese, Japanese, or Korean) which are not listed in [Fonts for non-ascii strings]
table, EasyBuilder Pro will select a font from the list to substitute for it automatically.

Setting Description
Add All Non-ascii The non-ascii fonts in Windows can be added to the
Fonts [Fonts for non-ascii strings] table.
Line spacing
Set the space between multiple text lines.
Default font for EasyBuilder will use the selected font as default font
non-ascii strings for non-ascii strings.
Support Arabic, Select this check box to correctly display these
Persian, Hebrew, alphabets.
and Thai,…
alphabets

15.5.3. Font Management
Setting Description
Current used fonts This table shows all the fonts used in this project and
the file position of its font file.
Copy Files To Copy the font file to the specified position.
Replace font in all Change font at a time for all the objects using that
objects font.
15.5.4. Font Mapping
This tab lists the fonts used in Windows / cMT3000 and the mapping fonts in iOS / cMT-iV5 /
Android devices.

Setting Description
Object’s font When the checkbox is selected, the fonts in iOS /
selection includes cMT-iV5 / Android that map to the select font in
iOS / object property settings will be shown.
cMT-iV5/Android
font information
15.6. Settings of Multi-Language
When displaying the texts in multiple languages, the system register “*LW-9134]: language
mode” should be used too.
The value of [LW-9134: language mode] is ranged from 0 to 23. Different values correspond to
different languages.
If not all languages are selected to compile and download, [LW-9134] will work differently.
For example, user defines 5 different languages in the Label Tag Library:
1: English, 2: Traditional Chinese, 3: Simplified Chinese, 4: French, 5: Korean
If only Language 1, Language 3, and Language 5 are selected to compile then the
corresponding values of [LW-9134] are:

0: English, 1: Simplified Chinese, 2: Korean

Please follow the steps to use multiple languages.
1. Create a Text/Comment object and select [Use label library] checkbox.
2. Create a Numeric Input Object and use the system register [LW-9134].
3. When compiling, select the defined languages.

4. The simulation is shown as followed: If the value of [LW-9134] is changed, the content of
the Text object will be changed.
Note
 When using cMT-SVR, system register [LW-9134] is used to change the language mode in
server, while [PLW-9134] is used to change the language mode on a portable tablet
device.
Click the icon to download the demo project that illustrates how to use the Option List
object to switch between multiple languages. Please confirm your internet connection before

Address Tag Library 16-1
16. Address Tag Library

This chapter explains how to build and use Address Tag Library.
16.1. Overview ..................................................................................................................... 16-2

16.2. Building Address Tag Library ....................................................................................... 16-2
16.3. Using Address Tag Library ........................................................................................... 16-5

16.1. Overview
Generally it is recommended to define the commonly used addresses in Address Tag Library
when starting to build a project. It not only avoids accidental reuse of addresses but also
improves project readability.
16.2. Building Address Tag Library
Click [Library] » [Address] on the toolbar and the [Address Tag Library] dialog box appears.
Setting Description
User-defined tags Displays user-defined address tags.
System tags Displays system registers. The registers listed cannot
be deleted or changed.
Classification With this checkbox selected, the system tags can be
classified into categories according to their function.
Users may customize classification by editing the
system_tag.xml file, found under EasyBuilder Pro
installation directory.
Search A key word may be entered in the provided field to
search for a specific tag.
New Adds a new address tag. Please see the steps next
page.
Settings Sets the selected address tag.
Delete All Deletes all existing address tags.

Delete Deletes the selected address tag.

Export CSV Saves all current address tags as .csv file.
Import CSV Loads the existing .csv file of address tag to the
current project.
Export EXCEL Saves all current address tags as .xls file.
Import EXCEL Loads the existing .xls file of address tag to the current
project.
Use UTF-8 format If selected, the .csv file will be exported in UTF-8
to export CSV file format. If not selected, in ANSI format.

1. Click [New] and set the relevant properties.
Setting Description
Comment The information of the address tag.
Name The name of the address tag.
Device As defined in [System Parameter Settings] » [Device list].
Address mode The tag address type; select [Bit] or [Word].
Address type The available address types depend on [Device] and
[Address mode].
Address Address of the tag.
Address format If select [Word] in [Address type], the data format can be
specified.
Conversion/Calculation When enabled, the data format that the address tag will
(Use macro be converted into can be specified. Macro subroutines can
subroutine) be selected to do read/write conversion.
Read / Write Select the macro subroutine to do read/write conversion.
convertion The macro subroutine can only be selected when the data
format is identical to the one in the macro subroutine.

2. Click [OK], a newly added tag can be found in the [User-defined tags] library.
16.3. Using Address Tag Library
1. Create a tag in Address Tag Library.

2. Create an object, select [General] » [Device].
3. Click [Settings] to finish the settings.
4. Select [User-defined tag] check box.

5. In [Address type] select the defined tag.

6. If the data type is selected when creating the address tag, the system automatically
restricts the data format to the one selected.
7. When finished, the window tree will show the address tag name used by the object.

Note
 The name of the used tags will be written in red font in Address Tag Library.

Transferring Recipe Data 17-1
17. Transferring Recipe Data

This chapter explains how to transfer recipe data.
17.1. Overview ..................................................................................................................... 17-2

17.2. Steps to Update Recipe Data with Ethernet or USB Cable ......................................... 17-2
17.3. Steps to Update Recipe Data with SD Card or USB Disk ............................................. 17-3
17.4. Transferring Recipe Data............................................................................................. 17-4
17.5. Saving Recipe Data Automatically .............................................................................. 17-5

17.1. Overview
Recipe Data refers to the data stored in RW and RW_A addresses. The way of reading and
writing these addresses is the same as operating a word register. The difference is that recipe
data is stored in flash memory, when restarting HMI, the latest data records in RW and RW_A
are kept.
The size of recipe data a RW address can store is 512K words, and RW_A is 64K words. Users
can update recipe data with SD card, USB disk, USB cable or Ethernet and use the data to
update PLC data. Recipe Data can also be uploaded to PC; furthermore, PLC data can be saved
in recipe data. The following explains the ways of transferring recipe data.
17.2. Steps to Update Recipe Data with Ethernet or USB Cable
1. Open UtilityManagerEx and click [Publish] » [Download].

2. Select [RW] and [RW_A] and [Browse] for the source file.
3. After downloading, restart HMI, RW and RW_A will be updated.
When [Reboot HMI after download] is selected, users don’t have to manually reboot HMI.
When [Reset recipe] check box is selected, the system will clear all the data in [RW] and [RW_A]
before downloading.

17.3. Steps to Update Recipe Data with SD Card or USB Disk
1. Open UtilityManagerEx and click [Publish] » [Build Download Data for SD/USB Disk].
2. Insert a SD card or USB disk into PC.
3. Click [Browse] to designate the file path.
4. Click [Build], EasyBuilder Pro will save the data in SD card or USB disk.

Note
 When download data is successfully built, two folders can be found: history and emt3000.
emt3000 is for storing project file; history is for storing recipe data and data sampling /
event log records.
 Please manually reboot HMI to update recipe data.
17.4. Transferring Recipe Data
Use [Data Transfer (Trigger-based) Object] to transfer recipe data to a specific address, or save
the data of this address in [RW] and [RW_A].

Setting Description
Source address Sets the source of the data.
Destination address Sets the destination of the data to transfer to.
Attribute Sets the number of words to transfer from source
to destination.
17.5. Saving Recipe Data Automatically
In order to prolong the life span of HMI flash memory, the system will automatically save the
recipe data to HMI every minute. To avoid losing data when turning HMI off during the interval
of saving data, system register [LB-9029: Save all recipe data to machine (set ON)] is provided.
Set ON LB-9029 will make the system save recipe data once. Set ON [LB-9028: Reset all recipe
data (set ON)], the system will clear all recipe data.

Macro Reference 18-1
18. Macro Reference

This chapter describes the syntax, programming methods and usage of macro commands.
18.1. Overview ..................................................................................................................... 18-2

18.2. Instructions to use the Macro Editor .......................................................................... 18-2
18.3. Configuration .............................................................................................................. 18-7
18.4. Syntax.......................................................................................................................... 18-8
18.5. Statement ................................................................................................................. 18-14
18.6. Function Blocks ......................................................................................................... 18-19
18.7. Built-In Function Block .............................................................................................. 18-22
18.8. How to Create and Execute a Macro ........................................................................ 18-82
18.9. User Defined Macro Function................................................................................... 18-86
18.10. Some Notes about Using the Macro ........................................................................ 18-99
18.11. Use the Free Protocol to Control a Device ............................................................... 18-99
18.12. Compiler Error Message ......................................................................................... 18-104
18.13. Sample Macro Code................................................................................................ 18-110
18.14. Macro TRACE Function ........................................................................................... 18-115
18.15. Example of String Operation Functions .................................................................. 18-119
18.16. Macro Password Protection.................................................................................... 18-127
18.17. Reading / Writing CANbus Address Using Variable ................................................ 18-128

18.1. Overview
Macros provide the additional functionality your application may need. Macros are automated
sequences of commands that are executed at run-time. Macros allow you to perform tasks
such as complex scaling operations, string handling, and user interactions with your projects.
This chapter describes syntax, usage, and programming methods of macro commands.
18.2. Instructions to use the Macro Editor
Macro editor provides the following functions:

 Display line number
 Undo / Redo
 Cut / Copy / Paste
 Select All
 Toggle Bookmark / Previous Bookmark / Next Bookmark / Clear All Bookmarks
 Toggle All Outlining
 Security -> Use execution condition
 Periodical execution
 Execute one time when HMI starts
The instructions in the following part show you how to use these functions.
1. Open the macro editor; you’ll see the line numbers displayed on the left-hand side of the
edit area.

2. Right click on the edit area to open the pop-up menu as shown in the following figure.
Disabled operations are colored grey, which indicates that it is not possible to use that
function in the current status of the editor. For example, you should select some text to
enable the copy function, otherwise it will be disabled. Keyboard shortcuts are also
shown.
3. The toolbar provides [Undo], [Redo], [Cut], [Copy], [Paste], [Toggle Bookmark], [Next
Bookmark], [Previous Bookmark] and [Clear All Bookmarks] buttons.
4. Any modification will enable the [Undo] function. [Redo] function will be enabled after
the undo action is used. To perform the undo/redo, right click to select the item or use the
keyboard shortcuts. (Undo: Ctrl+Z, Redo: Ctrl+Y).

5. Select a word in the editor to enable the [Cut] and [Copy] function. After [Cut] or [Copy] is
performed, [Paste] function is enabled.
6. Use [Select All] to include all the content in the edit area.
7. If the macro is too long, use bookmarks to manage and read the code with ease. The
following illustration shows how it works.
 Move your cursor to the position in the edit area where to insert a bookmark. Right click,
select [Toggle Bookmark]. There will be a blue little square that represents a bookmark on
the left hand side of edit area.

 If there is already a bookmark where the cursor is placed, select [Toggle Bookmark] to
close it, otherwise to open it.
 Right click and select [Next Bookmark], the cursor will move to where the next bookmark
locates. Selecting [Previous Bookmark] will move the cursor to the previous bookmark.
 Selecting [Clear All Bookmarks] will delete all bookmarks.

8. Macro editor provides outlining (or code-folding). Outlining will hide macro codes that
belong to the same block, and display them as . There will be a tree diagram on the
left hand side of edit area. Click to hide the block or to open, as shown in the
following figure.

9. Right click to select [Toggle All Outlining] to open all folded macro code blocks.
10. Sometimes the outlining might be incorrect since that the keywords are misjudged as
shown in the following figure. To solve this problem, right click and select [Update All
Outlining].
11. The statements enclosed in the following keywords are called a “block” of the macro
code:
 Function block: sub – end sub
 Iterative statements:
i. for – next
ii. while – wend
 Logical statements:
i. if – end if
 Selective statements: select case – end select
12. The macro editor is not a monopoly window. Returning to the main screen and editing the
project with the Work Space window open is allowed.

13. The macro editor provides Find and Replace features.
14. When [Periodical execution] is checked, this macro will be triggered periodically.
15. Select [Security] » [Use execution condition] » [Settings] to enable security settings:
 [Disable when Bit is ON]: When Bit is ON, this macro is disabled.
 [Disable when Bit is OFF]: When Bit is OFF, this macro is disabled.
16. Select [Execute one time when HMI starts], this macro will be executed once when HMI
starts up.
18.3. Configuration
A macro contains statements. The statements contain constants, variables and operations. The
statements are put in a specific order to create the desired output.
A macro has the following structure:

Global Variable Declaration ----------------------------------- Optional
Sub Function Block Declarations ----------------------------------- Optional

Local Variable Declarations
End Sub
macro_command main() ------------------------------------ Required

Local Variable Declarations
[Statements]
end macro_command ------------------------------------ Required
Macro must have one and only one main function which is the execution start point of macro.
The format is:
macro_command main()
end macro_command
Local variables are used within the main macro function or in a defined function block. Its
value remains valid only within the specific block.
Global variables are declared before any function blocks and are valid for all functions in the
macro. When local variables and global variables have the same declaration of name, only the
local variables are valid.
The following example shows a simple macro which includes a variable declaration and a
function call.
short pressure = 10 // local variable declaration
SetData(pressure, "Allen-Bradley DF1", N7, 0, 1) // function calling
end macro_command
18.4. Syntax
18.4.1. Constants and Variables
18.4.1.1. Constants
Constants are fixed values and can be directly written into statements. The formats are:

Constant Type Note Example

Decimal integer 345, -234, 0, 23456
Hexadecimal Must begin with 0x 0x3b, 0xffff, 0x237
ASCII Single character must be enclosed in single ‘a’, "data", "name"
quotation marks and a string (group of
characters) must be enclosed in double
quotation marks. A backslash \ can be used
to escape the quotation marks contained in a
string. Therefore, to enclose a string
containing double quotation marks, please
use \" for the double quotation mark in the
string.
Boolean true, false
Here is an example using constants:
short A, B // A and B are variables
A = 1234
B = 0x12 // 1234 and 0x12 are constants
end macro_command
18.4.1.2. Variables
Variables are names that represent information. The information can be changed as the
variable is modified by statements.
Naming Rules for Variables
 A variable name must start with an alphabet.

 Variable names longer than 32 characters are not allowed.
 Reserved words cannot be used as variable names.
There are 8 different Variable types, 5 for signed data types and 3 for unsigned data types:
Variable Type Description Range
bool (boolean) 1 bit (discrete) 0, 1
char (character) 8 bits (byte) +127 to -128
short (short integer) 16 bits (word) +32767 to -32768
int (integer) 32 bits (double word) +2147483647to -2147483648
float (floating point) 32 bits (double word)
unsigned char 8 bits (byte) 0 to 255
unsigned short 16 bits (word) 0 to 65535

unsigned int 32 bits (double word) 0 to 4,294,967,295
Declaring Variables
Variables must be declared before being used. To declare a variable, specify the type before
the variable name.
Example:
int a
short b, switch
float pressure
unsigned short c
Declaring Arrays
Macros support one-dimensional arrays (zero-based index). To declare an array of variables,

specify the type and the variable name followed by the number of variables in the array
enclosed in brackets “*+”. The length of an array could be 1 to 4096. (Macros only support at
most 4096 variables per macro).
Example:
int a[10]
short b[20], switch[30]
float pressure[15]
The minimum array index is 0 and the maximum is (array size – 1).
Example:
char data [100] // array size is 100
In this case, the minimum of array index is 0 and maximum of array index is 99 (=100-1)
Variable and Array Initialization
There are two ways variables can be initialized:

 By statement using the assignment operator (=)
Example:
int a
float b[3]
a = 10
b[0] = 1
 During declaration
char a = ‘5’, b = 9
The declaration of arrays is a special case. The entire array can be initialized during declaration
by enclosing comma separated values inside curly brackets “,-”.

Example:
float data[4] = {11, 22, 33, 44} // now data*0+ is 11, data*1+ is 22….
18.4.2. Operators
Operators are used to designate how data is manipulated and calculated.

Operator Description Example
= Assignment operator pressure = 10
Arithmetic Operators Description Example

+ Addition A=B+C
- Subtraction A=B–C
* Multiplication A=B*C
/ Division A=B/C
% Modulo division (return A=B%5
remainder)
By default, integer numbers (1, 2,3..etc) are considered having integer data type; therefore,
when division is carried out involving two integer numbers where the result should have
decimal point, the decimal part will be removed. To avoid this, add .0 (1.0, 2.0, 3.0...etc) behind
the dividend or the divisor to turn it into a floating point number calculation.
Examples:
A=3/2=1 » 3 and 2 are both integers; therefore the result is an integer.
B = 3 / 2.0 = 1.5 » 3 is an integer whereas 2.0 is a floating point number, therefore the
result is a floating point number.
C = 3.0 / 2 = 1.5 » 3.0 is a floating point number whereas 2 is an integer, therefore the
result is a floating point number.
Comparison Operators Description Example
< Less than if A < 10 then B = 5
<= Less than or equal to if A <= 10 then B = 5
> Greater than if A > 10 then B = 5
>= Greater than or equal to if A >= 10 then B = 5
== Equal to if A == 10 then B = 5
<> Not equal to if A <> 10 then B = 5
Logic Operators Description Example

and Logical AND if A < 10 and B > 5 then C = 10
or Logical OR if A >= 10 or B > 5 then C = 10
xor Logical Exclusive OR if A xor 256 then B = 5

not Logical NOT if not A then B = 5

Shift and bitwise operators are used to manipulate bits of signed/unsigned character and
integer variables. The priority of these operators is from left to right within the statement.
Shift Operators Description Example
<< Shifts the bits in a bitset to A = B << 8
the left a specified number
of positions
>> Shifts the bits in a bitset to A = B >> 8
the right a specified number
of positions
Bitwise Operators Description Example

& Bitwise AND A = B & 0xf
| Bitwise OR A=B|C
^ Bitwise XOR A=B^C
~ One’s complement A = ~B
Priority of All Operators
The overall priority of all operations from highest to lowest is as follows:

1. Operations within parenthesis are carried out first
2. Arithmetic operations
3. Shift and Bitwise operations
4. Comparison operations
5. Logic operations
6. Assignment
Reserved Keywords
The following keywords are reserved for system. These keywords cannot be used as variable,
array, or function names.
+, -, *, /, %, >=, >, <=, <, <>, ==, and, or, xor, not, <<, >>,=, &, |, ^, ~
exit, macro_command, for, to, down, step, next, return, bool, short, int, char, float, void, if,
then, else, break, continue, set, sub, end, while, wend, true, false
SQRT, CUBERT, LOG, LOG10, SIN, COS, TAN, COT, SEC, CSC, ASIN, ACOS, ATAN, BIN2BCD,
BCD2BIN, DEC2ASCII, FLOAT2ASCII, HEX2ASCII, ASCII2DEC, ASCII2FLOAT, ASCII2HEX, FILL, RAND,
DELAY, SWAPB, SWAPW, LOBYTE, HIBYTE, LOWORD, HIWORD, GETBIT, SETBITON, SETBITOFF,
INVBIT, ADDSUM, XORSUM, CRC, INPORT, OUTPORT, POW, GetCnvTagArrayIndex, GetError,
GetData, GetDataEx, SetData, SetDataEx, SetRTS, GetCTS, Beep, SYNC_TRIG_MACRO,

ASYNC_TRIG_MACRO, TRACE, FindDataSamplingDate, FindDataSamplingIndex,

FindEventLogDate, FindEventLogIndex
StringGet, StringGetEx, StringSet, StringSetEx, StringCopy, StringMid, StringDecAsc2Bin,
StringBin2DecAsc, StringDecAsc2Float, StringFloat2DecAsc, StringHexAsc2Bin,
StringBin2HexAsc, StringLength, StringCat, StringCompare, StringCompareNoCase, StringFind,
StringReverseFind, StringFindOneOf, StringIncluding, StringExcluding, StringToUpper,
StringToLower, StringToReverse, StringTrimLeft, StringTrimRight, StringInsert, String2Unicode

18.5. Statement
18.5.1. Definition Statement
This covers the declaration of variables and arrays. The formal construction is as follows:
type name
This defines a variable with name as “name” and type as “type”.

Example:
int A // define a variable A as an integer
type name[constant]
This defines an array variable called “name” with size as “constant” and type as “type”.
Example:
int B[10] // where define a variable B as a one-dimensional array of size 10
18.5.2. Assignment Statement
Assignment statements use the assignment operator to move data from the expression on the
right side of the operator to the variable on the left side. An expression is the combination of
variables, constants and operators to yield a value.
VariableName Expression
Example
A=2 where a variable A is assigned to 2
18.5.3. Logical Statements
Logical statements perform actions depending on the condition of a boolean expression.

The syntax is as follows:
Single-Line Format
If <Condition> then
[Statements]
else
[Statements]
end if

Example:
if a == 2 then
b=1
else
b=2
end if
Block Format
If <Condition> then
[Statements]
else if <Condition-n> then
[Statements]
else
[Statements]
end if
Example:
if a == 2 then
b=1
else if a == 3 then
b=2
else
b=3
end if
Syntax description
if Must be used to begin the statement.
<Condition> Required. This is the controlling statement. It is FALSE when the
<Condition> evaluates to 0 and TRUE when it evaluates to non- zero.
then Must precede the statements to execute if the <Condition> evaluates to
TRUE.
[Statements] It is optional in block format but necessary in single-line format without
else. The statement will be executed when the <Condition> is TRUE.
else if Optional. The else if statement will be executed when the relative
<Condition-n> is TRUE.
<Condition-n> Optional. see <Condition>
else Optional. The else statement will be executed when <Condition> and
<Condition-n> are both FALSE.
end if Must be used to end an if-then statement.

18.5.4. Selective Statements
The select-case construction can be used like multiple if-else statements and perform selected
actions depending on the value of the given variable. When the matched value is found, all the
actions below will be executed until a break statement is met. The syntax is as follows:
Format without a Default Case
Select Case [variable]

Case [value]
[Statements]
break
end Select
Example:
Select Case A
Case 1
b=1
break
end Select
Format with a Default Case (Case else)

Case [value]
[Statements]
break
Case else
[Statements]
break
end Select
Example:
Select Case A
Case 1
b=1
break
Case else
b=0
break
end Select

Multiple cases in the same block

Case [value1]
[Statements]
Case [value2]
[Statements]
break
end Select
Example:
Select Case A
Case 1
break
Case 2
b=2
break
Case 3
b=3
break
end Select
Syntax description
Select Case Must be used to begin the statement.
[variable] Required. The value of this variable will be compared to the value of
each case.
Case else Optional. It represents the default case. If none of the cases above are
matched, the statements under default case will be executed. When a
default case is absent, it will skip directly to the end of the select-case
statements if there is no matched case.
break Optional. The statements under the matched case will be executed until
the break command is reached. If a break command is absent, it simply
keeps on executing next statement until the end command is reached.
end Select Indicates the end of the select-case statements.
18.5.5. Iterative Statements
Iterative statements control loops and repetitive tasks depending on condition. There are two
types of iterative statements.

18.5.5.1. for-next Statements
The for-next statement runs for a fixed number of iterations. A variable is used as a counter to
track the progress and test for ending conditions. Use this for fixed execution counts. The
syntax is as follows:
for [Conunter] = <StartValue> to <EndValue> [step <StepValue>]

[Statements]
next [Counter]
Or
for [Conunter] = <StartValue> to <EndValue> [step <StepValue>]

[Statements]
next [Counter]
Example:
for a = 0 to 10 step 2
b=a
next a
Syntax description
for Must be used to begin the statement
[Counter] Required. This is the controlling statement. The result of evaluating the
variable is used as a test of comparison.
<StartValue> Required. The initial value of [Counter]
to/down Required. This determines if the <step> increments or decrements the
<Counter>.
“to” increments <Counter> by <StepValue>.
“down” decrements <Counter> by <StepValue>.
<EndValue> Required. The test point. If the <Counter> is greater than this value, the
macro exits the loop.
step Optional. Specifies that a <StepValue> other than one is to be used.
[StepValue] Optional. The increment/decrement step of <Counter>. It can be
omitted when the value is 1 If [step <StepValue>] are omitted the step
value defaults to 1.
[Statements] Optional. Statements to execute when the evaluation is TRUE.
“for-next” loops may be nested.
next Required.
[Counter] Optional. This is used when nesting for-next loops.

18.5.5.2. while-wend Statements
The while-wend statement runs for an unknown number of iterations. A variable is used to test
for ending conditions. When the condition is TRUE, the statements inside are executed
repetitively until the condition becomes FALSE. The syntax is as follows.
while <Condition>
[Statements]
wend
Example:
while a < 10
a = a + 10
wend
Syntax description
while Must be used to begin the statement.
continue Required. This is the controlling statement. When it is TRUE, the loop
begins execution. When it is FALSE, the loop terminates.
return [value] Statements to execute when the evaluation is TRUE.
wend Indicates the end of the while-end statements.
18.5.5.3. Other Control Commands
break Used in for-next and while-wend. It skips immediately to the end of the
iterative statement.
continue Used in for-next and while-wend. It ends the current iteration of a loop
and starts the next one.
return The return command inside the main block can force the macro to stop
anywhere. It skips immediately to the end of the main block.
18.6. Function Blocks
Function blocks are useful for reducing repetitive codes. It must be defined before use and
supports any variable and statement type. A function block could be called by putting its name
followed by parameters in parenthesis. After the function block is executed, it returns the value
to the caller function where it is used as an assignment value or as a condition. A return type is
not required in function definition, which means that a function block does not have to return
a value. The parameters can also be ignored in function definition while the function has no
need to take any parameters from the caller. The syntax is as follows:
Function definition with return type

sub type <name> [(parameters)]

Local variable declarations
[Statements]
[return [value]]
end sub
Example:
sub int Add(int x, int y)
int result
result = x +y
return result
end sub
int a = 10, b = 20, sum
sum = Add(a, b)
end macro_command
or:
sub int Add()
int result, x=10, y=20
result = x +y
return result
end sub
int sum
sum = Add()
end macro_command
Function definition without return type
sub <name> [(parameters)]

Local variable declarations
[Statements]
end sub
Example:
sub Add(int x, int y)
int result
result = x +y

end sub
int a = 10, b = 20
Add(a, b)
end macro_command
or:
sub Add()
int result, x=10, y=20
result = x +y
end sub
Add()
end macro_command
Syntax description
sub Must be used to begin the function block
type Optional. This is the data type of value that the function returns. A
function block is not always necessary to return a value.
(parameters) Optional. The parameters hold values that are passed to the function.
The passed parameters must have their type declared in the parameter
field and assigned a variable name.
For example: sub int MyFunction(int x, int y). x and y would be integers
passed to the function. This function is called by a statement that looks
similar to this: ret = MyFunction(456, pressure) where “pressure” must
be integer according to the definition of function.
Notice that the calling statement can pass hard coded values or
variables to the function. After this function is executed, an integer
values is return to ‘ret’.
Local variable Variables that are used in the function block must be declared first.
declaration This is in addition to passed parameters. In the above example x and y
are variables that the function can used. Global variables are also
available for use in function block.
[Statements] Statements to execute
[return [value]] Optional. Used to return a value to the calling statement. The value can
be a constant or a variable. Return also ends function block execution.
A function block is not always necessary to return a value, but, when
the return type is defined in the beginning of the definition of function,
the return command is needed.
end sub Must be used to end a function block.

18.7. Built-In Function Block
EasyBuilder Pro has many built-in functions for retrieving and transferring data to the PLC, data
management and mathematical functions.
18.7.1. PLC
Name GetData
Syntax GetData(read_data[start], device_name, device_type, address_offset,
data_count)
or
GetData(read_data, device_name, device_type, address_offset, 1)
Description Receives data from the PLC. Data is stored into read_data[start]~
read_data[start + data_count - 1].
data_count is the amount of received data. In general, read_data is an array,
but if data_count is 1, read_data can be an array or an ordinary variable. Below
are two methods to read one word data from PLC.
short read_data_1[2], read_data_2
GetData(read_data_1[0], "FATEK KB Series", RT, 5, 1)
GetData(read_data_2, "FATEK KB Series", RT, 5, 1)
end macro_command
Device_name is the PLC name enclosed in the double quotation marks (“) and
this name has been defined in the device list of system parameters as follows
(see FATEK KB Series):
Device_type is the device type and encoding method (binary or BCD) of the PLC
data. For example, if device_type is LW_BIN, it means the register is LW and the
encoding method is binary. If use BIN encoding method, "_BIN" can be ignored.
If device_type is LW_BCD, it means the register is LW and the encoding method
is BCD.
Address_offset is the address offset in the PLC.
For example, GetData(read_data_1[0], "FATEK KB Series", RT, 5, 1) represents
that the address offset is 5.
If address_offset uses the format –"N#AAAAA", N indicates that PLC’s station

number is N. AAAAA represents the address offset. This format is used while
multiple PLCs or controllers are connected to a single serial port. For example,
GetData(read_data_1[0], "FATEK KB Series", RT, 2#5, 1) represents that the
PLC’s station number is 2. If GetData() uses the default station number defined
in the device list as follows, it is not necessary to define station number in
address_offset.
The number of registers actually read from depends on both the type of the
read_data variable and the value of the number of data_count.
actual number of
type of read_data data_count
16-bit register read
char (8-bit) 1 1
char (8-bit) 2 1
bool (8-bit) 1 1
bool (8-bit) 2 1
short (16-bit) 1 1
short (16-bit) 2 2
int (32-bit) 1 2
int (32-bit) 2 4
float (32-bit) 1 2
float (32-bit) 2 4
When a GetData() is executed using a 32-bit data type (int or float), the
function will automatically convert the data. For example,

float f
GetData(f, "MODBUS", 6x, 2, 1) // f will contain a floating point value
end macro_command
Example macro_command main()
bool a
bool b_array[30]
char c
char c_array[20]
short s
short s_array[50]
int i
int i_array[10]
float f
float f_array[15]double g[10]
// get the state of LB2 to the variable a

GetData(a, "Local HMI", LB, 2, 1)
// get 30 states of LB0 ~ LB29 to the variables b_array[0] ~ b_array[29]

GetData(b_array[0], "Local HMI", LB, 0, 30)
// get lower byte of LW-0 to the variable c

// note that char is 1 byte, and a LW address occupies 2 bytes (1 word).
Reading the first byte in a word register will get the lower byte of the word.
// Ex: when the value in LW-0 is 0x0201, then variable c will read 0x01
GetData(c, "Local HMI", LW, 0, 1)
// get data of LW1 ~ LW10 to the c_array[0] ~ c_array[19]

GetData(c_array[0], "Local HMI", LB, 0, 20)
// get one word from LW-2 to the variable s

GetData(s, "Local HMI", LW, 2, 1)
// get 50 words from LW-0 ~ LW-49 to the variables s_array[0] ~ s_array[49]

GetData(s_array[0], "Local HMI", LW, 0, 50)
// get 2 words from LW-6 ~ LW-7 to the variable e

// Ex: When value in LW-6 is 0x0002, in LW-7 is 0x0001, then i will read
0x00010002(65538)
// note that int occupies 2 words (32-bit)
GetData(i, "Local HMI", LW, 6, 1)
// get 20 words (10 integer values) from LW-0 ~ LW-19 to variables i_array[0]
~ i_array[9], note that type of i_array[10] is int.
GetData(i_array[0], "Local HMI", LW, 0, 10)

// get data from LW-10 ~ LW-11 to the variable f

// note that type of variable f is float.
GetData(f, "Local HMI", LW, 10, 1)
// get 30 words (15 float variables) from LW-0 ~ LW-29 to variables f_array[0]
~ f_array[14], note that type of f_array[15] is float.
// note that float occupies 2 words (32-bit)
GetData(f_array[0], "Local HMI", LW, 0, 15)
end macro_command
Name GetDataEx
Syntax GetDataEx(read_data[start], device_name, device_type, address_offset,
data_count)
or
GetDataEx(read_data, device_name, device_type, address_offset, 1)
Description Receives data from the PLC and continue executing next command even if no
response from this device.
Descriptions of read_data, device_name, device_type, address_offset and
data_count are the same as GetData.

bool a
bool b
bool b_array[30]
char c
char c_array[20]
short s
short s_array[50]
int i
int i_array[10]
float f
float f_array[15]
// get the state of LB2 to the variable a

GetDataEX(a, "Local HMI", LB, 2, 1)
// get 30 states of LB0 ~ LB29 to the variables b_array[0] ~ b_array[29]

GetDataEX(b_array[0], "Local HMI", LB, 0, 30)
// get lower byte of LW-0 to the variable c

// note that char is 1 byte, and a LW address occupies 2 bytes (1 word).
Reading the first byte in a word register will get the lower byte of the word.
// Ex: when the value in LW-0 is 0x0201, then variable c will read 0x01
GetDataEX(c, "Local HMI", LW, 0, 1)

// get data of LW1 ~ LW10 to the c_array[0] ~ c_array[19]

GetDataEX(c_array[0], "Local HMI", LB, 0, 20)
// get one word from LW-2 to the variable s

GetDataEX(s, "Local HMI", LW, 2, 1)
// get 50 words from LW-0 ~ LW-49 to the variables s_array[0] ~ s_array[49]

GetDataEX(s_array[0], "Local HMI", LW, 0, 50)
// get 2 words from LW-6 ~ LW-7 to the variable e

// Ex: When value in LW-6 is 0x0002, in LW-7 is 0x0001, then i will read
0x00010002(65538)
// note that int occupies 2 words (32-bit)
GetDataEX(i, "Local HMI", LW, 6, 1)
// get 20 words (10 integer values) from LW-0 ~ LW-19 to variables i_array[0]
~ i_array[9], note that type of i_array[10] is int.
GetDataEX(i_array[0], "Local HMI", LW, 0, 10)
// get data from LW-10 ~ LW-11 to the variable f

// note that type of variable f is float.
GetDataEX(f, "Local HMI", LW, 10, 1)
// get 30 words (15 float variables) from LW-0 ~ LW-29 to variables f_array[0]
~ f_array[14], note that type of f_array[15] is float.
// note that float occupies 2 words (32-bit)
GetDataEX(f_array[0], "Local HMI", LW, 0, 15)
end macro_command
Name GetError
Syntax GetError (err)
Description Get an error code.
short err
char byData[10]
GetDataEx(byData[0], "MODBUS RTU", 4x, 1, 10)// read 10 bytes
// if err is equal to 0, it is successful to execute GetDataEx()

GetErr(err)// save an error code to err
end macro_command

Name SetData
Syntax SetData(send_data[start], device_name, device_type, address_offset,
data_count)
or
SetData(send_data, device_name, device_type, address_offset, 1)
Description Send data to the PLC. Data is defined in send_data[start]~ send_data[start +
data_count - 1].
data_count is the amount of sent data. In general, send_data is an array, but if
data_count is 1, send_data can be an array or an ordinary variable. Below are
two methods to send one word data.
short send_data_1[2] = { 5, 6}, send_data_2 = 5
SetData(send_data_1[0], "FATEK KB Series", RT, 5, 1)
SetData(send_data_2, "FATEK KB Series", RT, 5, 1)
end macro_command
device_name is the PLC name enclosed in the double quotation marks (") and
this name has been defined in the device list of system parameters.
device_type is the device type and encoding method (binary or BCD) of the PLC
is BCD.
address_offset is the address offset in the PLC.
For example, SetData(read_data_1[0], "FATEK KB Series", RT, 5, 1) represents
SetData(read_data_1[0], "FATEK KB Series", RT, 2#5, 1) represents that the
PLC’s station number is 2. If SetData () uses the default station number defined
in the device list, it is not necessary to define station number in address_offset.
The number of registers actually sends to depends on both the type of the
send_data variable and the value of the number of data_count.
actual number of
type of read_data data_count
16-bit register send
char (8-bit) 1 1
char (8-bit) 2 1
bool (8-bit) 1 1
bool (8-bit) 2 1
short (16-bit) 1 1

short (16-bit) 2 2
int (32-bit) 1 2
int (32-bit) 2 4
float (32-bit) 1 2
float (32-bit) 2 4
When a SetData() is executed using a 32-bit data type (int or float), the function
will automatically send int-format or float-format data to the device. For
example,
float f = 2.6
SetData(f, "MODBUS", 6x, 2, 1) // will send a floating point value to the
device
end macro_command
int i
bool a = true
bool b[30]
short c = false
short d[50]
int e = 5
int f[10]
for i = 0 to 29
b[i] = true
next i
for i = 0 to 49
d[i] = i * 2
next i
for i = 0 to 9
f [i] = i * 3
next i
// set the state of LB2

SetData(a, "Local HMI", LB, 2, 1)
// set the states of LB0 ~ LB29

SetData(b[0], "Local HMI", LB, 0, 30)
// set the value of LW-2

SetData(c, "Local HMI", LW, 2, 1)
// set the values of LW-0 ~ LW-49

SetData(d[0], "Local HMI", LW, 0, 50)
// set the values of LW-6 ~ LW-7, note that the type of e is int
SetData(e, "Local HMI", LW, 6, 1)

// 10 integers equal to 20 words, since each integer value occupies 2 words.
SetData(f[0], "Local HMI", LW, 0, 10)
end macro_command
Name SetDataEx
Syntax SetDataEx (send_data[start], device_name, device_type, address_offset,
data_count)
or
SetDataEx (send_data, device_name, device_type, address_offset, 1)
Description Send data to the PLC and continue executing next command even if no
Descriptions of send_data, device_name, device_type, address_offset and
data_count are the same as SetData.

int i
bool a = true
bool b[30]
short c = false
short d[50]
int e = 5
int f[10]
for i = 0 to 29
b[i] = true
next i
for i = 0 to 49
d[i] = i * 2
next i
for i = 0 to 9
f [i] = i * 3
next i
// set the state of LB2

SetDataEx (a, "Local HMI", LB, 2, 1)

// set the states of LB0 ~ LB29

SetDataEx (b[0], "Local HMI", LB, 0, 30)
// set the value of LW-2

SetDataEx (c, "Local HMI", LW, 2, 1)

SetDataEx (d[0], "Local HMI", LW, 0, 50)
// set the values of LW-6 ~ LW-7, note that the type of e is int
SetDataEx (e, "Local HMI", LW, 6, 1)

// 10 integers equal to 20 words, since each integer value occupies 2 words.
SetDataEx (f[0], "Local HMI", LW, 0, 10)
end macro_command
18.7.2. Free Protocol
Name GetCTS
Syntax GetCTS(com_port, result)
Description Get CTS state for RS232.
com_port refers to the COM port number. It can be either a variable or a
constant. result is used for receiving the CTS signal. It must be a variable.
This command receives CTS signal and stores the received data in the result
variable. When the CTS signal is pulled high, it writes 1 to result, otherwise, it
writes 0.
char com_port=1
char result
GetCTS(com_port, result) // get CTS signal of COM1
GetCTS (1, result) // get CTS signal of COM1
end macro_command
Name INPORT
Syntax INPORT(read_data[start], device_name, read_count, return_value)
Description Reads data from a COM port or the ethernet. These data is stored to
read_data[start]~ read_data[start + read_count - 1].
device_name is the name of a device defined in the device table and the device
must be a “Free Protocol”-type device.

read_count is the required amount of reading and can be a constant or a

variable.
If the function is used successfully to get sufficient data, return_value is 1,
otherwise is 0.
Example Below is an example of executing an action of reading holding registers of a
MODBUS device.
// Read Holding Registers

char command[32], response[32]
short address, checksum
short read_no, return_value, read_data[2]
FILL(command[0], 0, 32)// command initialization

FILL(response[0], 0, 32)
command[0] = 0x1// station no

command[1] = 0x3// function code : Read Holding Registers
address = 0
HIBYTE(address, command[2])
LOBYTE(address, command[3])
read_no = 2// read 2 words (4x_1 and 4x_2)

HIBYTE(read_no, command[4])
LOBYTE(read_no, command[5])
CRC(command[0], checksum, 6)
LOBYTE(checksum, command[6])
HIBYTE(checksum, command[7])
// send out a ‘Read Holding Registers” command

OUTPORT(command[0], "MODBUS RTU Device", 8)
// read responses for a ‘Read Holding Registers” command

INPORT(response[0], "MODBUS RTU Device", 9, return_value)
if return_value > 0 then

read_data[0] = response[4] + (response[3] << 8)// data in 4x_1
read_data[1] = response[6] + (response[5] << 8)// data in 4x_2
SetData(read_data[0], "Local HMI", LW, 100, 2)

end if
end macro_command

Name INPORT2
Syntax INPORT2(response[start], device_name, receive_len, wait_time)
Description Read data from a communication port (COM Port or Ethernet Port). The data
read will be saved in response. The description of device_name is the same as
OUTPORT.
receive_len stores the length of the data received, this must be a variable.
receive_len total length can’t exceed the size of response.
wait_time (in millisecond) can be a constant or variable. After the data is read,
if there's no upcoming data during the designated time interval, the function
returns.
short wResponse[6], receive_len, wait_time=20
INPORT2(wResponse[0], "Free Protocol", receive_len, wait_time)

// wait_time unit : millisecond
if receive_len > 0 then

SetData(wResponse[0], "Local HMI", LW, 0, 6)
// set responses to LW0
end if
end macro_command
Name INPORT3
Syntax INPORT3(response[start], device_name, read_count, receive_len)
Description Read data from a communication port (COM Port or Ethernet Port). The data
read will be saved in response.
The amount of data to be read can be specified. The data that is not read yet
will be stored in HMI buffer memory for the next read operation, in order to
prevent losing data. The description of device_name is the same as OUTPORT.
read_count stores the length of the data read each time.
receive_len stores the length of the data received, this must be a variable.
receive_len total length can’t exceed the size of response.
short wResponse[6], receive_len
INPORT3(wResponse[0], "Free Protocol", 6, receive_len) // read 6 words
if receive_len >= 6 then
SetData(wResponse[0], "Local HMI", LW, 0, 6) // set responses to LW0

end if
end macro_command
Name OUTPORT
Syntax OUTPORT(source[start], device_name, data_count)
Description Sends out the specified data from source[start] to source[start + data_count -1]
to PLC via a COM port or the ethernet.
device_name is the name of a device defined in the device table and the device
must be a “Free Protocol”-type device.
data_count is the amount of sent data and can be a constant or a variable.
Example To use an OUTPORT function, a “Free Protocol” device must be created first as
follows:
The device is named ”MODBUS RTU Device”. The port attribute depends on the
setting of this device. (the current setting is “19200,E, 8, 1”)
Below is an example of executing an action of writing single coil (SET ON) to a

MODBUS device.
char command[32]
FILL(command[0], 0, 32)// command initialization
command[0] = 0x1// station no

command[1] = 0x5// function code : Write Single Coil
address = 0
command[4] = 0xff// force bit on

command[5] = 0

// send out a “Write Single Coil” command

OUTPORT(command[0], "MODBUS RTU Device", 8)
end macro_command
Name PURGE
Syntax PURGE (com_port)
Description com_port refers to the COM port number which ranges from 1 to 3. It can be
either a variable or a constant. This function is used to clear the input and
output buffers associated with the COM port.
int com_port=3
PURGE (com_port)
PURGE (1)
end macro_command
Name SetRTS
Syntax SetRTS(com_port, source)
Description Set RTS state for RS232.
com_port refers to the COM port number. It can be either a variable or a
constant. source can be either a variable or a constant.
This command raise RTS signal while the value of source is greater than 0 and
lower RTS signal while the value of source equals to 0.
char com_port=1
char value=1
SetRTS(com_port, value) // raise RTS signal of COM1 while value>0
SetRTS(1, 0) // lower RTS signal of COM1
end macro_command
18.7.3. Process Control
Name ASYNC_TRIG_MACRO
Syntax ASYNC_TRIG_MACRO (macro_id or name)
Description Trigger the execution of a macro asynchronously (use macro_id or macro name
to designate this macro) in a running macro.
The current macro will continue executing the following instructions after
triggering the designated macro; in other words, the two macros will be active

simultaneously.
macro_id can be a constant or a variable.
char ON = 1, OFF = 0
SetData(ON, "Local HMI", LB, 0, 1)
ASYNC_TRIG_MACRO(5)// call a macro (its ID is 5)
ASYNC_TRIG_MACRO("macro_1") // call a macro (its name is macro_1)
SetData(OFF, "Local HMI", LB, 0, 1)
end macro_command
Name DELAY
Syntax DELAY(time)
Description Suspends the execution of the current macro for at least the specified interval
(time). The unit of time is millisecond.
time can be a constant or a variable.
int time == 500
DELAY(100)// delay 100 ms

DELAY(time)// delay 500 ms
end macro_command
Name SYNC_TRIG_MACRO
Syntax SYNC_TRIG_MACRO(macro_id or name)
Description Trigger the execution of a macro synchronously (use macro_id or macro name
to designate this macro) in a running macro.
The current macro will pause until the end of execution of this called macro.
macro_id can be a constant or a variable.
char ON = 1, OFF = 0
SetData(ON, "Local HMI", LB, 0, 1)
SYNC_TRIG_MACRO(5) // call a macro (its ID is 5)
SYNC_TRIG_MACRO("macro_1") // call a macro (its name is macro_1)
SetData(OFF, "Local HMI", LB, 0, 1)
end macro_command

18.7.4. Data Operation
Name FILL
Syntax FILL(source[start], preset, count)
Description Sets the first count elements of an array (source) to a specified value (preset).
source and start must be a variable, and preset can be a constant or variable.
char result[4]
char preset
FILL(result[0], 0x30, 4)
// result[0] is 0x30, result[1] is 0x30, , result[2] is 0x30, , result[3] is 0x30
preset = 0x31
FILL(result[0], preset, 2) // result[0] is 0x31, result[1] is 0x31
end macro_command
Name SWAPB
Syntax SWAPB(source, result)
Description Exchanges the high-byte and low-byte data of a 16-bit source into result.
source can be a constant or a variable. result must be a variable.
short source, result
SWAPB(0x5678, result)// result is 0x7856
source = 0x123
SWAPB(source, result)// result is 0x2301
end macro_command
Name SWAPW
Syntax SWAPW(source, result)
Description Exchanges the high-word and low-word data of a 32-bit source into result.
int source, result
SWAPW (0x12345678, result)// result is 0x56781234
source = 0x12345
SWAPW (source, result)// result is 0x23450001
end macro_command

Name LOBYTE
Syntax LOBYTE(source, result)
Description Retrieves the low byte of a 16-bit source into result.
LOBYTE(0x1234, result)// result is 0x34
source = 0x123
LOBYTE(source, result)// result is 0x23
end macro_command
Name HIBYTE
Syntax HIBYTE(source, result)
Description Retrieves the high byte of a 16-bit source into result.
HIBYTE(0x1234, result)// result is 0x12
source = 0x123
HIBYTE(source, result)// result is 0x01
end macro_command
Name LOWORD
Syntax LOWORD(source, result)
Description Retrieves the low word of a 32-bit source into result.
int source, result
LOWORD(0x12345678, result)// result is 0x5678
source = 0x12345
LOWORD(source, result)// result is 0x2345
end macro_command

Name HIWORD
Syntax HIWORD(source, result)
Description Retrieves the high word of a 32-bit source into result.
int source, result
HIWORD(0x12345678, result)// result is 0x1234
source = 0x12345
HIWORD(source, result)// result is 0x0001
end macro_command
Name INVBIT
Syntax INVBIT(source, result, bit_pos)
Description Inverts the state of designated bit position of a data (source), and put changed
data into result.
source and bit_pos can be a constant or a variable. result must be a variable.
int source, result
short bit_pos
INVBIT(4, result, 1)// result = 6
source = 6
bit_pos = 1
INVBIT(source, result, bit_pos)// result = 4
end macro_command
Name SETBITON
Syntax SETBITON(source, result, bit_pos)
Description Changes the state of designated bit position of a data (source) to 1, and put
changed data into result.
source and bit_pos can be a constant or a variable.
result must be a variable.
int source, result
short bit_pos
SETBITON(1, result, 3)// result is 9
source = 0

bit_pos = 2
SETBITON (source, result, bit_pos)// result is 4
end macro_command
Name SETBITOFF
Syntax SETBITOFF(source, result, bit_pos)
Description Changes the state of designated bit position of a data (source) to 0, and put in
changed data into result.
int source, result
short bit_pos
SETBITOFF(9, result, 3)// result is 1
source = 4
bit_pos = 2
SETBITOFF(source, result, bit_pos)// result is 0
end macro_command
Name GETBIT
Syntax GETBIT(source, result, bit_pos)
Description Gets the state of designated bit position of a data (source) into result.
result value will be 0 or 1.
int source, result
short bit_pos
GETBIT(9, result, 3)// result is 1
source = 4
bit_pos = 2
GETBIT(source, result, bit_pos)// result is 1
end macro_command

18.7.5. Data Type Conversion
Name ASCII2DEC
Syntax ASCII2DEC(source[start], result, len)
Description Transforms a string (source) into a decimal value saved to a variable (result).
The length of the string is len. The first character of the string is source[start].
source and len can be a constant or a variable. result must be a variable. start
must be a constant.
char source[4]
short result
source[0] = '5'
source[1] = '6'
source[2] = '7'
source[3] = '8'
ASCII2DEC(source[0], result, 4) // result is 5678
end macro_command
Name ASCII2FLOAT
Syntax ASCII2FLOAT(source[start], result, len)
Description Transforms a string (source) into a float value saved to a variable (result).
must be a constant.
char source[4]
float result
source[0] = '5'
source[1] = '6'
source[2] = '.'
source[3] = '8'
ASCII2FLOAT (source[0], result, 4) // result is 56.8
end macro_command
Name ASCII2HEX
Syntax ASCII2HEX (source[start], result, len)
Description Transforms a string (source) into a hexadecimal value saved to a variable
(result).

must be a constant.
char source[4]
short result
source[0] = '5'
source[1] = '6'
source[2] = '7'
source[3] = '8'
ASCII2HEX (source[0], result, 4) // result is 0x5678
end macro_command
Name BIN2BCD
Syntax BIN2BCD(source, result)
Description Transforms a binary-type value (source) into a BCD-type value (result).
BIN2BCD(1234, result)// result is 0x1234
source = 5678
BIN2BCD(source, result)// result is 0x5678
end macro_command
Name BCD2BIN
Syntax BCD2BIN(source, result)
Description Transforms a BCD-type value (source) into a binary-type value (result).
BCD2BIN(0x1234, result)// result is 1234
source = 0x5678
BCD2BIN(source, result)// result is 5678
end macro_command

Name DEC2ASCII
Syntax DEC2ASCII(source, result[start], len)
Description Transforms a decimal value (source) into an ASCII string and save it to an array
(result).
len represents the length of the string and the unit of length depends on
result’s type., i.e. if result’s type is “char” (the size is byte), the length of the
string is (byte * len). If result’s type is “short” (the size is word), the length of
the string is (word * len), and so on.
The first character is put into result[start], the second character is put into
result[start + 1], and the last character is put into result[start + (len -1)].
must be a constant.
short source
char result1[4]
short result2[4]
char result3[6]
source = 5678
DEC2ASCII(source, result1[0], 4)
// result1[0] is '5', result1[1] is '6', result1[2] is '7', result1[3] is '8'
// the length of the string (result1) is 4 bytes( = 1 * 4)
// result2[0] is '5', result2[1] is '6', result2[2] is '7', result2[3] is '8'
source=-123
// result1[0] is '-', result1[1] is '0', result1[2] is '0', result1[3] is '1'
// result1[4] is '2', result1[5] is '3'
end macro_command
Name FLOAT2ASCII
Syntax FLOAT2ASCII(source, result[start], len)
Description Transforms a floating value (source) into ASCII string saved to an array (result).
must be a constant.

float source
char result[4]
source = 56.8
FLOAT2ASCII (source, result[0], 4)
// result[0] is '5', result[1] is '6', result[2] is '.', result[3] is '8'
end macro_command
Name HEX2ASCII
Syntax HEX2ASCII(source, result[start], len)
Description Transforms a hexadecimal value (source) into ASCII string saved to an array
(result).
must be a constant.
short source
char result[4]
source = 0x5678
HEX2ASCII (source, result[0], 4)
// result[0] is '5', result[1] is '6', result[2] is '7', result[3] is '8'
end macro_command
Name StringDecAsc2Bin
Syntax success = StringDecAsc2Bin(source[start], destination)
or
success = StringDecAsc2Bin("source", destination)
Description This function converts a decimal string to an integer. It converts the decimal
string in source parameter into an integer, and stores it in the destination
variable.
The source string parameter accepts both static string (in the form: "source")
and char array (in the form: source[start]).
Destination must be a variable, to store the result of conversion.
This function returns a Boolean indicating whether the process is successfully
done or not. If successful, it returns true, otherwise it returns false. The string
can only contain these characters: +, -, and 0 to 9. If the string contains other
characters, it returns false.
The success field is optional.

char src1[5]="12345"
int result1
bool success1
success1 = StringDecAsc2Bin(src1[0], result1)
// success1=true, result1 is 12345
char src2[5] = "-6789"

short result2
bool success2
success2 = StringDecAsc2Bin(src2[0], result2)
// success2 = true，result2 is -6789
char result3
bool success3
success3 = StringDecAsc2Bin("32768", result3)
// success3=true, but the result exceeds the data range of result3
char src4[2]="4b"
char result4
bool success4
success4 = StringDecAsc2Bin (src4[0], result4)
// success4=false, because src4 contains characters other than ‘+’ or ‘-’ and ‘0’
to ‘9’
end macro_command
Name StringBin2DecAsc
Syntax success = StringBin2DecAsc (source, destination[start])
Description This function converts an integer to a decimal string. It converts the integer in
source parameter into a decimal string, and stores it in the destination buffer.
Source can be either a constant or a variable.
Destination must be an one-dimensional char array, to store the result of
conversion.
done or not. If successful, it returns true, otherwise it returns false. If the
length of decimal string after conversion exceeds the size of destination buffer,
it returns false.
int src1 = 2147483647
char dest1[20]
bool success1
success1 = StringBin2DecAsc(src1, dest1[0])
// success1=true, dest1="2147483647"

short src2 = 0x3c

char dest2[20]
bool success2
int src3 = 2147483647

char dest3[5]
bool success3
// success3=false, dest3 remains the same.
end macro_command
Name StringDecAsc2Float
Syntax success = StringDecAsc2Float (source[start], destination)
or
success = StringDecAsc2Float ("source", destination)
Description This function converts a decimal string to floats. It converts the decimal string
in source parameter into float, and stores it in the destination variable.
source string contains characters other than ‘0’ to ‘9’ or ‘.’, it returns false.
char src1[10]="12.345"
float result1
bool success1
success1 = StringDecAsc2Float(src1[0], result1)
// success1=true, result1 is 12.345
float result2
bool success2
success2 = StringDecAsc2Float("1.234567890", result2)
// success2=true, but the result exceeds the data range of result2, which
// might result in loss of precision
char src3[2]="4b"
float result3
bool success3
success3 = StringDecAsc2Float(src3[0], result3)
// success3=false, because src3 contains characters other than ‘0’ to ‘9’ or

// ‘.’
end macro_command
Name StringFloat2DecAsc
Syntax success = StringFloat2DecAsc(source, destination[start])
Description This function converts a float to a decimal string. It converts the float in
source parameter into a decimal string, and stores it in the destination buffer.
conversion.
length of decimal string after conversion exceeds the size of destination
buffer, it returns false.
float src1 = 1.2345
char dest1[20]
bool success1
success1 = StringFloat2DecAsc(src1, dest1[0])
// success1=true, dest1="1.2345"
float src2 = 1.23456789

char dest2 [20]
bool success2
success2 = StringFloat2DecAsc(src2, dest2 [0])
// success2=true, but it might lose precision
float src3 = 1.2345

char dest3[5]
bool success3
success3 = StringFloat2DecAsc(src3, dest3 [0])
end macro_command
Name StringHexAsc2Bin
Syntax success = StringHexAsc2Bin (source[start], destination)
or
success = StringHexAsc2Bin ("source", destination)
Description This function converts a hexadecimal string to binary data. It converts the
hexadecimal string in source parameter into binary data, and stores it in the
destination variable.


source string contains characters other than ‘0’ to ‘9’, ‘a’ to ‘f’ or ‘A’ to ‘F’, it
returns false.
char src1[5]="0x3c"
int result1
bool success1
success1 = StringHexAsc2Bin(src1[0], result1)
// success1=true, result1 is 3c
short result2
bool success2
success2 = StringDecAsc2Bin("1a2b3c4d", result2)
// success2=true, result2=3c4d.The result exceeds the data range of
// result2
char src3[2]="4g"
char result3
bool success3
success3 = StringDecAsc2Bin (src3[0], result3)
// success3=false, because src3 contains characters other than ‘0’ to ‘9’
// , ‘a’ to ‘f’ or ‘A’ to ‘F’
end macro_command
Name StringBin2HexAsc
Syntax success = StringBin2HexAsc (source, destination[start])
Description This function converts binary data to a hexadecimal string. It converts the
binary data in source parameter into a hexadecimal string, and stores it in
the destination buffer.
conversion.
length of hexadecimal string after conversion exceeds the size of destination
Please note that this function cannot convert negative values.
int src1 = 20
char dest1[20]

bool success1
success1 = StringBin2HexAsc(src1, dest1[0])
short src2 = 0x3c

char dest2[20]
bool success2
// success2=true, dest2="3c"
int src3 = 0x1a2b3c4d

char dest3[6]
bool success3
end macro_command
18.7.6. String Operation
Name String2Unicode
Syntax result = String2Unicode("source", destination[start])
Description Convert all the characters in the source string to Unicode and store the result
in the destination buffer. The length of result string after conversion will be
stored to result.
Source must be a constant but not a variable.
char dest[20]
int result
result = String2Unicode("abcde", dest[0]) // "result" will be set to 10.
result = String2Unicode("abcdefghijklmno", dest[0]) // "result" will be set to
20.
// "result" will be the length of converted Unicode string
end macro_command
Name StringCat
Syntax success = StringCat (source[start], destination[start])
or
success = StringCat ("source", destination[start])
Description This function appends source string to destination string. It adds the contents
of source string to the last of the contents of destination string.

Destination must be an one-dimensional char array.
length of result string after concatenation exceeds the max. size of destination
char src1[20]="abcdefghij"
char dest1[20]="1234567890"
bool success1
success1= StringCat(src1[0], dest1[0])
// success1=true, dest1="123456790abcdefghij"
char dest2 [10]="1234567890"

bool success2
success2= StringCat("abcde", dest2 [0])
char dest3[20]
bool success3
success3= StringCat(src3[0], dest3[15])
end macro_command
Name StringCompare
Syntax ret = StringCompare (str1[start], str2[start])
ret = StringCompare ("string1", str2[start])
ret = StringCompare (str1[start], "string2")
ret = StringCompare ("string1", "string2")
Description Do a case-sensitive comparison of two strings.
The two string parameters accept both static string (in the form: "string1") and
char array (in the form: str1[start]).
This function returns a Boolean indicating the result of comparison. If two
strings are identical, it returns true. Otherwise it returns false.
The ret field is optional.
char a1[20]="abcde"
char b1[20]="ABCDE"
bool ret1
ret1= StringCompare(a1[0], b1[0])
// ret1=false

char a2[20]="abcde"
char b2[20]="abcde"
bool ret2
// ret2=true
char a3 [20]="abcde"
char b3[20]="abcdefg"
bool ret3
// ret3=false
end macro_command
Name StringCompareNoCase
Syntax ret = StringCompareNoCase(str1[start], str2[start])
ret = StringCompareNoCase("string1", str2[start])
ret = StringCompareNoCase(str1[start], "string2")
ret = StringCompareNoCase("string1", "string2")
Description Do a case-insensitive comparison of two strings.
The two string parameters accept both static string (in the form: "string1") and
char array (in the form: str1[start]).
This function returns a Boolean indicating the result of comparison. If two
strings are identical, it returns true. Otherwise it returns false.
The ret field is optional.
char a1[20]="abcde"
char b1[20]="ABCDE"
bool ret1
ret1= StringCompareNoCase(a1[0], b1[0])
// ret1=true
char a2[20]="abcde"
char b2[20]="abcde"
bool ret2
// ret2=true
char a3 [20]="abcde"
char b3[20]="abcdefg"
bool ret3
// ret3=false

end macro_command
Name StringCopy
Syntax success = StringCopy ("source", destination[start])
or
success = StringCopy (source[start], destination[start])
Description Copy one string to another. This function copies a static string (which is
enclosed in quotes) or a string that is stored in an array to the destination
buffer.
destination[start] must be an one-dimensional char array.
length of source string exceeds the max. size of destination buffer, it returns
false and the content of destination remains the same.
char src1[5]="abcde"
char dest1[5]
bool success1
success1 = StringCopy(src1[0], dest1[0])
// success1=true, dest1="abcde"
char dest2[5]
bool success2
success2 = StringCopy("12345", dest2[0])
char dest3[5]
bool success3
char dest4[5]
bool success4
// success4=true, dest4="fghij"
end macro_command
Name StringExcluding
Syntax success = StringExcluding (source[start], set[start], destination[start])

success = StringExcluding ("source", set[start], destination[start])

success = StringExcluding (source[start], "set", destination[start])
success = StringExcluding ("source", "set", destination[start])
Description Retrieve a substring of the source string that contains characters that are not in
the set string, beginning with the first character in the source string and ending
when a character is found in the source string that is also in the target string.
The source string and set string parameters accept both static string (in the
form: "source") and char array (in the form: source[start]).
length of retrieved substring exceeds the size of destination buffer, it returns
false.
char src1[20]="cabbageabc"
char set1[20]="ge"
char dest1[20]
bool success1
success1 = StringExcluding(src1[0], set1[0], dest1[0])
// success1=true, dest1="cabba"
char src2[20]="cabbage"
char dest2[20]
bool success2
success2 = StringExcluding(src2[0], "abc", dest2[0])
// success2=true, dest2=""
char set3[20]="ge"
char dest3[4]
bool success3
success3 = StringExcluding("cabbage", set3[0], dest3[0])
end macro_command
Name StringFind
Syntax position = StringFind (source[start], target[start])
position = StringFind ("source", target[start])
position = StringFind (source[start], "target")
position = StringFind ("source", "target")
Description Return the position of the first occurrence of target string in the source string.
The two string parameters accept both static string (in the form: “source”) and
char array (in the form: source[start]).
This function returns the zero-based index of the first character of substring in
the source string that matches the target string. Notice that the entire
sequence of characters to find must be matched. If there is no matched

substring, it returns -1.

char target1[20]="cd"
short pos1
pos1= StringFind(src1[0], target1[0])
// pos1=2
char target2[20]="ce"
short pos2
pos2= StringFind("abcde", target2[0])
// pos2=-1
short pos3
pos3= StringFind(src3[3], "cd")
// pos3=-1
end macro_command
Name StringFindOneOf
Syntax position = StringFindOneOf (source[start], target[start])
position = StringFindOneOf ("source", target[start])
position = StringFindOneOf (source[start], "target")
position = StringFindOneOf ("source", "target")
Description Return the position of the first character in the source string that matches any
character contained in the target string.
The two string parameters accept both static string (in the form: "source") and
This function returns the zero-based index of the first character in the source
string that is also in the target string. If there is no match, it returns -1.


char src1[20]="abcdeabcde"
char target1[20]="sdf"
short pos1
pos1= StringFindOneOf(src1[0], target1[0])
// pos1=3
short pos2
pos2= StringFindOneOf(src2[1], "agi")
// pos2=4
char target3 [20]="bus"

short pos3
pos3= StringFindOneOf("abcdeabcde", target3[1])
// pos3=-1
end macro_command
Name StringGet
Syntax StringGet(read_data[start], device_name, device_type, address_offset,
data_count)
Description Receives data from the PLC. The String data is stored into read_data[start]~
read_data[start + data_count - 1]. read_data must be a one-dimensional char
array.
Data_count is the number of received characters, it can be either a constant or
a variable.
Device_name is the PLC name enclosed in the double quotation marks (") and
this name has been defined in the device list of system parameters as follows
(see FATEK KB Series):
Device_type is the device type and encoding method (binary or BCD) of the PLC
is BCD.
Address_offset is the address offset in the PLC.
For example, StringGet(read_data_1[0], "FATEK KB Series", RT, 5, 1) represents


StringGet(read_data_1[0], "FATEK KB Series", RT, 2#5, 1) represents that the
PLC’s station number is 2. If StringGet() uses the default station number
defined in the device list as follows, it is not necessary to define station number
in address_offset.
The number of registers actually read from depends on the value of the
number of data_count since that the read_data is restricted to char array.
type of read_data data_count actual number of
16-bit register read
char (8-bit) 1 1
char (8-bit) 2 1
1 WORD register(16-bit) equals to the size of 2 ASCII characters. According to
the above table, reading 2 ASCII characters is actually reading the content of
one 16-bit register.
char str1[20]
// read 10 words from LW-0~LW-9 to the variables str1[0] to str1[19]

// since that 1 word can store 2 ASCII characters, reading 20 ASCII
// characters is actually reading 10 words of register

StringGet(str1[0], "Local HMI", LW, 0, 20)
end macro_command
Name StringGetEx
Syntax StringGetEx (read_data[start], device_name, device_type, address_offset,
data_count)
Description Receives data from the PLC and continue executing next command even if no
Descriptions of read_data, device_name, device_type, address_offset and
data_count are the same as GetData.
char str1[20]
short test=0
// macro will continue executing test = 1 even if the MODBUS device is

// not responding
StringGetEx(str1[0], "MODBUS RTU", 4x, 0, 20)
test = 1
// macro will not continue executing test = 2 until MODBUS device responds
StringGet(str1[0], "MODBUS RTU", 4x, 0, 20)
test = 2
end macro_command
Name StringIncluding
Syntax success = StringIncluding (source[start], set[start], destination[start])
success = StringIncluding ("source", set[start], destination[start])
success = StringIncluding (source[start], "set", destination[start])
success = StringIncluding ("source", "set", destination[start])
Description Retrieve a substring of the source string that contains characters in the set
string, beginning with the first character in the source string and ending when a
character is found in the source string that is not in the target string.
false.


char src1[20]="cabbageabc"
char set1[20]="abc"
char dest1[20]
bool success1
success1 = StringIncluding(src1[0], set1[0], dest1[0])
// success1=true, dest1="cabba"
char src2[20]="gecabba"
char dest2[20]
bool success2
success2 = StringIncluding(src2[0], "abc", dest2[0])
// success2=true, dest2=""
char set3[20]="abc"
char dest3[4]
bool success3
success3 = StringIncluding("cabbage", set3[0], dest3[0])
end macro_command
Name StringInsert
Syntax success = StringInsert (pos, insert[start], destination[start])
success = StringInsert (pos, "insert", destination[start])
success = StringInsert (pos, insert[start], length, destination[start])
success = StringInsert (pos, "insert", length, destination[start])
Description Insert a string in a specific location within the destination string content. The
insert location is specified by the pos parameter.
The insert string parameter accepts both static string (in the form: “source”)
The number of characters to insert can be specified by the length parameter.
length of string after insertion exceeds the size of destination buffer, it
returns false.

char str1[20]="but the question is"

char str2[10]=", that is"
char dest[40]="to be or not to be"
bool success
success = StringInsert(18, str1[3], 13, dest[0])

// success=true, dest="to be or not to be the question"
success = StringInsert(18, str2[0], dest[0])

// success=true, dest="to be or not to be, that is the question"
success = StringInsert(0, "Hamlet:", dest[0])

// success=false, dest remains the same.
end macro_command
Name StringLength
Syntax length = StringLength (source[start])
or
length = StringLength ("source")
Description Obtain the length of a string. It returns the length of source string and stores it
in the length field on the left-hand side of ‘=’ operator.
The return value of this function indicates the length of the source string.
int length1
length1= StringLength(src1[0])
// length1=5
char src2[20]={'a', 'b', 'c', 'd', 'e'}

int length2
length2= StringLength(src2[0])
// length2=5
int length3
length3= StringLength(src3 [2])
// length3=8
end macro_command

Name StringMid
Syntax success = StringMid (source[start], count, destination[start])
or
success = StringMid ("string", start, count, destination[start])
Description Retrieve a character sequence from the specified offset of the source string and
store it in the destination buffer.
and char array (in the form: source[start]). For source[start], the start offset of
the substring is specified by the index value. For static source string(“source”),
the second parameter(start) specifies the start offset of the substring.
The count parameter specifies the length of substring being retrieved.
Destination must be an one-dimensional char array, to store the retrieved
substring.
false.
char src1[20]="abcdefghijklmnopqrst"
char dest1[20]
bool success1
success1 = StringMid(src1[5], 6, dest1[0])
// success1=true, dest1="fghijk"
char src2[20]="abcdefghijklmnopqrst"
char dest2[5]
bool success2
success2 = StringMid(src2[5], 6, dest2[0])
char dest3[20]="12345678901234567890"
bool success3
success3 = StringMid("abcdefghijklmnopqrst", 5, 5, dest3[15])
// success3= true, dest3="123456789012345fghij"
end macro_command
Name StringReverseFind
Syntax position = StringReverseFind (source[start], target[start])
position = StringReverseFind ("source", target[start])
position = StringReverseFind (source[start], "target")
position = StringReverseFind ("source", "target")
Description Return the position of the last occurrence of target string in the source string.
The two string parameters accept both static string (in the form: "source") and


This function returns the zero-based index of the first character of substring in
the source string that matches the target string. Notice that the entire
sequence of characters to find must be matched. If there exists multiple
substrings that matches the target string, function will return the position of
the last matched substring. If there is no matched substring, it returns -1.
char target1[20]="cd"
short pos1
pos1= StringReverseFind(src1[0], target1[0])
// pos1=7
char target2[20]="ce"
short pos2
pos2= StringReverseFind("abcdeabcde", target2[0])
// pos2=-1
short pos3
pos3= StringReverseFind(src3[6], "ab")
// pos3=-1
end macro_command
Name StringSet
Syntax StringSet(send_data[start], device_name, device_type, address_offset,
data_count)
Description Send data to the PLC. Data is defined in send_data[start]~ send_data[start +
data_count - 1]. send_data must be a one-dimensional char array.
data_count is the number of sent characters, it can be either a constant or a
variable.
device_name is the PLC name enclosed in the double quotation marks (") and
this name has been defined in the device list of system parameters.
device_type is the device type and encoding method (binary or BCD) of the PLC
is BCD.
address_offset is the address offset in the PLC.
For example, StringSet(read_data_1[0], "FATEK KB Series", RT, 5, 1) represents

StringSet(read_data_1[0], "FATEK KB Series", RT, 2#5, 1) represents that the

PLC’s station number is 2. If SetData () uses the default station number defined
in the device list, it is not necessary to define station number in address_offset.
The number of registers actually sends to depends on the value of the number
of data_count, since that send_data is restricted to char array.
type of data_count actual number of

read_data 16-bit register send
char (8-bit) 1 1
char (8-bit) 2 1
1 WORD register(16-bit) equals to the size of 2 ASCII characters. According to

the above table, sending 2 ASCII characters is actually writing to one 16-bit
register. The ASCII characters are stored into the WORD register from low byte
to high byte. While using the ASCII Display object to display the string data
stored in the registers, data_count must be a multiple of 2 in order to display
full string content. For example:
StringSet(src1[0], "Local HMI", LW, 0, 5)
end macro_command
The ASCII Display object shows:
If data_count is an even number that is greater than or equal to the length of

the string, the content of string can be completely shown:
StringSet(src1[0], "Local HMI", LW, 0, 6)
end macro_command
char str1[10]="abcde"
// Send 3 words to LW-0~LW-2

// Data are being sent until the end of string is reached.

// Even though the value of data_count is larger than the length of string
// , the function will automatically stop.
StringSet(str1[0], "Local HMI", LW, 0, 10)
end macro_command
Name StringSetEx
Syntax StringSetEx (send_data[start], device_name, device_type, address_offset,
data_count)
Description Send data to the PLC and continue executing next command even if no
Descriptions of send_data, device_name, device_type, address_offset and
data_count are the same as StringSet.
char str1[20]="abcde"
short test=0
// macro will continue executing test = 1 even if the MODBUS device is

// not responding
StringSetEx(str1[0], "MODBUS RTU", 4x, 0, 20)
test = 1
// macro will not continue executing test = 2 until MODBUS device responds
StringSet(str1[0], "MODBUS RTU", 4x, 0, 20)
test = 2
end macro_command
Name StringToUpper
Syntax success = StringToUpper (source[start], destination[start])
success = StringToUpper ("source", destination[start])
Description Convert all the characters in the source string to uppercase characters and
store the result in the destination buffer.
length of result string after conversion exceeds the size of destination buffer, it
returns false.


char src1[20]="aBcDe"
char dest1[20]
bool success1
success1 = StringToUpper(src1[0], dest1[0])
// success1=true, dest1="ABCDE"
char dest2[4]
bool success2
success2 = StringToUpper("aBcDe", dest2[0])
end macro_command
Name StringToLower
Syntax success = StringToLower (source[start], destination[start])
success = StringToLower ("source", destination[start])
Description Convert all the characters in the source string to lowercase characters and store
the result in the destination buffer.
length of result string after conversion exceeds the size of destination buffer, it
returns false.
char src1[20]="aBcDe"
char dest1[20]
bool success1
success1 = StringToLower(src1[0], dest1[0])
// success1=true, dest1="abcde"
char dest2[4]
bool success2
success2 = StringToLower("aBcDe", dest2[0])
end macro_command
Name StringToReverse
Syntax success = StringToReverse (source[start], destination[start])
success = StringToReverse ("source", destination[start])
Description Reverse the characters in the source string and store it in the destination buffer.

length of reversed string exceeds the size of destination buffer, it returns false.
char dest1[20]
bool success1
success1 = StringToReverse(src1[0], dest1[0])
// success1=true, dest1="edcba"
char dest2[4]
bool success2
success2 = StringToReverse("abcde", dest2[0])
end macro_command
Name StringTrimLeft
Syntax success = StringTrimLeft (source[start], set[start], destination[start])
success = StringTrimLeft ("source", set[start], destination[start])
success = StringTrimLeft (source[start], "set", destination[start])
success = StringTrimLeft ("source", "set", destination[start])
Description Trim the leading specified characters in the set buffer from the source string.
length of trimmed string exceeds the size of destination buffer, it returns false.
char src1[20]= "# *a*#bc"
char set1[20]="# *"
char dest1[20]
bool success1
success1 = StringTrimLeft (src1[0], set1[0], dest1[0])
// success1=true, dest1="a*#bc"
char set2[20]={'#', ' ', '*'}

char dest2[4]
bool success2
success2 = StringTrimLeft ("# *a*#bc", set2[0], dest2[0])
char src3[20]="abc *#"

char dest3[20]
bool success3
success3 = StringTrimLeft (src3[0], "# *", dest3[0])
// success3=true, dest3="abc *#"
end macro_command
Name StringTrimRight
Syntax success = StringTrimRight (source[start], set[start], destination[start])
success = StringTrimRight ("source", set[start], destination[start])
success = StringTrimRight (source[start], "set", destination[start])
success = StringTrimRight ("source", "set", destination[start])
Description Trim the trailing specified characters in the set buffer from the source string.
length of trimmed string exceeds the size of destination buffer, it returns false.
char src1[20]= "# *a*#bc# * "
char set1[20]="# *"
char dest1[20]
bool success1
success1 = StringTrimRight(src1[0], set1[0], dest1[0])
// success1=true, dest1="# *a*#bc"
char set2[20]={'#', ' ', '*'}

char dest2[20]
bool success2
success2 = StringTrimRight("# *a*#bc", set2[0], dest2[0])
// success2=true, dest2="# *a*#bc"
char src3[20]="ab**c *#"

char dest3[4]
bool success3
success3 = StringTrimRight(src3[0], "# *", dest3[0])

end macro_command
18.7.7. Mathematics
Name SQRT
Syntax SQRT(source, result)
Description Calculate the square root of source and store the result into result.
source must be a nonnegative value.
float source, result
SQRT(15, result)
source = 9.0
SQRT(source, result)// result is 3.0
end macro_command
Name CUBERT
Syntax CUBERT(source, result)
Description Calculate the cube root of source and store the result into result.
source must be a nonnegative value.
CUBERT (27, result) // result is 3.0
source = 27.0
CUBERT(source, result)// result is 3.0
end macro_command
Name POW
Syntax POW(source1, source2, result)
Description Calculate source1 to the power of source2.
source1 and source2 can be a constant or a variable.
source1 and source2 must be a nonnegative value.
float y, result

y = 0.5
POW (25, y, result) // result = 5
end macro_command
Name SIN
Syntax SIN(source, result)
Description Calculate the sine of source (degree) into result.
SIN(90, result)// result is 1
source = 30
SIN(source, result)// result is 0.5
end macro_command
Name COS
Syntax COS(source, result)
Description Calculate the cosine of source (degree) into result.
COS(90, result)// result is 0
source = 60
COS(source, result)// result is 0.5
end macro_command
Name TAN
Syntax TAN(source, result)
Description Calculate the tangent of source (degree) into result.
TAN(45, result)// result is 1
source = 60
TAN(source, result)// result is 1.732

end macro_command
Name COT
Syntax COT(source, result)
Description Calculate the cotangent of source (degree) into result.
COT(45, result)// result is 1
source = 60
COT(source, result)// result is 0.5774
end macro_command
Name SEC
Syntax SEC(source, result)
Description Calculate the secant of source (degree) into result.
SEC(45, result)// result is 1.414
source = 60
SEC(source, result)// if source is 60, result is 2
end macro_command
Name CSC
Syntax CSC(source, result)
Description Calculate the cosecant of source (degree) into result.
CSC(45, result)// result is 1.414
source = 30
CSC(source, result)// result is 2
end macro_command

Name ASIN
Syntax ASIN(source, result)
Description Calculate the arc sine of source into result (degree).
ASIN(0.8660, result)// result is 60
source = 0.5
ASIN(source, result)// result is 30
end macro_command
Name ACOS
Syntax ACOS(source, result)
Description Calculate the arc cosine of source into result.
ACOS(0.8660, result)// result is 30
source = 0.5
ACOS(source, result)// result is 60
end macro_command
Name ATAN
Syntax ATAN(source, result)
Description Calculate the arc tangent of source into result.
ATAN(1, result)// result is 45
source = 1.732
ATAN(source, result)// result is 60
end macro_command

Name LOG
Syntax LOG (source, result)
Description Calculates the natural logarithm of a number and saves into result.
source can be either a variable or a constant. result must be a variable.
float source = 100, result
LOG (source, result)// result is approximately 4.6052
end macro_command
Name LOG10
Syntax LOG10(source, result)
Description Calculates the base-10 logarithm of a number and saves into result.
source can be either a variable or a constant. result must be a variable.
float source = 100, result
LOG10 (source, result) // result is 2
end macro_command
Name RAND
Syntax RAND(result)
Description Calculates a random integer and save into result. (Range: 0 ~ 32767)
short result
RAND (result) //result is not a fixed value when executes macro every time
end macro_command
18.7.8. Statistics
Name AVERAGE
Syntax AVERAGE(source[start], result, count)
Description Get the average value from array.
Example int data[5] = {1, 2, 3, 4, 5}
float result
AVERAGE(data[0], result, 5) // result is equal to 3

AVERAGE(data[2], result, 3) // result is equal to 4
Name HARMEAN
Syntax HARMEAN(source[start], result, count)
Description Get the harmonic mean value from array.
Example int data[10] = {1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10}
float result
HARMEAN(data[0], result, 10) // result is equal to 3.414
Name MAX
Syntax MAX(source[start], result, count)
Description Get the maximum value from array.
Example int data[5] = {1, 2, 3, 4, 5}
int result
MAX(data[0], result, 5) // result is equal to 5

MAX(data[1], result, 3) // result is equal to 4
Name MEDIAN
Syntax MEDIAN(source[start], result, count)
Description Get the median value from array.
Example int data[10] = {1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10}
float result
MEDIAN(data[0], result, 10) // result is equal to 5.5
Name MIN
Syntax MIN(source[start], result, count)
Description Get the minimium value from array.
Example int data[5] = {1, 2, 3, 4, 5}
int result
MIN(data[0], result, 5) // result is equal to 1

MIN(data[1], result, 3) // result is equal to 2
Name STDEVP
Syntax STDEVP(source[start], result, count)
Description Get the standard deviation value from array.
Example int data[10] = {1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10}
float result
STDEVP(data[0], result, 10) // result is equal to 2.872

Name STDEVS
Syntax STDEVS(source[start], result, count)
Description Get the sample standard deviation value from array.
Example int data[10] = {1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10}
float result
STDEVS(data[0], result, 10) // result is equal to 3.027
18.7.9. Recipe Database
Name RecipeGetData
Syntax RecipeGetData(destination, recipe_address, record_ID)
Description Get Recipe Data. The gained data will be stored in destination, and must be a
variable. recipe_address consists of recipe name and item name:
"recipe_name.item_name". record_ID specifies the ID number of the record in
recipe being gained.
int data=0
char str[20]
int recordID
bool result
recordID = 0
result = RecipeGetData(data, "TypeA.item_weight", recordID)
// From recipe "TypeA" get the data of the item "item_weight" in record 0.
recordID = 1
result = RecipeGetData(str[0], "TypeB.item_name", recordID)
// From recipe "TypeB" get the data of the item "item_name" in record 1.
end macro_command
Name RecipeQuery
Syntax RecipeQuery (SQL_command, destination)
Description Use SQL statement to query recipe data. The number of records of query result
will be stored in the destination. This must be a variable. SQL command can be
static string or char array. Example:
RecipeQuery("SELECT * FROM TypeA", destination)
or
RecipeQuery(sql[0], destination)
SQL statement must start with "SELECT * FROM" followed by recipe name and
query condition.
int total_row=0
char sql[100]="SELECT * FROM TypeB"

short var
bool result
result = RecipeQuery("SELECT * FROM TypeA", total_row)

// Query Recipe "TypeA". Store the number of records of query result in
total_row.
result = RecipeQuery(sql[0], total_row)

// Query Recipe "TypeB". Store the number of records of query result in
total_row.
result = RecipeQuery("SELECT * FROM Recipe WHERE Item >%(var)", total_row)

// Query "Recipe", where "Item" is larger than var. Store the number of
records of query result in total_row.
end macro_command
Name RecipeQueryGetData
Syntax RecipeQueryGetData (destination, recipe_address, result_row_no)
Description Get the data in the query result obtained by RecipeQuery. This function must
be called after calling RecipeQuery, and specify the same recipe name in
recipe_address as RecipeQuery.
result_row_no specifies the sequence row number in query result
int data=0
int total_row=0
int row_number=0
bool result_query
bool result_data
result_query = RecipeQuery("SELECT * FROM TypeA", total_row)

total_row.
if (result_query) then
for row_number=0 to total_row-1
result_data = RecipeQueryGetData(data, "TypeA.item_weight", row_number)
next row_number
end if
end macro_command
Name RecipeQueryGetRecordID
Syntax RecipeQueryGetRecordID (destination, result_row_no)
Description Get the record ID numbers of those records gained by RecipeQuery. This
function must be called after calling RecipeQuery.
result_row_no specifies the sequence row number in query result, and write

the obtained record ID to destination.

int recordID=0
int total_row=0
int row_number=0
bool result_query
bool result_id
result_query = RecipeQuery("SELECT * FROM TypeA", total_row)

total_row.
if (result_query) then
for row_number=0 to total_row-1
result_id = RecipeQueryGetRecordID(recordID, row_number)
next row_number
end if
end macro_command
Name RecipeSetData
Syntax RecipeSetData(source, recipe address, record_ID)
Description Write data to recipe. If success, returns true, else, returns false.
recipe_address consists of recipe name and item name:
"recipe_name.item_name".
record_ID specifies the ID number of the record in recipe being modified.
int data=99
char str[20]="abc"
int recordID
bool result
recordID = 0
result = RecipeSetData(data, "TypeA.item_weight", recordID)
// set data to recipe "TypeA", where item name is "item_weight" and the
record ID is 0.
recordID = 1
result = RecipeSetData(str[0], "TypeB.item_name", recordID)
// set data to recipe "TypeB", where item name is "item_name" and the record
ID is 1.
end macro_command

18.7.10. Data/Event Log
Name FindDataSamplingDate
Syntax return_value = FindDataSamplingDate (data_log_number, index, year, month,
day)
or
FindDataSamplingDate (data_log_number, index, year, month, day)
Description A query function for finding the date of specified data sampling file according to
the data sampling no. and the file index. The date is stored into year, month and
day respectively in the format of YYYY, MM and DD.
Data sampling no.
The directory of saved data: [Storage location]\[filename]\yyyymmdd.dtl. The

data sampling files under the same directory are sorted according to the file
name and are indexed starting from 0. The most recently saved file has the
smallest file index number. For example, if there are four data sampling files as
follows:
20101210.dtl
20101230.dtl
20110110.dtl
20110111.dtl
The file index are:
20101210.dtl -> index is 3
20101230.dtl -> index is 2
20110110.dtl -> index is 1
20110111.dtl -> index is 0
return_value equals to 1 if referred data sampling file is successfully found,
otherwise it equals to 0.
data_log_number and index can be constant or variable. year, month, day and
return_value must be variable. return_value is optional.
short data_log_number = 1, index = 2, year, month, day
short success
// if there exists a data sampling file named 20101230.dtl, with data sampling //
number 1 and file index 2.
// the result after execution: success == 1, year == 2010, month == 12 and //day
== 30
success = FindDataSamplingDate(data_log_number, index, year, month, day)
end macro_command

Name FindDataSamplingIndex
Syntax return_value = FindDataSamplingIndex (data_log_number, year, month, day,
index)
or
FindDataSamplingIndex (data_log_number, year, month, day, index)
Description A query function for finding the file index of specified data sampling file
according to the data sampling no. and the date. The file index is stored into
index. year, month and day are in the format of YYYY, MM and DD respectively.
Data sampling no.
The directory of saved data: [Storage location]\[filename]\yyyymmdd.dtl. The

data sampling files under the same directory are sorted according to the file
name and are indexed starting from 0. The most recently saved file has the
smallest file index number. For example, if there are four data sampling files as
follows:
20101210.dtl
20101230.dtl
20110110.dtl
20110111.dtl
The file index are:
20101210.dtl -> index is 3
20101230.dtl -> index is 2
20110110.dtl -> index is 1
20110111.dtl -> index is 0
data_log_number, year, month and day can be constant or variable. index and
return_value must be variable. return_value is optional.
short data_log_number = 1, year = 2010, month = 12, day = 10, index
short success
// if there exists a data sampling file named 20101210.dtl, with data sampling //
number 1 and file index 2.
// the result after execution: success == 1 and index == 2
success = FindDataSamplingIndex (data_log_number, year, month, day, index)
end macro_command
Name FindEventLogDate
Syntax return_value = FindEventLogDate (index, year, month, day)
or

FindEventLogDate (index, year, month, day)

Description A query function for finding the date of specified event log file according to file
index. The date is stored into year, month and day respectively in the format of
YYYY, MM and DD.
The event log files stored in the designated position (such as HMI memory
storage or external memory device) are sorted according to the file name and
are indexed starting from 0. The most recently saved file has the smallest file
index number. For example, if there are four event log files as follows:
EL_20101210.evt
EL_20101230.evt
EL_20110110.evt
EL_20110111.evt
The file index are:
EL_20101210.evt -> index is 3
index can be constant or variable. year, month, day and return_value must be
variable. return_value is optional.
short index = 1, year, month, day
short success
// if there exists an event log file named EL_20101230.evt，with index 1

// the result after execution: success == 1, year == 2010, month == 12, day //==
30
success = FindEventLogDate (index, year, month, day)
end macro_command
Name FindEventLogIndex
Syntax return_value = FindEventLogIndex (year, month, day, index)
or
FindEventLogIndex (year, month, day, index)
Description A query function for finding the file index of specified event log file according
to date. The file index is stored into index. year, month and day are in the
format of YYYY, MM and DD respectively.
The event log files stored in the designated position (such as HMI memory
storage or external memory device) are sorted according to the file name and
are indexed starting from 0. The most recently saved file has the smallest file
index number. For example, if there are four event log files as follows:
EL_20101210.evt
EL_20101230.evt
EL_20110110.evt
EL_20110111.evt

The file index are:

index can be constant or variable. year, month, day and return_value must be
variable. return_value is optional.
short year = 2010, month = 12, day = 10, index
short success
// if there exists an event log file named EL_20101210.evt, with index 2

// the result after execution: success == 1, index == 2
success = FindEventLogIndex (year, month, day, index)
end macro_command
18.7.11. Checksum
Name ADDSUM
Syntax ADDSUM(source[start], result, data_count)
Description Adds up the elements of an array (source) from source[start] to source[start +
data_count - 1] to generate a checksum. Puts in the checksum into result.
result must be a variable. data_count is the amount of the accumulated
elements and can be a constant or a variable.
char data[5]
short checksum
data[0] = 0x1
data[1] = 0x2
data[2] = 0x3
data[3] = 0x4
data[4] = 0x5
ADDSUM(data[0], checksum, 5)// checksum is 0xf
end macro_command
Name XORSUM
Syntax XORSUM(source[start], result, data_count)
Description Uses XOR to calculate the checksum from source[start] to source[start +

data_count - 1]. Puts the checksum into result. result must be a variable.
data_count is the amount of the calculated elements of the array and can be a
constant or a variable.
char data[5] = {0x1, 0x2, 0x3, 0x4, 0x5}
short checksum
XORSUM(data[0], checksum, 5)// checksum is 0x1
end macro_command
Name BCC
Syntax BCC(source[start], result, data_count)
Description Same as XORSUM.
char data[5] = {0x1, 0x2, 0x3, 0x4, 0x5}
char checksum
BCC(data[0], checksum, 5) // checksum is 0x1
end macro_command
Name CRC
Syntax CRC(source[start], result, data_count)
Description Calculates 16-bit CRC of the variables from source[start] to source[start +
data_count - 1]. Puts in the 16-bit CRC into result. result must be a variable.
data_count is the amount of the calculated elements of the array and can be a
constant or a variable.
char data[5] = {0x1, 0x2, 0x3, 0x4, 0x5}
short checksum
CRC(data[0], checksum, 5) // checksum is 0xbb2a, 16-bit CRC
end macro_command
18.7.12. Miscellaneous
Name Beep
Syntax Beep ()
Description Plays beep sound.
This command plays a beep sound with frequency of 800 hertz and duration of
30 milliseconds.

Beep()
end macro_command
Name Buzzer
Syntax Buzzer ()
Description Turn ON / OFF the buzzer.
char on = 1, off = 0
Buzzer(on) // turn on the buzzer
DELAY(1000) // delay 1 second
Buzzer(off) // turn off the buzzer
DELAY(500) // delay 500ms
Buzzer(1) // turn on the buzzer
DELAY(1000) // delay 1 second
Buzzer(0) // turn off the buzzer
end macro_command
Name TRACE
Syntax TRACE(format, argument)
Description Use this function to send specified string to the EasyDiagnoser. Users can print
out the current value of variables during run-time of macro for debugging.
When TRACE encounters the first format specification (if any), it converts the
value of the first argument after format and outputs it accordingly.
format refers to the format control of output string. A format specification,
which consists of optional (in [ ]) and required fields (in bold), has the following
form:
%[flags] [width] [.precision] type
Each field of the format specification is described as below:
flags (optional):
-
+
width (optional):
A nonnegative decimal integer controlling the minimum
number of characters printed.
precision (optional):
A nonnegative decimal integer which specifies the precision and
the number of characters to be printed.

type:
C or c : specifies a single-byte character.
d : signed decimal integer.
i : signed decimal integer.
o : unsigned octal integer.
u : unsigned decimal integer.
X or x : unsigned hexadecimal integer.
E or e : Signed value having the form. [ – ]d.dddd e [sign]ddd where d
is a single decimal digit, dddd is one or more decimal digits, ddd is exactly
three decimal digits, and sign is + or –.
f : Signed value having the form [ – ]dddd.dddd, where dddd is
The length of output string is limited to 256 characters. The extra characters
will be ignored.
The argument part is optional. One format specification converts exactly one
argument.
char c1 = 'a'
short s1 = 32767
float f1 = 1.234567
TRACE("The results are") // output: The results are

TRACE("c1 = %c, s1 = %d, f1 = %f", c1, s1, f1)
// output: c1 = a, s1 = 32767, f1 = 1.234567
end macro_command
Name GetCnvTagArrayIndex
Syntax GetCnvTagArrayIndex(array_index)
Description When an user-defined conversion tag uses array, the GetCnvTagArrayIndex()
function of [Read conversion] subroutine can get the relative array index
before doing conversion.
Example Sub short newfun(short param)
Int index
GetCnvTagArrayIndex(index)
If index is 2, the third data record in the array will be converted.
return param
end sub

18.8. How to Create and Execute a Macro
18.8.1. How to Create a Macro
Please follow the steps below to create a macro.
1. Click [Project] » [Macro] to open Macro Manager dialog box.
In Macro Manager, all macros compiled successfully are displayed in “Macro list”, and all
macros under development or cannot be compiled are displayed in “Macro under
development”. The following is a description of the various buttons.
Setting Description
New Opens a blank “WorkSpace” editor for creating a
new macro.
Delete Deletes the selected macro.
Edit Opens the “WorkSpace” editor, and loads the

selected macro.
Copy Copies the selected macro into the clipboard.
Paste Pastes the macro in the clipboard into the list, and
creates a new name for the macro.
Export Save the selected macro as *.edm file.
Import Import an *.edm file to the project.
Library Open Macro Function Library managing dialog.
2. Press the [New] button to create an empty macro and open the macro editor. Every macro
has a unique number defined at [Macro ID], and must have a macro name, otherwise an
error will appear while compiling.
3. Design your macro. To use built-in functions (like SetData() or Getdata()), press [Get/Set
FN…] button to open API dialog box and select the function and set essential parameters.

4. After the completion of a new macro, press [Compile] button to compile the macro.
5. If there is no error, press [Exit] button and a new macro “macro_test” will be in “Macro
list”.


18.8.2. Execute a Macro
There are several ways to execute a macro.

 Use a PLC Control object
1. Open [PLC Control] and add one PLC Control object with the [Type of control] as [Execute
macro program].
2. Select the macro in [Macro name]. Choose a bit and select a trigger condition to trigger
the macro. In order to guarantee that the macro will run only once, consider latching the
trigger bit, and then resetting the trigger condition within the macro.
3. Use a [Set Bit] or Toggle Switch object to change the bit to activate the macro.
 Use a [Set Bit] or Toggle Switch object

1. On the [General] tab of the [Set Bit] or [Toggle Switch] dialog box, select the [Execute
Macro] option.
2. Select the macro to execute. The macro will be executed one time when the button is
activated.
 Use a Function Key object

1. On the [General] tab of the [Function Key] dialog, select the [Execute Macro] option.
2. Select the macro to execute. The macro will execute one time when the button is
activated.
 In macro editor, use

1. [Periodical Execution]: Macro will be triggered periodically.
2. [Execute one time when HMI starts]: Macro will be executed once HMI starts.
 In Window Settings, Macro group box

1. [Open]: When the window opens, run the selected macro once.
2. [Cycle]: When the window opens, run the selected macro every 0.5 second.
3. [Close]: When the window closes, run the selected macro once.
18.9. User Defined Macro Function
When editing Macro, to save time of defining functions, user may search for the needed from
built-in Macro Function Library. However, certain functions, though frequently used, may not
be found there. In this case, user may define the needed function and save it for future use.
Next time when the same function is required, the saved functions can be called from [Macro

Function Library] for easier editing. Additionally, [Macro Function Library] greatly enhances the
portability of user-defined functions. Before building a function please check the built-in
functions or online function library to see if it exists.
18.9.1. Import Function Library File
Open a project in HMI programming software, the default Function Library File will be read
automatically and the function information will be loaded in. At this moment if a user-defined
function is called, the relevant .mlb file must be imported first.
1. Default Function Library File Name: MacroLibrary (without filename extension)
2. Function Library Directory: HMI programming software installation directory\library
(folder)
3. \library (folder) contains two types of function library files:
Without filename extension: MacroLibrary, the Default Function Library for HMI
programming software to read at the beginning.

With filename extension (.mlb): Such as ”math.mlb”. The files to be read / written when
users import / export. These files are portable and can be called from the folder when
needed.
4. When opening HMI programming software, only the functions in Default Function Library
will be loaded in, to use functions in .mlb files, please import them first.
18.9.2. How to Use Macro Function Library
1. Select the function directly from Macro Function Library.
2. In WorkSpace click [GET/SET FN…] to open API dialog box.

3. At least check one from [Library] or [Build-in] and select the function to be used.
4. The description displayed in API dialog box is the same as written in Function Editor.

5. Select the function to be used, fill in the corresponding variables according to the data
type.
6. Upon completion of the steps above, user-defined functions can be used freely without
defining the same functions repeatedly.
18.9.3. Function Library Management Interface
1. Open macro management dialog, click [Library] to open [Macro Function Library] dialog
box.

2. A list of functions is shown. When the project is opened, the software will load all the
functions in the Macro Function Library.
3. Each listed function has the following format:
return_type function_name ( parameter_type1, …, parameter_typeN)
return_type indicates the type of the return value. If this value does not exist, this column
will be omitted. function_name indicates the name of the function. “N” in
parameter_typeN stands for the number of parameter types. If this function does not

need any parameter, this column will be omitted.
4. Macro function can be embedded in the project file. Select the function and then click
[Copy To Project], then you can find this function in [Project] tab. When opening the
project on another computer, this function can still be used. When compiling the project,
the .exob file will included the functions that are used. Please note that decompiling the
project will only produce the macro commands that are used.
18.9.3.1. Create a Function
1. Click [New] to enter Function Editor.

2. Edit function in Function Editor.
3. Edit the function description to describe what the specification is, how to use … etc.
4. After editing, click [Compile] and [Save] to save this function to the Library. Otherwise, a
warning is shown.
5. Successfully add a function into Macro Function Library.

Note
 The total size of data type can be declared in a function is 4096 bytes.
 Function name must only contain alphanumeric characters, and cannot start with a
number.
18.9.3.2. Delete a Function
1. In function list select the function to be deleted and click [Delete].
2. Click [Yes] to confirm, [No] to cancel the deletion. Click [Yes] to delete MAX_SHORT
function.

18.9.3.3. Modify a Function
1. Users can modify the functions exist in the Library.

2. Select a function to modify by clicking [Edit] to enter Function Editor.
3. Double click the function to be modified can also enter Function Editor.

4. After modifying, [Compile] then [Save] before leaving.
18.9.3.4. Import a Function
1. Functions can be imported using an external .mlb file.
2. For example, import a function library “math.mlb” which contains a function “test1”. Click
[Open].

3. When importing a function which already exists in the Library, a confirmation pop-up will
be shown. The buttons are:
[OK]: Overwrite the existing function with the imported one.

[NO]: Cancel the importing of the function with the same name.
[Yes to all]: Overwrite using all the imported functions with the same name.
[No to all]: Cancel the importing of all the functions with the same name.
4. The imported functions will be saved in Default Function Library, so if “math.mlb” file is
deleted, “test1” will still exist in the Library, even restarting EasyBuilder Pro.

18.9.3.5. Export a Function
1. Export the function from Function Library and save as .mlb file. Click [Export].
2. Select the function to be exported, and click [Export].
3. A “math.mlb” file can be found under export directory. This file contains 4 functions: ADD,
SUBS, MUL, and DIV.
4. The exported .mlb file can be imported on another PC. Open HMI programming software,
import, then the functions in this file can be used.

18.10. Some Notes about Using the Macro
1. The maximum storage space of local variables in a macro is 4K bytes. So the maximum
array size of different variable types are as follows:
char a[4096]
bool b[4096]
short c[2048]
int d[1024]
float e[1024]
2. A maximum of 255 macros are allowed in an EasyBuilder Pro project.
3. A macro may cause the HMI unresponsive. Possible reasons are:
 A macro contains an infinite loop with no PLC communication.
 The size of an array exceeds the storage space in a macro.
4. The PLC communication speed affects the running time for the macro to execute. Also,
too many macros may slow down the communication between HMI and PLC.
18.11. Use the Free Protocol to Control a Device
If EasyBuilder Pro does not provide a driver for a specific device, users can use OUTPORT and
INPORT built-in functions to control the device. The data sent by OUTPORT and INPORT must
follow the communication protocol of the device. The following example explains how to use
these two functions to control a MODBUS RTU device.
1. First, create a new device in the device table. The device type of the new device is set to
“Free Protocol” and named with “MODBUS RTU device” as follows:

2. The interface of the device (PLC I/F) uses [RS-232]. If a MODBUS TCP/IP device is
connected, the interface should be [Ethernet] with correct IP and port number as follows:
Suppose that the HMI will read the data of 4x_1 and 4x_2 on the device. First, utilize OUTPORT
to send out a read request to the device. The format of OUTPORT is:
OUTPORT(command[start], device_name, cmd_count)
Since “MODBUS RTU device” is a MODBUS RTU device, the read request must follow MODBUS
RTU protocol. The request uses”Reading Holding Registers (0x03)” command to read data. The
following picture displays the content of the command. (The items of the station number (byte
0) and the last two bytes (CRC) are ignored).

Depending on the protocol, the content of a read command as follows (The total is 8 bytes):
command[0]: station number (BYTE 0)
command[1]: function code (BYTE 1)
command[2]: high byte of starting address (BYTE 2)
command[3]: low byte of starting address (BYTE 3)
command[4]: high byte of quantity of registers (BYTE 4)
command[5]: low byte of quantity of registers (BYTE 5)
command[6]: low byte of 16-bit CRC (BYTE 6)
command[7]: high byte of 16-bit CRC (BYTE 7)
So a read request is designed as follows:
char command[32]
FILL(command[0], 0, 32) // initialize command[0]~command[31] to 0
command[0] = 0x1 // station number

command[1] = 0x3 // read holding registers (function code is 0x3)
address = // starting address (4x_1) is 0

read_no = 2 // the total words of rading is 2 words

CRC(command[0], checksum, 6) // calculate 16-bit CRC
Lastly, use OUPORT to send out this read request to PLC.
OUTPORT(command[0], “MODBUS RTU Device”, 8) // send read request
After sending out the request, use INPORT to get the response from PLC. Depending on the
protocol, the content of the response is as follows (the total byte is 9):

command[0]: station number (BYTE 0)

command[1]: function code (BYTE 1)
command[2]: byte count (BYTE 2)
command[3]: high byte of 4x_1 (BYTE 3)
command[4]: low byte of 4x_1 (BYTE 4)
command[7]: low byte of 16-bit CRC (BYTE 7)
command[8]: high byte of 16-bit CRC (BYTE 8)
The format of INPORT is:
INPORT(response[0], “MODBUS RTU Device”, 9, return_value) // read reponse
Where the real read count is restored to the variable return_value (unit is byte). If return_value
is 0, it means reading fails in executing INPORT.
According to the MODBUS RTU protocol specification, the correct response[1] must be equal to
0x03. After getting correct response, calculate the data of 4x_1 and 4x_2 and put in the data
into LW-100 and LW-101 of HMI.
If (return_value) >0 and response[1] == 0x3) then

read_data[0] = response[4] + (response[3] << 8) // 4x_1
read_data[1] = response[6] + (response[5] << 8) // 4x_2
SetData(read_data[0], “Local HMI”, LW, 100, 2)

endif
The complete macro is as follows:

// Read Holding Registers


short read_no, return_value, read_data[2], i
FILL(command[0], 0, 32)// initialize command[0]~command[31] to 0

command[0] = 0x1// station number

command[1] = 0x3// read holding registers (function code is 0x3)
address = 0
address = 0// starting address (4x_1) is 0
read_no = 2/ the total words of reading is 2 words

CRC(command[0], checksum, 6)// calculate 16-bit CRC
OUTPORT(command[0], "MODBUS RTU Device", 8 )// send request

INPORT(response[0], "MODBUS RTU Device", 9, return_value)// read response
if (return_value > 0 and response[1] == 0x3) then

read_data[0] = response[4] + (response[3] << 8)// 4x_1
read_data[1] = response[6] + (response[5] << 8)// 4x_2
SetData(read_data[0], "Local HMI", LW, 100, 2)

end if
end macro_command
The following example explains how to design a request to set the status of 0x_1. The request
uses ”Write Single Coil(0x5)” command.

The complete macro is as follows:
// Write Single Coil (ON)


short i, return_value
FILL(command[0], 0, 32)// initialize command[0]~ command[31] to 0

command[0] = 0x1// station number

command[1] = 0x5// function code : write single coil
address = 0
command[4] = 0xff// force 0x_1 on

command[5] = 0
OUTPORT(command[0], "MODBUS RTU Device", 8)// send request

INPORT(response[0], "MODBUS RTU Device", 8, return_value)// read response
end macro_command
18.12. Compiler Error Message
 Error Message Format

error C# : error description

(# is the error message number)
Example: error C37 : undeclared identifier : i
When there are compile errors, the description of the error can be found by the compiler error
message number.
 Error Description
(C1) syntax error：’identifier’
There are many possibilities to cause compiler error.
For example:
char i, 123xyz // this is an unsupported variable name
end macro_command
(C2) ‘identifier’ used without having been initialized

Macro must define the size of an array during declaration.
For example:
char i
int g[i] // i must be a numeric constant
end macro_command
(C3) redefinition error : ‘identifier’

The name of variable and function within its scope must be unique.
For example:
int g[10]，g // error
end macro_command
(C4) function name error : ‘identifier’

Reserved keywords and constant cannot be the name of a function
For example：
sub int if() // error

(C5) parentheses have not come in pairs

Statement missing “(“ or “)”
For example：
macro_command main ) // missing “(“
(C6) illegal expression without matching ‘if’

Missing expression in “if” statement
(C7) illegal expression (no ‘then’) without matching ‘if’

Missing “then” in “if” statement
(C8) illegal expression (no ‘end if’)

Missing “end if”
(C9) illegal ‘end if’ without matching ‘if’

Unfinished “If’ statement before “End If”
(C10) illegal ‘else’

The format of “if” statement is :
if [logic expression] then
[ else [if [logic expression] then ] ]
end if
Any format other than this format will cause a compile error.
(C17) illegal expression (no 'for') without matching ‘next’

“for” statement error : missing “for” before “next”
(C18) illegal variable type (not integer or char)

Should be integer or char variable
(C19) variable type error

Missing assign statement
(C20) must be keyword ‘to’ or ‘down’

Missing keyword “to” or “down”

(C21) illegal expression (no 'next')

The format of “for” statement is:
for [variable] = [initial value] to [end value] [step]
next [variable]
(C22) ‘wend’ statement contains no ‘while’

“While” statement error : missing “while” before “Wend”
(C23) illegal expression without matching ‘wend’

The format of “While” statement is :
while [logic expression]
wend
(C24) syntax error : ‘break’

“break” statement can only be used in “for”, “while” statement.
(C25) syntax error : ‘continue’

“continue” statement can only be used in “for” statement, or “while” statement.
(C26) syntax error

Error in expression.
(C27) syntax error

The mismatch of an operation object in expression can cause a compile error.
For example :
macro_command main( )
int a, b
for a = 0 to 2
b = 4 + xyz // illegal : xyz is undefined
next a

end macro_command
(C28) must be ‘macro_command’

There must be ’macro_command’
(C29) must be key word ‘sub’

The format of function declaration is:
sub *data type+ function_name(…)

………..
end sub
For example::
sub int pow(int exp)
…….
end sub
format other than this format will cause a compile error.
(C30) number of parameters is incorrect

Mismatch of the number of parameters
(C31) parameter type is incorrect

Mismatch of data type of parameter. When a function is called, the data type and the number
of parameters should match the declaration of function, otherwise it will cause a compile error.
(C32) variable is incorrect

The parameters of a function must be equivalent to the arguments passing to a function to
avoid compile error.
(C33) function name : undeclared function
(C34) expected constant expression

Illegal array index format.
(C35) invalid array declaration
(C36) array index error

(C37) undeclared identifier : i ‘identifier’

Any variable or function should be declared before use.
(C38) un-supported PLC data address

The parameter of GetData( … ) , SetData( … ) should be legal PLC address. If the address is
illegal, this error message will be shown.
(C39) ‘idenifier’ must be integer, char or constant

The format of array is:
Declaration: array_name[constant] (constant is the size of the array)
Usage: array_name[integer, character or constant]
(C40) execution syntax should not exist before variable declaration or constant definition
For example :
macro_command main( )
int a, b
for a = 0 To 2
b=4+a
int h , k // illegal – definitions must occur before any statements or expressions
// for example, b = 4 + a
next a
end macro_command
(C41) float variables cannot be contained in shift calculation
(C42) function must return a value
(C43) function should not return a value
(C44) float variables cannot be contained in calculation
(C45) PLC address error
(C46) array size overflow (max. 4k)

(C47) macro command entry function is not only one
(C48) macro command entry function must be only one

The only one main entrance of macro is :
macro_command function_name( )
end macro_command
(C49) an extended addressee’s station number must be between 0 and 255
For example :
SetData(bits[0] , "PLC 1", LB , 300#123, 100)
// illegal : 300#123 means the station number is 300, but the maximum is 255
(C50) an invalid PLC name

PLC name is not defined in the device list of system parameters.
(C51) macro command do not control a remote device

A macro can only control a local machine.
For example :
SetData(bits[0] , "PLC 1", LB , 300#123, 100)
"PLC 1" is connected with the remote HMI ,so it cannot work.
18.13. Sample Macro Code
 “for” statement and other expressions (arithmetic, bitwise shift, logic and comparison)
int a[10], b[10], i
b[0] = (400 + 400 << 2) / 401

b[1] = 22 *2 - 30 % 7
b[2] = 111 >> 2
b[3] = 403 > 9 + 3 >= 9 + 3 < 4 + 3 <= 8 + 8 == 8
b[4] = not 8 + 1 and 2 + 1 or 0 + 1 xor 2
b[5] = 405 and 3 and not 0
b[6] = 8 & 4 + 4 & 4 + 8 | 4 + 8 ^ 4
b[7] = 6 – (~4)
b[8] = 0x11

b[9] = 409
for i = 0 to 4 step 1
if (a[0] == 400) then
GetData(a[0], "Device 1", 4x, 0,9)
GetData(b[0+,”Device 1", 4x, 11,10)
end If
next i
end macro_command
 “while”, “if” and “break” statements

int b[10], i
i=5
while i == 5 - 20 % 3
GetData(b[1], "Device 1", 4x, 11, 1)
if b[1] == 100 then

break
end if
wend
end macro_command
 Global variables and function call

char g
sub int fun(int j, int k)
int y
SetData(j, "Local HMI", LB, 14, 1)

GetData(y, "Local HMI", LB, 15, 1)
g=y
return y
end Sub
int a, b, i

a=2
b=3
i = fun(a, b)
SetData(i, "Local HMI", LB, 16, 1)
end macro_command
 “if” statement
int k[10], j
for j = 0 to 10
k[j] = j
next j
if k[0] == 0 then
SetData(k[1], "Device 1", 4x, 0, 1)
end if
if k[0] == 0 then
else
end if
if k[0] == 0 then
else if k[2] == 1 then
end If
if k[0] == 0 then
else if k[2] == 2 then
else
end If
end macro_command

 “while” and “wend” statements

char i = 0
int a[13], b[14], c = 4848
b[0] = 13
while b[0]
a[i] = 20 + i * 10
if a[i] == 120 then

c =200
break
end if
i=i+1
wend
SetData(c, "Device 1", 4x, 2, 1)

end macro_command
 “break” and “continue” statements

char i = 0
int a[13], b[14], c = 4848
b[0] = 13
while b[0]
a[i] = 20 + i * 10
if a[i] == 120 then

c =200
i=i+1
continue
end if

i=i+1
if c == 200 then
SetData(c, "Device 1", 4x, 2, 1)
break
end if
wend
end macro_command
 Array
int a[25], b[25], i
b[0] = 13
for i = 0 to b[0] step 1

a[i] = 20 + i * 10
next i
SetData(a[0], "Device 1", 4x, 0, 13)

end macro_command
 Syntax for placing quotation marks in a string applies to variable declaration and
function’s argument.
char data[40]= "\"Note\" "
StringCopy("This is a \"test\" for weintek", data[7])

//The string contains "Note" This is a "test" for weintek
end macro_command

18.14. Macro TRACE Function
TRACE function can be used with EasyDiagnoser to show the current content of the variables.
The following example illustrates how TRACE function could be used in macro.
1. First of all, add a new macro “macro_0” in the project, and in “macro_0” add TRACE (“LW
= %d”, a). “%d” indicates display current value of LW in decimal format. The content of
“macro_0” is as follows:
2. Secondly, add a Numeric Display object and a Function Key object in window no. 10 of the
project. The Function Key object is used to execute macro_0.
3. Lastly, compile the project and execute [Off-line simulation] or [On-line simulation].
4. When processing simulation on PC, right click and select “Run EasyDiagnoser” in the
pop-up menu.

5. Afterwards, EasyDiagnoser will be started. [Logger] window displays whether

EasyDiagnoser is able to connect with the HMI to be watched or not. [Output] window
displays the output of the TRACE function. The illustration below shows that
EasyDiagnoser succeeds in connecting with HMI.
When EasyDiagnoser is not able to connect with HMI, [Logger] window displays content
as shown in the following figure:
6. The possible reason of not being able to get connection with HMI can be failure in
executing simulation on PC. Another reason is that the Port No. used in project for
simulation on PC is incorrect (or occupied by system). Please change Port No. as shown,
compile project then do simulation again.
7. In EasyDiagnoser, the Port No. should be set the same as the Port No. in the project.

The three consecutive ports of the project port no. are preserved for HMI communication.
In the setting above as an example, Port No. is set as 8005. Port 8005, 8006 and 8007
should be reserved. In this case when executing simulation on PC, please make sure that
these ports are not occupied by other programs.
TRACE Syntax List
Name TRACE
Syntax TRACE(format, argument)
Description Use this function to send specified string to the EasyDiagnoser. Users can print
out the current value of variables during run-time of macro for debugging.
When TRACE encounters the first format specification (if any), it converts the
value of the first argument after format and outputs it accordingly.
format refers to the format control of output string. A format specification,
which consists of optional (in [ ]) and required fields (in bold), has the following
form:
%[flags] [width] [.precision] type
Each field of the format specification is described as below:
flags (optional):
-
+
width (optional):
A nonnegative decimal integer controlling the minimum
number of characters printed.
precision (optional):
A nonnegative decimal integer which specifies the precision and the
number of characters to be printed.
type:
C or c : specifies a single-byte character.
d : signed decimal integer.
i : signed decimal integer.
o : unsigned octal integer.
u : unsigned decimal integer.
X or x : unsigned hexadecimal integer.
E or e : Signed value having the form. [ – ]d.dddd e [sign]ddd where d
is a single decimal digit, dddd is one or more decimal digits, ddd i exactly
three decimal digits, and sign is + or –.
f : Signed value having the form [ – ]dddd.dddd, where dddd is
one or more decimal digits.
The length of output string is limited to 256 characters.

The argument part is optional.

char c1 = ’a’
short s1 = 32767
float f1 = 1.234567
TRACE("The results are") // output: The results are

TRACE("c1 = %c, s1 = %d, f1 = %f", c1, s1, f1)
// output: c1 = a, s1 = 32767, f1 = 1.234567
end macro_command
8. Use LB-9059 to disable MACRO TRACE function (when ON). When set ON, the output
message of TRACE won't be sent to EasyDiagnoser.
9. Users can directly execute EasyDiagnoser.exe from Utility Manager. In Utility Manager,
current HMI on line will be listed; users can simply select the HMI to be watched. Please
note that Project Port should be the same as Port No. used in project file.
10. Download the project to HMI and start the project. If EasyDiagnoser is unable to get
connection with the HMI to be watched, it is possible that HMI power is not ON, or Port
No. is incorrect. This may cause EasyDiagnoser to connect then disconnect with HMI
continuously. Please check the Port No. in EasyDiagnoser settings.
11. When EasyDiagnoser succeeds in connecting with HMI, simply execute macro_0, [Output]
window will then display the output of the TRACE function.

18.15. Example of String Operation Functions
String operation functions are added to macro to provide a convenient way to operate strings.
The term “string” means a sequence of ASCII characters, and each of them occupies 1 byte.
The sequence of characters can be stored into 16-bit registers with least significant byte first.
For example, create an ASCII Input object and setup as follows:
Run simulation and input “abcdef”:

The string “abcdef” is stored in LW-0~LW-2 as follows (LB represents low byte and HB
represents high byte):
The ASCII Input object reads 1 word (2 bytes) at a time as described in the previous chapter.
Suppose an ASCII Input object is set to read 3 words as shown in the above example, it can
actually read at most 6 ASCII characters since that one ASCII character occupies 1 byte.
The functionality of each string operation function is described in the following table:
Function name Description

StringGet Read string data from a device.
Read string data from a device and continue executing next
StringGetEx
command even if no response from that device.
StringSet Write string data to a device.
Write string data to a device and continue executing next
StringSetEx
command even if no response from that device.
StringCopy Copy one string to another.
StringMid Retrieve a substring.
StringDecAsc2Bin Convert a decimal string to an integer.
StringBin2DecAsc Convert an integer to a decimal string.
StringDecAsc2Float Convert a decimal string to floats.
StringFloat2DecAsc Convert a float to a decimal string.
StringHexAsc2Bin Convert a hexadecimal string to binary data.
StringBin2HexAsc Convert binary data into a hexadecimal string.
StringLength Obtain the length of a string.
StringCat Append source string to destination string.
StringCompare Do a case-sensitive comparison of two strings.
StringCompareNoCase Do a case-insensitive comparison of two strings.
StringFind Find a substring inside a larger string.
StringReverseFind Find a substring inside a larger string; starts from the end.
StringFindOneOf Find the first matching character from a set.
StringIncluding Extracts a substring that contains only the characters in a set.

Extracts a substring that contains only the characters not in a

StringExcluding
set.
StringToUpper Convert the characters of a string to uppercase.
StringToLower Convert the characters of a string to lowercase.
StringToReverse Reverse the characters of a string.
Trim the leading specified characters in a set from the source
StringTrimLeft
string.
Trim the trailing specified characters in a set from the source
StringTrimRight
string.
StringInsert Insert a string in a specific location within another string.
For more detailed information of the above string operation functions, please check out the
“Built-In Function Block” section. In order to demonstrate the powerful usage of string
operation functions, the following examples will show you step by step how to create
executable project files using the new functions; starts from creating a macro, ends in
executing simulation.
1. To read (or write) a string from a device:
Create a new macro:
Edit the content:
The first function “StringGet” is used to read a string from LW-0~LW-19, and store it into the str
array. The second function “StringSet” is used to output the content of str array.
Add one ASCII Input object and one Function Key object in window 10 of the project.
The settings of these objects are shown as below. Function Key object is used to execute
macro_0.

ASCII Input object:
Function Key object:
Lastly, use [Compile] to compile the project and execute [Off-line simulation] or
[On-line simulation]. Follow the steps below to operate the executing project:
Step 1. Input string.
Step 2. Press “GO” button.
Step 3. Output string.
2. Initialization of a string.
Create a new macro and edit the content:

The data enclosed in double quotation mark (" ") is viewed as a string. str1 is initialized as
a string while str2 is initialized as a char array. The following snapshot of simulation shows
the difference between str1 and str2 using two ASCII Input objects.
Macro compiler will add a terminating null character (‘\0’) at the end of a string. The
function “StringSet” will send each character of str1 to registers until a null character is
reached. The extra characters following the null character will be ignored even if the data
count is set to a larger value than the length of string.
On the contrary, macro compiler will not add a terminating null character (‘\0’) at the end
of a char array. The actual number of characters of str2 being sent to registers depends on
the value of data count that is passed to the “StringSet” function.
3. A simple login page.
Create a new macro and edit the content, for example, Macro [ID:001] macro_1.

The first two “StringGet” functions will read the strings input by users and store them into
arrays named name_input and password_input separately. Use the function
“StringCompare” to check if the input account name and password are matched. If the
account name is matched, name_match is set true; if the password is matched,
password_match is set true. If both name_match and password_match are true, output
the string “Success! Access Accepted.”. Otherwise, output the string “Fail! Access Denied.”.
Add ASCII Input and Function Key objects in window 10 of the project. The
settings of these objects are shown as below. Function Key object is used to execute
macro_1.
Object 2
Object 3
Object 1
Object 4
Object 1: Function Key

Select [Execute macro] and Macro: [ID:000] macro_1.

Object 2: ASCII Input
Object 3: ASCII Input
Object 4: ASCII Display
Lastly, use [Compile] to compile the project and execute [Off-line simulation] or
[On-line simulation]. Follow the steps below to operate the executing project:

Step 1. Enter account name.
Step 2. Enter password and press [Login] button.
Step 3. Login succeeded or failed.

18.16. Macro Password Protection
A password can be set to protect all the macros in the list, or an individual macro.
Protecting all macros:
In Macro Manager window there’s the *Password Protect…+ button, click it and then click
[Enable] to set a password less than or equals to 10 characters (support ASCII character only,
e.g. "a$#*hFds").
After setting the password, users will have to enter correct password when opening Macro
Manager.
EasyBuilder Pro should be rebooted for typing the password again after 3 incorrect attempts.
When macro is password protected, de-compilation of EXOB file will not be able to restore
macro contents. The macro content will be shown as below:
Protecting individual macro:

In the Work Space for editing an indivisual macro, click the [Password Protect…] button and
then click [Enable] to set a password less than or equals to 10 characters (support ASCII
character only, e.g. "a$#*hFds"). [Encrypted] and [Read only] modes work as follows.

[Encrypted]
Encrypt the macro content. Entering macro editing window will require password.
EasyBuilder Pro should be rebooted for typing the password again after 3 incorrect attempts
opening the same macro.
(The number of allowable incorrect attempts may vary between macros.)
[Read-only]
The user can only view the content of the macro and will not be able to edit it.
With this mode selected, macro editing window can be opened directly from Macro Manager;
however, a password is required after clicking [Password Protect…] button.
EasyBuilder Pro should be rebooted for typing the password again after 3 incorrect attempts.
In the macro list, the selected mode for each macro is shown.
18.17. Reading / Writing CANbus Address Using Variable
In “CAN Bus 2.0A/2.0B General and SAE J1939” driver, two device types can be found: DATA
and DATA_Bit, and the formats of these device types are shown in the following window.

Device Type & Address Format Description

H: ID
DATA B: Byte position(1~8)
HHHHHHHHBbNN b: Bit position (1~8)
NN: Bit number(1~64)
H: ID
DATA_Bit
B: Byte position(1~8)
HHHHHHHHBb
b: Bit position(1~8)
The ID is represented in hexadecimal while the position and number are represented in
decimal, please see the usage below.
Examples:
Variable is not used:

short f
GetData(f, “CAN Device”, DATA, 4e55108, 1)
GetData(f, “CAN Device”, DATA, 4e65108, 1

Variable is used:
short f
unsigned int address = 0x4e55108
GetData(f, “CAN Device”, DATA, address, 1)
address = address + 0x10000// == 0x4e65108
GetData(f, “CAN Device”, DATA, address, 1)
Please note that:

1. Declare variable as “Unsigned int” and use hexadecimal to represent address.
Since the size of Unsigned int is 4 bytes and Bb, NN take 1 byte respectively, when using a
variable for address parameter to read/write DATA_Bit device type, the format will change
to HHHHHHBb (Max. ID: 0xffffff), and when using a variable for address parameter to
read/write DATA device type, the format will change to HHHHBbNN (Max. ID: 0xffff).

Configure HMI as a MODBUS Server 19-1
19. Configure HMI as a

MODBUS Server
This chapter explains how to configure HMI as a MODBUS Server.
19.1. Overview ..................................................................................................................... 19-2

19.2. Steps to Create a MODBUS Server ............................................................................. 19-2
19.3. Steps to Access a MODBUS Server ............................................................................. 19-4
19.4. Changing MODBUS Server Station Number Online.................................................... 19-7
19.5. MODBUS Address Type............................................................................................... 19-7

19.1. Overview
Once the HMI is configured as a MODBUS device, the data of HMI can be read or written via
MODBUS protocol.
As shown in the following figure, the HMI is configured as a MODBUS device (also called
MODBUS Server). The HMI, PC or other devices can use MODBUS protocol to read or write
HMI data via Ethernet or RS-232 / RS-485 interface.
19.2. Steps to Create a MODBUS Server
1. To configure the HMI as a MODBUS device, add a new device to the device list in [System
Parameters] first. Click [PLC type] drop-down box and select “MODBUS Server” driver.
[PLC I/F] includes: RS-232 / RS-485 2W / RS-485 4W / Ethernet / USB / CAN BUS. Choose
the PLC interface appropriate for your PLC model.

2. If [PLC I/F] is set to [RS-232] or [RS-485], please select [COM] (COM 1 ~ COM 3) and set
correct communication parameters as shown in the following figure. MODBUS Server
[Station no.] is set to 1. Click [Settings], the maximum LW address range read / written by
Modbus Client can be set. When the object in the project uses a LW register, the Modbus
Client will not be able to read or write an address that is not within the specified range.
If [PLC I/F] is set to [Ethernet], please set [Port no.].
The [Port no.] of MODBUS Server and HMI must be the same. To change the port number,
please set in the [System Parameters] » [Model] tab.

3. When finished, MODBUS Server is listed in [Device] tab. The configuration of MODBUS
device is completed. Compile the .emtp file and download the compiled .exob file to the
HMI, then HMI data can be read or written by using MODBUS protocol.
Note
 For cMT Series models, if [Ethernet] PLC interface is chosen, port number can be specifed.
19.3. Steps to Access a MODBUS Server
Two HMIs can be configured as one MODBUS client and one MODBUS server to communicate
and exchange data.
1. Add a new device in client’s device list. If the client chooses [Ethernet] PLC interface, set
[PLC type] to “MODBUS TCP/IP” and fill in the correct *IP address] (the IP of MODBUS
Server), [Port no.], and [Station no.].

If the client chooses [RS-232] or [RS-485] PLC interface, the [PLC type] must be set to
“MODBUS RTU”, and its communication parameters also must be configured correctly.

2. When finished, click [OK], then a new device “MODBUS RTU” is listed in the [Device] tab.
3. In the setting page of each object, select “MODBUS RTU” in *PLC name+, and set the
address of MODBUS RTU.
Since the server is an HMI, the corresponding read and write addresses are listed below：
0x/1x (1 ~ 12800) LB (0 ~ 12799)

3x/4x/5x (1 ~ 9999) LW (0 ~ 9998)
3x/4x/5x (10000 ~ 65535) RW (0 ~ 55535)

19.4. Changing MODBUS Server Station Number Online
EasyBuilder Pro provides the following system registers to change MODBUS Server station
number online.
LW-9541 MODBUS/ASCII server station no. (COM 1)
LW-9544 MODBUS/ASCII server station no. (Ethernet)
19.5. MODBUS Address Type
In the EasyBuilder Pro, the address types of MODBUS protocol are 0x, 1x, 3x, 4x, 5x, 6x, 3x_bit
and 4x_bit. MODBUS RTU function codes are listed below:
0x: A read and write device type. When reading a bit
Coils with this device type, the function code is 01H.
When writing a bit, the function code is 05H. When
writing multiple bits, the function code is 0fH.
1x: A read only device type. When reading a bit the
Discrete Inputs function code is 02H.
3x: A read only device type. When reading data, the
Input Registers function code is 04H.
4x: A read and write device type. When reading data,
Holding Register the function code is 03H. When writing data, the
function code is 10H.
5x The function code is the same as 4x. The difference
is that 5x makes double word swap when the format
is 32-bit unsigned. If the data read by 4x is 0x1234,
the data read by 5x is 0x3412.
6x A read and write device type. When reading data,
the function code is 03H. The difference from 4x is
that when writing data, the function code is 06H,
meaning to write a single register.
3x_bit The function code is the same as 3x. The difference
is that 3x_bit reads a single bit in the data.
For more information, see “37 MODBUS TCP/IP Gateway”.

How to Connect a Barcode Reader 20-1
20. How to Connect a Barcode

Reader
This chapter explains how to connect a Barcode reader and the relevant settings.
20.1. Overview ..................................................................................................................... 20-2

20.2. Steps to Connect a Barcode Reader ........................................................................... 20-2

20.1. Overview
HMI can connect with barcode reader via the following interfaces:
 USB
 COM port
To connect a barcode reader, please add a new device by the following steps.
20.2. Steps to Connect a Barcode Reader
1. In EasyBuilder Pro click [System Parameters] » [Device list] and add a new device.
2. Click [Settings] and finish [Barcode Device / Keyboard Settings].

Setting Description
Timeout When select [Barcode device], if the device reads
slowly, a longer timeout is suggested to read data
completely.
When select [Keyboard], a time range can be set for
keyboard entries. The system starts counting time from
the first entry.
COM When using COM port, please set the communication
Baud rate
Data bits parameters correctly.
Parity When using USB, there is no need to set the
Stop bits
parameters.
Read byte limit If this check box is selected, the number of bytes a
barcode reader reads is restricted in order to prevent
overloading. The range is 10 to 512.
Please note that the data cannot be read if it exceeds
the limit.
Use a start code If this check box is selected, the data is only valid when
the first data is identical to the start code, otherwise
the data will be ignored. The start code will not be
stored in the address of barcode reader.
For example: if the start code is 255 (0xff), and the data
read is:
0xff 0x34 0x39 0x31 0x32 0x30 0x30 0x34 0x37
The data saved in the designated barcode reader
address will be:
0x34 0x39 0x31 0x32 0x30 0x30 0x34 0x37
Terminator Terminator means the end of data. When a terminator
is detected, it stands for the end of data stream.
CR/LF 0x0a or 0x0d stands for the end of data stream.
STX/ETX 0x02 or 0x03 stands for the end of data stream.
Other Users can set the terminator.
None If this check box is selected, HMI will save all the data to
the designated address of barcode reader.
When finish setting, a new device is added to the [Device list].

Now the barcode reader can be selected in [PLC type] when creating an object. The
address types are listed in the following table.

Address Type Address Name Description

Bit FLAG FLAG 0 indicates the status of data
reading. When reading data, the status of
FLAG 0 is set OFF and will return ON after
reading successfully.
RESET RESET 0 clears the data of BARCODE and
RESULT when set ON.
CONNECT_STAT CONNECT_STATUS 0 indicates whether
US the barcode reader (USB interface) is
connected. When the status is ON, the
barcode reader is connected.
Word BARCODE BARCODE 0: Number of bytes currently
read.
BARCODE 1 ~ n: Stores the data read.
RESULT RESULT 0 indicates the result of data
reading. The following codes indicate:
0x00 Waiting to read BARCODE.
0x01 BARCODE successfully read.
0x02 Invalid BARCODE format.
0x03 The number of bytes specified in
[Read byte limit] exceeded.
0x04 The Start Code of the data read
does not match the setting.
0x05 The Terminator of the data read
does not match the setting.
Example 1
The following is a setting example, the barcode is 9421007480830. BARCODE 0 is the address
of Numeric Object (BYTES) and BARCODE 1 ~ n is the address of ASCII object (BARCODE).
In the example the data stored in the barcode reader address is listed in the following table:

Barcode Reader Address Data

13 bytes (decimal)
However, the data saved is 14 bytes = 7 words.
BARCODE 0 It is because when the number of bytes is an
odd number, the system adds a byte (0x00) to
make it an even number.
BARCODE 1 3439 (HEX)
Note
 HMI can only connect with one USB barcode reader. When the device list in the project
includes this kind of device, the system register LB-9064: [enable USB barcode device
(disable keyboard) (when ON)] is set ON. To enable USB keyboard again and stop using
USB barcode reader, please set LB-9064 OFF.

Ethernet Communication and Multi-HMI Connection 21-1
21. Ethernet Communication

and Multi-HMI Connection
This chapter explains how to connect multiple devices via Ethernet.
21.1. Overview ..................................................................................................................... 21-2

21.2. HMI to HMI Communication ...................................................................................... 21-2
21.3. PC to HMI Communication ......................................................................................... 21-3
21.4. Operate the PLC Connected with Other HMI ............................................................. 21-4

21.1. Overview
There are two ways of Ethernet communication:

 Use RJ45 straight through cable and hub.
 Use RJ45 crossover cable and without hub, but this is limited to point-to-point connection
(HMI to HMI or PC to HMI).
Through Ethernet network, the system provides the following methods for data transmission:
 HMI to HMI communication.
 PC to HMI communication.
 Operating the PLC connected to another HMI.
21.2. HMI to HMI Communication
To exchange data between one HMI and another HMI, add a new remote HMI device in
[System Parameter Settings]. If there are 2 HMIs (HMI A and HMI B), in order to use a Set Bit
object on HMI A to control [LB-0] on HMI B, the setting of the project of HMI A is explained in
the following part.
1. Set the IP address of the two HMIs, for example, HMI A: 192.168.1.1, HMI B: 192.168.1.2.

2. In [System Parameters] » [Device list], add a remote HMI B (IP: 192.168.1.2).
3. Create a Set Bit Object, select “HMI B” in [PLC name] to control the address of the remote
HMI.
Note
 One HMI can handle requests from a maximum of 64 HMIs simultaneously.
 One cMT Series model can handle requests from a maximum of 32 HMIs simultaneously.
21.3. PC to HMI Communication
With On-line Simulation, PC can collect data from HMI through Ethernet network and save the
data files to PC. To connect PC with two HMIs (HMI A and HMI B), the setting of the project on
PC is explained in the following part.
1. Set the IP address of the two HMIs, for example, HMI A: 192.168.1.1, HMI B: 192.168.1.2.
2. In [System Parameter Settings] » [Device list], add a remote HMI A (IP: 192.168.1.1) & HMI
B (IP: 192.168.1.2).

3. Create a Set Bit Object, select “HMI A” in [PLC name] to control the address of the remote
HMI A. Same for the HMI B.
Note
 A PC can control at most 64 HMIs simultaneously.
 As shown above, HMI can also control PC. PC can be seen as another HMI, that is, adding
a remote HMI in the project of HMI A / HMI B, and the IP of the remote HMI is set to the
IP of PC.
21.4. Operating the PLC Connected with Other HMI
Through Ethernet network, PC or HMI can operate the PLC that is connected to another HMI. If
PLC is connected to COM 1of HMI B, when using PC or HMI A to read PLC data, the setting of
the project of PC or HMI A is explained in the following part.
21.4.1. Settings of eMT / iE / XE / mTV / iP Series
1. Set the IP address of HMI B, for example, 192.168.1.2.

2. In [System Parameter Settings] » [Device list], add a remote PLC, and set [Name] to “PLC
on HMI B”. Set correct parameters. Since this PLC is connected to remote HMI B, set the IP
address to HMI B (IP: 192.168.1.2).
3. Create a Set Bit Object, select “PLC on HMI B” in [PLC name] to control the PLC connected
with the remote HMI B.
21.4.2. Settings of cMT Series models
1. Set the IP address of HMI B, for example, 192.168.1.2.

2. In [System Parameters] » [Device list], click [New HMI]. Set the IP address to HMI B (IP:
192.168.1.2).

3. In the project of HMI B, go to [System Parameter Settings] » [Device list], click [New PLC],
set [Name] to “PLC on HMI B”. Set correct parameters.

4. When finished, a remote PLC can be found under Remote HMI 1. Local HMI 1 stands for
HMI A, Remote HMI 1 stands for HMI B, and Remote PLC 1 is connected with HMI B.
5. Create a Set Bit Object, select “PLC on HMI B” in [PLC name] to control the PLC connected
with the remote HMI B.
Note
 When the remote HMI in a cMT Series project is an eMT/iE/XE/mTV model, please select
[Support iE/XE/eMT/mTV HMI communication protocol and EasyWatch] check box in the
[Model] tab in [System Parameters]. Similarly, when the remote HMI in a non-cMT project
is a cMT Series model, please select [Support cMT communication protocol] to establish
communication between cMT and non-cMT models.

System Registers 22-1
22. System Registers

This chapter introduces different types of registers.
22.1. Overview ..................................................................................................................... 22-3

22.2. The Address Ranges of Local HMI .............................................................................. 22-4
22.2.1. Bits ...................................................................................................................... 22-4
22.2.2. Words.................................................................................................................. 22-4
22.3. System Registers ......................................................................................................... 22-5
22.3.1. HMI Time ............................................................................................................ 22-5
22.3.2. HMI Operation .................................................................................................... 22-7
22.3.3. Touch Position..................................................................................................... 22-8
22.3.4. Local HMI Network Information ......................................................................... 22-8
22.3.5. Project File Information .................................................................................... 22-10
22.3.6. Storage Space Management ............................................................................. 22-11
22.3.7. Recipe and Extended Memory ......................................................................... 22-11
22.3.8. Data Sampling ................................................................................................... 22-12
22.3.9. Event Log........................................................................................................... 22-13
22.3.10. Station Number Variables ................................................................................. 22-15
22.3.11. Index Registers .................................................................................................. 22-17
22.3.12. MODBUS Server Communication ..................................................................... 22-19
22.3.13. Communication Parameter Settings ................................................................. 22-20
22.3.14. Communication Status and Control with PLC (COM) ....................................... 22-23
22.3.15. Communication Status and Control with PLC (Ethernet) ................................. 22-24
22.3.16. Communication Status and Control with PLC (USB) ......................................... 22-29
22.3.17. Communication Status and Control with PLC (CAN Bus).................................. 22-30
22.3.18. Communication Status and Control with Remote HMI .................................... 22-30
22.3.19. Communication Status and Control with Remote PLC ..................................... 22-34
22.3.20. Local/Remote Operation Restrictions .............................................................. 22-36
22.3.21. Communication Error Codes............................................................................. 22-36
22.3.22. Driver ID ............................................................................................................ 22-38
22.3.23. DLT645 Controller ............................................................................................. 22-38
22.3.24. [PLC No Response] Window Control ................................................................ 22-38
22.3.25. [Fast Selection] Window Control ...................................................................... 22-39
22.3.26. EasyAccess ........................................................................................................ 22-39
22.3.27. EasyAccess 2.0 .................................................................................................. 22-39

22.3.28. Remote Print/Backup Server ............................................................................ 22-40

22.3.29. Pass-Through Settings....................................................................................... 22-40
22.3.30. VNC Control ...................................................................................................... 22-41
22.3.31. Project Key and HMI Key .................................................................................. 22-42
22.3.32. USB Security Key ............................................................................................... 22-42
22.3.33. User Name and Password ................................................................................. 22-43
22.3.34. Macro ................................................................................................................ 22-44
22.3.35. Input Object Function ....................................................................................... 22-45
22.3.36. Time Sync./Daylight Saving Time ...................................................................... 22-45
22.3.37. Cellular Data Network ...................................................................................... 22-47
22.3.38. Wi-Fi Setting ..................................................................................................... 22-47
22.3.39. OPC UA Server .................................................................................................. 22-49
22.3.40. e-Mail ................................................................................................................ 22-49
22.3.41. cMT Viewer and Diagnoser............................................................................... 22-51
22.3.42. Miscellaneous ................................................................................................... 22-52

22.1. Overview
Some Word and Bit addresses are reserved in EasyBuilder Pro. These registers are reserved for
different functions. This chapter introduces different types of registers.
The “C” letter in the register tables stands for “Control”, which means that this register not
only allows write operation, but also can be controlled by Macro or a remote HMI.
When using a cMT Series model, the PLW and PLB registers can be selected. LW/LB are local
registers whereas PLW/PLB are client registers. The client device can be: cMT-iV5, iPad,
Android device…etc. When connecting a cMT Series model with one or multiple client devices,
the PLW/PLB registers can be set on the client devices.
Please note that the supported system tags may vary between models. After launching
EasyBuilder Pro and selecting a model, the available system tags for the particular model can
be found in Address Tag Library.

22.2. The Address Ranges of Local HMI
22.2.1. Bits
Register Device Type Range Format

Local Bits LB 0 ~ 8999 DDDDD
(for users)
Local Bits LB 9000 ~ 12799 DDDDD
(for system
registers)
Client Bits PLB 0 ~ 12399 DDDDD
Local Word LW_Bit 0 ~ 1210015 DDDDDdd
Bits DDDDD: address
dd: bit no. (00 ~ 15)
Client Word PLW_Bit 0 ~ 1210015 DDDDDdd
Bits DDDDD: address
dd: bit no. (00 ~ 15)
Retentive Bit RBI 0 ~ 65535f DDDDDh
Index DDDDD: address
h: bit no. (0 ~ f)
Use LW-9000 as Index
Register, and
correspond to RW_Bit
Retentive RW_Bit 0 ~ 524287f DDDDDh
Word DDDDD: address
Bits h: bit no. (0 ~ f)
Retentive A RW_A_Bit 0 ~ 65535f DDDDDh
Word DDDDD: address
Bits h: bit no. (0 ~ f)
22.2.2. Words
Register Device Type Range Format

Local Words LW 0 ~ 8999 DDDDD
(for users)
Local Words LW 9000 ~ 12100 DDDDD
(for system
registers)
Client Words PLW 0 ~ 12100 DDDDD
Retentive RW 0 ~ 524287 DDDDDD
Words
Retentive A RW_A 0 ~ 65535 DDDDD
Words

Retentive RWI 0 ~ 65535 DDDDD

Word Use LW-9000 as Index
Index Register, and
correspond to RW
Extended EM0 ~ EM9 0~ DDDDDDDDDD
Memory 1073741823
Words
22.3. System Registers
22.3.1. HMI Time
Read(R)/Write(W)/Control(C)
Address Description Local Macro Remote
HMI HMI
LB-11958 time setting error (when ON) *Note 3 R R R
LW-9010 (16bit-BCD) : local second R/W R/C R/C
LW-9011 (16bit-BCD) : local minute R/W R/C R/C
LW-9012 (16bit-BCD) : local hour R/W R/C R/C
LW-9013 (16bit-BCD) : local day R/W R/C R/C
LW-9014 (16bit-BCD) : local month R/W R/C R/C
LW-9015 (16bit-BCD) : local year R/W R/C R/C
LW-9016 (16bit-BCD) : local week R R R
LW-9017 (16bit) : local second R/W R/C R/C
LW-9018 (16bit) : local minute R/W R/C R/C
LW-9019 (16bit) : local hour R/W R/C R/C
LW-9020 (16bit) : local day R/W R/C R/C
LW-9021 (16bit) : local month R/W R/C R/C
LW-9022 (16bit) : local year *Note 1 R/W R/C R/C
LW-9023 (16bit) : local week *Note 2 R R R
LW-9030 (32bit) : system time (unit : 0.1 second) R R R
LW-9048 (16bit) : time (0 : AM, 1 : PM) R/W R/C R/C
LW-9049 (16bit) : local hour (12-hour format) R/W R/C R/C
Note
1. Value range: 2000 ~ 2035.
2. Value range: 0 ~ 6, stand for Sunday ~ Saturday.
3. When use LW-9010 to LW-9023 to update RTC time, the system will check if RTC time is

successfully updated. If the system still fails to update RTC time, the system register
[LB-11958: time setting error] will be set ON, and restore to the time before update.
Updating time on PC during simulation by using LW-9010 to LW-9023 is ineffective.

22.3.2. HMI Operation
HMI HMI
LB-9018 disable(set ON)/enable (set OFF) mouse cursor R/W R/C R/C
LB-9019 disable(set ON)/enable (set OFF) buzzer R/W R/C R/C
LB-9020 show (set ON)/ hide (set OFF) system setting bar R/W R/C R/C
LB-9033 disable(when on)/enable (when off) HMI upload function
R/W R/C R
*Note 1
LB-9040 backlight up (set ON) *Note 2 W C C
LB-9041 backlight down (set ON) *Note 2 W C C
LB-9047 reboot HMI (set ON when LB-9048 is on) W C C
LB-9048 reboot-HMI protection R/W R/C R/C
LB-9062 open hardware setting dialog (set ON) W C C
LB-9063 disable(set ON)/enable(set OFF) popuping information
R/W R/C R/C
dialog while finding an USB disk
LB-9064 enable USB barcode device (disable keyboard) (when ON)
R/W R/C R
*Note 5
LB-11959 LED indicator control *Note 4 R/W R/C R/C
LB-12042 open/close [System information] dialog (set ON/set OFF) R/W R/C R/C
LB-12051 buzzer status (active when ON) R/W R/C R/C
LB-12360 CPU loading alarm (> 95%) *Note 6 R R R
LB-12364 show (set ON)/hide (set OFF) [Reset HMI to default] button
R/W R/C R/C
in calibration mode
LW-9007 (16bit) : hardware index R R R
LW-9008 (32bit-float) : battery voltage *Note 3 R R R
LW-9025 (16bit) : CPU loading (x 100%) R R R
LW-9026 (16bit) : OS version (year) R R R
LW-9027 (16bit) : OS version (month) R R R
LW-9028 (16bit) : OS version (day) R R R
LW-9040 (16bit) : backlight index *Note 2 R R R
LW-9051 (16bit) : audio volume (0 ~100) R/W R/C R/C
LW-9054 (32bit) : HMI model ID R R R
LW-9080 (16bit) : backlight saver time (unit : minute) R/W R/C R/C
LW-9081 (16bit) : screen saver time (unit : minute) R/W R/C R/C
LW-9141 (16bit) : HMI station no. R/W R/C R/C
LW-9199 (16bit) : external keyboard layout : 0 (QWERTY), 1 (AZERTY) R/W R/C R/C
LW-9350 (16bit) : pending command no. in local HMI R R R
LW-10884 (16 words) : HMI name R/W R/C R/C

LW-11155 (32bit) : the total size of HMI memory (K bytes) R R R

LW-11157 (32bit) : the free size of HMI memory (K bytes) R R R
LW-11159 (16bit) : memory loading (x 100%) R R R
LW-11382 (16bit) : DIP switch status (bit 0 : DIP 1, bit 1 : DIP 2, bit 2 :
R R R
DIP 3)
Note
1. After changing the settings, please reboot HMI for the updates to take effect.
2. Use LW-9040 together with LB-9040 ~ LB-9041 to adjust the backlight brightness, range: 0
~ 31.
3. Only supported by eMT Series. When the battery voltage level, indicated by LW-9008,
drops below 2.8V, battery replacement is recommended.
4. When multiple mTV or cMT-SVR/cMT-HDM/cMT-FHD devices are used, this register can
be triggered to make the LED indicator blink for identifying the device.
5. LB-9064: Enable USB barcode device (disable keyboard).
6. This register will be set to ON if CPU loading remains over 95% for 30 seconds.
22.3.3. Touch Position
HMI HMI
LW-9041 (16bit) : touch status word(bit 0 on = user is touching the
R R R
screen)
LW-9042 (16bit) : touch x position R R R
LW-9043 (16bit) : touch y position R R R
LW-9044 (16bit) : leave x position R R R
LW-9045 (16bit) : leave y position R R R
Click the icon to download the demo project that explains how to how to trigger relevant
registers to change page with finger slide. Please confirm your internet connection.
22.3.4. Local HMI Network Information
HMI HMI
LB-12041 refresh HMI ethernet information (DHCP, gateway,
R/W R/C R/C
netmask, IP) (set ON)
LB-12094 update ethernet 1 setting (IP, netmask, gateway) (set ON) R/W R/C R/C

LB-12095 update ethernet 2 setting (IP, netmask) (set ON) R/W R/C R/C
LW-9125 (16bit) : HMI ethernet 1 gateway 0 (machine used only) R/W R/C R/C
LW-9129 (16bit) : HMI ethernet 1 IP 0 (machine used only) R/W R/C R/C
LW-9133 (16bit) : ethernet port no. R R R
LW-9135 (16bit) : HMI media access control (MAC) address 0 R R R
LW-10750 (16bit) : HMI ethernet 1 Mask 0 (machine used only) R/W R/C R/C
LW-10790 (16bit) : HMI ethernet 2 netmask 0 (machine used only) R/W R/C R/C
LW-10798 (16bit) : ethernet 2 media access control (MAC) address 0 R R R


LW-10804 (16bit) : HMI ethernet 1 domain name system (DNS) server
R R R
IP0
LW-10805 (16bit) : HMI Ethernet 1 domain name system (DNS) server
R R R
IP1
R R R
IP2
R R R
IP3
R R R
IP0
R R R
IP1
R R R
IP2
R R R
IP3
LW-10812 (16bit) : obtain an IP address automatically (DHCP => 0 : off,
R/W R/C R/C
1 : on)
LW-10813 (16bit) : obtain an ethernet 2 IP address automatically
R/W R/C R/C
(DHCP => 0 : off, 1 : on)
LW-10815 (16bit) : link speed of ethernet 1 (0:failure, 10 (10M), 100
R R R
(100M), 1000 (1G))
LW-10816 (16bit) : link speed of ethernet 2 (0:failure, 10 (10M), 100
R R R
(100M), 1000 (1G))
22.3.5. Project File Information
HMI HMI
LW-9100 (16bit) : project name (16 words) R R R
LW-9116 (32bit) : project size in bytes R R R
LW-9118 (32bit) : project size in K bytes R R R
LW-9120 (32bit) : compiler version R R R
LW-9122 (16bit) : project compiled date [year] R R R
LW-9123 (16bit) : project compiled date [month] R R R
LW-9124 (16bit) : project compiled date [day] R R R

LW-11440 (16bit) : project compiled time [hour] (24-hour format) R R R

LW-11441 (16bit) : project compiled time [minute] R R R
LW-11442 (16bit) : project compiled time [second] R R R
22.3.6. Storage Space Management
HMI HMI
LB-9035 HMI free space insufficiency alarm (when ON) R R R
LB-9036 SD card free space insufficiency alarm (when ON) R R R
LB-9037 USB disk 1 free space insufficiency alarm (when ON) R R R
LB-9038 USB disk 2 free space insufficiency alarm (when ON) *Note
R R R
1
LB-12048 USB disk 1 status (exists when ON) R R R
LB-12049 USB disk 2 status (exists when ON) *Note 1 R R R
LB-12050 SD card status (exists when ON) R R R
LW-9070 (16bit) : free space insufficiency warning (Mega bytes) R R R
LW-9071 (16bit) : reserved free space size (Mega bytes) R R R
LW-9072 (32bit) : HMI current free space (K bytes) R R R
LW-9074 (32bit) : SD current free space (K bytes) R R R
LW-9076 (32bit) : USB disk 1 current free space (K bytes) R R R
LW-9078 (32bit) : USB disk 2 current free space (K bytes) *Note 1 R R R
LW-11458 (32bit) : HMI total space for history data (K bytes) R R R
LW-11460 (32bit) : HMI current free space for history data (K bytes) R R R
Note
1. The registers relating to USB disk 2 are only supported on iP / iE Series models.
Click the icon to download the demo project that explains how to use LW-9072 ~ LW-9076
with Backup Object. Please confirm your internet connection.
22.3.7. Recipe and Extended Memory
HMI HMI
LB-9028 reset all recipe data (set ON) W C C
LB-9029 save all recipe data to machine (set ON) W C C
LB-9460 EM0's storage device (SD card) does not exist (when ON) R R R

LB-9470 EM0's storage device (USB disk) does not exist (when ON) R R R
LB-12363 Prohibit recipe database update from remote HMI (set ON) R/W R/C R/C
22.3.8. Data Sampling
HMI HMI
LB-9025 delete the earliest data sampling file on HMI memory (set
W C C
ON)
LB-9026 delete all data sampling files on HMI memory (set ON) W C C
LB-9027 refresh data sampling information on HMI memory (set ON) W C C
LB-9034 save event/data sampling to HMI, USB disk, SD card (set
W C C
ON) *Note 1
LB-11949 delete the earliest data sampling file on SD card (set ON) W C C
LB-11950 delete all data sampling files on SD card (set ON) W C C
LB-11951 refresh data sampling information on SD card (set ON) W C C
LB-11952 delete the earliest data sampling file on USB disk 1 (set ON) W C C
LB-11953 delete all data sampling files on USB disk 1 (set ON) W C C
LB-11954 refresh data sampling information on USB disk 1 (set ON) W C C

LB-11955 delete the earliest data sampling file on USB disk 2 (set ON)
W C C
*Note 3
LB-11956 delete all data sampling files on USB disk 2 (set ON) *Note 3 W C C
LB-11957 refresh data sampling information on USB disk 2 (set ON)
W C C
*Note 3
LW-9063 (16bit) : no. of data sampling files on HMI memory R R R
LW-9064 (32bit) : size of data sampling files on HMI memory (bytes) R R R
LW-10489 (16bit) : no. of data sampling files on SD card R R R
LW-10490 (32bit) : size of data sampling files on SD card (bytes) R R R
LW-10492 (16bit) : no. of data sampling files on USB disk 1 R R R
LW-10493 (32bit) : size of data sampling files on USB disk 1 (bytes) R R R
LW-10495 (16bit) : no. of data sampling files on USB disk 2 *Note 3 R R R
LW-10496 (32bit) : size of data sampling files on USB disk 2 (bytes)
R R R
*Note 3
Note
1. The shortest interval between two successful executions is 2 seconds.
2. The registers for deleting or updating data samplings do not work during simulation on
PC.
22.3.9. Event Log
HMI HMI
LB-9021 reset current event log (OFF->ON) W C C
LB-9022 delete the earliest event log file on HMI memory (set ON) W C C
LB-9023 delete all event log files on HMI memory (set ON) W C C
LB-9024 refresh event log information on HMI memory (set ON) W C C
LB-9034 save event/data sampling to HMI, USB disk, SD card (set
W C C
ON) *Note 2
LB-9042 acknowledge all alarm events (set ON) W C C
LB-9043 unacknowledged events exist (when ON) R R R
LB-11940 delete the earliest event log file on SD card (set ON) W C C
LB-11941 delete all event log files on SD card (set ON) W C C
LB-11942 refresh event log information on SD card (set ON) W C C
LB-11943 delete the earliest event log file on USB disk 1 (set ON) W C C
LB-11944 delete all event log files on USB disk 1 (set ON) W C C

LB-11945 refresh event log information on USB disk 1 (set ON) W C C

LB-11946 delete the earliest event log file on USB disk 2 (set ON)
W C C
*Note 4
LB-11947 delete all event log files on USB disk 2 (set ON) *Note 4 W C C
LB-11948 refresh event log information on USB disk 2 (set ON) *Note
W C C
4
LB-12024 disable alarm buzzer (set ON) W C C
LB-12399 status is on when alarm exists in any category R R R
LB-12400 status is on when alarm exists in category 0 R R R
LW-9060 (16bit) : no. of event log files on HMI memory R R R
LW-9061 (32bit) : size of event log files on HMI memory (bytes) R R R
LW-9450 (16bit) : time tag of event log – second *Note 1 R/W R/C R/C
LW-9451 (16bit) : time tag of event log – minute *Note 1 R/W R/C R/C
LW-9452 (16bit) : time tag of event log – hour *Note 1 R/W R/C R/C
LW-9453 (16bit) : time tag of event log – day *Note 1 R/W R/C R/C
LW-9454 (16bit) : time tag of event log – month *Note 1 R/W R/C R/C
LW-9455 (16bit) : time tag of event log – year *Note 1 R/W R/C R/C
LW-10480 (16bit) : no. of event log files on SD card R R R
LW-10481 (32bit) : size of event log files on SD card (bytes) R R R
LW-10483 (16bit) : no. of event log files on USB disk 1 R R R
LW-10484 (32bit) : size of event log files on USB disk 1 (bytes) R R R
LW-10486 (16bit) : no. of event log files on USB disk 2 *Note 4 R R R
LW-10487 (32bit) : size of event log files on USB disk 2 (bytes) *Note 4 R R R
LW-11443 (16bit) : push notification alarm status (0 : none; 1 : green;
R R R
2 : yellow; 3 : red)
LW-11499 total no. of alarms R R R
LW-11500 no. of alarms in category 0 R R R


Note
1. If LW-9450 ~ LW-9455 are used to get Event Log time, please enable in [system
parameters] » [General].
Click the icon to download the demo project that explains how to use the system
registers LW-9450 to LW-9455 to be the time tag of event log. Please confirm your
internet connection.
2. The shortest interval between two successful executions is 2 seconds.
3. The registers for deleting or updating event logs do not work during simulation on PC.
22.3.10. Station Number Variables
HMI HMI
LW-10000 (16bit) : var0 - station no variable (usage : var0#address) R/W R/C R/C
LW-10010 (16bit) : var10 - station no variable (usage :
R/W R/C R/C
var10#address)
R/W R/C R/C
var11#address)
R/W R/C R/C
var12#address)


R/W R/C R/C
var13#address)
R/W R/C R/C
var14#address)
R/W R/C R/C
var15#address)

22.3.11. Index Registers
HMI HMI
LW-9200 (16bit) : address index 0 R/W R/C R/C
PLW-9200 (16bit) : private address index 0 R/W R/C R/C



22.3.12. MODBUS Server Communication
HMI HMI
LB-9055 MODBUS server (COM 1) receives a request (when ON) R R R
LB-9058 MODBUS server (ethernet) receives a request (when ON) R R R
LB-12052 MODBUS server status (disabled when ON) R/W R/C R/C
LW-9270 (16bit) : request's function code - MODBUS server (COM 1) R R R
LW-9271 (16bit) : request's starting address - MODBUS server (COM
R R R
1)
LW-9272 (16bit) : request's quantity of registers - MODBUS server
R R R
(COM 1)
R R R
2)
R R R
(COM 2)
R R R
3)
R R R
(COM 3)
LW-9285 (16bit) : request's function code - MODBUS server
R R R
(ethernet)
LW-9286 (16bit) : request's starting address - MODBUS server
R R R
(ethernet)
R R R
(ethernet)
LW-9288 (16bit) : last error code - MODBUS server (ethernet) R R R
LW-9541 (16bit) : MODBUS/ASCII server station no. (COM 1) R/W R/C R/C
LW-9544 (16bit) : MODBUS/ASCII server station no. (ethernet) R/W R/C R/C
LW-9570 (32bit) : received data count (bytes) (COM 1 MODBUS
R R R
server)


R R R
server)
R R R
server)
LW-9576 (32bit) : received data count (bytes) (Ethernet MODBUS
R R R
server)
22.3.13. Communication Parameter Settings
HMI HMI
LB-9030 activate COM 1 new communication settings
R/W R/C R/C
(LW-9550~9554) (set ON)
R/W R/C R/C
(LW-9555~9559) (set ON)
R/W R/C R/C
(LW-9560~9564) (set ON)
LB-9065 disable/enable COM 1 broadcast station no. R/W R/C R/C
LW-9550 (16bit) : COM 1 mode (0:RS232,1:RS485 2W,2:RS485 4W)
R/W R/C R/C
(use LB-9030 to activate all communication settings)
LW-9551 (16bit) : COM 1 baud rate
(7:1200,8:2400,0:4800,1:9600,10:14400, R/W R/C R/C
2:19200,11:28800,3:38400,4:57600,..) *Note 1
LW-9552 (16bit) : COM 1 databits (7 : 7 bits, 8 : 8 bits) R/W R/C R/C
LW-9553 (16bit) : COM 1 parity (0:none, 1:even, 2:odd, 3:mark,
R/W R/C R/C
4:space)
LW-9554 (16bit) : COM 1 stop bits (1 : 1 bit, 2 : 2 bits) R/W R/C R/C
LW-9555 (16bit) : COM 2 mode (0:RS232,1:RS485 2W,2:RS485 4W)
R/W R/C R/C
(use LB-9031 to activate all communication settings)
(7:1200,8:2400,0:4800,1:9600,10:14400, R/W R/C R/C
2:19200,11:28800,3:38400,4:57600,..) *Note 1
R/W R/C R/C
4:space)

LW-9560 (16bit) : COM 3 mode (0:RS232,1:RS485 2W) (use LB-9032
R/W R/C R/C
to activate all communication settings)
(7:1200,8:2400,0:4800,1:9600,10:14400, R/W R/C R/C
2:19200,11:28800,3:38400,4:57600,..) *Note 1
R/W R/C R/C
4:space)
LW-9565 (16bit) : COM 1 broadcast station no. R/W R/C R/C
LW-10500 (16bit) : PLC 1 timeout (unit : 100ms, 0 : 50ms) R/W R/C R/C
LW-10501 (16bit) : PLC 1 turn around delay (unit : ms) R/W R/C R/C
LW-10502 (16bit) : PLC 1 send ACK delay (unit : ms) R/W R/C R/C
LW-10503 (16bit) : PLC 1 parameter 1 R/W R/C R/C
LW-10515 (16bit) : PLC 4 timeout (unit : 100ms) R/W R/C R/C
LW-10517 (16bit) : PLC 4 send ACK delay (unit : ms) (SIEMENS S7/400
R/W R/C R/C
Link type)
LW-10518 (16bit) : PLC 4 parameter 1 (SIEMENS S7/400 rack) R/W R/C R/C
LW-10519 (16bit) : PLC 4 parameter 2 (SIEMENS S7/400 CPU slot) R/W R/C R/C
LW-10522 (16bit) : PLC 5 send ACK delay (unit : ms) (SIEMENS S7/400 R/W R/C R/C

Link type)
R/W R/C R/C
Link type)
R/W R/C R/C
Link type)
R/W R/C R/C
Link type)
Note
1. The Baud Rates are: 0:4800, 1:9600, 2:19200, 3:38400, 4:57600, 5:115200, 6:187.5K,
7:1200, 8:2400, 10:14400, 11:28800, 12:76800

22.3.14. Communication Status and Control with PLC (COM)
HMI HMI
LB-9150 auto. connection for PLC 1 (COM 1) (when ON) R/W R/C R/C
LB-9200 PLC 1 status (SN0, COM 1), set on to retry connection. R/W R/C R/C
LB-9201 PLC 1 status (SN1, COM 1), set on to retry connection R/W R/C R/C
LB-9500 PLC 2 status (SN0, COM 2), set on to retry connection. R/W R/C R/C
LB-12030 COM 1 status (OFF : normal, ON : open failed) *Note 1 R R R
LB-12031 COM 2 status (OFF : normal, ON : open failed) R R R


LW-9351 (16bit) : pending command no. in PLC 1 (COM 1) R R R
Note
1. The ON state of COM is for checking if COM is occupied by other program during
simulation on PC.
22.3.15. Communication Status and Control with PLC (Ethernet)
HMI HMI
LB-9153 auto. connection for PLC 4 (ethernet) (when ON) R/W R/C R/C
LB-10070 forced to reconnect PLC 4 (ethernet) when IP or system
R/W R/C R/C
parameters changed on-line (set ON)
R/W R/C R/C
R/W R/C R/C
R/W R/C R/C
R/W R/C R/C
R/W R/C R/C
LB-10099 forced to reconnect PLC 33 (ethernet) when IP or system R/W R/C R/C


LB-10100 PLC 4 status (ethernet), set on to retry connection R/W R/C R/C
LB-10101 PLC 4 status (SN0, ethernet), set on to retry connection R/W R/C R/C

LB-11906 PLC 16 status (ethernet), set on to retry connection
R/W R/C R/C
LB-11939 PLC 49 status (ethernet), set on to retry connection

R/W R/C R/C
LW-9354 (16bit) : pending command no. in PLC 4 (ethernet) R R R



LW-9600 (16bit) : PLC 4's IP0 (IP address = IP0:IP1:IP2:IP3) R/W R/C R/C
LW-9604 (16bit) : PLC 4's port no. R/W R/C R/C

LW-11472 (16bit) : PLC 4's ID0 (Beckhoff AMS NetId =

R/W R/C R/C
ID0:ID1:ID2:ID3:ID4:ID5)
R/W R/C R/C
R/W R/C R/C
R/W R/C R/C
R/W R/C R/C
R/W R/C R/C
R/W R/C R/C
R/W R/C R/C
R/W R/C R/C
R/W R/C R/C
R/W R/C R/C
R/W R/C R/C
R/W R/C R/C
R/W R/C R/C
R/W R/C R/C
R/W R/C R/C
R/W R/C R/C
R/W R/C R/C
LW-11490 (16bit) : PLC 7's ID0 (Beckhoff AMS NetId = R/W R/C R/C

R/W R/C R/C
R/W R/C R/C
R/W R/C R/C
R/W R/C R/C
R/W R/C R/C
22.3.16. Communication Status and Control with PLC (USB)
HMI HMI
LB-9190 auto. connection for PLC (USB) (when ON) R/W R/C R/C
LB-9191 PLC status (USB), set on to retry connection R/W R/C R/C
LW-9390 (16bit) : pending command no. in PLC (USB) R R R

22.3.17. Communication Status and Control with PLC (CAN Bus)
HMI HMI
LB-12080 auto. connection for PLC (CAN Bus) (when ON) R/W R/C R/C
LB-12081 PLC status (CAN Bus) set on to retry connection R/W R/C R/C
LB-12100 pause CAN Bus device 1 communication (when ON) R/W R/C R/C
LW-9392 (16bit) : pending command no. in PLC (CAN Bus) R R R
22.3.18. Communication Status and Control with Remote HMI
HMI HMI
LB-9068 auto. connection for remote HMI 1 (when ON) R/W R/C R/C
LB-9100 remote HMI 1 status (set on to retry connection) R/W R/C R/C

LB-9149 forced to reconnect remote HMI when IP changed on-line
R/W R/C R/C
(set ON)
LW-9800 (16bit) : remote HMI 1's IP0 (IP address = IP0:IP1:IP2:IP3) R/W R/C R/C
LW-9804 (16bit) : remote HMI 1's port no. R/W R/C R/C

LW-9905 (16bit) : remote HMI 21’s IP0 (IP address = IP0:IP1:IP2:IP3) R/W R/C R/C
LW-9909 (16bit) : remote HMI 21’s port no. R/W R/C R/C


22.3.19. Communication Status and Control with Remote PLC
HMI HMI
LW-10050 (16bit) : IP0 of the HMI connecting to remote PLC 1 (IP
R/W R/C R/C
address = IP0:IP1:IP2:IP3)
R/W R/C R/C
R/W R/C R/C
R/W R/C R/C
LW-10054 (16bit) : port no. of the HMI connecting to remote PLC 1 R/W R/C R/C
R/W R/C R/C
R/W R/C R/C
R/W R/C R/C
R/W R/C R/C
R/W R/C R/C
R/W R/C R/C
R/W R/C R/C
R/W R/C R/C


R/W R/C R/C
R/W R/C R/C
R/W R/C R/C
R/W R/C R/C
R/W R/C R/C
R/W R/C R/C
R/W R/C R/C
R/W R/C R/C
LW-10300 (16bit) : remote PLC 1's IP0 (IP address = IP0:IP1:IP2:IP3) R/W R/C R/C
LW-10304 (16bit) : remote PLC 1's port no. R/W R/C R/C

22.3.20. Local/Remote Operation Restrictions
HMI HMI
LB-9044 disable remote control (when ON) R/W R/C R/C
LB-9053 prohibit password remote-read operation (when ON) R/W R/C R/C
LB-9054 prohibit password remote-write operation (when ON) R/W R/C R/C
LB-9196 local HMI supports monitor function only (when ON) R/W R/C R/C
LB-9197 support monitor function only for remote HMIs (when ON) R/W R/C R/C
LB-9198 disable local HMI to trigger a MACRO (when ON) R/W R/C R/C
LB-9199 disable remote HMI to trigger a MACRO (when ON) R/W R/C R/C
22.3.21. Communication Error Codes
HMI HMI
LW-9400 (16bit) : error code for PLC 1 R R R
LW-9490 (16bit) : error code for USB PLC R R R
LW-9491 (16bit) : error code for CAN-Bus PLC R R R
Note
1. A list of the explaination of PLC communication error codes:

Error Code Cause of Communication Error

0 Normal
1 The device is busy and not yet ready to process a command.
2 Communication error due to unexpected reason.
3 The device does not exist.
4 The device using the specified station number does not exist.
5 Incorrect address format.
6 Read/Write unsupported address.
7 The driver of the device does not exist.
8 The COM port does not exist.
9 Incorrect IP address or unable to connect the device.
10 Checksum error.
11 Unidentified command.
12 Ignore
20 The USB device is improperly connected.
21 The CAN Bus device is improperly connected.
22 No reply from the device.
23 Insufficient data read from the device before timeout.
24 The Conversion Tag used by the object does not exist or the content is incorrect.
25 HMI is not accepting any commands from a remote HMI.
251 Read/Write exceeding number of words from/to the register of the MODBUS device.
252 MODBUS device replies incorrect data format.
253 MODBUS device checksum error.

22.3.22. Driver ID
HMI HMI
LW-9300 (16bit) : driver ID of local PLC 1 R R R
22.3.23. DLT645 Controller
HMI HMI
LW-10700 (4 words) : DLT_645 operator (COM 1) R/W R/C R/C
LW-10704 (4 words) : DLT_645 password (COM 1) R/W R/C R/C
LW-10708 (6 words) : DLT_645 address (COM 1) R/W R/C R/C
22.3.24. [PLC No Response] Window Control
HMI HMI
LB-9192 disable USB PLC's "PLC No Response" dialog (when ON) R/W R/C R/C
LB-11960 disable PLC 1's "PLC No Response" dialog (when ON) R/W R/C R/C
LB-12082 disable CAN Bus device’s “PLC No Response” dialog (when
R/W R/C R/C
ON)

22.3.25. [Fast Selection] Window Control
HMI HMI
LB-9013 hide (set ON)/show (set OFF) FS window R/W R/C R/C
LB-9014 hide (set ON)/show (set OFF) FS button R/W R/C R/C
LB-9015 hide (set ON)/show (set OFF) FS window/button R/W R/C R/C
22.3.26. EasyAccess
HMI HMI
LB-9051 disconnect (set OFF)/connect (set ON) EasyAccess server R/W R/C R/C
LB-9052 status of connecting to EasyAccess server R R R
For more information about EasyAccess, please visit http://www.ihmi.net/.

22.3.27. EasyAccess 2.0
HMI HMI
LW-10820 (16bit) : disable (set 0)/enable (set 1) (EasyAccess 2.0) R/W R/C R/C
LW-10821 (5 words) : session ID (EasyAccess 2.0) R/W R/C R/C
LW-10826 (2 words) : password (EasyAccess 2.0) R/W R/C R/C
LW-10828 (16bit) : execution status (EasyAccess 2.0) R R R
LW-10829 (16bit) : the last error code (EasyAccess 2.0) R R R
LW-11170 (16bit) : Proxy Disable/Enable (0:disable, 1:enable)
R/W R/C R/C
(EasyAccess 2.0)
LW-11171 (16bit) : Proxy Type (0:HTTP, 1:SOCKSv4, 2:SOCKSv5)
R/W R/C R/C
(EasyAccess 2.0)
LW-11172 (16bit) : Proxy Server IP0 (EasyAccess 2.0) R/W R/C R/C
LW-11176 (16bit) : Proxy Server Port (EasyAccess 2.0) R/W R/C R/C
LW-11177 (16bit) : Proxy authentication (0:disable, 1:enable)
R/W R/C R/C
(EasyAccess 2.0)
LW-11178 (16 words) : Proxy username (EasyAccess 2.0) R/W R/C R/C
LW-11194 (16 words) : Proxy password (EasyAccess 2.0) R/W R/C R/C

LW-11210 (20 words) : Hardware key (EasyAccess 2.0) R R R

LW-11296 (16bit) : Location of EasyAccess 2.0 server (0 : Global, 1 :
R R R
China)
LW-11982 (16 words) : HMI domain (EasyAccess 2.0) R R R
22.3.28. Remote Print/Backup Server
HMI HMI
LB-10069 forced to reconnect remote printer/backup server when IP
R/W R/C R/C
changed on-line (set ON)
LB-12040 remote printer/backup server disconnection alarm (when
R R R
ON)
LW-9770 (16bit) : remote printer/backup server IP0 (IP0:IP1:IP2:IP3) R/W R/C R/C
LW-9774 (6 words) : remote printer/backup server user name
R/W R/C R/C
*Note 1
LW-9780 (6 words) : remote printer/backup server password *Note 1 R/W R/C R/C
Note
1. When change settings using LW-9774 and LW-9780, please reboot HMI for the new
settings to take effect.
22.3.29. Pass-Through Settings
HMI HMI
LW-9901 (16bit) : pass-through source COM port (1~3 : COM 1~COM
R/W R/C R/C
3)
LW-9902 (16bit) : pass-through destination COM port (1~3 : COM
R/W R/C R/C
1~COM 3)
LW-9903 (16bit) : pass-through control (0 : normal, 1 : pause, 2 : stop
communications between HMI and PLC when executing R/W R/C R/C
pass-through)
LW-9904 (16bit) : pass-through server port no. (2000~2100) R/W R/C R/C

LW-10850 (16bit) : disable/enable (0 : disable, 1 : normal, 2 : IP

R/W R/C R/C
limited) (siemens pass-through)
LW-10851 (16bit) : destination COM port (siemens pass-through) R/W R/C R/C
LW-10852 (16bit) : destination PLC station no. (siemens pass-through) R/W R/C R/C
LW-10853 (16bit) : communication protocol (0 : invalid, 1 : PPI, 2 :
R/W R/C R/C
MPI) (siemens pass-through)
LW-10854 (16bit) : IP0 of connecting client (IP address =
R/W R/C R/C
IP0:IP1:IP2:IP3) (siemens pass-through)
R/W R/C R/C
R/W R/C R/C
R/W R/C R/C
LW-10858 (16bit) : IP0 of designated client (IP address =
R/W R/C R/C
R/W R/C R/C
R/W R/C R/C
R/W R/C R/C
LW-10862 (16bit) : connection status (0 : ready, 1 : client connecting)
R R R
(siemens pass-through)
LW-10863 (16bit) : execution status (0 : normal, 1 : error) (siemens
R R R
pass-through)
LW-10864 (16bit) : the last error (siemens pass-through) R R R
For more information about Siemens pass-through feature, see “29 Pass-through”.
22.3.30. VNC Control
HMI HMI
LB-12088 enable VNC monitor mode (when ON) *Note 1 R/W R/C R/C
LB-12089 VNC pass word free (when ON) *Note 1 R/W R/C R/C

LB-12090 a VNC client connecting to HMI (when ON)(OS version

R R R
20120621 or later supports only)
LB-12091 disable auto-logout function when a VNC client connecting
to HMI (when ON)(OS version 20120621 or later supports R/W R/C R/C
only)
LB-12092 enable VNC (set ON), disable VNC (set OFF) R/W R/C R/C
LB-12093 VNC connection mode (OFF: single connection, ON: multi
R/W R/C R/C
connection) (OS version 2013.05.09 or later support)*Note1
LW-9530 (4 words) : VNC server password R/W R/C R/C
Note
1. To change VNC mode, use LB-12092 to stop and then restart VNC to update the setting.
22.3.31. Project Key and HMI Key
HMI HMI
LB-9046 project key is different from HMI key (when ON) R R R
LW-9046 (32bit) : HMI key *Note 1 R/W R/C R
Note
1. When change HMI Key using LW-9046, please reboot HMI for the new settings to take
effect.
22.3.32. USB Security Key
HMI HMI
LW-11160 (16bit) : start time of USB security key - year R R R
LW-11161 (16bit) : start time of USB security key - month R R R
LW-11162 (16bit) : start time of USB security key - day R R R
LW-11163 (16bit) : start time of USB security key - hour R R R
LW-11164 (16bit) : start time of USB security key - minute R R R
LW-11165 (16bit) : expiration time of USB security key - year R R R
LW-11166 (16bit) : expiration time of USB security key - month R R R
LW-11167 (16bit) : expiration time of USB security key - day R R R
LW-11168 (16bit) : expiration time of USB security key - hour R R R
LW-11169 (16bit) : expiration time of USB security key - minute R R R

22.3.33. User Name and Password
HMI HMI
LB-9050 user logout W C C
LB-9060 password error R R R
LB-9061 update password (set ON) W C C
LB-12056 the user touches an unauthorized object (when ON) R R R
PLB-12056 the user touches an unauthorized object (when ON) (on
R N/A N/A
tablet)
LW-9082 (16bit) : auto logout time (unit : minute, 0 : disable the
R/W R/C R/C
function)
LW-9219 (16bit) : user no. (1~12) R/W R/C R/C
LW-9220 (32bit) : password R/W R/C R/C
LW-9222 (16bit) : object classes can be operated for current user
R R R
(bit 0:A, bit 1:B,bit 2:C, ...)
PLW-9222 (16bit) : object classes can be operated for current user
R N/A N/A
(bit 0:A, bit 1:B,bit 2:C, ...)
LW-9500 (32bit) : user 1's password R/W R/C R/C
PLW-10754 (8 words) : current user name *Note 1 R N/A N/A
Note
1. Only for [Security] » [Enhanced security mode].

22.3.34. Macro
HMI HMI
LB-9059 disable macro TRACE function (when ON) *Note1 R/W R/C R/C
LW-10900 (16bit) : macro 0 status (0:ready, 3:executing, 5:waiting
response, 9:waiting sync, 17:delay, 32:abnormal end R R R
(exceed array size))
Note
1. LB-9059: Disable macro trace function.

22.3.35. Input Object Function
HMI HMI
LW-9002 (32bit-float) : input high limit R R R
LW-9004 (32bit-float) : input low limit R R R
PLW-9052 (32bit-float) : the previous input value of the numeric
R N/A N/A
input object
LW-9150 (32 words) : keyboard's input data (ASCII) R R R
LW-9540 (16bit) : reserved for caps lock R/W R/C R/C
22.3.36. Time Sync./Daylight Saving Time
HMI HMI
LB-12055 failed to execute time synchronization (when ON) R R R
LB-12355 daylight saving time period (when ON) R R R
LW-11260 (16bit) : enable/disable the daylight saving time (DST)
R/W R/C R/C
(0:disable, 1:enable)
LW-11261 (16bit) : hour of the DST bias R/W R/C R/C
LW-11262 (16bit) : minute of the DST bias R/W R/C R/C
LW-11263 (16bit) : month of the year when DST starts R/W R/C R/C
LW-11264 (16bit) : week of the month when DST starts (1~5) R/W R/C R/C
LW-11265 (16bit) : day of the week when DST starts (0~ 6) R/W R/C R/C
LW-11266 (16bit) : hour of local time when DST starts R/W R/C R/C
LW-11267 (16bit) : minute of local time when DST starts R/W R/C R/C
LW-11268 (16bit) : month of the year when DST ends R/W R/C R/C
LW-11269 (16bit) : week of the month when DST ends (1~5) R/W R/C R/C
LW-11270 (16bit) : day of the week when DST ends (0~6) R/W R/C R/C
LW-11271 (16bit) : hour of local time when DST ends R/W R/C R/C
LW-11272 (16bit) : minute of local time when DST ends R/W R/C R/C
LW-11273 (16bit) : enable/disable time synchronization via NTP
R/W R/C R/C
(Network Time Protocol) server (0:disable, 1:enable)
LW-11274 (16bit) : execute time synchronization when HMI starts
R/W R/C R/C
(0:disable, 1:enable)
LW-11275 (16bit) : server response time has been adjusted in
R/W R/C R/C
accordance with DST (0:disable, 1:enable)

LW-11276 (16bit) : HMI time zone (unit : minute) R/W R/C R/C
LW-11277 (16bit) : server response time (server time zone) (unit :
R/W R/C R/C
minute)
LW-11278 (16bit) : IP 0 of network time server 1 (IP address =
R/W R/C R/C
IP0:IP1:IP2:IP3)
R/W R/C R/C
IP0:IP1:IP2:IP3)
R/W R/C R/C
IP0:IP1:IP2:IP3)
R/W R/C R/C
IP0:IP1:IP2:IP3)
R/W R/C R/C
IP0:IP1:IP2:IP3)
R/W R/C R/C
IP0:IP1:IP2:IP3)
R/W R/C R/C
IP0:IP1:IP2:IP3)
R/W R/C R/C
IP0:IP1:IP2:IP3)
R/W R/C R/C
IP0:IP1:IP2:IP3)
R/W R/C R/C
IP0:IP1:IP2:IP3)
R/W R/C R/C
IP0:IP1:IP2:IP3)
R/W R/C R/C
IP0:IP1:IP2:IP3)
R/W R/C R/C
IP0:IP1:IP2:IP3)
R/W R/C R/C
IP0:IP1:IP2:IP3)
R/W R/C R/C
IP0:IP1:IP2:IP3)
R/W R/C R/C
IP0:IP1:IP2:IP3)
LW-11294 (32bit) : update interval (time synchronization interval) (10
R/W R/C R/C
~ 86400, unit : second)

22.3.37. Cellular Data Network
HMI HMI
LW-11297 (16 words) : PIN code of SIM card (cellular network) R/W R/C R/C
LW-11313 (16 words) : Access Point Name (cellular network) R/W R/C R/C
LW-11329 (16 words) : username (cellular network) R/W R/C R/C
LW-11345 (16 words) : password (cellular network) R/W R/C R/C
LW-11361 (16 words) : dial number (cellular network) R/W R/C R/C
LW-11377 (16bit) : stop (set 0)/start (set 1) connection (cellular
R/W R/C R/C
network)
LW-11378 (16bit) : last error code (0:success, 1:incorrect PIN code,
2:no SIM, 3:no device, 4:puk locked, 5:other) (cellular R R R
network)
LW-11379 (16bit) : connection status (0:no device, 1:disconnect,
R R R
2:connecting, 3:connected) (cellular network)
LW-11380 (16bit) : stop (set 0)/start (set 1) connection (USB tethering) R/W R/C R/C
LW-11381 (16bit) : connection status (0:no device, 1:disconnect,
2:connected, 3:fail, 4:OS not support, 5:HMI not support) R R R
(USB tethering)
22.3.38. Wi-Fi Setting
HMI HMI
LB-12365 update wifi setting (IP, netmask, gateway, DNS) (set ON) R/W R/C R/C
LW-11383 (16bit) : Wi-Fi control (1: disconnect, 2: connect, 3: popup
R/W R/C R/C
setting dialog)
LW-11384 (16bit) : Wi-Fi error code (0: no error, 1: no such device, 2.
R R R
radio is off)
LW-11385 (16bit) : Wi-Fi status (0: stopped; 1: connecting; 2:
R R R
connected)
LW-11386 (16 words) : Wi-Fi connected SSID R R R
LW-11402 (16bit) : Wi-Fi signal level (0: none, 1: weak, 2: fair, 3: good,
R R R
4: excellent) (Wi-Fi) *Note2
LW-11403 (16bit) : Wi-Fi country code *Note1 R/W R/C R/C
LW-11404 (16bit) : Wi-Fi radio (0: Off, 1: On) R/W R/C R/C

LW-11405 (16bit) : Wi-Fi signal strength (dBm) (0, 1, 2: failed, others:

R R R
signal strength) (Wi-Fi)
LW-11410 (16bit) : HMI Wi-Fi IP 0 (machine used only) R/W R/C R/C
LW-11414 (16bit) : HMI Wi-Fi netmask 0 (machine used only) R/W R/C R/C
LW-11418 (16bit) : HMI Wi-Fi gateway 0 (machine used only) R/W R/C R/C
LW-11422 (16bit) : HMI Wi-Fi media access control (MAC) address 0 R R R
LW-11428 (16bit) : HMI Wi-Fi domain name system (DNS) server IP 0 R/W R/C R/C
LW-11432 (16bit) : obtain an Wi-Fi IP address automatically (DHCP =>
R/W R/C R/C
0 : off, 1 : on)
Note
1. Please enter Wi-Fi country code in ASCII for uppercase letters, the setting will take effect
after rebooting HMI. Wireless regulations vary from country to country. The country code
selection affects the list of channels of the wireless radio.
2. The signal strength is classified into four levels: 1. Weak (<-70 dBm), 2. Fair (-60 ~ -70
dBm), 3. Good (-50 ~ -60 dBm), 4. Excellent (>-50 dBm)

22.3.39. OPC UA Server
HMI HMI
LW-11435 (16bit) : OPC UA Server status (0: Stopped, 1: Started) R R R
LW-11436 (16bit) : OPC UA Server error code (0: Success, 1 or more:
R R R
Error)
LW-11437 (16bit) : OPC UA Server control command (0: None, 1: Start,
R/W R/C R/C
2: Stop)
22.3.40. e-Mail
HMI HMI
LB-12053 failed to send an [Event Log] e-Mail (when ON) R R R
LB-12054 failed to send an [Backup Object] e-Mail (when ON) R R R
LW-9216 (16bit) : the result of importing email data *Note 1 R R R
LW-11444 (16bit) : failed step (e-Mail) *Note 2 R R R
LW-11445 (16bit) : error code (e-Mail) *Note 3 R R R
Note
1. 1: import succeeded, 2: import failed (file doesn’t exist) , 4: incorrect file format or file
cannot be decrypted.
2. Error codes of failed steps include:
Code Cause of Error
0 CSMTP_NO_ERROR
100 WSA_STARTUP = Unable to initialise winsock2
101 WSA_VER = Wrong version of the winsock2
102 WSA_SEND = Function send() failed
103 WSA_RECV = Function recv() failed
104 WSA_CONNECT = Function connect failed
105 WSA_GETHOSTBY_NAME_ADDR = Unable to determine remote server
106 WSA_INVALID_SOCKET = Invalid winsock2 socket
107 WSA_HOSTNAME = Function hostname() failed
108 WSA_IOCTLSOCKET = Function ioctlsocket() failed
109 WSA_SELECT
110 BAD_IPV4_ADDR = Improper IPv4 address
200 UNDEF_MSG_HEADER = Undefined message header

201 UNDEF_MAIL_FROM = Undefined mail sender

202 UNDEF_SUBJECT = Undefined message subject
203 UNDEF_RECIPIENTS = Undefined at least one reciepent

204 UNDEF_RECIPIENT_MAIL = Undefined recipent mail
205 UNDEF_LOGIN = Undefined user login
206 UNDEF_PASSWORD = Undefined user password
207 BAD_LOGIN_PASSWORD = Invalid user login or password
208 BAD_DIGEST_RESPONSE = Server returned a bad digest MD5 response
209 BAD_SERVER_NAME = Unable to determine server name for digest MD5 response
300 COMMAND_MAIL_FROM = Server returned error after sending MAIL FROM
301 COMMAND_EHLO = Server returned error after sending EHLO
302 COMMAND_AUTH_PLAIN = Server returned error after sending AUTH PLAIN
303 COMMAND_AUTH_LOGIN = Server returned error after sending AUTH LOGIN
304 COMMAND_AUTH_CRAMMD5 = Server returned error after sending AUTH CRAM-MD5
305 COMMAND_AUTH_DIGESTMD5 = Server returned error after sending AUTH DIGEST-MD5

306 COMMAND_DIGESTMD5 = Server returned error after sending MD5 DIGEST
307 COMMAND_DATA = Server returned error after sending DATA
308 COMMAND_QUIT = Server returned error after sending QUIT
309 COMMAND_RCPT_TO = Server returned error after sending RCPT TO
310 MSG_BODY_ERROR = Error in message body
400 CONNECTION_CLOSED = Server has closed the connection

401 SERVER_NOT_READY = Server is not ready
402 SERVER_NOT_RESPONDING = Server not responding
403 SELECT_TIMEOUT =
404 FILE_NOT_EXIST = File not exist
405 MSG_TOO_BIG = Message is too big
406 BAD_LOGIN_PASS = Bad login or password
407 UNDEF_XYZ_RESPONSE = Undefined xyz SMTP response
408 LACK_OF_MEMORY = Lack of memory
409 TIME_ERROR = time() error
410 RECVBUF_IS_EMPTY = RecvBuf is empty
411 SENDBUF_IS_EMPTY = SendBuf is empty
412 OUT_OF_MSG_RANGE = Specified line number is out of message size

413 COMMAND_EHLO_STARTTLS = Server returned error after sending STARTTLS
414 SSL_PROBLEM = SSL problem
415 COMMAND_DATABLOCK = Failed to send data block
416 STARTTLS_NOT_SUPPORTED = The STARTTLS command is not supported by the server

417 LOGIN_NOT_SUPPORTED = AUTH LOGIN is not supported by the server
3. Error messages sent from mail server can be shown by designating a word address (length
adjustable) in System Parameter Settings » e-Mail tab » [Error message].
22.3.41. cMT Viewer and Diagnoser
HMI HMI
LB-12656 enable Diagnoser (set ON), disable (set OFF) R/W R/C R/C
LB-12657 Diagnoser password free (when ON) R/W R/C R/C
LW-11756 (4 words) : Diagnoser password R/W R/C R/C
LW-11839 (16bit) : number of connected clients (cMT Viewer) R R R
LW-11840 (8 words) : client 1 user name R R R
LW-11940 (16bit) : client 1 IP0 (IP address = IP0:IP1:IP2:IP3) R R R


22.3.42. Miscellaneous
HMI HMI
LB-9000~ initialized as ON R/W R/C R/C
LB-9009
LB-9010 data-transfer write indicator R R R
LB-9011 data-transfer read indicator R R R
LB-9012 data-transfer execution indicator R R R
LB-9016 status is on when a client connects to this HMI R R R
LB-9017 disable write-back in PLC control's [change
R/W R/C R/C
window]
LB-9039 status of file backup activity (backup in process R R R

if ON)
LB-9045 memory-map communication fails (when ON) R R R
LB-9049 disable/enable watch dog (use LW-11456 set
R/W R/C R/C
watch dog timeout) *Note 1
LB-12356 enable(set on)/disable(set off) web streaming R/W R/C R/C
LB-12357 web streaming status (on: enabled / off:
R R R
disabled)
LB-12358 enable (when ON) / disable (when OFF) off-line
R/W R/C R/C
simulation on HMI *Note 5
LB-12361 status of operation log function (OFF : disabled,
R R R
ON : enabled)
LB-12664 Cache Hit (cMT-G03) R R R
LW-9006 (16bit) : connected client no. R R R
LW-9024 (16bit) : memory link system register R/W R/C R/C
LW-9032 (8 words) : folder name of backup history files
R/W R/C R/C
to SD, USB memory *Note 3
LW-9050 (16bit) : current base window ID R R R
PLW-9050 (16bit) : current base window ID (on tablet) R N/A N/A
LW-9134 (16bit) : language mode *Note 2 R/W R/C R/C
PLW-9134 (16bit) : language mode (on tablet) *Note 2 R/W N/A N/A
LW-9900 (16bit) : HMI run mode (0 : normal mode, 1-3 :
R/W R/C R/C
test mode (COM 1-COM 3)
LW-10762 (8 words) : slot1 user name R/W R/C R/C
LW-10814 (16bit) : connecting to a Weintek HMI (0:none,
R R R
1:connecting) *Note 4
LW-11456 (16bit) : watch dog timeout (3 ~ 10), unit :
R/W R/C R/C
second *Note 1
LW-11760 (16bit) : CODESYS firmware status (0:error,
R R R
1:start, 2:stop)
LW-11761 (16bit) : CODESYS application status (0:error,
R R R
1:start, 2:stop)
LW-11762 (16bit) : CODESYS login status (0:error, 1:login,
R R R
2:logout)
LW-11770 (64 words) : QR code (URL) for WeChat push
R R R
notification (EasyAccess 2.0)
PLW-11998 (8 words) : Control Token release countdown R R R
Note
1. When LB-9049 watch dog function is enabled, watch dog automatically reboots the
system after the HMI stops functioning for a specified period of time.

2. To display texts on objects in multiple languages, except for using Label Library, the system
reserved register [LW-9134: language mode] is needed. The value range in LW-9134 is 0 ~
23. The values in LW-9134 relates to the languages downloaded to HMI. LW-9134 value
and language correspondence vary according to the languages selected during project
compilation and download.
For example: If 5 languages are defined by user in Label Library as Language 1 (Traditional
Chinese), Language 2 (Simplified Chinese), Language 3 (English), Language 4 (French), and
Language 5 (Japanese). If only Language 1, 3, 5 are downloaded, the corresponding
language of the value in LW-9134 will be 0 → Language 1 (Traditional Chinese), 1 →
Language 3 (English), 2 → Language 5 (Japanese). The following demo project explains
how to switch languages using Option List Object and LW-9134.
3. The default name of the backup data folder will be the HMI name.
4. When the USB Host is connected to a Weintek HMI, the address is set to 1, for testing if
the USB Client of another Weintek HMI works normally.
5. This register allows switching to off-line mode on HMI. In off-line mode, “Device No
Response” message will not show even when HMI is not properly connected. In this case,
device related objects can still operate, however, the values are not read by / written to
the device.

HMI Supported Printers 23-1
23. HMI Supported Printers

This chapter describes the printers supported by HMI and the setup steps.
23.1. The Supported Printer Types ...................................................................................... 23-2

23.2. Steps to Add a New Printer and Start Printing ........................................................... 23-5
23.3. Installing Network Printer on cMT HMI ...................................................................... 23-7
23.4. Installing PPD File on cMT HMI ................................................................................... 23-9

23.1. The Supported Printer Types
HMI supported printer drivers include the following types:
Printer type Description

 SP-M, D, E, F Serial printers, please configure communication
parameters to match the printer. [Pixels of width]
must be correctly set and can’t exceed printer
default setting:
100 pixels for 1610 series printers.
220 pixels for 2407, 4004 series printers.
The driver uses EPSON ESC Protocol for Serial
Micro Printer.
 EPSON ESC/P2 Series Serial printers, please configure communication
parameters to match the printer.
The ESPON ESC/P2 printer protocol is used.
Impact Printer: LQ-300, LQ-300+, LQ-300K+
(RS-232), LQ-300+II (RS-232)
Inkjet Printer: Stylus Photo 750
Laser Printer: EPL-5800
 HP PCL Series (USB) HP compatible USB printers that support HP PCL5

protocol or PostScript3 Printer Control Language.
The printers that support PCL5 or later versions will
support PCL5 protocol due to the downward
compatibility of PCL.

 Axiohm A630 Micro printer from France connects via serial port;
please configure communication parameters to
match the printer.
 SPRT Serial printers, please configure communication

default setting “100”.
 EPSON TM-L90 Serial printers, please configure communication

 EPSON TM-T70 Serial printers, please configure communication

The paper cutting mode can be selected: [No cut] /
[Partial cut].
 BRIGHTEK WH-A19 Supported models: A92R10-00E72A

72 in model number represents hexadecimal
printer, and A represents wide voltage 5~9V. This is
the same as the A6 16 impact printer.

 BRIGHTEK WH-E19 Serial printers, please configure the same

communication parameters as the printer.
 BRIGHTEK WH-E22 Supported models:

E22R10-00E725: Same as A7 16 impact printer.
A7 represents A72R90-31E72A.
E221R90-00E11740GA: Serial printer, connects
through RS-485 port, please use a RS232-to-RS485
converter.
 BRIGHTEK WH-C1/C2 Serial printers, please configure communication

parameters to match the printer. The paper cutting
mode can be selected: [No cut] / [Half cut] / Full
cut].
 Remote Printer Server Use EasyPrinter to start printing by the printers

connected with PC via Ethernet. This works under
MS Windows so most printers on the market are
supported.

23.2. Steps to Add a New Printer and Start Printing
1. Add printer type.

 In [System Parameter Settings] » [Model] select the printer type and set the relevant
parameters.
 To connect Remote Printer Server, set the parameters in [System Parameter Settings] »
[Printer/Backup Server].

2. Start printing.
 Start printing with Function Key.
 Or, use PLC Control [Screen hardcopy] to start printing with a designated bit address.

23.3. Installing Network Printer on cMT HMI
Opening system setting on a cMT Series model and select [Install network printer] can install
more printers apart from the ones listed in the preceding chapters.
1. Tap to open system setting and log in, find [Printer] » [Install network printer].
2. HMI needs a few seconds to search for the network printers on the same network.
3. Select a network printer and tap [Install] to install its driver. The new printer driver will
replace the former one since only one printer can be installed at a time.

4. The network printer is ready for use after installation is completed.

23.4. Installing PPD File on cMT HMI
Installing the PPD file from a printer driver on a cMT Series model is also possible.
1. Go to [System Parameter Settings] » [Model] tab.
2. Select a printer type. To add a new printer, place the printer’s PPD file in the ppd folder
under EasyBuilder Pro installation directory, and then click [Refresh].

3. Use Status Address to monitor printer status, and use Control Address to dynamically
update connection parameters.
Note
 Installing PPD file is not supported on cMT-SVR and cMT Gateway models.
 HP printers are recommended since they may have better compatibility with cMT models.
Printers from other brands should be tested beforehand.
 Please install a printer on cMT model by using [Install network printer] in the system
setting first; if this doesn’t work, installing PPD file is the second option.

Recipe Editor 24-1
24. Recipe Editor

This chapter explains how to use Recipe Editor.
24.1. Overview ..................................................................................................................... 24-2

24.2. Recipe / Extended Memory Editor Setting ................................................................. 24-2
24.3. Records of Recipe Database Setting ........................................................................... 24-4

Recipe Editor 24-2
24.1. Overview
Recipe Editor is used to create, view, and edit recipe data.

EasyBuilder Pro also provides another tool for editing recipe: Recipe Records. To use this tool,
first define a recipe in EasyBuilder Pro [System Parameter Settings] » [Recipe Database] tab,
and then use [Recipe View Object] to display the content. The following introduces the usage
of these two editing tools.
24.2. Recipe / Extended Memory Editor Setting
1. Open Utility Manager and click [Recipe/Extended Memory Editor].

2. To add new .rcp or .emi files, click [File] » [New].
3. Set address range and select data format.
Setting Description
Address range Fill in address range, the unit of which is word.
Select your data Save the specified data format for loading next time.
format The saved file name is “dataEX.fmt” under
EasyBuilder Pro’s installation directory.
Data format Edit new data format in this field.

Recipe Editor 24-3
4. Click [Add] to enter a description of the data type, and select data format. When selecting
[String], please enter the length (words) and select [ASCII] or [Unicode].
5. After setup, click [OK] to start editing recipe data.
In this example, the total length of data format is 13 words. Each 13 words will be one set
of recipe data.
The first set: “product no.” = address 0, “Name” = address 1 ~ 10, “Store No.”= address 11 ,
“Category” = address 12;
The second set: “product no.” = address 13, “Name” = address 14 ~ 23, “Store No.”=
address 24, “Category” = address 25;…and so on.

Recipe Editor 24-4
Note
 After editing recipe data, it can be saved as .rcp, .emi, or .csv files. The .rcp files can
be downloaded to HMI using Utility Manager or external devices (USB drive or SD
card). The .emi files can be saved directly to the external device which is inserted to
HMI as extended memory (EM).
24.3. Records of Recipe Database Setting
1. Before using Records of Recipe Database, first enable it in EasyBuilder Pro [System
Parameters] » [Recipe Database]. Please see “5 System Parameter Settings” for more
detail.
2. When finished, Recipe Records can be opened in main menu » [Project] » [Records of
Recipe Database]. In the example shown below, there are MyRecipe1 and MyRecipe2.
Three items are shown on the right hand side. The names of recipe come from System
Parameter Settings.

Recipe Editor 24-5
Setting Description
Recipes: The recipes created in System Parameter Settings.
The number enclosed in brackets shows the total
number of records in the corresponding recipe.
Add Inserts records into the recipe according to the item
format.
Delete Deletes the edited content.
Up / Down Arrows Moves the selected record upward / downward.
3. To define recipes according to the specified format, click [Add] button above the record
list to insert a new record and start editing each item. When click on the item, the item
format will be shown under the record list. This helps users to fill in each item with legal
value. Click [OK] to confirm and save the records.
Note
 Each recipe can hold a maximum of 10000 records.

Recipe Editor 24-6
 The recipe records will be stored in the .exob file after compilation and will be
downloaded to HMI. These recipes cannot be shared with other project files. If users
need to modify the recipe contents and download them to the HMI, make sure that
[Reset recipe database] check box is selected during download. If not, the recipe
database in the HMI will not be updated.

EasyConverter 25-1
25. EasyConverter
This Chapter explains how to use EasyConverter.
25.1. Overview ..................................................................................................................... 25-2

25.2. Converting Data Log File to Excel File ......................................................................... 25-2
25.3. Converting Event Log File to Excel File ....................................................................... 25-4
25.4. Converting Operation Log File to Excel File ................................................................ 25-5
25.5. Converting Multiple Files ............................................................................................ 25-6
25.6. Scaling Function .......................................................................................................... 25-8
25.7. Batch File .................................................................................................................... 25-9

EasyConverter 25-2
25.1. Overview
EasyConverter reads the Data Log file, Event Log file, and Operation Log file in HMI and convert
the files to Excel format.
 From Utility ManagerEX click [Data Conversion] » [EasyConverter].
 From EasyBuilder Pro menu select [Tool] » [Data/Event Log Converter].
25.2. Converting Data Log File to Excel File
1. If the Data Log file format is .db, and the file includes data of more than one day, the data
to be viewed can be specified by selecting a date range. (If the file format is .dtl, please
skip this step.)
2. The following is the setting dialog box, please set based on actual needs.

EasyConverter 25-3
3. Click [OK], the Data Log layout is shown in the following figure. Click [Export to Excel]. The
file will be converted to Excel format.
4. The Excel layout is shown in the following figure.

EasyConverter 25-4
Note
 If the file requires over six million cells in Excel format, only partial data will be shown in
EasyConverter. (The complete data will still be exported to xls / xlsx file.)
 The file will be automatically separated into different sheets in the xls / xlsx file under
these conditions:
1. Exceeds 60 thousand rows in a single sheet.
2. Exceeds 1.5 million cells in a single sheet.
25.3. Converting Event Log File to Excel File
1. If the Event Log file format is .db, and the file includes data of more than one day, the data
to be viewed can be specified by selecting a date range.
(If the file format is .evt, please skip this step.)
2. If the .db file of Event Log contains multiple languages, the language to be viewed can be
specified. (If the file format is .evt, please skip this step.)
3. Click [OK], the Event Log layout is shown in the following figure. Click [Export to Excel].
The file will be converted to Excel format.

EasyConverter 25-5
Note
 The "Event" column can be found. 0-> Event triggered; 1-> Event acknowledged; 2-> Event
returns to normal.
 If the file requires over six million cells in Excel format, opening the file in EasyCoverter
only partially shows the data. (The complete data will be exported to xls / xlsx file.)
these conditions:
25.4. Converting Operation Log File to Excel File
1. If the Operation Log file includes data of more than one day, the data to be viewed can be
specified by selecting a date range.

EasyConverter 25-6
2. Click [OK], the Operation Log layout is shown in the following figure. Click [Export to Excel].
The file will be converted to Excel format.
Note
 If the file requires over six million cells in Excel format, opening the file in EasyCoverter
only partially shows the data. (The complete data will be exported to xls / xlsx file.)
these conditions:
25.5. Converting Multiple Files
1. Click [Multi-File] to open the following dialog box.

EasyConverter 25-7
2. Click [Add File…] to add the files to be converted. If click [OK] without selecting [Combine
to a file], the files will be exported to separate Excel files.
3. If [Combine to a file] is selected, the files will be separated into different sheets of one
Excel file as shown in the following figure.

EasyConverter 25-8
Note
 The files cannot be combined when the total size of the files exceeds 32MB.
25.6. Scaling Function
When opening a Data Log file, the scaling function can be set.
The equation of scaling new value = [(value + A) x B] + C, and users can set the values of A, B,
and C.
A -> lower limit of the value ; B -> [(scaled max) - (scaled min) / (upper limit) - (lower limit)] ; C
-> scaled min.
For example, here is a voltage data with a format of 16-bit unsigned (range: 0 ~ 4096).
To convert the data to volt, range form -5V to +5V, the new value = [(value + 0) x 0.0024] + (-5).

EasyConverter 25-9
Before scaling: After scaling:
The settings described above can be saved as a settings file in *.lgs format, and then loaded
next time if needed.
25.7. Batch File
EasyConverter command line can execute batch file (.bat), and convert .dtl or .evt files into .xls
or .csv files for export. In the batch file, the user can define the format of the exported file (ex:
ASCII, Unicode, or UTF-8), and decide whether or not to include millisecond information or
load settings file.
The following explains how to create batch file (.bat) and provides some relevant notes.
Parameters:
[/c{a,8,u}] [/t{0,1}] [/s "Format file"] ["Src file"] ["Dest file"]
Example:
EasyConverter.exe /ca /t1 /s "C:\Format.lgs" "C:\Src.dtl" "C:\Dest.csv"
EasyConverter.exe /t1 /s "C:\Format.lgs" "C:\Src.dtl" "C:\Dest.xls"
Parameter Description
/c{a,8,u} Optional, specifies encoding method, only required when exporting
a .csv file.
/ca : ASCII (Default)
/c8 : UTF-8
/cu : Unicode
/t{0,1} Optional, specifies whether or not to include millisecond
information.

EasyConverter 25-10
/t0 : Excludes millisecond information.

/t1 : Includes millisecond information. (Default)
/s Optional, specifies whether or not to import settings file.
To import settings file, specify the path of .lgs file following /s.
For example: /s "C:\Format.lgs"
"Src file" Specifies the source file path, and the file format should
be: .dtl, .evt, or .db
"Dest file" Specifies the destination file path, and the file format can be: .xls
or .csv. See Note.
Note
 If the file name and path of "Dest file" is not specified in command line, the system will
export the file to the same path as "Src file".
You can also find the commands above by entering the file path of EasyConverter.exe in
Windows cmd.exe as shown in the following window.
Example: Enter “D:\EasyBuilder\EB Pro>EasyConverter.exe –h”

EasyConverter 25-11
Example
To convert the file 20150919 stored in “D:\EasyBuilder\EB Pro\HMI_memory” from .dtl to .xls,
and then save the file to the desktop, you can use the following command lines.
Scene 1: If the .bat file is placed in the same directory as EasyConverter, then the command line
is:
EasyConverter.exe "D:\EasyBuilder\EB Pro\HMI_memory\20150919.dtl"
"C:\Users\Desktop\20150919.xls"
Scene 2: If the .bat file is placed in a different directory from EasyConverter, the directory to
store EasyConverter.exe. must be specified, and the command line will be:
"D:\EasyBuilder\EB Pro\EasyConverter.exe" "D:\EasyBuilder\EB
Pro\HMI_memory\20150919.dtl" "C:\Users\Desktop\20150919.xls"

EasyPrinter 26-1
26. EasyPrinter
This chapter explains the setup steps of EasyPrinter.
26.1. Overview ..................................................................................................................... 26-2

26.2. Using EasyPrinter as a Printer Server ......................................................................... 26-3
26.3. Using EasyPrinter as a Backup Sever .......................................................................... 26-5
26.4. EasyPrinter Operation Guide .................................................................................... 26-10
26.5. Convert Batch File ..................................................................................................... 26-15

EasyPrinter 26-2
26.1. Overview
EasyPrinter is a Win32 application and can only run on MS Windows 7 / 8 / 10. It enables HMI
to output screen hardcopies to a remote PC via Ethernet. The following explains how to use
EasyPrinter.
Here are some advantages of using EasyPrinter:

 EasyPrinter provides two modes of hardcopy output: [Print Out] and [Save to File]. Users
can use either or both modes.
 Since EasyPrinter runs on MS Windows system, it supports most of the printers available
on the market.
 Multiple HMIs can share one printer so users don’t have to prepare printers for each HMI.
Additionally, EasyPrinter can also be a backup server. Users can use Backup objects on HMI to
copy history files such as Data Sampling records and Event Log to a remote PC via Ethernet.
Please see the following illustration:

EasyPrinter 26-3
26.2. Using EasyPrinter as a Printer Server
Users can make screen hardcopies with a Function Key object. The hardcopies will be
transferred to the Remote Printer Server via Ethernet and then printed out.
26.2.1. Setup Procedure in EasyPrinter
In EasyPrinter’s main menu, select [Options] » [Settings] and the following dialog box appears:
1. Select [General] on the left hand side.

2. In [Server], set [Port number of the server socket] to “8005”, *User name+ to “admin” and
*Password+ to “111111”. (These are default values.)
3. In [Naming Convention for HMI Folder], select [Use IP address] and enter “IP_” in the
[Prefix] field.
4. In [Properties], select [Minimize to system tray] check box. Select [Start EasyPrinter when I
start Windows] if necessary.
Set the print out location.

EasyPrinter 26-4
1. Select [Hardcopy] on the left hand side.

2. Under [Output] select [Print out to] and choose a printer as the output device for screen
hardcopies. (The printer shown in the image above is an example; please select an actual
printer located in your network environment.)
3. Select [Save to files in:] and browse for the directory to save the hardcopy file.
4. Click [OK] to confirm the settings.
5. In EasyPrinter main menu select [File] » [Enable Output] to output any incoming print
request.
26.2.2. Setup Procedure in EasyBuilder Pro
The setting procedure of EasyPrinter in EasyBuilder Pro:

1. Open a new project or an existing project in EasyBuilder Pro.
2. In EasyBuilder Pro main menu select [Home] » [System Parameters] » [Printer/Backup
Server] and select [Use Remote Printer/Backup Server] check box.

EasyPrinter 26-5
3. Under [Output settings] set appropriate values for left / top / right / bottom margins. (The
margins are all set to 15mm in the example.)
4. Under [Communication settings] fill in the [IP address] of the printer server according to
the settings in EasyPrinter. Set [Port] to “8005”, *User name+ to “admin” and *Password] to
“111111”.
5. Click [OK].
6. In EasyBuilder Pro main menu select [Objects] » [Button], select [Function Key], select
[Screen hardcopy] and set [Printer] to [MT Remote Printer/Backup Server].
7. Place the Function Key object in the common window (window no. 4) so that screen
hardcopies can be captured anytime when needed.
8. Compile and download the project to HMI. Press the Function Key object on the screen to
make a screen hardcopy.
Note
 A PLC Control object can also be used to make screen hardcopies.
 Alarm information cannot be printed via EasyPrinter.
 EasyPrinter can only communicate with HMI via Ethernet. Please check that the HMI has
appropriate network settings.

EasyPrinter 26-6
26.3. Using EasyPrinter as a Backup Sever
Backup objects can upload historical data and Operation Log to remote backup server.
26.3.1. Setup Procedure in EasyPrinter
In EasyPrinter’s main menu, select [Objects] » [Settings] and the following dialog box will
appear:
1. Select [General] on the left hand side.

2. Under [Server] set [Port number of the server socket] to “8005”, *User name+ to “admin”
and *Password+ to “111111”. (These are default values.)
3. Under [Naming Convention for HMI Folder] select [Use IP address] and enter “IP_” in the
[Prefix] field.
4. Under [Properties] select [Minimize to system tray]. Select [Start EasyPrinter when I start

EasyPrinter 26-7
Windows] if necessary.
Set the backup location.
1. Select [Backup] on the left.

2. Under [Output] click the button to browse and select a storage directory of the
incoming history files.
3. Click [OK] to confirm the settings.
4. In the main menu, select [File] » [Enable Output] to backup data in the selected directory.
26.3.2. Setup Procedure in EasyBuilder Pro
The setup procedure of EasyPrinter in EasyBuilder Pro:

1. Open a new project or an existing project in EasyBuilder Pro.
2. In EasyBuilder Pro’s main menu, select [Home] » [System Parameters] » [Printer/Backup
Server] and select the [Use Remote Printer/Backup Server] check box.

EasyPrinter 26-8
3. Under [Communication settings] fill in the [IP address] of the printer server according to
the settings in EasyPrinter. Set the [Port] to “8005”, *User name+ to “admin” and
*Password+ to “111111”. (Note: These are default values.)
4. Click [OK].
Create a Backup object.
1. In EasyBuilder Pro’s main menu, select [Data/History] » [Backup] and the following dialog
box appears:

EasyPrinter 26-9
2. Under [Source] select [Historical event log] (or [RW], [RW_A] if needed.)
3. Under [Backup position] select [Remote printer/backup server].
4. Under [Range] select [Today] and [All] (or other options if needed.)
5. Under [Trigger] select [Touch trigger].
6. Click [OK].
7. Place the [Backup] object in the common window (window no. 4), and users will be able
to make backups anytime when needed.
8. Compile and download the project to HMI. Press the Backup object on the screen to make
a backup of the history data.
Note
 The Backup object can also be triggered by a bit address.
 Users can arrange a Scheduler object, which turns a bit ON at the end of a week, to trigger
the Backup object to automatically back up all history data.

EasyPrinter 26-10
26.4. EasyPrinter Operation Guide
The following introduces the interface and operation of EasyPrinter.
26.4.1. EasyPrinter Managing Window
EasyPrinter main menu is divided into 5 parts as shown in the following figure:
Area Name Description

1 Job List Lists all incoming tasks, such as screen
hardcopy and backup requests.
2 Download Progress Shows the download progress of incoming
requests.
3 Preview Shows the preview image of the screen
hardcopy task selected from [Job List].
4 Properties Shows the information about the task
selected from [Job List].
5 Logger Shows the time and message information of
events such as incoming request, incorrect
password, etc.

EasyPrinter 26-11
26.4.2. Operation Guide
The following describes the function of EasyPrinter menu items.
Menu Description
File Enable Output
If selected, EasyPrinter processes the tasks one by one,
otherwise, EasyPrinter stores the tasks in memory.
Edit Edit
Edits screen hardcopy by setting [Orientation], [Scaling] and
[Margins].
Delete
Deletes the selected tasks permanently.
Select All
Selects all tasks from [Job List].
View Properties Bar
Shows or hide the Property Window.
Preview Bar
Shows or hide the Preview Window.
Download Bar
In [Download Progress] Window, the mode to display download
progress can be set by clicking the header of the [progress]
column as shown in the following figure:
Logger Bar
EasyPrinter can reserve up to 10,000 messages in Message
Window. If a new message comes in, the oldest message will be
deleted.
Options Please see the following page.
Note
 EasyPrinter can only reserve up to 128 MB of task data in memory. If the memory is full,
any request coming in afterwards will be rejected. Users must either operate [Enable
Output] or delete some tasks to make room for new tasks.

EasyPrinter 26-12
 The backup task is not editable.

 [Edit] is available only when a task is selected.
 [Delete] is available when at least one task is selected.
The following is the detail for [Options] » [Settings]

 In General Tab:
Setting Description
Server Port number of the server socket
Sets the Ethernet port number to connect the HMI. Range: 1 ~
65535. Default: 8005.
User name / Password
Sets the user name and password to let only authorized HMIs send
requests to EasyPrinter.
Naming EasyPrinter uses different folders to store files (e.g. hardcopy
Convention bitmap files, backup files) from different HMI. There are two ways
for HMI to name the folders:
Folder Use IP address
EasyPrinter names the folder as [Prefix] + [IP address] after the
HMI at this IP address sends request.

EasyPrinter 26-13
Use HMI name

EasyPrinter names the folder in [Prefix] + [HMI name] after the
HMI this name indicates sends request.
Properties Minimize to system tray
If this check box is selected, the EasyPrinter shortcut icon will be
placed in the system tray in PC. Double click the on icon in system
tray to open EasyPrinter.
Detailed message
Select this check box to display more detailed messages about
events in the message window.
Start EasyPrinter when I start Windows
Select this check box to automatically run EasyPrinter when
Windows starts.
 In Hardcopy Tab:

EasyPrinter 26-14
Setting Description
Output Print out to
EasyPrinter prints out the hardcopy result with the specified
printers.
Save to files in
EasyPrinter converts the hardcopy result into a bitmap file and
saves it in the specified directory. The bitmap files are found at:
[Specified Path] \ [HMI Folder] \ yymmdd_hhmm.bmp
For example, when a hardcopy request is given at 17:35:00,
12/Jan/2009, the bitmap file will be named “090112_1735.bmp”.
And if there is another bitmap file generated within the same
minute, it will be named “090112_1735_01.bmp” and so on.
 In Backup Tab:
Setting Description
Output Backup files in:
EasyPrinter stores the backup files to the specified
path.
The upper directory is the same:
[Specified Path] \ [HMI Name] or [IP address]
The lower directory:
 For Event Log files:
\ eventlog\ EL_yyyymmdd.evt
 For Data Sampling files:
\ datalog \ [File name of the Data Sampling] \
yyyymmdd.dtl

EasyPrinter 26-15
 For Recipe files:

\ recipe \ recipe.rcp or recipe_a.rcp
 For Recipe Database:
\ recipe \ recipe.db
 For Operation Log:
\ operationlog\ operationlog.db
Convert Batch File Select [Enable] to convert the selected history file
to .csv or .xls (Excel) format of Convert Batch Files.
Note
 System registers LW-9032 to LW-9039 can be used to specify HMI name.
 When closing EasyPrinter, the following dialog will appear.
26.5. Convert Batch File
EasyPrinter provides a conversion tool to convert the uploaded Data Sampling and Event Log
history files to .csv files automatically. To do so, please select [Enable] under [Convert Batch
File] to make EasyPrinter convert the history files.
In the following illustration, the conversion is actually executed by EasyConverter. EasyPrinter
simply follows the criteria in Convert Batch File and activates EasyConverter with proper
arguments to achieve the conversion.
Note
 EasyConverter is another Win32 application that converts history data into .csv or MS

EasyPrinter 26-16
Excel .xls files. Users can find it in the EasyBuilder Pro installation directory.
 Users requesting this function must ensure EasyPrinter and EasyConverter are placed in
the same directory.
26.5.1. The Default Value of Convert Batch File
The following is the default Convert Batch File: convert2csv.def

Listing 1. Default Convert Batch File
1: "dtl", "EasyConverter /c $( Pathname)"
2: "evt", "EasyConverter /c $( Pathname)"
There are two lines in the file. Each line has two arguments separated by a comma and forms a
criterion of how to process a specific type of files. The first argument stands for the extension
name of the file type to be processed. The second argument stands for the command to be
executed in console mode. Please note that “$(Pathname)” is a key word to inform EasyPrinter
to replace it with the real name of the converted backup file. For example, if a Data Sampling
history file named 20090112.dtl is uploaded and stored, EasyPrinter will send out the following
command to a console window:
1: EasyConverter /c 20090112.dtl
A file named 20090112.csv is created.

The criteria of the default Convert Batch File:
1. Convert all Data Sampling history files (.dtl) into .csv files.
2. Convert all Event Log history files (.evt) into .csv files.
Note
 “$(Pathname)” in the second argument stands for the full path name of the file. In the
previous case, EasyPrinter replaces it with:
[Specified Path] \ [HMI Folder] \ [datalog] \ [Folder name of the Data-Sampling object] \
20090112.dtl
 EasyPrinter interprets the Convert Batch File in line basis, that is, each line forms a
criterion.
 Any two arguments should be separated by a comma.
 Every argument should be put in double quotes.
 Do not put any comma inside an argument.
 Supported parameters for batch file: $(PathName), $(HmiName), and $(IP) which stand
for file path, HMI name, and HMI IP address.
 When [Start EasyPrinter when I start Windows] option is selected, please add in the file
path where EasyConverter is placed, which is usually the EBPro installation directory in

EasyPrinter 26-17
your PC, as shown below.

1: "dtl", "C:\EBPro\EasyConverter /c $(Pathname)"
2: "evt", "C:\EBPro\EasyConverter /c $(Pathname)"
For more information, see “25 Easy Converter”.
26.5.2. Specialized Criteria
The specialized criterion are needed when:

 Upload file to a specific HMI, see listing 2.
 Identify the HMI by HMI name, see listing 3.
 Process differently to different Data Sampling, see listing 4.
(This can only be used for Data Sampling file with the file name “voltage”.)
The 3rd argument (“*”) indicates this criterion accepts the Data Sampling files that meet the
criterion from any HMI. Users can also change the 3rd argument to “192.168.1.26”,
“192.168.1.*”, or HMI name, etc. for narrowing the range of the target HMI.
Listing 2. Specialized Criterion for the HMI IP: 192.168.1.26

1: "dtl", "EasyConverter /c $(Pathname)", "192.168.1.26"
Listing 3. Specialized Criterion for HMI name: Weintek_01

1: "dtl", "EasyConverter /c $(Pathname)", "Weintek_01"
Listing 4. Specialized Creterion for Data Sampling file name: Voltage

1: "dtl", "EasyConverter /s Voltage.lgs $(Pathname)", "*", "Voltage"
26.5.3. The Format of a Convert Batch File
The following explains the arguments in a criterion.

File Type Command (line) HMI IP / Name Condition 1 Condition 2
 File Type
This argument specifies the extension name of the uploaded file in this criterion.
(e.g. “.dtl” for Data Sampling history files, “.evt” for Event Log history files)
 Command (line)
The command EasyPrinter sends to a console window if the uploaded file meets the
criterion.
 HMI IP / Name
This argument specifies the HMI that meets the criterion.
 Condition 1
This argument specifies the folder name of the Data Sampling files that meet the criterion.

EasyPrinter 26-18
This is not effective to other format of files.

 Condition 2
Not used (Reserved for future use).
26.5.4. The Order of Examining Criterion
EasyPrinter examines criterion in descending order every time a file is uploaded. Once the file
meets a criterion, it stops the examination and starts over for the next file. Therefore, users
should place the criterion with a wider range downward in the Convert Batch File and place the
more specific criteria upward. For example:
"evt", "EasyConverter /c $(Pathname)"
"dtl", "EasyConverter /c $(Pathname)"
"dtl", "EasyConverter /c $(Pathname)", "192.168.1.26"
"dtl", "EasyConverter /c $(Pathname)", "my_HMI_01"
"dtl", "EasyConverter /s Voltage.lgs $(Pathname)", "*", “Voltage"
The correct order of examination would be: (from bottom to top)

"dtl", "EasyConverter /s Voltage.lgs $(Pathname)", "*", “Voltage"
"dtl", "EasyConverter /c $(Pathname)", "192.168.1.26"
"dtl", "EasyConverter /c $(Pathname)"
"evt", "EasyConverter /c $(Pathname)"

EasySimulator 27-1
27. EasySimulator
This chapter explains how to use EasySimulator.
27.1. Overview ..................................................................................................................... 27-2

27.2. Steps to setup EasySimulator ..................................................................................... 27-2

EasySimulator 27-2
27.1. Overview
EasySimulator allows a project to be run in the On- or Off-line simulator without having to start
the simulator from EasyBuilder Pro. To do this, please prepare the required files and follow the
steps to setup EasySimulator.
27.2. Steps to setup EasySimulator
1. Prepare the following required files.

 [driver]  [win32]
 com_e30.exe
 EasySimulator.exe
 gui_e30.exe
 sqlite3.dll
 xob_pos.def
 libcurl.dll
 libeay32.dll
 MFC71.dll
 mosquitto.dll
 mosquittopp.dll
 pthreadVC2.dll
 ssleay32.dll
2. Open xob_pos.def by using a text editing tool (e.g. Notepad) and edit the contents.
Line number Description

1 “2” run an Off-line Simulation; “3” run an On-line Simulation.
2 The directories of the relevant files.
(e.g. com_e30.exe, gui_e30.exe, EasySimulator.exe…etc.)
3 The full path of the .exob file.
3. Double click on EasySimulator.exe to start a simulation.
4. On-line / Off-line Simulation is displayed on the screen.
Note

EasySimulator 27-3
 The required files can be found in the EasyBuilder Pro installation directory. Please install
EasyBuilder Pro first then copy the required files to your PC.
 If EasySimulator.exe is not activated, please check if the installation directory is correct.
 If the “Failed to open project file: No such file or directory” dialog box appears, this
indicates that there is an error of the .exob file path, please check again.

Multi-HMI Communication 28-1
28. EasySystemSetting
This chapter explains how to use EasySystemSetting.
28.1. EasySystemSetting ...................................................................................................... 28-2

28.2. Configuring EasySystemSetting................................................................................... 28-5

28.1. EasySystemSetting
EasySystemSetting allows updating hardware system settings by using a SD card or USB drive.
EasySystemSetting can be opened by clicking EasySystemSetting.exe under EasyBuilder Pro
installation directory, or clicking [Tool] » [SystemSetting] Editor in EasyBuilder Pro. The feature
is available for HMI OS version 20131106 or later.
Setting Description
File [New] Restore default settings.
[Load] Import and edit an existing .conf file.
[Save] Export the configured data to a .conf file.
Language Change the language used in EasySystemSetting.
Help [About] Shows version information of
EasySystemSetting.

iP/iE/XE/mTV/eMT
Since the description of system settings can be found in Chapter 4, the following introduces
only the General tab.
Setting Description
Current Local Please enter the password used to log in System
Password
Parameter Settings.
General [HMI name] Enter HMI name.
[Back light] Adjust LCD backlight brightness.
[Time offset] Set the HMI RTC with offset.
For example, if the current RTC time is 15:00:00, and
the time offset is set to -3, the updated time will be
12:00:00.
[Portrait mode] Set the display mode.

cMT Series
Since the description of system settings can be found in Chapter 4, the following introduces
only the General tab.
Setting Description
Current Local Please enter the password used to log in System
Password
Parameter Settings.
General [HMI name] Enter HMI name.
[Back light] Adjust LCD backlight brightness.
[Time offset] Set the HMI RTC with offset.
For example, if the current RTC time is 15:00:00, and
the time offset is set to -3, the updated time will be
12:00:00.
[Portrait mode] Set the display mode.
[Volume] Adjust sound volume.

28.2. Configuring EasySystemSetting
The following explains how to update HMI IP address by using SD card or USB drive.
iP/iE/XE/mTV/eMT Series
1. Open EasySystemSetting and change the Network settings as shown below.
2. Click [File] » [Save] to generate a “systemsetting.conf” file.

3. Close EasySystemSetting.
4. In EasyBuilder Pro click [Build Download Files], select [Use system setting], and browse for
the systemsetting.conf file.

5. Click [Build] to generate the download file to be saved into the external device.
6. Insert the external device that stores the download file to HMI and the Download/Upload
dialog box appears.
7. Press [Load System setting] and then the [Download Config Settings] message appears.
The project file will be updated after finishing system settings.
cMT Series
1. Open EasySystemSetting and change the Network settings as shown below.

2. Click [File] » [Save] to generate a “systemsetting.conf” file.

3. Close EasySystemSetting.
4. In EasyBuilder Pro click [Build Download Files], select [Use system setting], and browse for
the systemsetting.conf file.
5. Click [Build] to generate a compiled file and a system setting file with the same filename
(EBProject1.cxob & EBProject1.conf). Save these files in the same directory in an external
device.
6. Insert the external device to HMI and the Download/Upload dialog box appears; click

Download. Browse for the project file, enter the password, and then click Download.
Note
 System setting file can be downloaded using Utility Manager or EasyBuilder Pro.

Pass-through 29-1
29. Pass-through
This chapter explains how to set up Pass-through mode.
29.1. Overview ..................................................................................................................... 29-2
29.2. Serial Pass Through Ethernet Mode ........................................................................... 29-2
29.3. Serial Pass-Through COM Port Mode ......................................................................... 29-7
29.4. Pass-through Control .................................................................................................. 29-9
29.5. SIEMENS S7-200 PPI and S7-300 MPI Pass-through Settings ................................... 29-10
29.6. Ethernet Pass-Through ............................................................................................. 29-15

Pass-through 29-2
29.1. Overview
The Pass-through feature allows PC applications to control PLC via HMI. In this case the HMI is
an adaptor.
The Serial Pass-Through feature provides two modes:
 Ethernet
 COM port
Click [Pass-through] in Utility Manager to open the setting dialog box.
29.2. Serial Pass Through Ethernet Mode
29.2.1. Steps to Install Virtual Serial Port Driver
Before using [Ethernet] mode, please check if Weintek virtual serial port driver has been
installed.
1. Open Utility Manager to check if the driver has been installed. If it shows [Please install
weintek virtual serial port driver], please click [Install].
2. If the dialog below pops up during installation asking for verification, please click

Pass-through 29-3
[Continue Anyway].
3. When finished, the [Virtual COM Port (PC <-> PLC)] field displays the virtual COM port
used.
29.2.2. Steps to Change the Virtual Serial Port Number
1. Open [Device Manager] and find Virtual Serial Port.
2. To change to another COM Port Number, double-click Virtual Serial Port and open [Port
Settings] » [Advanced].
29.2.3. Steps to Uninstall the Virtual Serial Port
2. To uninstall the Virtual Serial Port, select it and click the [Uninstall] button in the Device

Pass-through 29-4
Manager toolbar.
3. Click [OK] to uninstall this Virtual Serial Port.
29.2.4. Steps to Update Virtual Serial Port Driver
2. To update virtual serial port driver software, select Virtual Serial Port and click the
[Update Driver Software] button in the Device Manager toolbar.

Pass-through 29-5
3. Browser for the directory of the driver, and then click [Next] to update the driver.
29.2.5. Settings of Ethernet mode
After installing the virtual serial port driver, follow the steps to use Ethernet mode of
pass-through feature.
1. Set the IP address of the HMI connected with PLC.
2. Set the communication port and the serial port that connects HMI with PLC.
3. Click [Apply], to apply the settings.

Pass-through 29-6
4. When running PC application, set COM port to the used virtual serial port. For example, in
Mitsubishi application, if the virtual serial port is COM 3, set [PC side I/F Serial setting] »
[COM port] to COM 3.
5. With the correct configurations, upon execution of PLC application on PC, HMI will be

Pass-through 29-7
automatically switched to Pass-through mode. During Pass-through, the PLC is controlled

by PC via the virtual serial port. Pass-through mode will be turned off when the
application ends.
29.3. Serial Pass-Through COM Port Mode
[Source COM Port] The port connects HMI with PC.

[Destination COM Port] The port connects HMI with PLC.
To use [COM port] mode of Pass-through, please set the properties of Source COM Port and
Destination COM Port correctly.
29.3.1. Settings of COM Port Mode
There are two ways to enable [COM port] mode of Pass-through feature.
 Using Utility Manager.
 Using system registers.
LW-9901: pass-through source COM port (1 ~ 3: COM 1 ~ COM 3)
LW-9902: pass-through destination COM port (1 ~ 3: COM 1 ~ COM 3)
29.3.2. Using Utility Manager
1. Click [Serial Pass-Through] button in Utility Manager to set the communication

parameters as shown in the following figure.

Pass-through 29-8
Setting Description
HMI IP HMI IP address.
Get HMI Communication Reads the settings of Source and Destination COM
Parameters port. Click this button to update the communication
parameters.
Source COM Port (PC->HMI) / The communication parameters of Source and
Destination COM Port Destination COM Port are displayed.
(HMI->PLC) The settings will be applied when [Start
Pass-through] is clicked.
Baud rate / Source and Destination COM Port parameters should
Data bits / be set to be same. Since [Source COM Port]
Parity / connects PC, select RS-232 mode in most situations;
Stop bits [Destination COM Port] connects PLC, so the setting
depends on the PLC type, and can be one of RS-232,
RS-485 2W, or RS-485 4W.
Note
 When pass-through feature is no longer needed, click [Stop Pass-through] to stop it. HMI
will then resume communication with PLC.
There are three work modes of HMI.

Pass-through 29-9
Mode Description
Unknown The work mode before reading the settings of HMI.
Normal The work mode after reading the settings of HMI.
The HMI does not accept any data form the Source
COM Port.
Pass-through The work mode is “Pass-through.” the PC connected
via Source COM Port can control the PLC connected
via Destination COM Port.
29.3.3. Using System Registers
Another way of enabling pass-through is by writing to LW-9901(Source COM port) and

LW-9902 (Destination COM port).When the values of LW-9901 and LW-9902 match the
conditions below, HMI will start Pass-through automatically:
 The values of LW-9901 and LW-9902 are 1 to 3 (1 to 3: COM 1 to COM 3).
 The values of LW-9901 and LW-9902 are different.
To change the communication parameters, just change the value in the related registers and
set ON the appropriate registers: [LB-9030: update COM 1 communication parameters],
[LB-9031: update COM 2 communication parameters] and [LB-9032: update COM 3
communication parameters]. HMI will then update the settings.
Note
 To stop Pass-through, change the values of LW-9901 and LW-9902 to 0.
 For some models (eMT, cMT…etc), COM1 RS232 RTS/CTS share the same pins (Pin no. 7
and 8) with COM3 RS232 RX/TX. When COM3 is not used in the device list, Pin no. 7 and 8
is used for COM1 RS232. To activate Pin no. 7 and 8 for COM3 RS232 RX/TX, please add
COM3’s Master Slave driver or Free Protocol driver into the device list in System
Parameter Settings.
29.4. Pass-through Control
Generally speaking, during pass-through, HMI closes its connection with the PLC until the
pass-through mode ends. However, certain PLC drivers allow communications between HMI
and PLC in pass-through mode.
To see whether a driver supports concurrent communication, see “PLC Connection Guide”.
Pass-through control is controlled by LW-9903. The following table shows valid LW-9903 values
and their features.

Pass-through 29-10
LW-9903 Description
0 (Default) Normal Mode. Communications between HMI
and PLC in pass-through mode is allowed.
2 Stop Mode. No communications between HMI
and PLC in pass-through mode
Note
 Due to speed limitation, users may wish to set LW-9903 to 2 to enhance the speed of
program download/upload in pass-through mode.
29.5. SIEMENS S7-200 PPI and S7-300 MPI Pass-through Settings
EasyBuilder Pro supports SIEMENS S7-200 PPI and S7-300 MPI pass-through feature.
29.5.1. EasyBuilder Pro Settings
Launch EasyBuilder Pro, go to [System Parameter Settings] » [Device list], and then add
SIEMENS S7-200 PPI or S7-300 MPI device. Click [Pass-Through Settings] and the following
dialog box appears.
Setting Description
Disable pass-through Select this check box to disable pass-through
mode. By default this check box is not selected.
Designate client IP Designate client HMI IP address used in
pass-through mode.
29.5.2. S7-200 PPI Connection
Confirm that the HMI used in pass-through communication is started and connected to the

Pass-through 29-11
network. Launch STEP 7 Micro/Win, open [Communications] dialog box, and then search for
the HMI IP address. Connect the HMI to communicate.
29.5.3. S7-300 MPI Connection
Connect via virtual COM port or Ethernet.
29.5.3.1. Virtual COM Port
1. In Utility Manager run [Pass-Through], in [HMI Mode] select “MPI ISOTCP” to install virtual
serial port driver. Set the HMI IP address and the COM port that connects PLC, and then
start Pass-through.

Pass-through 29-12
2. In STEP 7, go to [Option] » [Set PG/PC Interface]. Confirm that the interface used is “PC
Adapter(MPI)”, and then click [Properties]. Select the same COM port as the virtual serial
port. In the example COM 4 is used.

Pass-through 29-13
3. When finished, STEP 7 can be used to Upload / Download PLC program via HMI.
29.5.3.2. Ethernet
1. In STEP 7 go to [Option] » [Set PG/PC Interface]. As shown in the following figure, select
“TCP/IP(Auto) -> the name of the network interface card”.
2. Go to [PLC] » [Update station to PG], in [Target Station] select [Can be reached by means
of gateway]. From left to right columns enter MPI, PLC station number, S7 Subnet ID, and
HMI IP address. When finished, S7 can upload PLC program to STEP 7 via HMI.

Pass-through 29-14
29.5.4. Registers of SIEMENS Pass-through
System registers from LW-10850 to LW-10864 are used to set or indicate pass-through status of
SIEMENS devices.
For more information see “22 System Registers”.
During pass-through mode, LW-10863 indicates errors and LW-10864 displays error code. The
following table lists the error codes, the description of each code, and the possible reason.
(The client usually refers to STEP 7 PLC program)
Error Code Description Possible Reason
0 Successfully executed
1 Prohibit client from connecting HMI is already running
HMI pass-through and won’t accept any
request from other client.
2 Prohibit client from connecting When LW-10850 is set to 1, the
HMI client IP for connecting HMI is
different from the IP specified in
LW-10858 ~ LW-10861.
3 Invalid communication Incorrect setting in LW-10853.
protocol
4 Invalid PLC station number The PLC station number specified in
LW-10852 does not exist.
5 Delayed communication PLC connection failure.
6 Busy communication PLC does not accept pass-through
request, please confirm PLC
settings.
7 Invalid pass-through request Environment setup failure.

Pass-through 29-15
29.6. Ethernet Pass-Through
Ethernet Pass-through feature is available when both PLC and PC connect to HMI via Ethernet.
Ethernet Pass-through allows running the application on PC to control PLC through HMI. This
feature is only supported on cMT Series models.
1. Launch Utility Manager, select cMT Series, and then open Analysis & Testing tab in which
Ethernet Pass-through can be found.
2. Click [Ethernet Pass-through] and then fill in the communication parameters.

Pass-through 29-16
Setting Description
HMI IP Enter HMI’s IP address.
HMI port no. Enter the port number used to connect to HMI.
By default the port number is 8000.
Passthrough IP Enter the IP address of the device to be
controlled under Ethernet Pass-through mode.
Status After filling in the communication parameters,
click [Connect] to see the connection status.
Note
 One HMI can only use one Ethernet Pass-through IP.
 Ethernet Pass-through feature is disabled when system register LB-9044 (disable remote
control) is ON.

Project Protection 30-1
30. Project Protection

This chapter explains the settings relevant to project protection.
30.1. Overview ..................................................................................................................... 30-2

30.2. EXOB Password ........................................................................................................... 30-2
30.3. Decompilation is Prohibited ....................................................................................... 30-3
30.4. Disable EXOB Upload Function ................................................................................... 30-3
30.5. Project Key .................................................................................................................. 30-3
30.6. EMTP Password .......................................................................................................... 30-4

30.1. Overview
The copyright of program design must be protected. This chapter discusses how to protect the
projects by settings in EasyBuilder Pro.
Note
 The protected projects cannot be decrypted by the factory since they are encrypted by
users, therefore, please remember your password.
30.2. EXOB Password
After editing a project (.emtp), users can compile the project to .exob format. The .exob file can
be downloaded to HMI. Password can be set to protect the .exob file in [EXOB password] when
compiling. (Password range: 0 ~ 4294967295)
A password will be required when attempting to decompile the .exob file back to .emtp file. If
the password is entered incorrectly for three times, please restart EasyBuilder Pro.

30.3. Decompilation is Prohibited
After a project (.emtp) is done editing, users can compile the project to .exob format. The .exob
file can be downloaded to HMI. If [Decompilation is prohibited] check box is selected when
compiling, the setting in [EXOB password] will be ignored. Furthermore, the .exob file cannot
be decompiled to .emtp file.
30.4. Disable EXOB Upload Function
EasyBuilder Pro provides a system reserved register [LB-9033]. When this register is set ON,
the .exob file cannot be uploaded. If attempting to upload an .exob file with this register set
ON, the file obtained after uploading is 0 byte, and cannot be decompiled. Please reboot HMI
for the changed setting to take effect.
30.5. Project Key
Projects can be restricted to run on a specific HMI.

The setting is in [System Parameters Settings] » [General] » [Project protection].

If the [Enable] check box is selected under [Project protection], please set the [Project key]
(password range: 0 ~ 4294901750). System registers LW-9046 ~ LW-9047 (32-bit) can be used
to set the [HMI key] for HMI. The values in LW-9046 and LW-9047 cannot be read or written by
a remote device. The .exob file obtained after compiling can only be executed on HMI when
[HMI key] and [Project key] match. If the keys don’t match, LB-9046 is set ON. To change [HMI
key], please reboot HMI.
Note
 When [HMI key] and [Project key] don’t match, HMI and PLC cannot communicate.
30.6. EMTP Password
After a project (.emtp) is done editing, a password can be set to protect the .emtp file. In
[System parameter] » [Security] tab, select [Enable] check box under [Project password] and
click [Settings] (password range: 1 ~ 4294967295).
The password will be required when attempting to open the .emtp file.
Note
 When using “Window Copy” function, if the source file is protected by EMTP password,
please enter the correct password for the system to execute window copy.

Memory Map 31-1
31. Memory Map

This chapter explains the settings relevant to Memory Map.
31.1. Overview ..................................................................................................................... 31-2

31.2. PIN Settings ................................................................................................................. 31-2
31.3. Communication Flowchart ......................................................................................... 31-3
31.4. Address Types ............................................................................................................. 31-4
31.5. Settings ....................................................................................................................... 31-7

Memory Map 31-2
31.1. Overview
Memory Map communication protocol is similar to IBM 3764R, and it is used when the
memory data transferred seldom between two devices. When setting the two devices, one is
set as Master, and another is Slave. Generally, Master and Slave do not communicate unless
the data in the assigned address has changed. Once the data is synchronized, the
communication will stop. The purpose of Memory Map is to keep the consistency of the
assigned part of data between two devices (Master and Slave).
The corresponding addresses of Master and Slave devices should have the same property as
MW (MB) address type. The size of MW (MB) in HMI is 10,000 words.
MB and MW indicate the same area of memory, for example, MB0~MBf correspond to the bits
of MW0, MB10~MB1f correspond to MW1, as shown in the following table:
Device Type Format Range
MB DDDDh DDDD:0~4095 h:0~f(hex)
MW DDDD DDDD:0~9999
31.2. PIN Settings
When using Memory Map communication protocol, the Master and Slave must have the same
communication parameters. The wiring is shown in the following table:
(the # will be distinct depends on the type of PLC or controller.)
COM Port RS-232
Device Master Slave
Pin Mapping TX(#) RX(#)
RX(#) TX(#)
GND(#) GND(#)
COM Port RS-485 (4W)

Device Master Slave
Pin Mapping TX+(#) RX+(#)
TX-(#) RX-(#)
RX+(#) TX+(#)
RX-(#) TX-(#)
GND(#) GND(#)

Memory Map 31-3
31.3. Communication Flowchart

Memory Map 31-4
Note
 Flowchart 2 works for Slave but not Master.
 STX: Start of Text, ACK: Acknowledge, NAK: Negative Acknowledge
31.4. Address Types
There are two address types, MB and MW.

The format of the commands that controls MB are listed in the following table:
MB Commands
Offset(byte) Format Description
0 0x02 The operating sign to MB
1 0x## Address (Low byte)
2 0x## Bit Address (High byte)
For example: MB-18 = 1*16 + 2 = 18 = 0x12 and 0x00
3 0x00 The data in MB address.
(or 0x01) (Bit type, must be 0 or 1)
4, 5 0x10, 0x03 Stop sign
6 0x## The checksum. Calculate XOR from offset 0 to 5.

Memory Map 31-5
The format of the commands that controls MW are listed in the following table:
MW Commands
0 0x01 The operating sign to MW
1 0x## Address (Low byte)
2 0x## Bit Address (High byte)
If the address includes 0x10, insert another 0x10
after it and all offsets after that are increased by 1.
For example: 0x10, 0x04 will become
0x10,0x10,0x04
3 0x## Number of sending bytes (To control a word, the
number of bytes must be even). If the number of
bytes is 0x10, insert another 0x10 after it and all
offsets after that are increased by 1.
4 to 4+n-1 0x##(L),0x##(H) The address that the first and second bytes
0x##(L),0x##(H) correspond to is the initial address. “n” is the
… number of bytes. If the data includes 0x10, insert
another 0x10 after it and the “Number of sending
bytes” (offset 3) remains the same, but n = n + 1.
Same thing applies to other 0x10 data.
4+n, 0x10 End sign
4+n+1 0x03
4+n+2 0x## The checksum. Calculate XOR from all above.
31.4.1. Communication Examples
Example 1
If Master sets the data of MW-3 to 0x0a, Master will build communication with Slave
immediately due to the data changed, so Slave will update its MW-3 to 0x0a, the procedure is:
1. Master sends STX(0x02h).
2. Slave receives STX(0x02h) from Master, and sends ACK(0x06h) to Master.
3. Master receives ACK(0x06h) from Slave.
4. Master sends 0x01,0x03,0x00,0x02,0x0a,0x00,0x10,0x03,0x19, as shown in the following
table:

Memory Map 31-6

0 0x01 The operating sign for MW
1 0x03 Address(Low byte)
2 0x00 Bit Address (High byte)
3 0x02 The number of bytes sent (MW-3= two bytes).
4, 5 0x0a, 0x00 Data in MW-3 is 0x0a and 0x00
6, 7 0x10, 0x03 End sign
8 0x19 The checksum
0x01^0x03^0x00^0x02^0x0a^0x00^0x10^0x03=0x19
5. Slave receives data from Master and then sends ACK(0x06h).
6. Master receives ACK(0x06h) from Slave.
When finish communicating, Master sends the updated data in MW to Slave, and Slave
synchronizes its MW data with Master.
Example 2
If the data includes 0x10; please notice the change in data format.
If MW-10 of Slave is set to 0x10, Slave will build communication with Master immediately, and
Master will update its MW-10 to 0x10, the procedure is:
1. Slave sends STX(0x02h)
2. Master receives STX(0x02h) from Slave, and sends ACK(0x06h) to Slave.
3. Slave receives ACK(0x06h) from Master
4. Slave sends 0x01,0x10,0x10,0x00,0x02,0x10,0x10,0x00,0x10,0x03,0x10 as shown in the
following table:
0 0x01 The operating sign to MW
1 0x10 Address(Low byte)
2 0x10 Insert 0x10
3 0x00 Bit Address (High byte)
4 0x02 The number of bytes sent (MW-10= two bytes).
5 0x10 0x10 is the low byte in MW-10
6 0x10 Insert 0x10
7 0x00 0x00 is the high byte
8 0x10 End sign
9 0x03
10 0x10 The checksum,
0x01^0x10^0x10^0x00^0x02^0x10^0x
10^0x00^0x10^0x03=0x10
5. Master receives data from Slave and sends ACK(0x06h) to Slave.
6. Slave receives ACK(0x06h) from Master.
Slave sends the updated data in MW to Master, and Master synchronizes its MW data with
Slave.

Memory Map 31-7
31.5. Settings
The following explains how to connect two HMIs using Memory Map protocol.
Note
 If the type of these two HMIs are different, please create different project files, or, after
setting the first HMI, directly change to the type of the second HMI in [Home] » [System
Parameters] » [Model], and then compile and download the project to the second HMI.
31.5.1. Steps to Add a Memory Map Device
1. Launch EasyBuilder Pro, select [New], and select an HMI model.

2. Click [Home] » [System Parameters] » [Device] tab, then click [New] to add a new device.
3. In the [Name] field enter “Memory Map”, and then select [PLC], set the [Location] to
[Local].
4. Set [PLC type] to [Memory Map], and set [PLC I/F] to [RS-232].
5. Click [Settings], and the setting is shown in the following figure.

Memory Map 31-8
6. After setting the COM port click [OK].

7. Click [OK] to finish setting.
Note
 Memory Map in MT500 is divided into [Memory Map_Master] and [MemoryMap_Slave];
please refer to the relevant manual.
 For eMT3000 and MT8000 Series, select [Memory Map] in the PLC type setting.
 [Data bit] must set to 8 bits.
 All the settings of the two HMIs must be the same.
31.5.2. Object Settings
Add two objects in window no. 10, a Toggle Switch and a Multi-state Switch:
Create a Toggle Switch Object as shown in the following steps.
1. Set the [PLC name] of read address and write address to [Memory Map].
2. Set [Address] to MB-0.
3. Set [Switch style] to [Toggle]. (The picture and label of the object can be selected).

Memory Map 31-9
Create a Multi-state Object as shown in the following steps.

1. Set the [PLC name] of read address and write address to [Memory Map].
2. Set [Address] to MW-1.
3. Set [Cyclical] to [Enable]. (The picture and label of the object can be selected).
31.5.3. Executing the Settings
Compile and download the same project to HMI 1 and HMI 2.
When pressing the button in one of the HMIs, the status of another one will also be changed.
The way to connect a HMI with a controller is similar to the example above. The data in the
same addresses of the two devices are kept identical.

FTP Server Application 32-1
32. FTP Server Application

This chapter explains how to use FTP Server.
32.1. Overview ..................................................................................................................... 32-2

32.2. Steps to Log in FTP Server .......................................................................................... 32-2
32.3. Backup History Data and Update Recipe Data ........................................................... 32-3

32.1. Overview
Apart from saving the history data from an HMI to your PC by using SD card, USB disk or
EasyPrinter, the FTP Server can also do the backup. After downloading a project to the HMI,
the FTP Server can be used to backup or update the history data and the recipe data, but not
able to delete those data. Please disconnect from FTP before removing an SD card or USB disk,
otherwise these external devices may not work when next time inserted.
32.2. Steps to Log in FTP Server
1. Before logging in FTP Server, please check the HMI IP address.
2. On PC, enter the HMI IP address: ftp://192.168.1.123/ (example), then log in by the user
name: uploadhis, and enter the HMI [history upload password] (if not changed, the
default password is 111111). Or, directly enter “ftp://uploadhis:111111@192.168.1.123/”
3. After entering the IP address,the ftp address: ftp://192.168.1.123 and its folders are
shown as below:

32.3. Backup History Data and Update Recipe Data
 Steps to backup Data Sampling records

1. Click “datalog” folder to view the files.
2. Click the file to check the records.
3. Copy and paste the needed files to your PC.
 Steps to backup Event (Alarm) Log records

1. Click “eventlog” folder to view the files.
 Steps to backup or update Recipe records

1. Click “recipe” folder to view the files.
Note
 Since the recipe data is automatically saved per minute, after updating “recipe.rcp” or

“recipe_a.rcp”, the HMI must be rebooted within one minute or the saving will be failed.
 The HMI can be rebooted by the system registers: [LB-9047] (reboot HMI) and [LB9048]
(reboot HMI protection). You can set [LB-9048] ON first, and then set [LB-9047] ON to
reboot the HMI.

EasyDiagnoser 33-1
33. EasyDiagnoser
This chapter explains how to use EasyDiagnoser.
33.1. Overview ..................................................................................................................... 33-2

33.2. Configuration .............................................................................................................. 33-2
33.3. EasyDiagnoser Settings ............................................................................................... 33-3
33.4. Error Code ................................................................................................................... 33-9
33.5. Window Adjustment ................................................................................................. 33-10

EasyDiagnoser 33-2
33.1. Overview
EasyDiagnoser is a tool for detecting the error in the communication of HMI with PLC.
33.2. Configuration
The following steps explain how to configure EasyDiagnoser.

1. Open Utility Manager and click EasyDiagnoser.
2. Set the HMI IP address. Enter IP address or click [Search All], and then enter [Project Port].
Or, during On-line simulation, right click and select [Run EasyDiagnoser] to open
EasyDiagnoser. EasyDiagnoser will monitor the communication between PC and PLC.

EasyDiagnoser 33-3
3. When finished, click [OK], EasyDiagnoser dialog box is shown in the following figure.
33.3. EasyDiagnoser Settings
33.3.1. Main Menu
Item Description
File Save As
The communication data can be saved as .xls file which can be
opened by Excel.
Exit
Exits current file.
View Device Bar displays Device window.
Package Bar displays Package window.
Logger Bar displays Logger window.
Output Bar displays Output window.
Options Toolbars displays toolbar icons of Device Bar, Package Bar,
Logger Bar, and Output Bar.

EasyDiagnoser 33-4
Status Bar displays information of CAP, NUM, and SCRL at the

bottom of EasyDiagnoser window.
Update Package List displays the Polling Package information
of current page.
Show Object ID (HMI) shows the ID of the objects on HMI as
Clear Activity List clears all the information recorded during

communication.
Help Displays EasyDiagnoser version information.
33.3.2. Activity Area
In the activity area, users can observe the communication between HMI and PLC.
Item Description
Command Read + Write
Displays Read and Write information in activity area.
Read
Displays only Read information in activity area.

EasyDiagnoser 33-5
Write
Displays only Write information in activity area.
Device All
Displays the information of Local HMI and PLC.
 If command is set to Read + Write, the Read and Write
information of Local HMI and PLC will be displayed in the
activity area.
 If command is set to Read, the Read information of Local
HMI and PLC will be displayed in the activity area.
 If command is set to Write, the Write information of Local
HMI and PLC will be displayed in the activity area.
Local HMI
Displays the information of Local HMI.
information of Local HMI will be displayed in the activity
area.
 If command is set to Read, the Read information of Local
HMI will be displayed in the activity area.
 If command is set to Write, the Write information of Local
HMI will be displayed in the activity area.
PLC
Displays the information of PLC.
information of PLC will be displayed in the activity area.
 If command is set to Read, the Read information of PLC
will be displayed in the activity area.
 If command is set to Write, the Write information of PLC
will be displayed in the activity area.
Station Selects the PLC station number to be displayed.
(This function is disabled when selecting [All] in [Device]).
Address Selects all or a preferred address type to be displayed.
Type (This function is disabled when selecting [All] in [Device]).
Range Sets the range of address types.
(This function is disabled when selecting [All] in [Device]).
Capture Click to start/stop capturing the communication message.
Error Please see “33.4 Error Code”.

EasyDiagnoser 33-6
33.3.3. Polling Packages
Item Description
Package ID Uses the Package ID to check the error of the object.
Device Displays HMI and PLC type.
Station Displays PLC station number.
Index Displays the index register numbers of the objects.
Address / Displays the device type and the size of the package (in
Length words).
Item Description
Object Check the object in the package.
Screen The window in the project where the object is placed.
ID The ID number of the object.
Address The address of the object.

EasyDiagnoser 33-7
Note
 Click [Package ID], the device station number will be displayed in the 3rd column.
 Double click [Package ID] then select [object] to display the position of the object.
For example, select [Numeric Input] and the screen no. displays 10.
This shows that this object is in window no. 10 in the project and will be marked with pink
frame on HMI as shown in the following figures

EasyDiagnoser 33-8
33.3.4. Devices
Displays the information of HMI and PLC.
33.3.5. Output (Macro debug)
With Macro Trace function, the executing status of Macro can be seen.
In the illustration below, for [ID 1, Ln 7] and [ID 1, Ln 12]
ID 1 represents Macro name.
Ln 7 and Ln 12 represent that data are in the 7th and 12th line of Macro.
For more information, see “18 Macro Reference”.

EasyDiagnoser 33-9
33.4. Error Code
In the activity area, the reason of error can be found through the error codes listed below.
Error Code Cause of Communication Error
0 Normal
1 The device is busy and not yet ready to process a command.
2 Communication error due to unexpected reason.
3 The device does not exist.
4 The device using the specified station number does not exist.
5 Incorrect address format.
6 Read/Write unsupported address.
7 The driver of the device does not exist.
8 The COM port does not exist.
9 Incorrect IP address or unable to connect the device.
10 Checksum error.
11 Unidentified command.
12 Ignore
20 The USB device is improperly connected.
21 The CAN Bus device is improperly connected.
22 No reply from the device.
23 Insufficient data read from the device before timeout.
24 The Conversion Tag used by the object does not exist or the content is incorrect.
25 HMI is not accepting any commands from a remote HMI.
251 Read/Write exceeding number of words from/to the register of the MODBUS device.
252 MODBUS device replies incorrect data format.
253 MODBUS device checksum error.
When error occurs, the error message will be shaded red as shown in the following figure.

EasyDiagnoser 33-10
33.5. Window Adjustment
Users can drag or use the smart docking icons in editing window to place the windows to a
desired position.
Note
 EasyDiagnoser doesn’t support Siemens S7/1200 (Ethernet) and Allen-Bradley Ethernet/IP
(CompactLogix/ControlLogix) – Free Tag Names since both of the PLCs use tag.

EasyDiagnoser 33-11

Rockwell EtherNet/IP Free Tag Names 34-1
34. Rockwell EtherNet/IP Free

Tag Names
This chapter explains how to use Rockwell EtherNet / IP Free Tag Names.
34.1. Overview ..................................................................................................................... 34-2

34.2. Steps to Import User-Defined AB Tag CSV File to EasyBuilder Pro ............................. 34-2
34.3. Steps to Add a New Data Type.................................................................................... 34-4
34.4. Steps to Paste ............................................................................................................. 34-6
34.5. Miscellaneous Functions ............................................................................................ 34-7
34.6. Module-Defined.......................................................................................................... 34-8

34.1. Overview
When using Rockwell EtherNet/IP Free Tags (CompactLogix/ControlLogix) driver, the

User-defined tag in RSLogix5000 can be exported to .csv file, and then imported to EasyBuilder
Pro.
However, the tags in User-Defined, Predefined and Module-Defined will not be exported.
Structure Editor in EasyBuilder Pro is then used for importing and editing tags of data
structures in User-Defined, Predefined and Module-Defined.
34.2. Steps to Import User-Defined AB Tag CSV File to EasyBuilder Pro
1. Create Tags in RSLogix5000.
2. Export Tags to .csv file.

3. In EasyBuilder Pro, add Rockwell EtherNet/IP-Tag (CompactLogix/ControlLogix) driver.

Enter PLC IP address and click [Import Tag].
4. In the object setting dialog, select the PLC type, and select a controller tag.

34.3. Steps to Add a New Data Type
Structure Editor is in the installation directory of EasyBuilder Pro. Double-click Structure

Editor.exe and the editor window will appear. See the following steps.
1. Right click the assigned data type (usually labeled as User-Defined), then click [New Data
Type] to start editing.
2. Enter the name of the data type. [Description] field can be left blank. To add a member,
click [Add].

3. Enter the name and the data type then click [OK].
4. After adding all members, click [OK]. The new data type will be added to the list of data
types.
5. After changing the name or description of a data type, click [OK] to update.

34.4. Steps to Paste
1. When adding a patch of members, this function allows users to add multiple data in one
step. First, click the [Paste] button.
2. Type in data name, and then enter data type, separated by Space key or Tab key. It is
recommended that data be directly copied and pasted from RSLogix5000 to avoid errors.
Users can click [Sample] for a formatting example.
3. Copy the needed Name and Data defined in RSLogix such as one shown above. Paste the
content in the editing window, as shown in the following figure.

4. Click [OK] to finish setting, and return to the main menu to check the added data.
34.5. Miscellaneous Functions
 Revising member data

Double click the member to be revised, or click the member then click [Edit].
 Deleting member data
Select the data to be deleted then click [Delete]. To delete all members of a data type,
press and hold the Delete button on the keyboard and then click the [Delete] button in
the dialog box.
 Deleting a data type
Select the data type from the list on the left and then press the Delete key on the
keyboard.
 Load from Default
To start over from default settings, click [Load from Default] button.
 Save to Default
Saves data type settings to default for use in other projects.

34.6. Module-Defined
Module-Defined is a default structure of a module.

Here is an example showing how to define the default structure of a module.
In RSLogix5000 [I/O Configuration], the I/O module is set.
The exported CSV file will not list tags that are associated with module-defined structure.
Please define the tags manually by following the steps below.
1. In RSLogix5000 [Controller Organizer] » [Data Types] » [Module-Defined], double click

Data Type of the module. Members of the module will be shown in a popup dialog. Copy
the Name and Data Type of the members.

2. In Structure Editor, right click [Module-Defined], and then click [New Data Type]. In [New
Data Type] » [Name], enter the Module-Defined name.

3. Click [Paste], and paste the data type information in the dialog box.

4. Select a member and then click [Edit]. Since the data of the modules allows bit-wise
operation, [Binary Access] should be selected, then click [OK] to return to Structure Editor.
5. Click [OK] to finish setting.


EasyWatch 35-1
35. EasyWatch
This chapter explains how to use EasyWatch.
35.1. Overview ..................................................................................................................... 35-2

35.2. Configuration .............................................................................................................. 35-2
35.3. Monitor Settings ......................................................................................................... 35-4
35.4. Macro Settings ............................................................................................................ 35-8
35.5. HMI Manager .............................................................................................................. 35-9
35.6. Object List ................................................................................................................. 35-11

EasyWatch 35-2
35.1. Overview
EasyWatch allows users to monitor the HMI or the PLC address values via Ethernet from the PC,
or to invoke the Macro for debugging, remote monitoring, and controlling.
For example, In EasyBuilder Pro, after creating a Numeric Input Object, you can set its address
to LW-10, and set the same address in EasyWatch. The value of LW-10 will be shown in
EasyWatch when successfully connecting.
Note
 When the system register [LB-9044 (disable remote control)] or [System Parameter
Settings] » [System Setting] » [Prohibit remote HMI connecting to this machine] is enabled,
the feature of monitoring in EasyWatch will be unavailable.
35.2. Configuration
35.2.1. Basic Functions
Item Description
File New: Opens a new EasyWatch file.
Open: Opens an existing EasyWatch file.
Save: Saves an EasyWatch file.
Save As: Saves an EasyWatch file to .ewt format.

EasyWatch 35-3
Exit: Exits EasyWatch.

Edit Cut: Relocates the selected items to the clipboard.
Copy: Copies the selected items to the clipboard.
Paste: Pastes the items in the clipboard at the selected location.
Objects Add Object: Adds new Monitor or Macro objects.
Delete Objects: Selects the objects to be deleted, a dialog box
appears, click [Yes] to delete.
Modify Object: Changes the settings of the selected object.
HMI Manager: Adds, modifies, or removes HMI settings.
Run: Executes the selected object.
Stop: Stops executing the selected object.
Help Help Topics: Reference of how to operate EasyWatch.
About EasyWatch: EasyWatch version information.
35.2.2. Quick Selection Tools
Item Description
Opens a new EasyWatch file.

New
Opens an existing EasyWatch file.

Open
Saves an EasyWatch file.

Save
Relocates the selected items to the clipboard.

Cut
Copies the selected items to the clipboard.

Copy
Pastes the items in the clipboard at the selected
Paste location.
Executes the selected object.

Run
Stops executing the selected object.

Stop

EasyWatch 35-4
Deletes the selected object.

Delete
Adds a new address monitor.

Add Monitor
Adds a new macro.

Add Marco
Opens HMI Manager to add, modify, or remove
HMI HMI settings.
Reference of how to operate the EasyWatch.

Help Topics
35.3. Monitor Settings
35.3.1. Adding a Monitor
There are two ways to create a Monitor Object.

 Select from the toolbar: [Objects] » [Add Object] » [Add Monitor].
 Select from the quick selection toolbar: [Add new address monitor].
35.3.2. Monitor Settings
Setting Description
Name Enters an object name which is an unique name.
Read Only: If an object is set to read only, its address value
can’t be edited.

EasyWatch 35-5
HMI Select a HMI to monitor.

PLC Selects the desired PLC to monitor and sets its type,
station number, and connection method.
Address Selects the desired object address to monitor and sets its
address type.
Address Type When the address type is set, the available formats of the
address can be selected. When executing, the address will
bedisplayed according to the selected format.
Update Cycle Sets the update interval of the monitoring object. If many
objects are executed simultaneously, the errors or delays
may appear.
35.3.3. Steps to Add a New Monitor
1. Select a target HMI. If the target HMI does not exist, click [Open HMI Manager] and click
[Add] to search the HMI for adding.
Or, select [Use Local HMI] checkbox to use the project on PC as a monitoring device.
2. Select a target HMI or PLC. If one HMI is selected, you can directly control the local HMI.

EasyWatch 35-6
If one PLC is selected, click [I/F Setting] and select [Com Port] to choose a COM port.
Or, click [I/F Setting] and select [Ethernet] to set the IP address.
3. Set the object address and its address type for being monitored.

EasyWatch 35-7
4. When a Word address is selected, set the address type to [Numeric] or [String].
[Numeric]: Select the data format of the monitor address.
[String]: Select the data format from [ANSI], [UNICODE], and [High/Reversed]. Set [No. of
Word] for reading the number of WORD.
5. Set the update interval of the monitor object. The range can be set from 500ms to
5000ms.

EasyWatch 35-8
35.4. Macro Settings
35.4.1. Adding a Macro
There are two ways to create a Macro object.

 Select from the toolbar: [Objects] » [Add Object] » [Add Macro].
 Select from the quick selection toolbar: [Add new macro].
35.4.2. Macro Settings
Setting Description
Name Enters an object name which is an unique name.
HMI Selects a HMI to monitor.
Macro Type The ways to execute the Macro included Direct Active and
Cycle Active.
Macro Each Macro Object can execute multiple macros. The time
interval between the executions of two macros can be
changed.
35.4.3. Steps to Add a New Macro
1. Select a target HMI. If the target HMI does not exist, add a new device, see “35.3.3 Steps
to Add a New Monitor”.
2. Set Active Type under Macro Type to [Direct Active] or [Cycle Active].
[Direct Active]: Directly executes Macro once.
[Cycle Active]: Set the interval of executing Macro.

EasyWatch 35-9
For example, if [Cycle Active] is set to 5 seconds, when executing a macro, the next time
to execute the macro object will be 5 seconds later.
3. Set Macro to [Macro] or [Sleep].

[Macro]: Select the Macro ID for execution, and click [Add] to add the Macro to the list.
[Sleep]: Set the time interval between the executions of two Macros. Click [Add] or
[Replace] to add or replace the Macros from the list.
35.5. HMI Manager
35.5.1. Opening HMI Setting
There are two ways to open the HMI Setting.

 Select from the toolbar: [Objects] » [HMI Manager].
 Select from the quick selection toolbar: [Open HMI manager].

EasyWatch 35-10
35.5.2. HMI Manager
Setting Description
Add Select a target HMI. If the target HMI does not exist, add a
new device, see “35.3.3 Steps to add a new monitor”.
Modify Modify the settings of the HMI.
Remove Remove the HMI.

EasyWatch 35-11
35.6. Object List
35.6.1. Object List Columns
Setting Description
Name Displays the object name. The small icons of the names
are for users to identify the objects.
Status Displays the status of the objects: [Connecting],
[Connected], and [Stop]. If HMI is not connected or Port
No. is incorrect, the error message “HMI Not Found” will
appear. For Monitor Objects, if the address is incorrect,
“Address Error” message will appear.
HMI / PLC Displays the information of HMI / PLC that is currently
operated by the objects.
Address For Monitor Objects, the relevant address setting is
Address Type displayed.
Update Cycle Set the update interval of the monitor object.
Value For Monitor Object, if the status shows [Connected], the
current HMI address value will be displayed. Modifying
the value is also available when the Read-Only checkbox
is unselected. For Macro Object, if set to [Direct Active],
there will be an [Active] button in this column for clicking
to directly execute a macro.

EasyWatch 35-12
35.6.2. Editing Object List
 Adding a new page: Click the icon to add a new page.
 Deleting a page: Click the icon and confirm the deletion.
 Renaming the page: Double-click on the page name and enter a new name.
 Positioning the column headers: Drag and drop the column headers to the desired
location.

Administrator Tools 36-1
36. Administrator Tools

This chapter explains how to setup Administrator Tools.
36.1. Overview ..................................................................................................................... 36-2

36.2. User Accounts ............................................................................................................. 36-2
36.3. USB Security Key ......................................................................................................... 36-6
36.4. e-Mail SMTP Server Settings ...................................................................................... 36-9
36.5. e-Mail Contacts ......................................................................................................... 36-10

36.1. Overview
Administrator Tools allows storing the data of [User Accounts], [USB Security Key], [e-Mail
SMTP Server Settings], and [e-Mail Contacts] to USB. With EasyBuilder Pro user accounts and
e-Mail function, the data built can be imported to HMI by Function Key object set to “Import
user data / Use [USB Security Key]”. The portability and convenience is greatly improved.
Launch Administrator Tools, select the check boxes in [Save] column to enable the selected
functions introduced in this chapter.
36.2. User Accounts
36.2.1. User Accounts Settings
Select [User Accounts] check box and complete the relevant settings.

Settings Description
Secret Select the check box to set secret accounts.
User Name Sets User Name. *Note 1
Password Sets User Password. *Note 1
Class A to L Sets user privilege.
Add Adds a new account. *Note 2
Remove Deletes an existing account.
Import Imports user account data.
Export Exports user account data.
Effective Time If [Restrict the using terms] is not selected, it is
available to import data anytime.
If select [Restrict the using terms] check box, and set
an effective time period, the importing of data to
HMI can only be done in the time limit specified.
When time expired, data cannot be imported, please
reset the data with this tool again.
Save to USB Saves data to USB. To save to a specific folder, click
“ ” button and select “Folder”.

Note
1. Only allows letters, numbers, “-” or “_”, case-sensitive.
2. A maximum of 127 user accounts can be added.
36.2.2. Steps to Set User Accounts
1. Click [Add] to create a new account. Click [Remove] to delete the selected account. Select
[Secret] check box to define the account as a secret user. Type in [User name] and
[Password] and check the privilege from [Class A] to [Class L] check boxes.
2. To back up the data, click [Export]. Click [Use Password] to protect the data, next time
when click [Import] to import the backup data, a password is required.
3. If under [Effective Time], the [Restrict the using terms] check box is selected, only during
the specified time period can the users import account data to HMI. If not selected, users

can import data to HMI at any time.
4. When finished, click [Save to USB], select the location of USB and then click [Create]. If
successful, the “Generated successfully!” message is shown.
36.2.3. Steps to Import Accounts Using EasyBuilder Pro
The following steps explain how to create a Function Key to import data in EasyBuilder Pro.
1. Select “Import user data/Use [USB Security Key]” in Function Key setting dialog box, and
then click [Settings].
2. Under [Function mode] select [Import user accounts]. Select the device that stores the
data in [Data position]. Select [Overwrite] under [Account import mode]; HMI will only
store the account data imported this time. Select [Append], HMI will store the accounts
imported this time and those already exist. Select [Delete file after importing user
accounts] check box to delete the source files after importing.

Click the icon to download the demo project that explains how to import user accounts by
using Function Key. Please confirm your internet connection.
36.3. USB Security Key
36.3.1. USB Security Key Settings
With the predefined user login information, the USB Security Key can be used to log in directly.

User Name Sets User Name. *Note 1
Password Sets User Password. *Note 1
Confirm Confirms User Password.
Effective Time Logs in using USB Security Key during the specified
time period. If not specifying Effective Time, log in at
any time.
Save to USB Saves data to USB.
Note
1. Only allows letters, numbers, “-” or “_”, case-sensitive.
36.3.2. Steps to Set USB Security Key
1. Type in the existing user name and password. Type the password again in [Confirm] field
for password confirmation.
2. Under [Effective Time] if [Restrict the using terms] check box is selected, only during the
specified time period can users log in using USB Security Key. If not selected, users can log
in using USB Security Key at any time.
successful, the “Generated successfully!” massage is shown.

36.3.3. Steps to Set USB Security Key Using EasyBuilder Pro
The following steps explain how to create a Function Key to enable USB Security Key in
EasyBuilder Pro. By touching the object, the USB Security Key is enabled for login.
2. Under [Function mode] select [Use USB Security Key to Login]. Select the device that
stores the data in [Data position].

Click the icon to download the demo project that explains how to enable login using USB
Security Key by using Function Key. Please confirm your internet connection.
36.4. e-Mail SMTP Server Settings
Select [e-Mail SMTP Server Settings] check box to complete the relevant settings.
Mail Settings Description

SMTP Server Specifies SMTP Server.
Port Specifies SMTP Server port number.
User name User e-mail account name.
Password User e-mail account password.
Confirm Confirm user e-mail account password.
Sender Information Description
Name The sender name displayed when mail received.
Mail address The sender address displayed when mail received.
36.4.1. Steps to set e-Mail SMTP Server Settings
1. Set the settings as shown in the following figure.

36.5. e-Mail Contacts
36.5.1. e-Mail Contacts Settings
Select [e-Mail Contacts] check box to complete the relevant settings.

Add Adds a new contact. *Note1
Remove Removes a contact.
No. of groups The number of groups. *Note2
Current group The name of current group. *Note3
Description Group description.
Import Imports contact information.
Export Exports contact information.
Note
1. A maximum of 256 contacts can be added.
2. A maximum of 16 groups can be added. (Group A to Group P)
3. From Group A to P, when [No. of groups] is “1”, only Group A will exist, when added to
“2”, Group A and Group B will exist, and so on.
4. UTF-8 characters are allowed in contact names.
36.5.2. Steps to set e-Mail Contacts
1. Click [Add] to add in all contacts.

2. Add the contacts to Group A, the added contacts are displayed in red font.

3. Press the up or down arrows of the spin box of [No. of groups] to add new groups. If add
to “2”, Group B can be found. Repeat step 1 and step 2 to add contacts into groups.
4. After adding all the e-mail contacts, click [Export] to back up the data for future use and
modification. Next time when needed, click [Import] to import the backup data.

36.5.3. Steps to Import e-Mail Settings and Contacts Using EasyBuilder Pro
The following steps explain how to create a Function Key to import e-Mail contacts.
2. Under [Function mode] select [Import e-mail settings and contacts]. Select the device that
stores the data in [Data position].
Click the icon to download the demo project that explains how to import e-mail settings
and contacts by using Function Key. Please confirm your internet connection.

MODBUS TCP/IP Gateway 37-1
37. MODBUS TCP/IP Gateway

This chapter explains how to use MODBUS TCP/IP Gateway and configure address mapping
tables.
37.1. Overview ..................................................................................................................... 37-2

37.2. Steps to Create an Address Mapping Table ................................................................ 37-2
37.3. Notes about Configuring Address Mapping ............................................................... 37-5

37.1. Overview
To access the data of the PLC connected to HMI with SCADA software (Supervisory Control and
Data Acquisition), the former way was to transfer PLC data to the HMI’s local address first, and
then use MODBUS TCP/IP protocol on PC to read HMI local address to get PLC data. Now by
using MODBUS TCP/IP Gateway provided by EasyBuilder, the mapping of MODBUS address to
PLC address can be defined first, and then one can directly use MODBUS TCP/IP protocol to
access PLC data.
37.2. Steps to Create an Address Mapping Table
To create an Address Mapping Table, please follow the steps:

1. In [System Parameter Settings] » [Device] tab, add the PLC device. (In the example FATEK
FB Series is used).
2. Add MODBUS Server (Ethernet), select [Enable] check box under [MODBUS TCP/IP
Gateway] as shown in the following figure.

3. Click [Address Mapping Tables] button and the following default tables will be displayed.
Modify the tables if needed or add new tables.

4. For example, to access the data in the 50 consecutive registers of FATEK FB Series PLC
starting from register D-0, configure the settings as shown in the following figure.
(1) Select the device type of the registers to be mapped, in the example select [Word].
(2) Select the mode to access the data in the mapped register, in the example set to
[Read/Write].
(3) Set the start address of MODBUS, in the example set to “4x-1”.
(4) Set the start address of the mapped PLC, in the example set to “D-0”.
(5) Set the range size of address mapping, in the example set to “50”.
(6) If needed, select high/low byte swap (AB->BA) or high/low word swap
(ABCD->CDAB).
The above figure shows that MODBUS Server 4x-1 ~ 4x-50 registers are mapped to FATEK
FB Series PLC D-0 ~ D-49 registers.
5. When finished, the data of FATEK FB Series PLC D-0 ~ D-49 registers are now accessible by
using MODBUS TCP/IP protocol to send read / write command to 4x-1 ~ 4x-50 registers.

37.3. Notes about Configuring Address Mapping
 UDP is not supported when using the MODBUS TCP/IP Gateway feature.
 This feature is only supported by MODBUS Server (Ethernet) interface.
 System register LW-9288 is used to indicate if data transfer has been correctly executed.
The following error codes represent:
Value Definition
0 Normal
1 Read or write the register that is not defined in the
Address Mapping Table.
2 Read or write a range of registers that is not within
the range defined in a single Address Mapping Table.
(Or, read / write a register that is defined in other
Address Mapping Table.)
3 The command format does not follow MODBUS
TCP/IP protocol.
4 Modify a read-only register.
5 Read a write-only register.
6 Cannot get the correct reply from PLC within the
specified time range.
7 Use a function code that is not supported by
MODBUS Server.
 The defined register range must not overlap between different mapping tables.
 If [MODBUS TCP/IP Gateway] is enabled, EasyBuilder will cancel the original mapping
between MODBUS Server and HMI register. That includes:
(1) 0x, 1x mapped to LB
(2) 3x, 4x mapped to LW, RW
Therefore, to access data in LB or LW register via 0x, 1x, 3x, 4x, configure the Address
Mapping Table again. The following figure is an example.

 SCADA can only read / write the register defined in one Address Mapping Table at one
time, that is, the same MODBUS command cannot access the data in the registers defined
in different Address Mapping Tables.
As shown in the above figure, in Mapping Table 1 set MODBUS 4x-1 to access register
D-200, table size 99 words, and in Mapping Table 2 set MODBUS 4x-100 to access register
R-0, table size 100 words. If using SCADA to send a command to read from 4x-1 to 4x-199,
table size 199 words, since the range spans two different tables, the command will not be
accepted by HMI. Instead, access the data with two separate commands (4x-1~4x-99 and
4x-100~4x-199), each reading only from one table as shown in the following figure.

EasyDownload 38-1
38. EasyDownload
This chapter explains how to setup EasyDownload.
38.1. Overview ..................................................................................................................... 38-2

38.2. Configuration .............................................................................................................. 38-2

EasyDownload 38-2
38.1. Overview
EasyDownload allows downloading the project data file built in EasyBuilder Pro via Ethernet or
USB cable. In EasyBuilder Pro main menu select [Project] and then select [Build for SD
card/USB disk download] to build the data file before running EasyDownload.
38.2. Configuration
Download data folder Browse for the project data file to download.
RW Browse for the recipe data (.rcp) to download.
RW_A Browse for the recipe data (.rcp) to download.
Recipe database Browse for the recipe database (.db) to download.
Reboot HMI after If selected, HMI will reboot after downloading.
download

EasyDownload 38-3
Reset recipe
Reset recipe database
Delete startup screen
Reset event log The selected files will be erased before downloading.
Reset data log
Reset Operation Log
Download the file to HMI via USB cable. Please make
USB cable
sure that the USB driver is correctly installed.
Ethernet Download the file to HMI via Ethernet.
IP Enter the target HMI IP address.
Name Enter the target HMI name.
Search Search by HMI name.
Search All Search from all the HMI names on the same network.
Add Add the selected HMI in the Search field to the
Destination field.
Add All Add all the HMI in the Search field to the Destination
field.
Destination A list of all the HMI for download.
Delete Delete the selected HMI in the Destination field.
Delete All Delete all the HMI in the Destination field.
Download Click to start download to the selected HMI in the
Destination field.
Download All Click to start download to all the HMI in the Destination
field.
Password / Port No. Enter the password and the port number of download
set in HMI system settings.

EasyDownload 38-4
Note
 Take eMT3000 Series as an example, the built download data directory has the following
structure. Please select the parent directory of the generated file when download.
Parent directory First subdirectory Second subdirectory

emt3000 001
002
Pub driver
font
 The parent directory name changes according to the model used.

 Downloading to multiple HMI is only supported by Ethernet.
 When downloading the project to multiple HMI at a time, all the HMI must use the same
password and port number.
 The downloading process goes from the top of Destination list to the bottom. Only when
the downloading of one HMI is done will the downloading of next HMI start.
 To avoid long waiting time for an off-line HMI, the wait time is 3 seconds.

Data Security 39-1
39. Data Security

This chapter explains how to setup Data Security.
39.1. Overview ..................................................................................................................... 39-2

39.2. Configuration .............................................................................................................. 39-2

Data Security 39-2
39.1. Overview
Data Security allows setting restrictions on the write operations that modify local Word or Bit
register data. To do so, open [System Parameter Settings] » [Device] tab, select [Local HMI] and
then click [Security...] button.
39.2. Configuration
The following is the settings dialog box:

Data Security 39-3
Setting Description
LW protection \
If selected, a remote HMI or MODBUS client
Prohibit remote-write
will not be able to write to the specified LW
operation of remote HMI
addresses.
or MODBUS client
RW protection \
If selected, a remote HMI or MODBUS client
Prohibit remote-write
will not be able to write to the specified RW
operation of remote HMI
addresses.
or MODBUS client
Click [Data Security] button to set the restrictions on the write operations that modify local
Word or Bit register data.
39.2.1. Word address settings
Set the restrictions relevant to local Word addresses.

Data Security 39-4
Setting Description
Description Enter the description or memo about this setting.
Address Mode Select [Word] to set the relevant attributes.
Min. value Set the minimum value that can be written to the
designated word address.
Max. value Set the maximum value that can be written to the
designated word address.
Disable remote-write If selected, the remote HMI will not be able to
operation write to the protected address.
Used only in If selected, the range between [Min. value] and
remote-write [Max. value] is only used to restrict the value
operation written by a remote device.
Use min. value when If selected, when the written value is less than
write value is less [Min. value], the system will write the specified
than min. value minimum value instead.
If not selected, when the written value is less
than [Min. value], the system will keep the
original value.
Use max. value when If selected, when the written value is greater than
write value is more [Max. value], the system will write the specified
than max. value maximum value instead.

Data Security 39-5
If not selected, when the written value is greater

than [Max. value], the system will keep the
original value.
Notification When the written value is not within the specified
range between [Min. value] and [Max. value], the
system will trigger the designated notification bit
address.
As shown in the preceding figure, the remote HMI will not be able to write to LW-0, and when
the value written to the local address is greater than 10, the value 10 is written instead, and
the notification bit LB-0 will be set ON.
39.2.2. Bit address settings
Set the restrictions relevant to local Bit addresses.
Setting Description
Description Enter the description or memo about this setting.
Address Mode Select [Bit] to set the relevant attributes.
Set ON only If selected, the designated bit address can only be
set ON.
Set OFF only If selected, the designated bit address can only be
set OFF.

Data Security 39-6
Disable remote-write If selected, the remote HMI will not be able to

operation write to the protected address.
Used only in
If selected, the specified condition is only used to
remote-write
restrict the write operation by a remote device.
operation
Notification When enabled and:
 Select [Set ON], the system will trigger the
notification bit address when attempting to
set OFF the protected bit address.
 Select [Set OFF], the system will trigger the
notification bit address when attempting to
set ON the protected bit address.
As shown in the preceding figure, the remote HMI can only set ON LB-10, while the local HMI is
not restricted. If the remote HMI attempts to set LB-10 OFF, the system will trigger notification
bit LB-0 ON.

Web Streaming 40-1
40. Web Streaming

This chapter explains how to setup Web Streaming.
40.1. Overview ..................................................................................................................... 40-2

40.2. Configuration .............................................................................................................. 40-2
40.3. Operation .................................................................................................................... 40-2
40.4. Applicable Models ...................................................................................................... 40-3

Web Streaming 40-2
40.1. Overview
With Web Streaming function, video from the USB camera on HMI can be streamed and
viewed in web browsers, and third party devices.
40.2. Configuration
Instead of setting an object in EasyBuilder Pro, Web Streaming is controlled by system registers.
To enable Web Streaming, please set bit addresses or use macros to add the following system
registers into the project file.
LB-12356: open(set on)/close(set off) web streaming server

LB-12357: web streaming server status. (on: opened / off: closed)
Set LB-12356 on to start Web Streaming, and set LB-12356 off to stop Web Streaming.
LB-12357 indicates the streaming status. When LB-12357 is on, Web Streaming is enabled and
running. When LB-12357 is off, Web Streaming is stopped.
Web Streaming cannot start when the USB camera is not connected.
40.3. Operation
First, please make sure that the Web Streaming browser is enabled and running. To stream
video on a browser, enter HMI’s IP address with port 8080. For example, if the IP address is
192.168.1.100, please enter:
http://192.168.1.100:8080
Example 1
The following is a still image of video stream on iPad’s Safari of a plant monitoring application.

Web Streaming 40-3
Note
 When using EasyAccess 2.0, the HMI’s IP address is the virtual IP address obtained in the
software.
40.4. Applicable Models
Model OS Version EasyBuilder Pro Version

eMT Series 20150525 V5.04.01.013
XE Series /
20150225 V5.04.01.013
eMT3070B
mTV 20150508 V5.05.01
cMT-SVR 20151117 V5.03.02
cMT3090 20171024 V6.00.01
cMT3151 20171129 V6.00.01

Energy 41-1
41. Energy
This chapter explains how to setup Energy Demand Settings to monitor and record energy
consumption and calculate future energy demands.
41.1. Energy Demand Setting .............................................................................................. 41-2

41.2. Energy Demand Display .............................................................................................. 41-6

Energy 41-2
41.1. Energy Demand Setting
41.1.1. Overview
By monitoring the recorded energy consumption in a specified period, the Energy Demand
Setting feature can calculate future energy demands, and help saving energy.
Click [Data/History] and then click [Demand Setting] to open the settings dialog box. Configure
General and Demand Threshold settings and click OK; an Energy Demand Setting object will be
created.

Energy 41-3
General Tab
Setting Description
Accumulative This address records energy consumption. The unit
energy address can be 0.1/0.01/0.001 kWh (kilowatt-hours).
Demand update The frequency to record energy consumption, the
frequency range is from 1 to 60 minutes.
Demand duration The frequency to calculate energy demand. The
range is from 1 to 60 minutes.
Note
 Please note that Demand Duration (T) must be an integral multiple of Demand Update
Frequency (t).

Energy 41-4
Demand Threshold
Setting Description
Threshold When the values in the specified addresses reach
the values specified in Warning and Alarm fields, the
warning and alarm will be triggered. The threshold
limits can be dynamically changed at runtime.
Notification When the estimated energy demand reaches the
threshold limit, the status of the specified bit
address will change accordingly.
Follow If selected, when the estimated energy demand falls
less than the threshold limit, the status of the
notification bit address will return to its original
state.

Energy 41-5
Demand Output
Setting Description
Enable demand
Opens [Max. demand statistics] settings.
output
Max demand The maximum energy demand of today/yesterday,
statistics and current month/last month, can be recorded in
the corresponding addresses. The time/date format,
and the beginning day of the billing cycle, can be
specified.

Energy 41-6
41.2. Energy Demand Display
41.2.1. Overview
Energy Demand Display object graphs the result from Energy Demand Setting object at
runtime.
The font, grid and watch line style can be specified, and the threshold limits can be shown in
the graph.
Click [Data/History] and then click [Demand Display] to open the settings dialog box. Configure
the attributes and click OK; an Energy Demand Display object will be created.
General Tab

Energy 41-7
Setting Description
Object index Select an existing Energy Demand Setting object as
the data source of Energy Demand Display object.
Time/Date format Set Time and Date format.
Chart Set the colors of Grid, Frame, and Background.
X axis Set the number of divisions and time duration on
the X axis. Latest position ratio: The ratio represents
a position along the X axis, where 50% represents
the middle and 100% represents the right end. This
field sets the position to mark the latest data, and
the acceptable range is: 50%~100%.
Y axis Set the number of divisions, maximum and
minimum scale values on the Y axis. The limits can
be changed dynamically at runtime.
Scale text Set the font and color of the scale text.
Line Three watch lines marking Demand, Alarm, and
Warning can be shown. The type, width, and color of
the lines can be customized.
Example 1
The following example illustrates the relationship between Demand Duration (T) and Demand
Update Frequency (t) mentioned in Energy Demand Setting guide above.

Energy 41-8
1. As shown in the above figure, when t=1, the frequency to record energy consumption will
be once per minute. When T=15, each 15 minutes the sum of the energy consumption
measured every minute (t=1) will be calculated.
2. From the 1st to the 15th minute (red zone), the energy consumption measured each
minute will be added up to get the total sum. The total sum times 4 (15 minutes is a
quarter of an hour) to obtain a value (kWh) indicating the estimated energy demand.
3. From the 2nd to the 16th minute (blue zone), the energy consumption measured each
4. From the 3rd to the 17th minute (green zone), the energy consumption measured each
5. The Energy Demand Display object will graph the estimated energy demand.
6. If t=3 and T=15, the estimated energy demand will be: Sum of the latest 5 records (15/3=5)
times 4 (15 minutes is a quarter of an hour).
7. If t=5 and T=30, the estimated energy demand will be: Sum of the latest 6 records (30/5=6)
times 2 (30 minutes is half an hour).

IIoT 42-1
42. IIoT
This chapter explains how to use IIoT protocols.
42.1. MQTT .......................................................................................................................... 42-2

42.2. OPC UA Server .......................................................................................................... 42-22

IIoT 42-2
42.1. MQTT
42.1.1. Overview
MQTT object can send message to a remote server, or subscribe to topics on a remote server.
HMI can serve as a local server.
When HMI serves as a local server, the HMI will not send message to the remote server.
Click [Object] » [IIoT] » [MQTT] in the menu to open the settings dialog box.

IIoT 42-3
42.1.2.1. Server Settings
General Tab
Setting Description
Cloud service Normal
Use general publish-subscribe service.
AWS IoT
Use AWS IoT as a Broker, and use Thing Shadows service.
For more information, please find “AWS IoT User
Manual”.
Sparkplug B
Sparkplug B is a specification designed based on the
characteristic features of IoT applications. It helps define
topics and messages that are not specified by standard
MQTT, and allows non-MQTT terminal devices to transfer
data with MQTT Server through Edge of Network, which
can be HMIs in this architecture. Please see “Sparkplug B
Quick Start Guide” for more information.
Azure IoT Hub

IIoT 42-4
Use Microsoft Azure IoT Hub as a Broker. Using this

service can simplify setting step to entering a Connection
String. The Connection String can be found in Microsoft
Azure > IoT devices.
Protocol Supports MQTT v3.1 and v3.1.1.

Customize length
Client ID: The upper limit is 128 words.
for Client ID/
Username/Password: The upper limit is 256 words.
username/password
IP Enter the MQTT Server IP address for receiving the
message. If 127.0.0.1 is entered, HMI will run a MQTT
server locally.
Use domain name A domain name can be used as MQTT server’s IP address.
Port Enter the MQTT Server port number for receiving the
message.
Client ID Enter the Client ID. Variables can be used for Client ID, for
example, entering %0 will make the HMI Name to be the
Client ID.
Authentication If selected, connecting MQTT Server will require
[Username] and [Password].
Username Enter the username for connecting MQTT Server.
Password Enter the password for connecting MQTT Server.
Keep alive time When MQTT Server does not receive the message from
HMI passing the specified time, the HMI will be identified
as disconnected.
Note: When running simulation, the message may be
delayed, but the delay will not exceed the [Keep alive
time]. The message from the HMI will be sent
immediately.
Timestamp Local time
Use local HMI time for timestamp.
UTC time

IIoT 42-5
Use UTC+0 (coordinated universal time) for timestamp.

When the timestamp is shown incorrectly, please go to
[System Parameters] » [Time Sync. / DST] tab to set the
time zone.
Close inactive MQTT In this mode, the connection will be automatically
connection terminated if there’s no data update for a specified
automatically period of time. The connection will resume once any data
update occurs.
The user can choose to publish initial values / topic list
only at the first connection.
In this mode, the start and stop commands are disabled.
Address Tab
Setting Description
Status address LW-n: Displays the connection status to MQTT
Server.

IIoT 42-6
Value Description
0 Not attempting to connect to MQTT
Server.
1 Disconnected and can’t connect to
MQTT Server.
2 Connection succeeded.
LW-n+1: Error indicator.
Value Description
0 No error
1 Unknown error
2 Failed to connect
3 Access denied
4 Not allowed port number for built-in
MQTT server
5 Unresolvable domain name
6 Buffer overflowed
32 Incorrect client ID
48 Failed to verify certificate
256 Still connecting
Buffer usage Messages that have not been sent are stored in the
address buffer. The maximum buffer capacity is 10000
messages. The buffer capacity is measured in
percentage (%), rounded up.
LW-n: Shows buffer usage.
Control address LW-n: Controls the operation of MQTT Server.
Value Description
0 Ready
1 Start
2 Stop
3 Update
LW-n+1: Sets the IP address of MQTT Server.
LW-n+5: Sets the port number of MQTT Server.
LW-n+6: Sets the Client ID for connecting MQTT
Server.
LW-n+26: Enables / Disables authentication.
Value Description
0 Disable
1 Enable

IIoT 42-7
LW-n+27: Sets the username for connecting MQTT

Server.
LW-n+43: Sets the password for connecting MQTT
Server.
When Azure IoT Hub is used, the control addresses

are as below:
LW-n: Controls the operation of MQTT Server.
Value Description
0 Ready
1 Start
2 Stop
3 Update
LW-n+1: Sets the Connection String (128 words).
TLS/SSL Tab
Setting Description
Enable Enable TLS/SSL authentication. TLS version can be
selected from: TLS 1.0, TLS 1.1, and TLS 1.2.
Server verification Enable
Verify whether the server certificate is signed by CA
(certificate authority) certificate. Server certificate is

IIoT 42-8
sent from server during connection.

Server name must match certificate’s information
Verify whether the server’s domain name or IP
matches the records in the server certificate.
Domain name and IP records are stored in Subject
Alternative Name of the certificate.
Client verification By providing a private key and certificate, the server
can verify the client faster, skipping login by
username or password.
System Topic
Setting Description
Topic List Enable
Selecting this checkbox puts the specified topic into
the server’s topic list, which includes topics
published by different HMIs.
At the first time the subscriber connects to the
server, the server will send the specified topic to the
subscriber. Alternatively, the subscriber can
subscribe to this topic to view the available topics in
the server.
Retain message
When this checkbox is selected, the MQTT server
will save the latest message.
Connect State Enable
Selecting this checkbox displays the connection state

IIoT 42-9
between the server and the HMI (publisher).

At the first time the subscriber connects to the
server, the server will send the specified topic to the
subscriber. Alternatively, the subscriber can
subscribe to this topic to monitor the connection
state between the server and other HMIs
(publisher).
Retain message
When this checkbox is selected, the MQTT server
will save the latest message.
Note
 Please note that System Topics tab is not supported when using Sparkplug B and Azure IoT
Hub cloud services.
42.1.2.2. MQTT Topic Publisher
Click [New] to open General and Address settings, or click [Import] / [Export] to import or
export an existing *.csv file. The maximum allowable number of topics is 255.

IIoT 42-10
General Tab
Setting Description
Nickname Enter the nickname of the MQTT Topic for easier reference.
Topic Specify the format of the message topic sent to MQTT Server.
Variables can be used for Topic. Entering %(DYNAMIC) in the Topic
field opens Dyanmic String group box for designating a word address.
%(DYNAMIC) can include multiple topic levels. For example:
myhome/groundfloor.
When Azure IoT Hub is used, users can only specify the last topic level.

IIoT 42-11
Sending mode Address (Auto.)

Value-trigger-based:
Sends MQTT message when any value changes.
Time-based:
Sends MQTT message in a time-based manner.
Address (Bit trigger)
Sends MQTT message when a designated bit is triggered.
Event (Alarm) Log
The topic source can be an Event Log. MQTT message can be sent
when a single event or any event in a specific category occurs.
Compression The message will be compressed before being sent, and
type decompression is needed before reading the message. Messages in
MQTT can be compressed / decompressed in zlib, gzip, or with
DEFLATE algorithm.
Retain message If selected, the MQTT server will save the latest message.
Include This option is available only when the format used is [JSON (simple)].
timestamp Selecting this option can include timestamp in the message.
Use top-level This option is available only when the format used is [JSON (simple)].
key “d” for all When selected, the message format is as below:
addresses
When not selected, the message format is as below:
As shown in the above figure, when this option is not selected, ts and
address names become keys of the same level. Therefore, please
avoid using ts as an address name in this case.
QoS MQTT provides three levels of reliability, which are known as quality
of service (QoS). The reliability of the message determines the

IIoT 42-12
persistence of the message.

0: At most once, messages are not persistent.
1: At least once.
2: Exactly once.
Content Format The supported formats are:
Raw Data: Data in bytes.
JSON (Simple): JSON format with all data put in JSON member “d”.
JSON (Advanced): JSON format with flexible JSON structure.
Address Tab
The following explains the address settings for [Raw Data] and [JSON (Simple)] content
formats.
Setting Description
New Add the source of the topic. The length of each
address can be specified respectively.
Delete Delete the address.
Setting Change the name and address.

IIoT 42-13
Setting Description
Remove JSON array For JSON formatted messages, selecting this option
bracket “[“ and “]” can remove bracket “[“ and “]”.
Enable number of
digits to the right When data type is Float, the number of digits after
of the decimal the decimal point can be specified.
point
Note
 Maximum tag length: 255 words.
Address Tab [JSON (Advanced)]
The following explains address settings for [JSON (Advanced)] content format. This is a nested
format that allows using objects or arrays, and customizing timestamp and data name. Using
this format provides a more flexible way of using MQTT.

IIoT 42-14
When configure the settings as shown in the above screenshot, the received MQTT message by
the subscriber is as below.
Setting Description
New Object Add a new object. The name, type and value of each
item under the object can be configured. Items
under the object are enclosed in curly brackets { }.
New Array Add a new array. An array may contain multiple
items but the name of the item is automatically
generated and is unchangeable. Items under the
array are enclosed in square brackets [].
New Value Add a new number, string, or timestamp. When the
new value is a number or a string, fixed value can be

IIoT 42-15
selected, or an address can be designated as the

data source.
Delete Delete the selected item.
Settings Configure the selected item. When the selected item
is an object or an array, the user may only change its
name. When the selected item is contained in an
object or an array, its parameters can be configured.
Note
 Maximum number of nodes for a Topic is 512 (payload included). Maximum tag length is
255 words.
42.1.2.3. MQTT Topic Subscriber
Click [New] to open General and Address settings, or click [Import] / [Export] to import or
export an existing *.csv file. The maximum allowable number of topics is 255.

IIoT 42-16
General Tab
Setting Description
Nickname Enter the nickname of the MQTT Topic for easier
reference.
Topic Subscribe to a topic in MQTT Server. The topic name
can be dynamic.
Entering %(DYNAMIC) in the Topic field opens Dynamic
String group box for designating a word address.
%(DYNAMIC) can include multiple topic levels. For
example: myhome/groundfloor.
When Azure IoT Hub is used, users can only specify the

IIoT 42-17
last topic level, and the topic level should be the same
as in MQTT Topic Publisher.
Compression type Configure with the same setting as MQTT Topic

Publisher.
Verify timestamp When timestamp is included in the message, selecting
this option will verify whether the timestamp is
increasing, and update will occur when the timestamp
does increase; otherwise, the message will be treated
as expired message and update will not occur.
Use top-level key When selected, the message format is as below:
“d” for all
addresses
When not selected, the message format is as below:
Please use appropriate setting according to the data

source.
QoS MQTT provides three levels of reliability, which are
known as qualities of service (QoS). The reliability of
the message determines the persistence of the
message.
1: At least once.
2: Exactly once.
Content Format The supported formats are: JSON and Raw Data.

IIoT 42-18
Address Tab
Setting Description
New Add the destination address of the subscribed topic.
The length of each address can be specified
respectively.
Delete Delete the address.
Setting Change the name and address.
Setting Description
Remove JSON array For JSON formatted messages, selecting this option

IIoT 42-19
bracket “[“ and “]” can remove bracket “[“ and “]”.
Note
 Supports Amazon Web Service (AWS) IoT Core.
Notes on AWS IoT Core:
1. The maximum number of layers in a topic is 8 (iot-2/type equals to 2 layers).
2. Authentication in General tab is not supported, please use TLS/SSL.
3. Supports only Qos 0 and Qos 1.
4. Retaining the latest message in MQTT server is not supported.
42.1.2.4. Sparkplug B
General settings and Device settings for cloud service Sparkplug B are as shown below.
General Tab
Setting Description
Group ID The group ID that identifies the group in which the
Edge of Network Nodes belong to.
Edge ID The ID that identifies a specific Edge of Network

IIoT 42-20
Node.
DDATA min. time The minimum-wait-time duration before a new
DDATA (Device DATA) message is sent when data
change is detected.
QoS MQTT provides three levels of reliability, which are
known as qualities of service (QoS). The reliability of
the message determines the persistence of the
message.
1: At least once.
2: Exactly once.

IIoT 42-21
Device Tab
Setting Description
New Group Add a group to manage the tags.
New Tag Add the tags of this EoN node monitored by MQTT
engine. Please note that the Name field should not
be blank.
Delete Delete an existing group or tag.
Settings Configure an existing group or tag.

IIoT 42-22
42.2. OPC UA Server
42.2.1. Overview
OPC UA (Unified Architecture) is a communication technology often used in industrial

automation fields. OPC UA features cross-platform interoperability, unified access,
standardized communication, and security. In this architecture, cMT Series HMI models with
built-in OPC UA server play a key role as Communication Gateway, and allow OPC UA clients to
access HMI or PLC data by subscribing to tags to receive real-time updates. This new
architecture can help you achieve vertical integration.
Hardware & Software requirements:

 HMI Model: cMT-G01, cMT-G02, cMT3072, cMT3090, cMT3103, cMT3151
 Software: EasyBuilder Pro V5.06.01 or later
 Recommended OPC UA Client: Unified Automation UaExpert
Click [Object] » [IIoT] » [OPC UA Server] in the menu to open the settings dialog box.

IIoT 42-23
General Tab
Setting Description
Comment The description about the OPC UA Server.
OPC TCP The URL of the server.
Port The port number for the clients to connect with OPC
UA Server. The default port number is 4840.
Server name The server name, this field is allowed to remain
blank.
Security Policy Configure the security policy that can be used by
clients.

IIoT 42-24
User Authentications Tab
Setting Description
Methods Anonymous
Grant Browse, Read, Write permissions to
anonymous login by selecting the checkboxes.
User name & password
Use the same user name and password as HMI. The
permissions are granted to the security classes
specified in System Parameter Settings » Security.

IIoT 42-25
Discovery Tab
When configured, OPC UA server will register to the Local Discovery Server (LDS).
OPC UA Discovery service is used to simplify server location maintenance when there are many
OPC UA servers in the network. An OPC UA client can access one LDS Server and obtain all
registered OPC UA server.
Setting Description
IP IP address of the OPC UA client.
Port Port number used by the OPC UA client.
Server Name Server name of the OPC UA client.
Comment A memo on the server and will not influence
communication.
Example 1
The following is an example showing how to set up Discovery service.
1. Install Local Discover Server (LDS) on a PC (for example, the PC name is DESKTOP-ABCD).
Download the LDS provided by OPC Foundation from the link below:
https://opcfoundation.org/developer-tools/developer-kits-unified-architecture/local-discovery-ser
ver-lds/

IIoT 42-26
2. If the DNS service of router cannot resolve the HMI name to IP address, the HMI name
should be changed to the IP address of the HMI. For example: If HMI IP address is
192.168.1.100, then the HMI name should be 192.168.1.100 or 0.0.0.0.
3. On the PC with OPC UA LDS installed, please manually copy the certificate from folder
“C:\ProgramData\OPC Foundation\UA\pki\rejected\certs” (Folder for rejected certificates)
to folder “C:\ProgramData\OPC Foundation\UA\pki\trusted\certs” (Folder for trusted
certificates).
4. Launch the software of OPC UA Client, enter the name of the PC with OPC UA LDS
installed or its IP address to obtain all the registered OPC UA servers.
When Discovery does not work properly, please:

1. Open Windows Task Manager » Performance » Resource Monitor » Network » Listening
Ports, and find the port number used by opcualds.exe. As shown in the following
screenshot, in this example the PC’s opcualds.exe uses port 4840.
2. Enter HMI’s IP address in the web browser, and enter the password to log in. Open OPC
UA settings page and restart OPC UA Server. Please note that OPCUA settings tab is only
supported on cMT Gateway Series models.

IIoT 42-27
Tag
Setting Description
New group
Add a new group for managing tags.

IIoT 42-28
New Tag
Add a new tag for the client to monitor or control.

The name must be entered, and the address can be
Readable or Writeable.
Delete Delete an existing group or tag.
Settings Set an existing group or tag.
Import Import a tag file. Applicable import formats are:
*.xlsx, *. xls, *.csv, *. xml
Export Export current tags. Applicable export formats are:
Excel format or XML format.
Note
 When downloading the project file to HMI, please make sure that the HMI time and
time-zone settings are correct. Otherwise, the client program may not be able to
authenticate, and the communication may fail due to authentication error caused by
incorrect certificate valid time.
42.2.3. Device Statistics
Device-specific statistical data can be found in “Statistics” node, as shown below:

IIoT 42-29
Meaning of each node:

Node Name Description
FailedReads No. of failed read commands. If it is not zero, there may
be communication errors.
FailedWrites No. of failed write commands. If it is not zero, there may
be communication errors.
MaxPendingReads Max. no. of pending read commands.
MaxPendingWrties Max. no. of pending write commands.
PendingReads No. of pending read commands in the queue. If the
number stays high for a long time, it means the
communication module is not able to process all
commands in time. OPC UA nodes may update slower.
Under extreme circumstances (e.g. >30), OPC UA node
may not update in a long time.
PendingWrites No. of pending write commands. Write commands have
higher priority than read commands. If PendingWrites
stays high, it will affect read commands.
Reset Reset all statistical data.
SuccsessfulReads No. of successful read commands.
SuccsessfulWrites No. of successful write commands.
42.2.4. Limitation
The limitation of OPC UA server are listed below:

Item Description
OPC UA Profile UA 1.02 Standard UA Server Profile, including but not
limited to
* Core Server Facet
* UA-TCP UA-SC UA-Binary
* SecurityPolicy – None
* Enhanced DataChange Subscription Server Facet
* Standard DataChange Subscription Server Facet
* Embedded DataChange Subscription Server Facet
* User Token – X509 Certificate Server Facet
* User Token – User Name Password Server Facet
* Standard DataChange Subscription Server Facet
* Embedded DataChange Subscription Server Facet
See Profile Reporting Visualization Tool by OPC

IIoT 42-30
Foundation for more details.

Security policies None
Basic128Rsa15
Basic256
Basic256Sha256
Number of nodes 15 000
Max. array size 255
Read cache 100ms
(Cache will be used for 100ms from previous read)
Max. client sessions 100
Max. subscription per 64
session
Min. publishing interval 100ms
Performance (Values may change for different hardware/EBPro version)
Max. Read/Subscribe Built-in registers (e.g. LW): 27000 words/second (WPS)
Throughput MODBUS RTU@9600bps: 500 WPS
(Security: None) MODBUS RTU@115200bps: 4000 WPS
MODBUS TCP/IP: 10000 WPS
Tested Environment
EBPro version: V6.02.02.242
cMT-G02 OS version: 20180917
Test uses as many as words as possible in one node
(using array) to optimize reading.

Comparison of HMI Software Features A-1
Appendix A.
Comparison of HMI Software Features
 eMT Series: eMT3070B, eMT3105P, eMT3120A, eMT3150A
 cMT Series: cMT-SVR-100, cMT-SVR-102, cMT-SVR-200, cMT-SVR-202, cMT-iV5, cMT3151, cMT3090, cMT3071, cMT3072, cMT3103,
cMT-HDM, cMT-FHD
 cMT Series-Gateway: cMT-G01, cMT-G02, cMT-G03, cMT-G04
 mTV Series: mTV-100
 iE Series: MT8050iE, MT8053iE, MT6070iE, MT6071iE, MT8070iE, MT8071iE, MT8073iE, MT8100iE, MT8101iE, MT8102iE, MT8103iE
 iER Series: MT8070iER1
 XE Series: MT8090XE, MT8091XE, MT8092XE, MT8121XE, MT8150XE
 iP Series: MT6051iP, MT8051iP, MT6071iP, MT8071iP, MT6103iP, MT8102iP
Please note that the table below is for reference only and may not include all features. Some features are version-dependent, so please
confirm again by cross-checking with the software or consulting Weintek service when in doubt.
iP/iE/eMT/mTV/XE Series
Model
Category new iP iE eMT mTV XE Note
Function
History size limit 16MB 16MB 64MB 64MB 64/120MB* 1
Project size limit 22.5MB 22.5MB 64MB 64MB 64MB
6051iP
EasyBuilder 6070iE 8121XE
USB Cable Download 6071iP Y N/A
6071iE 8151XE
6103iP
USB Disk Download Y Y Y Y Y
3G/4G Dongle N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 2
Function Audio (cMT Viewer) N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Control Token N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

Model
Function
e-Mail N/A Y Y Y Y
Enhanced Security Mode N/A Y Y Y Y
Ethernet Printer N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Recipe Database N/A Y Y Y Y
String Table N/A Y Y Y Y
Time Synchronization N/A Y Y Y Y
USB Tethering N/A Y Y Y Y 3
User-defined Startup Screen Y Y Y Y Y
VNC Server N/A Y Y Y Y 4
Web Streaming N/A N/A Y Y Y 5
eMT3120
Audio Output N/A N/A via HDMI via USB 11
eMT3150
Hardware 8091XE
CAN Bus N/A N/A Y N/A
8092XE
Wi-Fi N/A 8103iE N/A N/A N/A
Action Trigger N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Barcode Scanner (Android Camera) N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 6
Combo Button N/A Y Y Y Y
Date/Time Y Y Y Y Y
Dynamic Drawing N/A Y Y Y Y
Dynamic Scale N/A Y Y Y Y
File Browser N/A Y Y Y Y
Flow Block N/A Y Y Y Y
Object eMT3105
Media Player N/A N/A eMT3121 N/A Y 7
eMT3150
PDF Reader N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Picture Viewer N/A Y Y Y Y
Pie Chart N/A Y Y Y Y
Recipe Import/Export N/A Y Y Y Y
Recipe View N/A Y Y Y Y
Table N/A Y Y Y Y

Model
Function
Video In - IP Camera N/A N/A Y N/A Y 8
Video In - USB Camera N/A N/A Y Y Y
eMT3121
Video In - Video Input N/A N/A N/A N/A
eMT3150
VNC Viewer N/A Y Y Y Y 9
Demand Display N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Demand Setting N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
MQTT N/A Y Y Y Y
Object - IIoT/Energy
MQTT - AWS IoT, Sparkplug B, Azure IoT Hub N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
OPC UA Client N/A Y Y Y Y
OPC UA Server N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Circular Trend Display N/A Y Y Y Y
Database Server N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Object- Data/History Event Bar Chart N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Operation Log Settings N/A Y Y Y Y
SQL Query N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Other CODESYS N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
cMT Viewer - Diagnoser N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
EasyAccess 1.0 Y Y Y Y Y
EasyAccess 2.0 N/A Y Y Y Y
8053iE
EasyAccess 2.0 Built-in License N/A 8073iE N/A N/A 8092XE
8103iE
Utility
EasyDiagnoser Y Y Y Y Y
EasyLauncher N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
EasyPrinter Y Y Y Y Y
EasySimulator Y Y Y Y Y
EasySystemSetting Y Y Y Y Y 10
EasyWatch Y Y Y Y Y

cMT Series
cMT-G01
Model cMT3071 cMT-HDM cMT-G02
Category cMT-SVR cMT3090 cMT3103 cMT3151 Note
Function cMT3072 cMT-FHD cMT-G03
cMT-G04
History size limit * * * * * * * 1
Project size limit 32MB 64MB 64MB 64MB 64MB 64MB 32MB
EasyBuilder
USB Cable Download N/A N/A N/A N/A Y N/A N/A
USB Disk Download N/A Y Y Y Y Y N/A
3G/4G Dongle Y Y Y Y Y Y N/A 2
Audio (cMT Viewer) Y Y Y Y Y Y N/A
Control Token Y Y Y Y Y Y N/A
e-Mail Y Y Y Y Y Y Y
Enhanced Security Mode Y Y Y Y Y Y Y
Ethernet Printer N/A Y Y Y Y Y N/A
Function Recipe Database Y Y Y Y Y Y N/A
String Table Y Y Y Y Y Y N/A
Time Synchronization Y Y Y Y Y Y Y
USB Tethering Y Y Y Y Y Y N/A 3
User-defined Startup Screen N/A Y Y Y Y Y N/A
VNC Server N/A Y Y Y Y Y N/A 4
Web Streaming Y Y Y Y Y Y N/A 5
Audio Output N/A N/A Y N/A Y via HDMI N/A 11
CAN Bus N/A Y Y Y Y N/A N/A
Hardware
cMT-SVR-
Wi-Fi N/A N/A Y N/A N/A cMT-G02
200/202
Action Trigger Y Y Y Y Y Y N/A
Barcode Scanner (Android Camera) Y Y Y Y Y Y N/A 6
Combo Button Y Y Y Y Y Y N/A
Object Date/Time Y Y Y Y Y Y N/A
Dynamic Drawing Y Y Y Y Y Y N/A
Dynamic Scale Y Y Y Y Y Y N/A
File Browser N/A Y Y Y Y Y N/A

cMT-G01
cMT-G04
Flow Block Y Y Y Y Y Y N/A
Media Player N/A Y Y Y Y Y N/A 7
PDF Reader N/A Y Y Y Y Y N/A
Picture Viewer N/A Y Y Y Y Y N/A
Pie Chart Y Y Y Y Y Y N/A
Recipe Import/Export Y Y Y Y Y Y N/A
Recipe View Y Y Y Y Y Y N/A
Table Y Y Y Y Y Y N/A
Video In - IP Camera N/A Y Y Y Y Y N/A 8
Video In - USB Camera N/A Y Y Y Y Y N/A
Video In - Video Input N/A N/A N/A N/A Y N/A N/A
VNC Viewer N/A Y Y Y Y Y N/A 9
Demand Display Y Y Y Y Y Y N/A
Demand Setting Y Y Y Y Y Y N/A
MQTT Y Y Y Y Y Y Y
Object - IIoT/Energy
MQTT - AWS IoT, Sparkplug B, Azure IoT Hub Y Y Y Y Y Y Y
OPC UA Client Y Y Y Y Y Y Y
OPC UA Server License Y Y Y Y License Y
Circular Trend Display N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Database Server Y Y Y Y Y Y Y
Object- Data/History Event Bar Chart Y Y Y Y Y Y N/A
Operation Log Settings Y Y Y Y Y Y N/A
SQL Query Y Y Y Y Y Y N/A
Other CODESYS N/A Y Y N/A Y N/A N/A
cMT Viewer - Diagnoser Y Y Y Y Y Y Y
EasyAccess 1.0 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Utility EasyAccess 2.0 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y
cMT-SVR- cMT3071:
EasyAccess 2.0 Built-in License Y Y Y N/A N/A
102/202 N/A

cMT-G01
cMT-G04
cMT3072:
Y
EasyDiagnoser N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
EasyLauncher Y Y Y Y Y Y N/A
EasyPrinter N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
EasySimulator N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
EasySystemSetting Y* Y* Y* Y* Y* Y* N/A 10
EasyWatch Y Y Y Y Y Y Y
Notes
No. Function Note
1 History Size Limit MT8121/8150XE: 64MB,
MT8090/8091/8092XE: 120MB
cMT Series: Max. data sampling entries: 40
OS Support
No Function OS Version
2 3G/4G Dongle cMT-SVR: 20151127
cMT3072/3090/3103/3151: 20180723
cMT-HDM/FHD: 20190130 or later
3 USB Tethering iE Type A: 20160707
iE Type B: 20160325
eMT: 20160601
mTV: 20160527
XE: 20160503
cMT-SVR: 20160518
cMT3090/3103/3151/HDM: 20160412 or later
4 VNC Server cMT3090/3151: 20160412 or later

5 Web Streaming cMT-SVR: 20151127, cMT3151:20171129 or later
6 Barcode Scanner Android Android cMTViewer V1.7.0 or later
7 Media Player cMT-HDM: no 1920*1080 resolution
8 Video-in IP Camera eMT: 20160601
XE: 20160503
9 VNC Viewer iE Type A: 20160707
iE Type B: 20160325
eMT: 20160601
mTV: 20160527
XE: 20160503
all cMT series: 20181211 or later
10 EasySystemSetting all cMT series: 20180723 or later
11 Audio Output USB Audio Output OS Support: XE 20190325

cMT-Viewer Limitations B-1
Appendix B. cMT Viewer Limitations

A cMT series HMI screen accessed locally, by physically on the HMI screen itself, or remotely,
from another device running cMT Viewer or VNC viewer. However, please note that some
features do not work when connecting remotely from a cMT Viewer client (iOS, Android, PC,
cMT-iV5), even if they work on the local cMT machine. Please take this into consideration
when designing projects.
Features that do not work remotely on cMT Viewer:

 File Browser
 Media Player
 Video In: USB Camera
 Video In: IP Camera
 Video In: Video Input (analog)
 Picture View
 PDF Reader
 VNC Viewer
 Selected features of Function Key: Screen hardcopy, Import user data/User [USB Security
Key]
 Selected features of PLC Control
i. Screen hardcopy: File are saved in the external drive on HMI
ii. Backlight: Backlight control of HMI screen
 Selected features of Operation Log
i. Operation Log printing: Logs are saved in the external drive on HMI

PC Simulation Limitations C-1
Appendix C. PC Simulation Limitations

Running on-line or off-line simulation when designing an EasyBuilder Pro project can help users
find out if the project will work as planned. However, some features only works on HMI, in
which case the project should be downloaded to HMI in order to see the effects. Please take
this into consideration when designing projects.
When running simulation on PC, the historical data is stored in their respective destination
folder that is placed under EasyBuilder Pro installation directory:
 HMI_memory: when the designated destination is HMI memory.
 SD_card: when the designated destination is SD card.
 usb1: when the designated destination is USB Disk.
 usb2: when the designated destination is USB Disk2. (Applicable only for models that
support two USB disks.)
Features that do not work when running on-line/off-line simulation on PC:

cMT Series
 Media Player
 PDF Reader
eMT/iE/XE/mTV Series
 VNC Viewer

EasyBuilderPro V60301 UserManual Eng

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

EasyBuilderPro V60301 UserManual Eng

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

EasyBuilderPro V60301 UserManual Eng

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

EasyBuilder Pro Installation and Startup Guide

EasyBuilder Pro V4.00.01

1. EasyBuilder Pro Installation and Startup Guide .................................................................... 1-1

EasyBuilder Pro V6.03.01

5.2.1. How to Control a Local PLC ................................................................................... 5-2

EasyBuilder Pro V6.03.01

7.3. Creating a New Event Log ............................................................................................. 7-8

EasyBuilder Pro V6.03.01

10.6. Example of Object Security Settings ......................................................................... 10-20

EasyBuilder Pro V6.03.01

13.9. Numeric .................................................................................................................... 13-40

EasyBuilder Pro V6.03.01

13.21.1. Overview ......................................................................................................... 13-133

EasyBuilder Pro V6.03.01

13.34. Flow Block ............................................................................................................... 13-213

EasyBuilder Pro V6.03.01

13.45.1. Overview ......................................................................................................... 13-293

EasyBuilder Pro V6.03.01

14.4.3. Extended Features ............................................................................................ 14-18

EasyBuilder Pro V6.03.01

18.7.1. PLC .................................................................................................................... 18-22

EasyBuilder Pro V6.03.01

21.2. HMI to HMI Communication ...................................................................................... 21-2

EasyBuilder Pro V6.03.01

22.3.28. Remote Print/Backup Server ............................................................................ 22-40

EasyBuilder Pro V6.03.01

26.3.1. Setup Procedure in EasyPrinter .......................................................................... 26-6

EasyBuilder Pro V6.03.01

30.3. Decompilation is Prohibited ....................................................................................... 30-3

EasyBuilder Pro V6.03.01

35.2. Configuration .............................................................................................................. 35-2

EasyBuilder Pro V6.03.01

38.1. Overview ..................................................................................................................... 38-2

EasyBuilder Pro V6.03.01

1. EasyBuilder Pro Installation

1.1. Installation Requirements............................................................................................. 1-2

EasyBuilder Pro V6.03.01

1.1. Installation Requirements

EasyBuilder Pro V6.03.01

1.2. Steps to Install EasyBuilder Pro

EasyBuilder Pro V6.03.01

EasyBuilder Pro V6.03.01

EasyBuilder Pro V6.03.01

9. Click [Finish] to complete the installation.

EasyBuilder Pro V6.03.01

The description of each item in EasyBuilder Pro menu:

EasyBuilder Pro V6.03.01

tool running on PC that allows monitoring or setting

EasyBuilder Pro V6.03.01

2.1. Overview ....................................................................................................................... 2-2

EasyBuilder Pro V6.03.01

EasyBuilder Pro V6.03.01

See “29 Pass-through”.

Minimize the window.

Close the window.

EasyBuilder Pro V6.03.01

2.2. HMI IP, Password

Data/Event Log File Information

EasyBuilder Pro V6.03.01